Hfc4da12c JAC PDF

Maintenance manual for sunray hfc4da1-2c china-IV diesel engines
Contents
Chapter I Technical Characteristics of Engine .......................................................................................................... 11

Section I Technical Requirements for Fuel, Oils, and Auxiliary Materials ..................................................... 11
Section II Main Technical Specification of Engine ............................................................................................ 14
Section III Performance Curve of Engine .......................................................................................................... 15
Section IV Main Checking and Adjustment Parameters .................................................................................. 16
Section V Tightening Torque for Critical Bolts of Engine ................................................................................. 17
Section VI Main Fitting Clearances and Allowable Wear Limits of Engine ................................................... 21
Section VII Specification of Main Attachments and Accessories...................................................................... 24
Chapter II Maintenance for Main Structures of Engine ........................................................................................... 25
Section I Disassembly of Engine Assembly ......................................................................................................... 25
Section II Assembly of Engine ............................................................................................................................. 43
Section III Crankshaft and Flywheel System ..................................................................................................... 68
Section IV Piston and Connecting Rod Group ................................................................................................... 69
Section V Valve Distribution Mechanism ........................................................................................................... 70
Section VI Lubrication System ............................................................................................................................ 71
Section VII Cooling System ................................................................................................................................. 72
Section VIII Turbocharger and Inter-Cooler System ........................................................................................ 73
Section IX EGR System........................................................................................................................................ 75
Section X Exhaust System .................................................................................................................................... 76
Chapter III Working Principle of Engine Control and Actuator Units ................................................................... 77
Section I Overview of Diesel Common Rail System .......................................................................................... 77
Section II Working Principle of Low Pressure Fuel Line System .................................................................... 79
Section III Working Theory of High Pressure Fuel Line .................................................................................. 82
Section IV Electronic Control Unit of High Pressure Common Rail System .................................................. 84
Chapter IV Engine Diagnosis .................................................................................................................................... 109
Section I. Precautions ......................................................................................................................................... 109
Section II. Maintenance Procedures ................................................................................................................. 111
Section III. Fault Diagnosis ................................................................................................................................ 113
Section IV. DTC List ........................................................................................................................................... 115
Section V. Fault Diagnosis for Electronic-Controlled Common Rail Diesel Engines .................................... 133
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Chapter I Technical Characteristics of Engine

Section I Technical Requirements for Fuel, Oils, and Auxiliary Materials
I. Diesel
HFC4DA1-2C diesel engine adopts electronically controlled, high pressure common rail, fuel injection system and
conforms to Euro-IV emission regulation and thus extends higher requirements over the fuel. To guarantee the
reliability of the fuel supply system, make sure to use the qualified clean diesel produced by national well-established
fuel company, in order to prevent the blockage or early wear of fuel injector due to poor fuel.
Add the fuel only at the well-established gas station. The use of poor diesel or other diesel intended for
other than vehicle engine application is strictly prohibited.
Make sure to use the fuel conforming to national standard GB 19147. The grade number of the diesel chosen is related
to the temperature of working environment. When the environment temperature is reduced, the paraffins within the
diesel will precipitate to block the fuel pipeline, leading to difficult fuel supply and start failure of the engine.
Therefore, choose different grade number of diesel depending on the environment temperature in different seasons
and regions, in accordance with the table shown below.
Environment temperature Above 5℃ Above -5℃ Above -10℃ Above -25℃

Recommended grade
0# light diesel -10# light diesel -20# light diesel -35# light diesel
number of diesel
Notice!
The cam of the high pressure fuel pump is being lubricated by the fuel. Never cause engine flameout due to depletion
of fuel in the fuel tank, or it will lead to serious wear of the high pressure fuel pump. After adding new fuel, make sure
to firstly use manual fuel pump to bleed the air from the fuel pipe and high pressure fuel pump and thoroughly fill the
fuel pipe and high pressure fuel pump with fuel before starting the engine, in order to prevent the wear of high
pressure fuel pump due to fuel shortage.
Procedure for air bleeding and refueling:
1. Loosen the air bleeding screw;
2. Push down the manual fuel pump with hand and then release. Repeat above operation, till there is no air bleeding
out from the air bleeding screw;
3. Tighten the air bleeding screw and pump the fuel with manual fuel pump, till the fuel injection pump is thoroughly
filled with fuel.
The diesel filter embodies the fuel-water separation function:

The water content in the diesel will bring about great harm to the fuel system. Upon the detection that the diesel filter
water level warning lamp on the instrument panel lights up, it indicates the presence of waste water in the diesel filter.
The waste water shall be drained timely, or it will lead to the rusting and wear of high pressure fuel pump, high
pressure fuel rail, and fuel injector and bring about unnecessary losses.
Procedure for water drainage:
1. Unplug the water level sensor connector;
2. Loosen the water level sensor to drain the waste water, till the diesel flows out.

3. Tighten the water level sensor and plug the water level sensor connector.
II. Engine Oil

HFC4DA1-2C diesel engine shall use the diesel engine oil with the quality grade at API CH-4 or above, of which the
viscosity is related to the environment temperature. When the environment temperature is reduced, the viscosity of the
engine oil is increased to increase the start resistance so that the diesel engine can’t reach the start speed and cause
difficult start. Therefore, in different seasons and regions, choose the correct engine oil with different viscosity grade
under different environment temperature, in accordance with the table below.
Environment -30℃~25℃
-15℃~40℃ -20℃~30℃ Extreme cold region
temperature
Engine oil
10W-40/50 or 15W-40 10W-30/40/50 5W-40/50 0W-40/50
trademark
Check engine oil level:
z Stop the engine and wait for several minutes;
z Pull out the engine oil dipstick;
z Wipe the oil dipstick with clean cloth and re-insert the oil dipstick to the end;
z Pull out the oil dipstick again and observe the engine oil level. Check whether the oil level is between the upper
and lower limits of the oil dipstick. If insufficient, add the engine oil.
Upper limit
Lower limit
Notice: Make sure to horizontally park the vehicle while

measuring the engine oil level. Stop the engine and wait
for several minutes, till the engine oil can return to the oil
sump.
Notice!
z Make sure to periodically check the engine oil level.
z The apparatus used for refueling shall be clean.
z In event of sudden rise or drop of engine oil level, check for cause immediately.

z Never mix different trademarks of engine oils.
z Periodically replace the engine oil as per the maintenance regulations.
III. Coolant
Make sure to use clean automotive antifreeze coolant featuring antifreeze in winter, anti-boiling in summer, and
anti-corrosion, anti-rusting, and anti-scaling.
Take cautions during the operation:
a. Always use coolant throughout the year and pay attention to the use continuity of the coolant.
b. Depending on the temperature of the region in which the vehicle is used, choose the coolant with different freezing
point. The freezing point of the coolant shall be at least 10ºC below the lowest temperature of the region, in order to
maintain the antifreeze function.
c. Purchase the qualified coolant product, in order to prevent damaging the engine and causing unnecessary economic
losses due to use of disqualified product.
d. Never mix different trademarks of coolants nor use such mixed coolant, in order to prevent the chemical reaction
from impairing the respective comprehensive anti-corrosion performance.
e. Never add the hard water such as well water or running water. Upon the detection of suspended material, sediment,
or smelliness phenomenon in the coolant, it indicates that the coolant is deteriorated and becomes ineffective due to
chemical reaction. In such case, timely clean the cooling system and thoroughly replace the coolant.
f. The glycol coolant is one toxic substance and is harmful to the liver. Never swallow the coolant. In event of skin
exposure to the coolant, thoroughly clean with water immediately. In addition, the nitrite anti-corrosion additive in the
coolant is one carcinogenic substance. Do not dispose the used coolant randomly, in order to prevent contaminating
the environment.
Notice!
z Upon the detection of sudden drop in coolant level, check for cause immediately.
z The cooling system is under pressurized state! Never open the cap of the coolant compensation tank or radiator
while the engine is still hot, or it will lead to scalding danger!

Section II Main Technical Specification of Engine

Model HFC4DA1-2C
Inline 4-cylinder, longitudinal layout, water-cooled, 4-stroke, turbocharged
Type
inter-cooler, high pressure common rail, and direct injection engine
Nominal power/speed 85/3600（kw/rpm）
Top torque/speed 250/1800～2800(Nm/rpm)
Minimum fuel consumption
≤ 218g/kw·h Top idling speed 4000rpm
of external characteristic
Exhaust temperature (before
≤ 700℃ Idling speed 800±50 rpm
turbine)
Number of cylinders × bore Total piston
4×93 mm×102 mm 2.771 L
× stroke: displacement
Compression ratio 17 ：1 Fuel grade -10#
Fuel supply advance
Working sequence 1-3-4-2 Electronically controlled
angle
Flameout mode Fuel cut-off Engine mass 270kg
China-IV emission standard
Emission limit (test value) Noise limit ≤ 95dB(A)
compliant
Engine oil trademark Above grade CH-4 Engine oil capacity 7.2L
Engine oil/fuel consumption ratio (24h at full speed) ≤ 0.10%
Temperature of engine oil in oil sump (under nominal working
≤130℃
condition)
Engine oil pressure Idling: ≥98 kPa
Coolant capacity 30L Applicable altitude ≤3500m
Maximum outlet temperature of
Thermostat type Wax type ≤ 110℃
coolant
Thermostat opening
82℃ Thermostat full open temperature 95℃
temperature
Applicable temperature
With heated cold starter and with heater plug in engine
of diesel engine
Length of cylinder
Overall dimensions (L×W×H) 728.9mm×715.6mm×753.3mm 479mm
block

Section III Performance Curve of Engine
300 90
扭矩
Torque
80
250 功率
Power
70
200 60
扭矩（N m ）
w）
50
功率（k
150
Power
Torque
40
100 30
20
50
10
0 0
1000
1200
1400
1600
1800
2000
2200
2400
2600
2800
3000
3200
3400
3600
转速（r p m ）
Speed
280 25
油耗率
Fuel consumption
270 油耗量
Fuel consumption
20
260
w . h）
/k(g/kw.h)
/h）
consumption (kg/h)
250
15
Fuel油耗量（kg
consumption
240
油耗率（g
10
230
Fuel
220
5
210
200 0
1000
1200
1400
1600
1800
2000
2200
2400
2600
2800
3000
3200
3400
3600
转速（r pm ）
Speed

Section IV Main Checking and Adjustment Parameters

1、At rated power:
(1) Exhaust temperature (master pipe) (ºC) ≤700
(2) Thermostat opening temperature (ºC) 82
(3) Thermostat full open temperature (ºC) 95
(4) Temperature of engine oil in main oil way (ºC) ≤130
(5) Engine oil pressure (kPa) 400～600
2. Engine oil pressure at minimum stable speed (kPa) ≥98
3. Timing phase (in rotation angle of crankshaft)
(1) Open of intake valve (before top dead center) 24.5°
(2) Close of intake valve (after bottom dead center) 55.5°
(3) Open of exhaust valve (before bottom dead center) 54°
(4) Close of exhaust valve (after top dead center) 26°
4. Valve clearance (mm) 0.3～0.4

Section V Tightening Torque for Critical Bolts of Engine
☆ Comparison Table of Tightening Torque for Critical Bolts

No. Description N．m
1 Fixing bolt of rockshaft 55
2 Heater plug 25
3 Nut and washer for fuel injector body 40
4 Fuel injector 34
5 Fixing bolt of thermostat housing assembly 25
6 Installation torque of rocker arm assembly 55
7 Camshaft thrust plate bolt 25
8 Camshaft timing gear bolt 110
9 Fixing bolt of rockshaft 50
10 Fixing bolt of engine oil pump filter screen assembly 20
11 Engine oil pump fixing bolt 20
12 Oil sump bolt 23.5
13 Flywheel baffle bolt 85
14 Flywheel bolt 25 for first step
70 for second step
120 for third step
15 Crankshaft bearing cap bolt 20 for first step
110 for second step
170 for third step
16 Tightening bolt of engine oil pump 25
17 Socket nut of engine oil pump 30
18 Torque for cylinder head bolt: 65 for first step
85 for second step
105 for third step
19 Rockshaft support bolt 55
20 Main bearing cap bolt 170
21 Torque for drive shaft nut 66
22 Transmission bracket nut 69
23 Clutch cover – flywheel housing bolt M10：46
M12：91
24 Engine rear bracket nut and bolt M10：40
M12：69
25 Front exhaust pipe bolt 37
26 Clutch working cylinder bolt 19


27 Belt pulley bolt 210
28 Fan pulley 12.5
29 Crankshaft bearing cap bolt 170
30 Connecting rod bearing cap bolt 25 for first step
85 for second step
31 Camshaft timing gear 110
32 Fuel injection pump nut 30
33 Idler gear bolt 20
34 Engine oil pipe perforated bolt 20
35 Crankshaft belt pulley bolt 210
36 Fan silicone oil clutch 12.5
37 Connecting rod bearing cap 20 for first step
85 for second step
38 Piston cooling oil pipe bolt M8×1.25 25
M6×1.00 7.5
39 Oil pressure regulation valve M6×1.5 30
40 Socket nut of engine oil pump 30
41 Engine oil pump assembly bolt 25
42 Oil sump bolt 23.5
43 Cylinder head bolt 65 for first step
85 for second step
105±5 for third step
44 Rockshaft support bolt 55
45 Tightening bolt of water outlet pipe 19
46 Protrusion size of water pump impeller 24.6mm
47 Fan center distance 79.2～79.8 m
48 Open temperature of thermostat valve 82 ℃
49 Full open temperature of thermostat valve 95℃
50 Open pressure of vacuum valve at center of radiator 88．2～117．6 kPa
cap valve seat
51 Water pump fixing bolt 25 N.m
52 Alternator fixing bolt 40 N.m
53 Alternator adjustment plate fixing bolt 25 N.m
54 Lock nut, A/C compressor idler gear 27 N.m
55 Nut of engine oil cooler water pipe 25
56 Oil drainage plug 80
57 Fixing bolt of oil pump assembly 20
10


58 Tightening socket nut 30
59 Bolt and nut of starter motor 81
60 Fixing nut of starter cable 9
61 Exhaust branch pipe bolt 30
62 Bolt of heat shield 25
63 Support bolt 40
64 Front exhaust pipe nut 40
65 Crankshaft belt pulley bolt 210
66 Exhaust pipe nut 67
67 Torque of engine bracket bolt M10：40
M12：69
68 Cylinder head cover nut 13
69 Connecting nut between turbocharger and exhaust 25
manifold
70 Connecting bolt between exhaust manifold and 30
cylinder head
71 Bolt of exhaust pipe heat shield 25
72 Connecting bolt of turbocharger air bleeding pipe 25
73 Perforated bolt of lubricating oil pipe M12：41
M14：55
☆ Comparison Table for Standard Bolt Specification and Tightening Torque

Bolt Identification
Less than grade 8.8 Grade 8.8 (High Grade 10.9 (Alloy
Torque (N.m)
(low carbon steel) carbon steel) steel)
Specification
M6×1.0 4~8 5~10 .......
M8×1.25 8~18 12~23 17~31
M10×1.25 21~35 28~47 38~64
M10×1.5 20~34 28~46 37~61
M12×1.25 50~75 62~93 77~116
M12×1.75 46~70 58~86 73~109
M14×1.5 78~117 95~142 116~174
M12×2.0 73~109 90~134 109~163
M16×1.5 106~160 138~208 163~245
M16×2.0 102~152 132~198 156~234
M18×1.5 154~230 199~299 234~352
M20×1.5 210~316 275~413 323~485
11

M22×1.5 256~422 370~555 433~649

M24×2.0 360~550 439~725 565~847
12

Section VI Main Fitting Clearances and Allowable Wear Limits of Engine

Assembly
Fitting Clearance for Wear Limit
No. Name Standard Size (mm)
nature New Engine (mm)
(mm)
Contact width between
valve and seat ring
1 Intake valve 1.7 2.2
Exhaust valve 2 2.5
Valve sinkage
2 Intake valve 0.73 1.28
Exhaust valve 0.71 1.2
3 Backlash 0.05-0.13 0.3
Axial run-out clearance of
4 0.07 0.2
idler gear A
Outside diameter of tappet Φ13 −−00..010

028
5 Clearance 0.01～0.046 0.10
+0.018
Tappet bore Φ13 0
6 Radial run-out of push rod 0.3
7 Deflection of rockshaft 0.3
Outside diameter of
rockshaft Φ19 0−0.02
8 Clearance 0.01～0.05 0.20
Rocker arm bore Φ19 ++00..03
01
Rod diameter of intake
valve Φ8 −−00..039
054
9 Clearance 0.039～0.071 0.20
Valve guide bore Φ80+0.017
Rod diameter of exhaust
valve Φ8 −−00..064
079
10 Clearance 0.064～0.096 0.25
Valve guide bore Φ80+0.017
Free height of valve spring 48
11 Perpendicularity of valve
Φ1.4
spring
Outside diameter of idler
gear A shaft Φ55 −−00..025
055
12 Clearance 0.025～0.080 0.2
Inside diameter of idler gear
A bearing Φ550+0.03
13 Cylinder sleeve bore Φ93++00..065
020
13

Assembly
(mm)
Assembly
Name Standard Size (mm)
(mm)
Protrusion height of
13 0～０.08
cylinder sleeve
Axial run-out clearance of
0.20
14 camshaft Clearance 0.05～0.13
Cam height of camshaft 42.02±0.05 0.38
Inside diameter of camshaft
bush Φ50 0+0.025
15 Clearance 0.025～0.080 0.12
Diameter of camshaft
journal Φ50 −−00..025
055
16 Deflection of cam bush 0.02 0.1
Outside diameter of piston
pin Φ34 0
−0.005
17 Clearance 0.002～0.015 0.03
+0.010
Piston pin bore Φ34 + 0.002
Thickness of connecting
rod large end Φ33 0
− 0.07
18 Clearance 0.175～0.320 0.35
+0.250
Opening of crankshaft
connecting rod journal Φ33 + 0.175
Clearance of intake and
19 Clearance 0.3～0.4
exhaust valves (cold state)
Main journal Φ 70 −−00..068
086
20 Clearance 0.031～0.066 0.11
Main bush bore (after
assembly) Φ 70 −−00..003
033
Outside diameter of piston
pin Φ340− 0.036 0.05
21 Clearance 0.008～0.026
+0.020
Inside diameter of
connecting rod bush Φ34 + 0.038
−0.070
Crankshaft connecting rod
journal Φ53 − 0.085
22 Clearance 0.029～0.069 0.1
−0.016
Connecting rod bush bore
(after assembly) Φ53 − 0.041
Grouping of piston outside
diameter
Group A 92.957～92.968 Grouping
23 0.053～0.075
Group B 92.968～92.979 clearance
Group C 92.979～92.990
Group D 92.990～93.001
14

Assembly
(mm)
Grouping of cylinder sleeve
inside diameter (after
pressed-in)
Group A 93.021～93.032
Group B 93.032～93.043
Group C 93.043～93.054
Group D 93.054～93.065
Opening of piston ring
1st compression ring 0.2～0.4 1.5
24 nd
2 compression ring 0.65～0.85 1.5
Oil control ring 0.25～0.50 1.5
End clearance of piston ring
1st compression ring 0.078～0.139 0.15
25 nd
2 compression ring 0.045～0.09 0.15
Oil control ring 0.03～0.07 0.15
15

Section VII Specification of Main Attachments and Accessories

Engine oil pump type Externally engaged gear pump
Flow rate of engine oil pump ≥ 23L/m (at 1,000r/m and 0.4MPa)
Lubrication ≥ 23L/m (at 1,800r/m and 0.44MPa)
system Open pressure of engine oil pump 0.7±0.08MPa
relief valve
Engine oil filter type Filter element type
Water pump type Centrifugal type
Flow rate and head of water pump Head ≥6.5m (at 3,000r/m) at 100L/min flow rate;
Cooling (water temperature at 80±5ºC) Head ≥12m (at 4,000r/m) at 120L/min flow rate;
system Thermostat type Pellet thermostat
Temperature of thermostat Initial open: 82ºC; full open: 95ºC
Fan type Independent electric fan
Preheating plug type Ceramic type
Voltage of preheating plug 12V
Electric
Starter specification 12V，2.8kW
system
Alternator specification 14V，90A
Battery voltage 12V
Radial flow variable section turbocharger
Intake system Turbocharger The top speed of turbocharger is ≤220,000r/m, with
turbocharger ratio at ≤2.2.
Type of EGR valve Position feedback type
EGR Voltage of EGR valve position 5V
sensor
Fuel filter type Spin-on type, with fuel-water separator, manual fuel
delivery pump, and diesel heater
High pressure fuel pump BOSCH CP1H, radial three-plunger pump, with fuel
delivery fuel pump and solenoid valve control
Fuel injector BOSCH CRI2.2, solenoid valve control
Electronically High pressure common rail Maximum rail pressure: 160MPa
controlled Electronic control unit (ECU) BOSCH EDC17, with working voltage at 12V
common rail Crankshaft speed sensor Working clearance: 0.5～1.2mm
fuel system Camshaft position sensor Working clearance: 0.5～1.5
Air flowmeter HFM6, with working voltage at 12V and flow measurement
range at 40~840kg/h.
Water temperature sensor NTC type
Rail pressure sensor Voltage output: 0.5~4.5V
Accelerator pedal position sensor Voltage: 5V
16

Chapter II Maintenance for Main Structures of Engine
Section I Disassembly of Engine Assembly

I. Special Notices:
a) Before overhauling the engine, make sure to firstly disconnect the negative cable of the battery, or it will damage
the harness and other electric units;
b) Unless otherwise specified, rotate the ignition switch to LOCK position;
c) Whenever the air cleaner is disassembled, make sure to plug the intake port, in order to prevent the ingress of
foreign material, which may enter into cylinder and cause serious damage.
II. Disassembly Procedure

z Turn the ignition switch to LOCK position and disconnect the negative cable of the battery.
z Open the oil drainage bolt of the oil sump and fully drain and collect the oil.
z Fully drain the coolant.
z Disassemble the water inlet and outlet hoses of the engine.
z Disassemble the electronic control harness for engine ECU, engine, and complete vehicle.
z Disassemble the power supply wires for alternator, starter, and oil pressure and water temperature sensors.
z Remove the connecting hose between intake connecting pipe and air cleaner.
z Loosen the connecting pipe of inter-cooler.
z Shut off the fuel pipeline and unplug the fuel pipe and return pipe.
z Disconnect the power supply of the radiator fan and when necessary loosen the radiator bracket and take out the
whole radiator.
z Loosen the clutch connecting pipe.
z Disassemble relevant connecting pipes of air conditioner and power steering pump.
z Disconnect the exhaust manifold and exhaust muffler pipe.
z Loosen the connecting mechanism between transmission and the complete vehicle.
z Loosen the fixing bolts between engine and transmission suspension bracket.
z Steadily lower the engine with elevator.
z Loosen the connecting bolts between engine and transmission and separate the transmission from the engine.
17

III. Illustration for Disassembly of Engine
1. Disassemble the flywheel.
a. Block the flywheel with flywheel clamp, loosen the
fixing bolts between damping pulley and flywheel, and
disassemble the flywheel assembly.
2. Disassemble the belt, air conditioner

compressor, and alternator and water
pump pulleys.
a. Use an open-end wrench to remove the fixing nuts of

engine fan and remove the cooling fan of the engine.
b. Loosen the alternator adjustment bolts and fixing bolts,
remove the fan clutch pulley and alternator belt, and
check the side face and toothed face of the belt for
normal state.
c. Remove the oil and vacuum pump oil return pipe
connectors.
d. Loosen the alternator fixing bolts and adjustment bolts
and disassemble the alternator belt. Check the
alternator belt for presence of aging, cracking, and
abnormal wear. If yes, replace the belt. Arrange the
parts disassembled orderly on the part shelf, remove
the alternator, use hand to rotate the alternator pulley,
and check the inside for presence of noise, stagnation,
and unbalance. Check the alternator for presence of
ablation and check the shaft for presence of abnormal
wear noise.
e. Disassemble the water pump pulley.
18

3. Disassemble the exhaust system.
a. Disassemble the fixing bolts of turbocharger lubricating

oil pipe and disassemble the fixing clamp of return
hose.
b. Remove the exhaust pipe shield.
c. Remove the EGR cooler.
d. Remove the exhaust pipe and turbocharger assembly.

e. Remove the fixing bolts and nuts of exhaust pipe,
remove the exhaust manifold and turbocharger
subassembly, and remove the exhaust manifold gasket.
f. Check:
A) Whether the rotor of turbocharger rotates flexibly.
B) Whether the air compressor wheel is damaged,
observed from the inlet of air compressor.
C) Whether the air compressor interferences with the
housing, observed from the inlet of air compressor.
4. Disassemble the relevant accessories
of fuel system.
19

a. Loosen the conical nut at fuel injector end and the

conical nut on fuel injection pump side (one is to
reversely tighten the fuel inlet of fuel injector and one is
to loosen the nut of high pressure fuel pipe); Loosen the
conical nut on fuel injection pump side (Two wrenches
are used mainly for disassembly, of which one is to
reversely tighten the fuel outlet of fuel injection pump
and one is to loosen the nut of high pressure fuel pipe,
in order to prevent the fuel outlet of the fuel injection
pump from follow-up rotation). Remove the high
pressure fuel pipe and install the high pressure fuel pipe
protective sleeve;
b. Remove the fuel injector return hose.
c. Remove the fixing bolts of fuel injector pressure plate,

remove the fuel injector body along with its support,
and install the fuel injector protective sleeve.
4. Disassemble the fuel-gas separator

subassembly
a. Remove the crankshaft breathe hose and fuel-gas

separator return hose.
b. Disassemble the fixing bolts of fuel-gas separator.
c. Remove the fuel-gas separator.
20

d. Remove the fixing bolts of fuel-gas separator housing

and take out the fuel-gas separator filter element. Clean
the fuel-gas separator housing, check the state of filter
element, and when necessary replace the filter element.
e. Disassemble the fixing bolts of fuel-gas separator

bracket and remove the fuel-gas separator bracket.
4. Disassemble the intake manifold and

other peripheral accessories.
21

a. Disassemble the fixing bolts of power steering pump

and remove the power steering pump.
b. Check the power steering pump for presence of oil
leakage and check the belt pulley of power steering
pump for presence of wear;
c. Remove the EGR valve.
d. Remove the fixing bolts of air intake pipe bracket.
e. Remove the air intake pipe bracket and fuel-gas

separator bracket.
22

f. Remove the fuel rail and rail pressure sensor assembly

and the rail bracket and install the fuel pressure rail
protective sleeve;
g. Disassemble
h. Disassemble the fixing bolts of oil dipstick fixing

sleeve and disassemble the oil dipstick conduit.
i. Disassemble the fixing bolts and nuts of intake

manifold. Remove the intake manifold;
23

j. Remove the fixing bolts of compressor bracket and

remove the compressor bracket;
k. Remove the bypass rubber pipe, remove the thermostat

housing and water outlet assembly; Disassemble the
fixing bolts of thermostat housing and remove the
thermostat housing.
l. Remove the fixing bolts of cylinder head shield and

remove the cylinder head shield;
m. Remove the bolts and nuts of rocker arm support as per

specified sequence and remove the rocker arm
assembly. Sequence: 4-1-3-2
n. Notice: The failure to loosen the bolts of rocker arm
support as per the specified sequence will damage the
rockshaft*.
o. Take out the push rod;
24

p. Remove the cylinder head bolts by several times as per

the specified sequence (front circle drawing method).
q. The failure to disassemble by several times as per
specified sequence will damage the cylinder head and
impair the deflection of lower surface of cylinder
head*.
r. Remove the damping pulley.

Remove the fixing bolts of water pump, remove the
water pump, and check the water pump blades for
presence of cracking and corrosion and check the
blade shaft for presence of wear.
s. Disassemble the fixing bolts of timing gear chamber

cover and remove the timing gear chamber cover and
cover gasket.
t. Remove the engine left bracket.

u. Loosen the bypass rubber hose clamp, loosen the
fixing bolts of water inlet pipe weldment, and remove
the water inlet pipe weldment.
25

v. Disassemble the fixing bolts of engine oil filter and

remove the engine oil filter.
w. Use an open-end wrench to disassemble the engine oil

pressure connector and remove the connector and
lubricating oil pipe.
x. Loosen the fixing nuts of fuel injection pump gear,

remove the hexagon socket fixing bolts of fuel
injection pump and the fixing nuts of fuel injection
pump gear, knock lightly the fuel injection pump gear
shaft with rubber hammer, remove the fuel injection
pump and fuel injection pump gear, and install the fuel
injection pump protective sleeve. The fuel injection
pump shall be insulated from the air and dust.
26

y. Remove the fixing bolts of idler gear pressure plate

and remove the idler gear pressure plate, idler gear, and
idler gear shaft.
z. Remove the fixing bolts and fixing nuts of oil sump by

one time as per the specified sequence and remove the
oil sump.
aa. Remove the fixing bolts of engine oil pump and pull
out the engine oil pump.
bb. Remove the fixing bolts of camshaft.
27

cc. Pull out the camshaft.
dd. Remove the nuts of connecting rod large end as per

specified sequence and use piston installation tool to
push out the piston. Position the piston orderly.
Visually observe each piston for presence of
cracking, scratch, and other excessive wear.
ee. Disassemble the fixing bolts of timing gear chamber

and the fixing bolts of idler gear lining plate and
remove the idler gear lining plate.
ff. Use a rubber hammer to knock lightly the timing

gear chamber from both sides to remove the timing
gear chamber.
28

gg. Take out the crankshaft timing gear.
hh. Rotate the bolts of master bearing cap as per

specified sequence to pull out the bolts of master
bearing cap and remove the main shaft bushes
(Position the main shaft bushes orderly).
ii. Overturn the crankshaft to take out the crankshaft
thrust plate and remove the crankshaft and the
crankshaft lower bushes.
jj. Check the wear state of the crankshaft thrust plates.
kk. Disassemble the piston cooling fuel injection pipe

subassembly.
5. Check the parts.
a. Check the lower surface of the cylinder head. Strict

planeness tolerance is required for the fitting surface of
the intake and exhaust branch pipes.
b. These surfaces can be repaired by grinding. If the
surface planeness is out of the specified tolerance,
grind the surface to meet the technical requirements. If
the planeness is excessively out of the technical
requirements, replace the cylinder head.
Deflection of cylinder head lower surface 0.05 or
less Limit 0.20
Cylinder head height Standard value 92 Limit
91.55
c. Use ruler and feeler gauge to measure the deflection of
fitting surface between exhaust branch pipe and
29

cylinder head.
If the measurement is between limit and standard
value, re-grind the fitting surface between exhaust
branch pipe and cylinder head.
If the measurement is out of the specified limit, make
sure to replace the branch pipe.
d. Use a multimeter to measure the outside diameter of

piston at the position 73.9mm reach from the piston
crown.
Standard value:
A: 92.971~92.980mm
B: 92.981~92.990mm
C: 92.991~93.000mm
D: 93.001~93.010mm
e. Use an inside micrometer to measure:

Standard value for inside diameter of cylinder bore
fitted with cylinder sleeve:
A:93.021~93.030mm
B:93.031~93.040mm
C:93.041~93.050mm
D:93.051~93.060mm
f. Subtract the inside diameter of cylinder bore from the

outside diameter of piston to obtain the piston
clearance. The clearance range of piston:
0.041~0.059mm.
If the piston clearance is out of the specified range,
check and replace the cylinder sleeve or piston,
depending on the cylinder bore grouping and the
outside diameter of piston.
(The second line of the stamped code at the rear end
of lower surface of new cylinder block indicates the
inside diameter group of the cylinder bore).
30

g. Measure the cam height of the camshaft. The standard

value is 42.02±0.05mm and the limit is 41.65mm. If
the measurement is out of the limit, make sure to
replace the camshaft.
h. Use a multimeter to measure the outside diameter of
each camshaft journal. If any measurement is out of
the limit, replace the camshaft. The standard value for
outside diameter of journal is 49.945-49.975mm and
the limit is 49.60mm. If any measurement is out of the
limit, replace the camshaft.
i. Use a feeler gauge to measure the axial run-out

clearance of the camshaft. The axial run-out clearance
of camshaft is 0.05~0.114mm.
j. Use a multimeter to measure the outside diameter of

valve stem. If the measurement is less than the
specified limit, make sure to replace the valve and
valve guide in pair.
(Intake valve: 7.946-7.961mm; limit: 7.880mm)
(Exhaust valve: 7.921-7.936mm; limit: 7.850mm)
k. Use a multimeter to measure the inside diameter of

valve guide and subtract the outside diameter of valve
stem from the measurement to obtain the valve guide
clearance. If the clearance obtained is out of specified
limit, make sure to replace the valve and valve guide in
pair.
(Limit of intake valve guide clearance: 0.200mm)
(Limit of exhaust valve guide clearance: 0.250mm)
31

l. Measure the free height of valve spring. If the

measurement is out of specified limit, make sure to
replace the spring.
The standard value is 0.05mm or less and the limit is
0.20mm.
m. Use a feeler gauge to measure the clearance between

piston ring groove and piston ring.
If the clearance between piston ring groove and piston
ring is out of specified limit, make sure to replace the
piston.
n. Use a feeler gauge to measure the opening gap of

piston ring.
If the opening gap of the piston ring is out of specified
limit, make sure to replace the piston.
o. Install the steel-strip oil ring.
32

p. Install the oil ring bush ring.
q. Use a piston ring expander to install the 2nd

compression ring and the 1st compression ring. While
installing the compression rings, face upward the
marking N (The lip of 2nd compression ring shall face
downward).
Illustration of opening directions for
piston rings The overlap position of oil control ring cushion spring
Forward marking and the opening of oil control ring steel strip shall be
Compression
180º away from each other and shall be 90º away from
Opening of oil control
ring
ring steel strip the 2nd compression ring.
Auxiliary
thrust face Main thrust face
Overlap of oil Compressi

control ring on ring
cushion spring
Piston pin direction
r. Measure the outside diameter of main journal and the

inside diameter of main shaft bore.
33

s. Measure the outside diameter of connecting rod journal

and the inside diameter of bush bore of connecting rod
fitted with bush.
Calculate the clearance between main journal of crankshaft
and the main bush bore of crankshaft: The difference
between the diameter of main journal and the inside
diameter of crankshaft main bush bore measured above is
the fitting clearance. The wear limit shall not exceed
0.11mm.
Notice: While measuring the inside diameter of
crankshaft main bush bore, install the bearing cap and
bush onto the bearing block and tighten the bolts to
specified torque. Use an inside multimeter to measure
the inside diameter.
Calculate the clearance between crankshaft connecting rod
journal and connecting rod bush bore: The difference
between the diameter of connecting rod journal and the
inside diameter of connecting rod bush bore measured
above is the fitting clearance. The wear limit shall not
exceed 0.10mm.
34

Section II Assembly of Engine

I. Basic Technical Requirements for Assembly
The assembly of the engine is one important step for service of the engine. The service performance of the engine is
closely related to the assembly accuracy, assembly technical requirements, and the assembly quality. Make sure to pay
attention to following items:
Before the assembly, make sure to thoroughly clean and thoroughly blow dry all parts and components. All friction
surfaces of the parts with relative movement are applied with lubricating oil (grade CE diesel engine oil or above).
Carefully remove all oil dirt and carbon deposit, till the base metal is exposed. Never use electric wire brush to clean
the sealing surfaces of any sealing gasket. Remove the residues from all used sealing gaskets. It’s absolutely
prohibited to use wire brush to clean the piston.
a. Remove the carbon deposit, oil dirt, and water scale and clean all lubricating oil pipes and pipelines.
b. Check the wear state of valve, push rod, and rocker arm contact surfaces and when necessary repair or replace.
c. Check the wear state of piston rings, cylinder sleeves, connecting rod small end bushes, and connecting rod bushes
and when necessary replace.
d. Check the wear state of main bushes and thrust plates.
e. Check the wear state of engagement surfaces of transmission mechanism and drive gear and measure the
engagement clearance and when necessary repair or replace.
f．Check the wear state of intake and exhaust valves and intake and exhaust valve seats and repair, grind, and test the
leakage and when necessary replace.
g．Check the mist injection state of the fuel injector and when necessary grind or replace the fuel injector coupler.
While installing the used fuel injector, clean the carbon deposit with ultrasonic and do not wipe with silk or scrape
with knife, in order to prevent damaging the injector nozzle and blocking the injector orifice.
h. Check the engine oil pump and disassemble for checking or measure the wearing parts and adjust accordingly.
i. Check the cylinder gasket and intake and exhaust pipe gaskets and replace any damaged or failed gasket.
j. Check the alternator and starter, clean all parts and bearings, blow dry and apply new lubricating grease, and check
the wear state of starter gear and check the transmission mechanism for flexible functioning.
k. Check and clean the turbocharger.
35

II. Illustration for Assembly of Engine

1. Install the piston cooling fuel injector
subassembly.
a. Install the piston cooling fuel injector subassembly:
Install the piston cooling fuel injector subassembly
onto the engine block;
b. Tighten the hexagon socket screws to 12.5±2.5N.m;
2. Install the crankshaft, thrust plates,

and main bearing caps.
a. Install the upper and lower main bushes: Align the
stop opening of upper main bush with the slip groove
of the main bearing block bore of engine block and
push 5 upper main bushes to place;
Notice: While installing the main bushes, make
sure to differentiate the upper and lower bushes,
of which the upper bush has oil grooves and the
lower bush has not. Do not install the bushes
reversely.
a. Apply an appropriate amount of clean engine oil onto

the upper bearing bush;
b. Lift up and place the crankshaft onto the engine
block.
36

c. Install the crankshaft thrust plates to the 3rd main

journal portion (The surface with oil groove faces to
crankshaft thrust surface and the oil groove shall be
sprayed with lubricating oil).
d. Spray oil to the main journal portion and install the

1~4 main bearing caps of crankshaft as per the
marked sequence. The arrow markings on the bearing
caps shall face to the front of the engine.
e. Apply the liquid sealant onto the fitting surface
between 5th bearing cap and cylinder block and install
the 5th bearing cap * text: Notice: 1) Before applying
the sealant, the fitting surface of main bearing cap
shall be thoroughly free of any engine oil; 2) Never
block the cylinder threaded holes and bearings by the
sealant.
37

f. Apply engine oil onto the threads of main bearing cap

bolts, install into the main bearing caps, and tighten
the bolts to 170 N.m torque as per the specified
sequence. Tighten to 20 N·m for the 1st step, to 120
N·m for the 2nd step, and 170 N·m for the 3rd step.
Tightening sequence: (From center to two sides)
8415 9
7326 10
g. Adhere the magnetic dial gauge onto the cylinder

block, position the pointer of the dial gauge to the
rear end face of crankshaft, and use a straight
screwdriver to pry lightly the crankshaft to check the
axial clearance of crankshaft (or push the crankshaft
left and right and measure with feeler gauge). If the
thrust clearance is out of the limit, replace the thrust
bearings in pair. Standard value: 0.040mm-0.201mm;
Limit: 0.30mm
h. Rotate the crankshaft and check for flexible rotation

and presence of noise. Alternatively, use a digital
wrench to measure the net torque of crankshaft, listen
for presence of noise, and check whether the torque is
≤6N.m.
a Insert the lubricated tappets in turn into the tappet

holes.
38

b. Install the tappet anti-drop tool.
3. Install the piston connecting rod

assembly.
a. Spray one film of oil onto the cylinder bore.

b. Spray oil onto the piston skirt, install the piston into
the piston taper sleeve, insert into the cylinder bore,
and use nylon bar and guide jig to install the piston.
Notice: (The connecting rod and bolts shall not
come into contact with the cylinder bore and the
large end bore of connecting rod shall be
orthometric with the crankshaft journal.)
c. After installing the large end cap of the connecting

rod, tighten the large end nut of connecting rod to
20N· m and 85N· m by two times.
d. Use a feeler gauge to check the side play of large end
of connecting rod. The side play range for large end
of connecting rod: 0.175-0.29mm.
e. After the installation of pistons for 1st and 4th
cylinders, rotate the crankshaft for 180º and install
the pistons for 2nd and 3rd cylinders.
39

4. Install the timing gear and related

accessories.
a. Insert the lubricated tappets in turn into the tappet
holes.
b. Install the water manifold (The water manifold is

paralleling with the cylinder block)
40

c. Spray oil to the crankshaft gear and then install.
d. Install the gasket of timing gear chamber.
e. Install the timing gear chamber and idler gear lining

plate and pre-tighten the fixing bolts.
41

f. Spray lubricating oil onto the camshaft bush, add

lubricating oil to the head of tappet, and spray
lubricating oil onto the camshaft subassembly.
g. Install the camshaft (with the bottom facing upward

and the left facing forward).
h. Tighten the fixing bolt subassembly of camshaft

thrust plate to 25±5N.m.
i. Install the engine oil pump outlet pipe subassembly

and engine oil pump assembly with strainer.
42

j. Install the idler gear shafts A and C onto the idler

gear lining plate and use nylon bar for idler gear shaft
to lightly knock into the idler gear lining plate.
k. Apply oil onto the surface of idler gear C bush and

lightly rotate into the idler gear shaft C. Then, apply
oil onto the surface of idler gear A bush and use
nylon bar to lightly knock into the idler gear shaft A.
Take caution to apply the force lightly and uniformly,
in order to prevent the abnormal wear of bush.
l. While installing the idler gear A, take caution to
adjust the installation position of idler gear A and "2
2” position of camshaft gear as per the “1 1” marking
of crankshaft gear. (Timing photo)
43

m. Apply oil onto the surface of idler gear B bush and

lightly rotate into the idler gear shaft B. In event of
difficult installation, slightly rotate the crankshaft to
help installation.
n. Use the hexagon flange bolts to install the idler gear

pressure plates A, B, and C onto the idler gear shaft
and tighten the fixing bolts of pressure plate and
fixing bolts of idler gear lining plate to 25±5N. m
torque.
5. Install the oil sump.

a. Use a scraper to remove the excessive portion of the
gear chamber.
b. Install and pre-tighten the stud * 12 of oil sump.
44

c. Apply sealant to the lower end face of timing gear

chamber and the lower rear end of engine block.
d. Install the oil sump gasket.

e. Apply the sealant for the second time to both sides of
oil sump gasket.
f. Install the oil sump assembly with oil drainage screw

plug and use nylon bar to lightly knock the oil sump
to ensure the steady installation of oil sump.
45

g. As per the specified sequence, tighten the fixing bolts

*10 of oil sump and the fixing nuts * 12 of oil sump
to 23.5±3.5N.m torque.
h. Use a cotton cloth to wipe away excessive sealant.
5. Install the timing gear chamber.
i. Pre-install the flange O-ring of fuel injection pump

onto the fuel injection pump.
j. Place the fuel injection pump into installation
position, install and pre-tighten the hexagon socket
fixing bolts of fuel injection pump, and install the
fuel injection pump gear and fixing nuts of fuel
injection pump.
k. Tighten large fixing nuts of fuel injection pump to

70±5 N·m and tighten hexagon socket fixing bolts of
fuel injection pump to 30±5 N·m.
l. Install the water pump O-ring onto the water pump

and use hand to rotate the impeller for two turns to
ensure that the water pump rotates flexibly.
m. Install the water pump assembly to the gear chamber.
46

n. Install and tighten the bolts and nuts of water pump in

diagonal manner to 25±5N.m.
o. Install the timing gear chamber cover subassembly

and attach and tighten the fixing bolts of gear
chamber cover to 20±5 N.m.
p. Torque for hexagon socket fixing bolt: 60±10 N.m.
q. Install the damping pulley and attach and tighten the

fixing bolts of damping pulley to 210±15 N·m.
6. Install the cylinder head and related

accessories.
a. Check whether the upper surface of cylinder block is
normal and the cylinder gasket is normal and install
the cylinder gasket.
47

b. Install the cylinder head onto the cylinder block.
c. Immerse the thread portion of cylinder head bolts into

oil and then install into the cylinder head and
pre-tighten.
d. Tighten the cylinder head bolts by steps from the

center to two sides as per the specified sequence:
65N.m→85N.m→105N.m
e. Install the thermostat housing and water outlet

assembly and tighten the fixing bolts and hexagon
socket fixing bolts.
48

7. Install the intake manifold and

related accessories.
a. Use hexagon flange bolts to fix the fuel rail bracket
onto the cylinder block and tighten to 37.5±9.5N.m.
b. Use hexagon flange bolts to install the fuel rail

assembly with rail pressure sensor onto the fuel rail
bracket and tighten to 25±5N.m.
c. Install the intake manifold gasket.
d. Insert the oil dipstick into the cylinder block and

tighten the fixing bolts and nuts of intake manifold as
per the specified sequence.
49

e. Install the intake manifold and install and tighten the

fixing bolts, plain washers, and fixing nuts.
f. Install the intake manifold harness bracket and intake

pressure and temperature sensor.
8. Install the push rod rocker arm

subassembly and adjust the valve
clearance.
a. Dip the tip of push rod with oil and install into the
cylinder head. Install the rocker arm and pre-tighten
the rocker arm support bolts.
b. Tighten the support bolts by steps. Sequence: 2-3-4-1;

Torque: 55±5N.m
50

c. Rotate the crankshaft, till the top dead center (TDC)

line of crankshaft damping pulley is aligned with the
timing pointer. In such case, either 1st cylinder piston or
4th cylinder piston is at top dead center (TDC) of
compression stroke.
d. Check the clearance of push rod for the intake valve

and exhaust valve of 1st cylinder. If there is a
clearance between 1st cylinder intake valve and valve
push rod, the 1st cylinder piston is at top dead center
of compression stroke (1236). If the 1st cylinder
intake valve is pressed tightly by exhaust valve push
rod, the 4th cylinder piston is at top dead center of
compression stroke (4578).
e. Valve clearance (under cold state): 0.3-0.4 mm

f. Loosen the clearance adjustment screws for the
valves, as shown in the figure.
g. Insert the feeler gauge with appropriate thickness
between rocker arm and valve rod end.
h. Rotate the valve clearance adjustment screw, till a

light resistance is felt on the feeler gauge.
i. Securely tighten the lock nut.
j. Rotate the crankshaft for 360º.

k. Align the TDC marking of crankshaft damping pulley
with the timing pointer.
l. Adjust the clearance for other valves, as shown in the
figure.
51

9. Install other peripheral accessories.
a. In turn install the fuel injection assembly with sealing

gasket onto the cylinder head.
b. Install the fuel injector fixing pressure plate and
install and tighten the fuel injector pressure plate
bolts to 8±2N.m+40～45°.
c. Install the 1st cylinder high pressure fuel pipe

assembly, 2nd cylinder high pressure fuel pipe
assembly, fuel injection pump high pressure fuel
pipe, 3rd cylinder high pressure fuel pipe assembly,
and 4th cylinder high pressure fuel pipe assembly and
tighten the corresponding nuts. Notice: 1. Notice the
installation direction of high pressure fuel pipes; 2.
The tightening torque for nuts at fuel injector end is
27±5N.m; 3. The tightening torque is 20±5N.m for
nuts at high pressure fuel rail end, 27±2N.m for high
pressure fuel pipe nuts at fuel pump end, and
20±2N.m for high pressure nuts at fuel rail end.
d. Use accelerator cable bracket bolts to install the fuel

return three-way valve onto the gear chamber and
tighten to 7.5±2.5N.m.
52

e. Install the engine oil filter and O-ring subassembly

and tighten the fixing bolts of engine oil filter bracket
to 25±5 N.m.
f. Install the engine right bracket and shock absorber

subassembly and install and pre-tighten the fixing
bolts.
g. Install the water inlet pipe gasket and water pump

inlet pipe weldment subassembly, pre-tighten the
bolt, spring, and plain washer subassembly (of water
pump inlet pipe), and install and tighten the bracket
fixing bolts at the lower end of water pump inlet pipe
weldment.
h. Install the engine left bracket and shock absorber

assembly and tighten the fixing bolts.
53

i. Check the cylinder head shield O-ring.
j. Install the cylinder head shield and install and tighten

the cylinder head shield bolts to 13±5N.m.
k. Install the exhaust manifold gasket and install the

exhaust manifold and turbocharger subassembly.
l. Install the spring washers and hexagon nuts and

tighten the fixing nuts and fixing bolts as per
specified sequence.
54

Tighten bolts as per sequence shown in figure.
m. Install the EGR cooling steel pipe and tighten the

fixing bolts.
n. Install the EGR valve and tighten the fixing bolts.
o. Apply sealant onto the thread of vacuum pump oil

inlet pipe connecting bolts, install the connecting
bolts onto the cylinder block oil outlet, and tighten to
18±2 N.m.
p. Install the alternator belt and water pump pulley.

q. Install the fan and clutch assembly and install and
pre-tighten the clutch fixing nuts.
55

r. Adjust the tension of alternator belt and tighten the

alternator adjustment bolts and clutch fixing nuts.
s. Tighten the alternator fixing nuts.
t. Install the vacuum pump oil inlet pipe fixing bolts I

(M8×20) and tighten the fixing bolts to 18±2N.m and
25±5N.m respectively.
u. Install the exhaust pipe heat shield and install and

tighten the fixing bolts.
v. Install the power steering pump and tighten the fixing

bolts of power steering pump.
56

w. Install the compressor bracket and tighten the bracket

fixing bolts.
x. Use perforated bolts II and copper washers II to install

the turbocharger oil inlet pipe assembly onto the
turbocharger oil inlet and use perforated bolts I and
copper washers I to install another end onto the
cylinder block oil hole and tighten the perforated
bolts I and II. 1. Tightening torque for perforated
bolts I is 55±10N.m; 2. Tightening torque for
perforated bolts II is 41±6N.m.
y. Install the fuel-gas separator bracket and intake

manifold bracket.
z. Install the fuel-gas separator assembly.
57

aa. Install the VNT electromagnetic valve and connect

various vacuum hoses.
10. Install the flywheel and related

accessories.
a. Apply oil to the outer ring and lip of the crankshaft
rear oil seal and use installation jig I to push the rear
oil seal into the oil seal groove. Then install the
installation jig II and knock with steel hammer lightly
and uniformly to install the crankshaft rear oil seal to
place.
b. Install the flywheel baffle and fixing bolts and tighten

the fixing bolts of flywheel baffle to 85±10 N.m.
58

c. Install the flywheel.

d. Install the flywheel fixing gasket and install and
pre-tighten the fixing bolts of flywheel.
e. As per the specified sequence, tighten the fixing bolts

of flywheel to 25N.m→70N.m →140N.m by steps,
in order to prevent the occurrence of false tightening
torque. This tightening torque is really high and will
easily lead to thread failure of the bolts.
f. Install the lubricated guide ball bearings into the

installation jig and knock with steel hammer
uniformly into the rear end of crankshaft.
g. Insert the clutch guide into the driven disc and install
to the rear end of flywheel. Install the clutch cover
and install and tighten the fixing bolts of clutch
cover.
59

Section III Crankshaft and Flywheel System

z It works along with the connecting rod to convert the gas pressure applied onto the piston into rotating power and
transmit to the transmission mechanism of the chassis. At the same time, it drives the valve distribution
mechanism and other accessories, such as fan, water pump, and alternator.
z The crankshaft is made of medium carbon steel alloy forging. To improve the wear resistance and fatigue
resistance, the journal surface is treated with high-frequency hardening or nitriding treatment and high-precision
grounded to meet the higher surface hardness and surface roughness requirements.
z With fully supported structure and 8 balance weights, the crankshaft is cast to an integral structure with balance
weights to improve the rigidity and bending strength of the crankshaft.
z The crankshaft is made of high strength steel alloy forging, with fillet rolled journals.
z Its front end adopts rubber-embedded crankshaft torsional shock absorber to reduce the crankshaft torsional shock
generated during the running of the engine. The signal wheel of crankshaft position sensor is installed at the last
crank.
z There are two pieces of crankshaft thrust plates installed on two sides of the 3rd main bearing block, with the face
with oil groove facing to the thrust surface of the crankshaft.
z The grouping numbers for crankshaft main journal and connecting rod journal are stamped on the first crank of
the crankshaft.
z The flywheel assembly is installed at the rear end of crankshaft and the flywheel is located by locating pin and
connected by flywheel bolts.
z The crankshaft, flywheel, and clutch assembly qualified the dynamic balance test before the factory leave.
Signal gear of flywheel

crankshaft position sensor
60

Section IV Piston and Connecting Rod Group

z The piston crown is of ω type combustion chamber;
Depending on the performance and reliability requirements, the piston
profile designed can guarantee the normal working of engine under high
speed, high temperature, and high pressure conditions. The good skirt sizes
can reduce the frictional power consumption of piston and improve the
economic performance of the engine.
z The HFC4DA1-2C piston rings include two compression rings and one
oil control ring:
The first ring adopts the trapezoid tubbish ring, which can effective reduce
the consumption of engine oil.
The second compression ring adopts the torsional trapezoid ring to increase
the flexibility of piston ring and improve the capability of piston ring for
adapting to deformation of cylinder sleeve.
The oil control ring is of coil spring expander type and adopts the combined oil ring composed of two side guide rings
(upper and lower) and the middle expander, featuring the advantages of low mass and outstanding oil scraping effect.
It can reduce the consumption of engine oil and the grain emission while meeting the Euro-IV emission standard.
40~50% of the frictional power consumption of the engine is attributed to the pistons and piston rings. The piston
rings of 4DA1 engine can effectively arrange the engine oil, reduce the friction power of piston subassembly, and
improve the fuel economy.
z The piston is stamped with mark, which shall
face upward during assembly. During assembly, take
caution to position the spring connector 180º away
from the opening of oil control ring. Notice the
opening direction of the ring while installing the
cylinder sleeve. The openings of the piston rings shall
separate 120º from each other and the ring opening
shall not face towards the piston pin. Apply an
appropriate amount of lubricating oil during the
assembly. The piston rings shall rotate flexibly after
being installed in the ring grooves.
a. The arrow on the piston crown shall point to the
front of the engine.
b. It adopts variable section connecting rod to effectively reduce the force applied onto the connecting rod.
c. The piston pin is of full-floating structure and adopts retainer ring for limiting. The piston pin can be directly
assembled during installation.
d. The body of connecting rod adopts H-shaped cross section, featuring good bending strength and light weight.
61

Section V Valve Distribution Mechanism

z It’s a device that opens and closes at fixed times the intake and exhaust valves of all cylinder to enable the
ingress of fresh air into cylinders and the exhaust of exhaust gas from the cylinders.
z The front valve distribution timing adopts gear drive, featuring stability and reliability.
62

Section VI Lubrication System

While the engine is working, all motion parts apply one specific force onto another part and generate relatively high
speed motion. With the relative motion, the friction is necessarily generated on the part surfaces, which will accelerate
the wear. Therefore, to relieve the wear, reduce the friction resistance, and prolong the service life, the engine must be
fitted with lubrication system.
z The engine oil filter is functioned to filter out the metallic wear dust, mechanical impurity, and engine oil oxide
from the engine oil. The ingress of these impurities into the lubrication system along with the engine oil will
speed up the wear of engine parts and may block the oil pipe or oil passage.
z The engine oil pump is of externally engaged gear pump and is driven by the crankshaft.
z The cooling nozzle of piston is arranged on the main oil passage to realize the stable oil spray for cooling. The
spray of engine oil into the cold oil passage within the piston can effectively reduce the thermal load of the
piston.
Valve
mechanism Splash Rocker arm bearing
cylinder block
Oil way of
Various cam Splash Various camshaft bearings

tappets
cylinder block
Oil way of
Piston group Splash Various crankshaft Timing gear Turbocharger

main bearings
cylinder block
Turbocharger
oil inlet pipe
Turbocharger oil
Oil way of
return pipe
Cooling nozzle
Main oil way
Engine oil filter

Relief valve
Bypass
Engine oil cooler

Oil outlet
pipe
Engine oil pump

Relief valve
Strainer
Oil sump
63

Section VII Cooling System

z The cooling system is functioned to maintain the engine within an appropriate temperature range under all
working conditions.
z The cooling system can prevent the engine against overheating and prevent the engine from being too cold in
winter.
z After the cold start of the engine, the cooling system can guarantee the rapid temperature rise of the engine to
reach normal working temperature as soon as possible.
z Composition: Water pump, cooling fan, silicone oil fan clutch, thermostat, engine cylinder block, water jacket in
cylinder head, and other accessories.
z The cooling system is of enclosed forced recirculation water cooling type. Its structure is mainly composed of
radiator (water tank), water pump, fan, thermostat, cooling water jacket, and pipeline.
z The cooling recirculation of the heater system and engine oil cooler is always under working state and is not
subject to the restraints of large or small recirculation.
Dual thermostat control: When the water temperature is less than 82ºC, the thermostat is under natural state (namely
the cooling water from the water tank is closed and the cooling water from the cooling module is opened). In such
case, the cooling circuit works in the small recirculation circuit and the cooling water from the cooling module enters
into the engine block and cylinder head for recirculation through the water pump so that the temperatures of the water
and oil in the engine block and the cylinder head will rise. When the water temperature reaches 82ºC, the thermostat
starts to open. When the thermostat is opened, the small valve closes the small recirculation circuit. As the thermostat
is not fully opened, the cooling water from water tank enters into the cylinder block for large recirculation through
water pump. If the water temperature continues to rise to 95ºC, the thermostat valve is fully opened.
Water tank
Thermostat
Cylinder head
Radiator
Heater
Cylinder block
Water pump
Oil cooler
Inlet of
water
64

Section VIII Turbocharger and Inter-Cooler System

The turbocharger technology utilizes the motion energy of engine exhaust gas to drive the rotation of turbine. At the
same time, the coaxial air compressor compresses the air and provides more air to the cylinder so that more fuel can
combust to generate higher power, promote the engine torque, and reduce the fuel consumption.
The common turbocharger is of bypass valve turbocharger, which can’t provide sufficient pressure while the engine is
running at low speed and thus restrains the torque output at low speed and influences the engine performance. To
change this situation, the 1.9CTI engine adopts variable nozzle turbocharger (VNT) control system to promote the
turbocharger pressure at low speed of engine and at the same time adopts inter-cooler system to exert higher torque at
low speed of engine and promote the engine performance.
Theory of inter-cooler: The temperature of the air compressed at high speed may reach 100~120ºC. The high
temperature air will impair the intake efficiency of the engine and lead to power drop of the engine. Therefore, it’s
necessary to cool down the air to approximate 60ºC. The inter-cooler is located in front of the radiator or at windward
position easily arranged, in order to reduce the temperature of air entering into the cylinder, further improve the
combustion of diesel engine, and promote the performance and emission of the diesel engine.
Inter-cooler Compressed air
Engine
Turbocharger
Intake
Exhaust
Exhaust gas of engine
Variable nozzle turbocharger (VNT): The VNT is functioned similar to one turbine housing in which the size is
varying steplessly. The VNT actuator can accurately control the nozzle area within the entire working condition range
so that the engine can not only maintain the turbine efficiency at high speed, but also increase the turbine efficiency at
low speed, promote the torques at low speed, maximum torque output, and nominal working condition, improve the
cold start performance and low speed performance of turbocharged diesel engine, realize high specific power and low
speed torque of the engine simultaneously, and greatly reduce the smoke intensity and improve the economy.
Meanwhile, the VNT can reduce the turbine lag, improve the engine response, and enhance the braking capability and
safety.
Adjustment theory for variable nozzle turbocharger (VNT): There are two passages, one is in constant section and one
is in variable section. If the pressure is same for two passages, the speed of airflow passing through the variable
65

section passage is greatly higher than that passing through the constant section passage.
Small passage High speed

Idling of section Large passage running of engine
engine section Rotation direction of adjustment ring
66

Section IX EGR System

The exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) introduces one small portion of exhaust gas from the exhaust pipe into the intake
pipe that is mixed with the fresh intake air to artificially increase the exhaust amount in the fresh intake air and thus
reduce the combustion temperature of engine and reduce the formation of NOx.
z The NOx is increased following the increasing of engine load and the EGR ratio shall increase accordingly.
z The EGR is not be performed when the engine coolant temperature is low;
z The EGR is not performed under idling or low load, as the NOx emission is not high in such case.
z The EGR is not performed under full load or acceleration;
z The water-cooled EGR further reduces the temperature of exhaust gas entering into the cylinder and further
reduces the emission of NOx.
67

Section X Exhaust System

The exhaust pipe is composed of four exhaust manifolds leading to the exhaust master pipe and one manifold leading
to the exhaust gas chamber of EGR valve. During the operation, the exhaust gas from the combustion chamber is
introduced into the EGR valve by the manifold leading to the exhaust gas chamber of EGR valve through the EGR
passage in the cylinder head. Under the control of the EGR valve, the exhaust gas is mixed with fresh air and enters
into the combustion chamber to realize exhaust gas recirculation and reduce the emission.
4DA1-2C diesel engine real-time monitors the pressure drop of the exhaust gas post-treatment unit to determine
whether the post-treatment system is working normally. Via two pressure ports on the sensor, the pressure on two
sides of the exhaust gas post-treatment unit is introduced. The sensor converts the measurement into voltage value and
feeds back to the control unit, which can guarantee the sufficient oxidization of grains and prevent the blockage of
catalytic converter.
68

Chapter III Working Principle of Engine Control and Actuator Units
Section I Overview of Diesel Common Rail System

Diesel common rail injection system
Fuel pressure sensor

Cut-off valve
High pressure (optional) Distribution
pump pipe
Pressure
regulation valve
Fuel temperature Fuel delivery pump

Other sensors
sensor
Accelerator
pedal
Fuel-water Fuel injector
t Crankshaft
position
sensor
Camshaft position
Fuel tank High pressure
sensor
Low pressure
The electronically controlled high pressure common rail system means one fuel supply mode in which the generation
of injection pressure and fuel injection are completely separated in the closed-loop system composed of high pressure
fuel pump, pressure sensor, and ECU. The high pressure fuel pump generates high pressure fuel and conveys to the
common rail pipe to realize precise control of fuel pressure within the common rail pipe. This fuel injection system
can ensure that the fuel injection pressure will not vary following the variation of the engine speed and thus relieve the
defect of traditional diesel engines. Instead of the common pulse theory, this system adopts the pressure-time
measuring theory and combines the high pressure common rail with the control of fuel injection solenoid valves of all
cylinders, in which the last pulse of the control unit introduces the injection signal into the solenoid valve to trigger
one injection cycle and the injection amount is controlled by the accumulated pressure and the open duration of the
injector. The injection pressure of EDC17 control system adopted by this engine is up to 1,600bar.
The electronically controlled common rail fuel injection technology of diesel engine integrates the computer control
technology, modern sensing and measuring technology, and advanced fuel injection mechanism. The main
characteristic of this technology is as below: The main parameters (including speed, torque, power, oil temperature, oil
pressure, water temperature, and turbocharger pressure of the diesel engine) under actual working conditions of the
diesel engine are measured by modern sensing and measuring technology and transmitted to the ECU and the ECU
compares these measurements with the pre-inputted optimized running MAPs of the diesel engine and processes and
calculates out the best values to control the pressure of common rail pipe and the open moment, duration, and
injection frequency of the high speed solenoid valves of the fuel injectors, in order to realize the best working state of
the diesel engine. The electric pulses generated by the ECU trigger the solenoid valves of the fuel injector as per
specified sequence to determine the open and close moments of each fuel injection cycle of the engine and flexibly
control the fuel injection speed and frequency. The common rail fuel injection mechanism forms directly or indirectly
constant high pressure fuel and distributes to each fuel injector. The electronically controlled common rail fuel
injection technology of the diesel engine can guarantee that the diesel engine achieves the best air-combustion ratio
and excellent atomization.
69

The high pressure common rail system is composed of fuel tank, diesel filter, high pressure fuel pump, common rail
pipe, electronically controlled fuel injector, high pressure fuel pipe, and low pressure fuel return pipeline.
z It adopts direct injection combustion chamber system and common rail fuel supply system to realize high
performance, clean emission, low noise, and low vibration;
z Single camshaft and four-valve technology brings about higher air charging efficiency and improves the
combustion;
z High power per liter design and compact design;
z Variable nozzle turbocharger (VNT) control;
z Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR);
z Electronic throttle control.
70

Section II Working Principle of Low Pressure Fuel Line System

I. Composition of low pressure fuel line:
The low pressure fuel line is functioned to supply sufficient fuel to the
high pressure fuel line and is composed of:
z Fuel tank (including filter screen)
z Fuel filter (including manual fuel delivery pump)
z Low pressure fuel delivery pump
z Other low pressure fuel hoses
II. Fuel tank

The fuel tank shall be fabricated from anti-corrosion material and shall maintain 0.3bar pressure under all working
conditions and be free of fuel leakage under the application of the doubled working pressure. The fuel tank shall also
set up appropriate opening or safety valve or adopt appropriate measures to relieve the excessive pressure whenever
it's needed. When the motor vehicle is subject to slight vibration, makes turns or travels or parks on a slope, the fuel in
the fuel tank shall not leak from the fuel tank cap or the pressure balancing device.
III. Fuel filter (including manual fuel delivery pump)

Sunray long-wheelbase model adopts two-stage diesel filter, including
one primary filter and one fine filter. Compared with traditional diesel
engines, it requires cleaner fuel supply. The impurities contained in
the fuel will damage the fuel system including the high pressure pump,
high pressure common rail, and fuel injector. The fuel filter purifies
the fuel inputting into the high pressure fuel pump, in order to help the
normal functioning of the high pressure pump. The contaminant,
impurity, and particle in the fuel will lead to the damage of pump units,
fuel supply valve, and fuel injector. Therefore, the use of fuel filter
capable of meeting the fuel injector requirements becomes the
premise for normal working of the engine and guarantee of service life.
The water content in the diesel may exist in non-free radical form
(emulsified fuel) or radical form (such as water condensate generated
due to variation of temperature). If entering into the fuel injection
system, this water content will lead to damage of parts due to corrosion.
Similar to other fuel injection systems, common rail system requires
the fuel filter with water collection chamber as well as the automatic
water content alarm. When the alarm lamp lights up, make sure to
drain the water from the water collection chamber.
The fuel filter is composed of fuel temperature sensor, fuel heater,
manual fuel pump, fuel-water separator, and water level sensor.
The fuel leakage during traveling or the air ingress into fuel pipeline
after replacement of fuel filter may lead to start failure or poor
functioning of the engine. Therefore, make sure to bleed the air from
the low pressure fuel pipeline after the installation of manual fuel
delivery pump. Installed on the fuel filter, the manual fuel delivery
pump is the device for supplying fuel to the fuel filter and the device
required to guarantee the first start of the engine. In event of the
following conditions, press the manual fuel delivery pump, till the
manual fuel delivery pump can’t be further pressed, before starting the
71

engine.
z After the fuel is used up.
z After the water drainage from the fuel-water separator.
z After the replacement of fuel filter
Replacement of fuel filter
1. Replacement interval of fuel filter: Once every 7,000km;

2. Water separation interval: Once every 5,000Km;
3. It’s prohibited to use any used fuel filter.
IV. Low pressure fuel delivery pump

The low pressure fuel delivery pump is one gear pump and is stalled
at the rear end within the high pressure pump housing. The low
pressure fuel delivery pump continually supplies the required fuel
amount to the high pressure pump from the fuel tank.
The fuel delivery pump is functioned to supply sufficient fuel
supply to the high pressure pump under following conditions:
(1) Under any working condition;
(2) Under necessary pressure;
(3) Throughout the entire service life.
The low pressure fuel delivery pump is one mechanical gear pump and is installed at the rear end of high pressure
pump and driven by the high pressure pump shaft. Its main parts are two gears rotating in opposite direction. While
rotating, two gears engages to vacuumize the fuel into the chamber formed between gears and pump walls and then
conveys to the outlet (pressure end). The closing line of the rotating gears realizes the sealing between vacuumization
end and pressure end of the pump and prevents the fuel backflow.
The fuel supply amount of the gear pump is approximately in proportion to the engine speed. This is why the fuel
supply amount of the gear pump can be reduced by means of the throttle valve at the inlet end or can be restrained by
means of the relief valve at the outlet end.
No maintenance is required for the gear pump. Charge the fuel from the fuel system before the first start. When the
fuel in the fuel tank is used up, operate the manual fuel delivery pump to charge fully the low pressure fuel line.
V. Fuel pipeline
Besides the steel pipe, the low pressure fuel line can also adopt flame-retardant braided and armored fuel hose. The
fuel pipes shall be arranged in such manner to prevent the mechanical damage and that the fuel dripped or evaporated
will not concentrate nor burn.
In event of vehicle distortion, engine displacement, or similar conditions, the functions of the fuel pipeline shall not be
impaired. All fuel delivery pipelines shall have the radiation shield measures.
72

VI. Common malfunctions and troubleshooting for low pressure fuel line
No. Malfunction Troubleshooting Remarks
1 Weak pumping of Retighten the connectors (temperature The tightening torque for connectors is
fuel sensor, plug, and pile connector), in 30-35N.m. Higher torque will lead to
order to prevent the pumping failure thread failure.
due to ingress of air. If ineffective,
replace the manual pump.
2 Fuel leakage of air Check the screw hole of manual pump The tightening torque is 7~9N.m. Higher
bleeding screw for presence of thread failure. If yes, torque will lead to thread failure. While
replace the transitional thread insert assembling the transitional thread insert,
and air bleeding screw and washer. add an appropriate amount of thread sealant
onto the thread. Prevent the ingress of
sealant into the manual pump.
3 Fuel leakage of Replace the manual pump The knocking or improper use will lead to
manual pump fuel leakage of manual pump
4 Slow acceleration The filter is blocked. Replace the filter. The blockage of fuel filter will increase the
and difficult start If the malfunction still occurs after pressure difference.
due to difficult replacement of fuel filter, check other
fuel supply engine parts.
5 Failure for timely Make sure to drain the water when the If the water is not drained, the water
water drainage water level sensor indicator lamp lights content in fuel will increase to impair the
up. engine performance.
6 Light-up failure of 1. Water level sensor is damaged.

water level sensor 2. Indicator lamp is damaged.
indicator lamp at
3. Circuit malfunction
engine start
7 Working failure of 1. The heater is damaged.
heater 2. Circuit malfunction
3. Low battery current
4. The heater is punctured due to high
current
8 Working failure of Damage o temperature sensor
temperature Circuit malfunction
sensor
73

Section III Working Theory of High Pressure Fuel Line

I. High pressure fuel line parts
The high pressure fuel line generates and accumulates
1. Drive shaft
sufficient fuel pressure required for the fuel injectors. 2. Eccentric cam
The parts include: High pressure pump, fuel rail, high 3. Plunger pump
pressure fuel pipe, and fuel injector. 4. Fuel suction valve
5. Fuel outlet valve
II. High pressure pump 6. Fuel inlet
The high pressure pump compresses the fuel to a system

pressure of up to 1,450bar and then the fuel is
transmitted to the tubular high pressure fuel accumulator
(rail) via the high pressure pipe.
The high pressure pump is the interface between low pressure stage and high pressure stage. Under all working
conditions, it can reliably supply sufficient high pressure fuel throughout the entire service life of the vehicle,
including supplying addition fuel required for rapid start and the
rapid establishment of pressure in the common rail. The high
pressure pump continually generates the system pressure required
for the high pressure accumulator (rail). Therefore, it means that,
compared with traditional system, it’s unnecessary to compress the
fuel for each individual injection cycle.
The fuel is compressed by three plunger pumps arranged radially at
spacing of 120º from each other. As each rotation turn can generate
three compression strokes and only generate low peak drive torque,
the drive unit of the pump maintains uniform force application. As
far as 16Nm torque is concerned, this torque is only 1/9 of the
torque required for driving similar distribution pump. This means
that, compared with traditional fuel injection systems, the common rail generates lower load onto the drive unit of the
pump. The raising power of the drive pump is in proportion to the preset pressure of common rail and the speed of the
fuel pump (fuel delivery amount).
Working mode:
Through one water separator, the fuel delivery pump pumps out the fuel from the fuel tank and the fuel enters into the
lubricating and cooling lines of high pressure pump via the fuel inlet. The drive shaft with eccentric wheel drives three
pump plungers for upward and downward movements along with the profile of the cam. The pump plungers move
downward under the application of the fuel delivery pressure (fuel suction stroke). When the plungers overpass the
bottom dead center, the fuel inlet valve is closed so that the fuel in the pump chamber will not leak out. In such case,
the fuel is compressed so that the fuel pressure exceeds the fuel delivery pressure of the fuel delivery pump. In such
case, once the pressure established exceeds the pressure in the common rail, the fuel outlet valve opens so that the fuel
enters into the high pressure line. The pump plungers will continue the fuel supply, till the top dead center is reached
(fuel delivery stroke). Then the pressure drops and the fuel outlet valve closes. The residual fuel is pressure relieved:
The pump plungers move downward. When the pressure in the pump chamber is less than the fuel delivery pressure,
the fuel inlet valve re-opens and the pumping process is started again.
III. Fuel rail (Common rail)

The high pressure accumulator (rail) stores the high pressure fuel and at the same time restrains the pressure variation
generated during the fuel supply and fuel injection of the high pressure pump. The high pressure accumulator is
shared by all cylinders and therefore is referred to as “common rail”. Even when a great amount of fuel is drained, the
common rail can maintain its internal pressure basically unchanged. Therefore it maintains the constant fuel injection
pressure of the fuel injector.
74

The space of the common rail is always filled with high
pressure fuel. It utilizes the fuel compressed due to high
pressure to achieve the accumulator effect. When the fuel is
departed from the common rail for injection, the pressure in the
high pressure accumulator is basically constant. At the same
time, the pressure variation generated by the pulsed fuel supply
of high pressure pump is balanced and the pressure information
is provided to the ECU.
IV. High pressure fuel pipe

The high pressure fuel pipe is used to convey the high pressure
fuel and is made of steel to endure the intermittent high
frequency pressure variation under the maximum system pressure of the engine. The fuel pipe is generally 6mm in
outside diameter and 2.4mm in inside diameter. All high pressure fuel pipes between fuel rail and fuel injectors are
same in length, which means that the distances between the fuel rail and all fuel injectors are the same and the bending
points compensate the corresponding length differences.
IV. Fuel injector

The fuel injectors are the core parts of the high pressure common rail and are installed on the high pressure common
rail. In accordance with the directive of the ECU, the fuel
injectors spray high pressure well-atomized fuel into the
combustion chamber at specified moment and specified
pressure for a specified duration.
The fuel injector is mainly composed of fuel injector
nozzle, hydraulic servo unit, and solenoid valve. When
the coil control valve acquires control signal through the
ECU, the control valve will depart from its seat ring so
that the fuel pressure in the needle valve control chamber
drops rapidly. As the pressure at the injector nozzle holder
is maintained at similar pressure with common rail, the
needle valve opens and the injection starts. When the
current of the solenoid control valve drops to zero, as the
control valve returns to the seat cushion under the
application of coil spring, the pressure of the needle
control chamber will increase to lightly higher than he
pressure at the injector holder so that the needle valve
closes the injector and the injection stops. The sealing
copper washer beneath the fuel injector must be replaced
once the fuel injector is disassembled or loosened. During
the disassembly, use the special tools recommended or
designated by JAC Multifunctional Commercial Vehicle
Company. Note: Never disassemble the fuel injector by
self in any case. All maintenances and services of the fuel
injector body shall be fulfilled by Bosch relevant service
stations or JAC designated service stations.
75

Section IV Electronic Control Unit of High Pressure Common Rail System

The EDC17 system of HFC4DA1-2C engine belongs to electronically controlled diesel injection system and
incorporates the dynamic fuel injection timing system and air and fuel management system. It adopts the BOSCH
diesel high pressure common rail system, with the rail pressure up to 1,600bar, and applies new technologies
including VNT, electronically controlled EGR, and POC pressure difference control to meet the Euro-IV emission
standard, with potential compliance for Euro-V emission standard.
The characteristics of this system is one single ECU, one set of fuel injection control system, and one set of sensor
system. It’s functioned to inject the fuel into the engine cylinder, with accurate injection timing and fuel amount, so
that the fuel is mixed with air in the cylinder to achieve best combustion efficiency.
The electronic control unit of the diesel common rail system is mainly composed of three parts: sensor, ECU, and
actuator.
① Sensor part: The sensors and rated value transmitters collecting the running state and rated values of the engine
and complete vehicle, which convert various types of physical parameters into electric signals.
② ECU: It’s functioned to process the information as per definite mathematic calculation method and issue the
electric signals of the directives.
③ Actuator: It’s functioned to convert the electric signals of the directives issued by the ECU into mechanical
parameters.
I. Sensor part
1. Crankshaft position sensor
1) Overview
z The crankshaft position sensor is one electromagnetic sensor.
z The position of piston in the combustion chamber determines
the start moment of fuel injection. As the engine piston is
connected with crankshaft through connecting rod, the
crankshaft position sensor can provide all data information for
the piston position and the engine speed determines the
revolution per minute of the crankshaft.
z Generation of signal: The crankshaft is connected with one
60-tooth ferromagnetic actuation gear. The actuation gear Crankshaft speed sensor
actually in use has two teeth missing. This large gap 1. Permanent magnet 2. Sensor housing
3. Engine outer cap 4. Soft iron core
corresponds to one specified crankshaft position of 1st cylinder. 5. Coil 6. Sensing gear
The crankshaft position sensor records the tooth sequence of
the actuation gear. It’s composed of one permanent magnet and
soft iron core with copper coil. The magnetic flux in the sensor
varies along with the gear and gap passing through and
generates one sine AC voltage, of which the amplitude rapidly
increases following the speed of the engine (crankshaft). It can
achieve sufficient amplitude even when the speed is at 50r/min.
z The crankshaft position sensor is situated on the rear clutch
housing of the engine;
z Wiring terminals: 1. Signal terminal of crankshaft position
sensor; 2. Grounding terminal of crankshaft position sensor;
76

z Resistance: 860 Ohm;
z Clearance between sensor and top of signal gear: 0.5~1.2mm.
2) Working Principle
The electromagnetic sensor simulates the AC signal generator, namely such sensor generates AC signal, and is
generally composed of a magnet wound by coil and two wiring terminals. These two coil terminals are the output
terminals of the sensor. When the steel annular gear (sometimes referred to as magnetic resistance gear or target gear
or signal gear) rotates to pass through this sensor, the magnetic flux of the magnet passing through the coil varies at
certain level and the induction voltage is generated in the coil.
The same tooth profiles of the signal gear will generate continual pulses in same form. The pulses have consistent
form amplitudes (peak-peak voltages) and are in proportion to the speed of crankshaft signal gear. The frequency of
the output signal is based on the rotation speed of the magnetic resistance gear and the air gap between sensor
magnetic pole and the magnetic resistance gear is of great influence over the amplitude of the sensor signal (Attention
shall be paid to the backlash during the installation). During the production, removing the synchronous pulse
generated by one tooth or two really close teeth from the sensor can determine the signal of top dead center, which
will lead to the frequency variation of output signal. When the number of teeth is reduced, the voltage output
amplitude will vary greatly. This pulse signal is transmitted to the ECU, based on which the ECU controls the fuel
injection of the engine.
As the electromagnetic crankshaft position sensor is weak in signal and sensitive and is vulnerable to the
electromagnetic interference by the electric devices such as car telephone, fan, and starter, it will lead to malfunction
of traveling performance or generate trouble code. To prevent the occurrence of such phenomenon, two signal wires of
the crankshaft position sensor adopt the twisted-pair structure in the manufacturing of engine harness, which can
effectively guard the signal of crankshaft position sensor against the external signals and reduce the production cost.
3) Measurement analysis:
Signal
Speed sensor
Grounding
Shielding wire
1 – Signal -; 2 – Signal +; Use a multimeter to measure the resistances for two signal terminals of the crankshaft
position sensor. The resistance measurement shall be 860 Ohm.
4) Malfunction Mode:
z Short-circuit or open-circuit of sensor;
z Distorted, error, and suspicious signal;
z Unstable sensor signal;
z Sensor signal is out of range.
The crankshaft position and speed sensor is the main sensor of the engine electronic control system. In event of the
malfunction of crankshaft position and speed sensor, the engine can’t start. If the malfunction occurs after the start of
the engine, the engine will stop immediately.
5) Troubleshooting
77

Use diagnosis instrument to check the trouble code and determine the
malfunction position. Mainly check whether the sensor is installed in place and
whether the clearance is normal, check the sensor circuit whether there is
short-circuit or open-circuit to grounding wire, check whether there is
short-circuit or open-circuit to the power supply, and check whether the circuit
is consistent with the given pin definition.
Notice: Take caution to install the sensor and make sure not to add any washer,
or it may lead to signal distortion of sensor.
2. Camshaft position sensor
1) Overview
z The camshaft position sensor is one Hall sensor.
z The camshaft position sensor utilizes the Hall effect to determine the camshaft position. One steel actuation gear
rotates along with the camshaft, the Hall effect integrated circuit is installed between actuation gear and
permanent magnet, and the permanent magnet generates a magnetic field perpendicular to the Hall unit. If one
tooth of actuation gear passes through the current-carrying linear sensor unit (semiconductor chip), it changes the
strength of magnetic field perpendicular to the Hall unit. In such case, the electron driven by the voltage in major
axis direction is offset in the direction perpendicular to the current direction to generate one temporary signal
voltage (Hall voltage) so that the calculation circuit integrated with the sensor Hall integrated circuit will process
the signal and output as square wave signal.
z The camshaft position sensor is installed on the cylinder head shield.
z Wiring terminals: 1. +5V power supply, 2. Signal output, 3. Grounding;
z The clearance between sensing end of sensor and the signal gear of camshaft: 0.5~1.5mm. Required torque:
8±0.5Nm
The camshaft controls the intake and exhaust valves of the engine, of which the speed is only half of the crankshaft
speed. When the piston moves towards the top dead center, the camshaft position determines whether the piston is at
compression stroke or the exhaust stroke and then judges the fuel injection or not. If the engine is under start stage,
such data information can’t be acquired from the crankshaft position. On the other hand, during the normal working
of the engine, the data information generated by the crankshaft sensor is enough to determine the engine state. In
other words, while the vehicle is traveling, even the camshaft sensor is failed, the ECU can still receive the data
information of engine working state from the crankshaft sensor.
The camshaft sensor utilizes Hall effect to determine the camshaft position. One steel toothed part is fixed on the
camshaft and rotates along with the camshaft. When this toothed part passes through the semiconductor chip of the
camshaft sensor, its magnetic field will offset the electron of the semiconductor chip towards the current direction.
Therefore, one temporary voltage signal (Hall voltage) is generated to remind ECU that the 1st cylinder enters into the
compression stroke.
3) Measurement analysis
Wiring terminals: 1 - +5V, 2 – Signal +, 3 – Grounding
Power supply terminal

Camshaft
position Signal terminal
sensor
Grounding terminal
78

4) Malfunction Mode
z Distorted, error, and suspicious signal;
5) Troubleshooting
Use diagnosis instrument to check the trouble code and determine the malfunction position. Mainly check whether the
sensor is installed in place and whether the clearance is normal, check the sensor circuit whether there is short-circuit
or open-circuit to grounding wire, check whether there is short-circuit or open-circuit to the power supply, and check
whether the circuit is consistent with the given pin definition.
3. Pressure difference sensor
1) Overview
z The pressure difference sensor is functioned to real-time monitor the pressure drop of the POC and determine
whether the after-treatment system is working normally. The pressure at two ends of the POC is introduced via
two pressure ports of the sensor and then the sensor converts the measurement into voltage value and feeds back
to control unit. This can not only guarantee the sufficient oxidization of grains, but also prevent the blockage of
catalytic converter.
z The pressure difference sensor and the POC are connected via stainless steel pipe and high temperature rubber
hose. The pressure is introduced via stainless steel pipe, which is at least 250mm in length, from two sides of
POC and then is led to the pressure difference sensor via high temperature rubber hose, which is capable of
enduring more than 150ºC.
79

3) Test analysis
Wiring terminals: 1 - +5V, 2 – Signal +, 3 – Grounding
5V power supply
Pressure Pressure difference signal
difference Earthing
sensor
3. Turbocharger pressure sensor
1) Overview
The turbocharger pressure sensor is connected to the
intake pipe and is functioned to measure the absolute
pressure of the intake pipe. This sensor is composed of
one pressure unit with two sensing units and one
evaluation circuit chamber. The sensing units and
evaluation circuit are mounted on common ceramic
substrate. Each sensing unit incorporates one horn-shaped
diaphragm embodying the benchmark capacity for
determination of internal pressure. The diaphragm moves
towards large or small open extent as a function of
charging pressure. The pressure sensitive resistor is
mounted on the diaphragm surface, of which the resistance
varies under the application of pressure. These resistors are
connected to form a resistor bridge. Therefore, any
movement of the diaphragm will change the balance of
resistor bridge, namely the voltage of the resistor bridge is
one measurement of turbocharger pressure. The evaluation
circuit is functioned to amplify the bridge voltage and
compensate the linear variation of temperature influence
and pressure characteristic. The output signal of evaluation
circuit is transmitted to ECU and then the turbocharger
pressure is obtained by means of the programming
characteristic curve.
z The temperature sensor incorporates one negative
temperature coefficient (NTC) thermistor that is
connected in the voltage division circuit of 5V power
supply.
z The voltage drop on the resistor is inputted to the ECU via one analog and one digital converters (ADC), which
is one measurement for evaluating the temperature. The ECU micro-processor embodies one characteristic curve,
which defines the temperature as a function of given voltage.
z It’s installed on the pressure stabilizing chamber of intake manifold and take the priority to measure the pressure.
z Wiring terminals: 1 – Grounding, 2 – Temperature signal, 3 – +5V, 4 – Pressure signal.
The turbocharger pressure sensor is connected in the intake pipe and is capable of measuring the absolute pressure of
intake pipe at 0.5~3bar. This sensor is composed of one pressure unit with two sensing units and one evaluation circuit
chamber. The sensing units and evaluation circuit are mounted on common ceramic substrate. Each sensing unit
incorporates one horn-shaped diaphragm embodying the benchmark capacity for determination of internal pressure.
The diaphragm moves towards large or small open extent as a function of charging pressure. The pressure sensitive
80

resistor is mounted on the diaphragm surface, of which the resistance varies under the application of pressure. These
resistors are connected to form a resistor bridge. Therefore, any movement of the diaphragm will change the balance
of resistor bridge, namely the voltage of the resistor bridge is one measurement of turbocharger pressure. The
evaluation circuit is functioned to amplify the bridge voltage and compensate the linear variation of temperature
influence and pressure characteristic. The output signal of evaluation circuit is transmitted to ECU and then the
turbocharger pressure is obtained by means of the programming characteristic curve.
The voltage drop on the resistor is inputted to the ECU via one analog and one digital converters (ADC), which is one
measurement for evaluating the temperature. The ECU micro-processor embodies one characteristic curve, which
defines the temperature as a function of given voltage.
Wiring terminals: 1 – Grounding, 2 – Temperature signal, 3 – +5V, 4 – Pressure signal.
5V power supply
Turbocharger pressure
Intake pressure signal
and temperature
Grounding
sensor
Intake temperature signal
4) Malfunction Mode
The light-up of the engine malfunction indicator lamp indicates the presence of malfunction in the engine system and
it’s necessary to diagnose with diagnosis instrument. Use Sunray special diagnosis instrument to communicate with
ECU of electronic injection system and read out the malfunction data in the ECU.
5) Troubleshooting
Use Sunray special diagnosis instrument to check the trouble code and determine whether there is short-circuit or
open-circuit between circuit of malfunction position and the grounding wire, whether there is short-circuit or
open-circuit to power supply, and whether the circuit is consistent with the given pin definition.
4. Thermal diaphragm air flowmeter

1) Overview
z The thermal diaphragm airflow sensor is one air mass sensor fitted with
logic output. To obtain the air flow, the sensor diaphragm on the sensor is
heated by the heating resistor installed in the middle and the temperature
distribution on the diaphragm is measured by the temperature resistors
installed paralleling with the heating resistor. The air flow passing through
the sensor changes the temperature distribution on the diaphragm to cause
resistance difference between two temperature resistors. The resistance
difference depends on the direction and flow rate of the airflow so that the
airflow sensor has high requirements over the flow rate and direction of the
airflow. The sensor manufactured by micro-machinery features small size,
low thermal capacity, and <15ms response time.
z The sensor is internally fitted with intake temperature sensor to measure the
intake temperature.
z The air flowmeter is installed at the port of the air cleaner.
z Wiring terminals: 1. +12V power supply; 2. Grounding; 3. Air temperature signal; 4. Airflow rate signal.
81

This sensor is composed of two sensors, namely airflow sensor and intake temperature sensor, and is installed on the
intake hose after the air cleaner. This type of sensor requires that there shall be free of air leakage from the sensor to
the engine combustion chamber, or it will lead to unstable idling of engine or even engine flameout.
The airflow sensor integrates some micro-electronic units on a ceramic substrate. When the engine is working, the
diaphragm will be heated. The intake airflow passing through the diaphragm will take away the heat and the
Wheatstone bridge integrated on the diaphragm will increase the current to supplement the heat loss, which leads to
the variation of electric signal. This signal is transmitted to the engine control unit ECU, based on which the ECU can
obtain the load variation of the engine and thus control the fuel injection pulse width.
The intake temperature sensing unit is one negative temperature coefficient (NTC) thermistor. The sensor installs two
same sensing units on two sides of the thermal diaphragm. When the intake airflow flows through the diaphragm, the
temperature of the temperature sensing unit on the front of diaphragm is slightly lower than that of temperature
sensing unit on the rear. Based on this characteristic, the ECU can judge the direction of airflow.
Voltage output V
Common rail
pressure
Wiring terminals: 1. +12V power supply; 2. Grounding; 3. Air temperature signal; 4. Airflow rate signal.
Air flowmeter
4) Malfunction Mode
The subsequent electronic device of the air flowmeter in the ECU can judge the malfunctions such as open-circuit or
short-circuit of internal circuit and connecting circuit of air flowmeter and the damage of sensor. Upon the detection
that the output signal of the sensor is out of its output characteristic curve, the ECU will judge as malfunction of
sensor.
5) Troubleshooting
When the airflow sensor is failed, the engine cooling fan will run at high speed for one period after the ignition key is
turned to Off. For instance: When the airflow rate is higher than the upper limit of airflow or less than the lower limit
of airflow, the ECU will judge as malfunction of sensor (Though the intake airflow rate is less than lower limit
(closing to zero) at the start of the vehicle, the ECU can judge the start condition) and at the same time light up the
engine malfunction lamp and work under malfunction mode.
82

5. Rail pressure sensor

1) Overview
The resistance of the metal film installed on the diaphragm will change accordingly following the change of shape.
This change of shape generated by the established system pressure (approximate 1mm under 1,500bar pressure) will
change the resistance and lead to the change of voltage between two sides of 5V bridge composed of resistor units.
This voltage change range is 0~70mv (depending on the applied pressure) and is amplified to 0.5~4.5V by the
evaluation circuit.
The accurate measurement of rail pressure is of great importance to the effective working of the system. This is one of
the causes for very strict tolerance over the rail pressure sensor during the pressure measurement. Under the scope of
main working conditions, the measurement accuracy is approximately ±2% of the full scale reading.
Wiring terminals: 1. Grounding; 2. Rail pressure sensor signal; 3. +5V power supply.
It transmits one voltage signal to the ECU, depending on the fuel pressure. The rail pressure sensor must measure the
instant pressure in the fuel rail and embody sufficient accuracy and rapid response capability. The rail pressure sensor
is composed of following parts:
cIntegrated sensing unit welded onto the pressure device
d Printed circuit board (PCB) with electric evaluation circuit
sensor housing with electric connector. The fuel flows into the rail pressure sensor via one hole on the common rail
and the end of this hole is sealed by one sensor diaphragm. The fuel under high pressure reaches the sensor diaphragm
via one blind hole. One sensing unit (semiconductor unit) is arranged on this diaphragm and converts the pressure into
electric signal. This signal generated is transmitted via wire to evaluation circuit, which will amplify this signal and
transmit to the ECU.
3) Test analysis
Wiring terminals: 1 - Grounding; 2 - Rail pressure sensor signal; 3 - +5V power supply.
5V power supply
Rail
pressure Rail sensor signal
sensor
Grounding
4) Malfunction Mode
The malfunction indicator lamp lights up if the voltage is higher or less than this limit. If the voltage is out of the
normal working voltage range, but is not out of the limit, the malfunction indicator lamp will not light up.
5) Troubleshooting
The light-up of the engine malfunction indicator lamp indicates the presence of malfunction in the engine system and
it’s necessary to diagnose with diagnosis instrument. Use JAC special diagnosis instrument to communicate with ECU
of electronic injection system and read out the malfunction data in the ECU.
6. Engine coolant temperature sensor
1) Overview
z The sensor is installed on the cylinder head, closing to the water outlet. The body is made of brass to protect the
resistor unit fabricated from negative temperature coefficient (NTC) resistor;
83

z The temperature resistor of the temperature sensor is one part of the 5V Characteristic curve of temperature sensor
voltage division circuit. Two terminals of the temperature sensor is
connected with the voltage charged circuit. When the temperature
resistor of the temperature sensor changes along with the temperature,
the voltage of the voltage charged circuit changes accordingly, which
will be inputted to the analog/digital conversion circuit of ECU
interface circuit. The relationship characteristic curve between voltage
Resistance
and temperature is stored in the ECU of engine management system;
z Sunray is equipped with 3-wire water temperature sensor to save the
cost and guarantee the system unity.
Temperature
The coolant temperature sensor is used to measure the working temperature of the engine. The ECU will provide the
engine with best control scheme, depending on different temperatures.
This sensor is one negative temperature coefficient (NTC) thermistor, of which the resistance reduces following the
increasing of coolant temperature in a non-linear mode. The negative temperature coefficient thermistor is installed
within one copper heat conducting sleeve. By means of one voltage division circuit, the ECU converts the resistance
change of thermistor to one varying voltage and provides to the ECU and thus monitors the change of water
temperature (internal structure of ECU).
Signal terminal
Water Grounding
temperature
sensor To water temperature gauge
Wiring terminals: 1 – Temperature signal; 2 – Grounding
Reference values: -10℃ 8.642---10.152 kΩ
20℃2.351---2.649 kΩ
80℃0.313---0.332 kΩ
4) Malfunction Mode
Upon the detection that the water temperature signal is higher or less than the limit range, the ECU will light up the
malfunction indicator lamp.
5) Troubleshooting
Sunray is fitted with one independent coolant temperature sensor to transmit the water temperature signal to the
instrument for display of instrument water temperature alarm. If the water temperature alarm indicator lamp lights up,
stop for cooling immediately. If the water temperature alarm indicator lamp lights up frequently, drive to the
authorized service station of JAC Multifunctional Commercial Vehicle Company for service.
7. Water level sensor
1) Overview
z The fuel-water separator position sensor is functioned to measure the water content in the fuel filter;
z When the water content reaches a predefined level, the ECU will control the working of the engine. This sensor
is installed on the bottom of the fuel filter;
84

z The fuel-water separator position sensor is installed on the bottom of the fuel filter;
z Wiring terminals: 1. Water level sensor; 2. Water level signal; 3. +12V power supply.
The grain substances are high-accuracy filtered by means of the interception and absorption of the filter medium and
the water concentrated on the filter medium is Signal terminal of
separated by gravity force. The water separated fuel-water separator
is deposited in the water chamber at the lower position sensor
portion of filter housing.
The water level sensor is installed at the lower
portion of water chamber. When the water level Water level sensor of
reaches the sensing point of the sensor, the fuel-water separator
internal circuit of sensor is actuated to output
signal to the ECU. At the same time, the signal is
transmitted to the instrument to light up the
water level alarm lamp.
Wiring terminals: 1 - Water level sensor; 2 - Water level signal; 3 - +12V power supply.
4) Malfunction Mode
1) Troubleshooting
Use Sunray special diagnosis instrument to check the trouble code and determine the malfunction position. Mainly
check the circuit of sensor and determine whether there is short-circuit or open-circuit between circuit and the
grounding wire, whether there is short-circuit or open-circuit to power supply, and whether the circuit is consistent
with the given pin definition.
8. Accelerator pedal position sensor
1) Overview
Output voltage
The accelerator pedal position sensor is mounted on

the accelerator pedal.
The accelerator pedal position sensor and the
accelerator pedal form one integral part. The
accelerator pedal position sensor internally
incorporates two same potentiometer sensors to
provide the driver’s driving demand signal to the ECU.
This process is completely same with the presently
mechanical pedal in terms of operation, in order to Full close Full open
adapt to the years of driving habit of the driver. Two Open angle of accelerator pedal
same sensors provide the accelerator signal to the
ECU respectively, which guarantees more safety and reliability of the system.
Wiring terminals: 1. +5V; 2. +5V; 3. Grounding of accelerator pedal 1; 4. Signal of accelerator pedal 1; 5. Grounding
of accelerator pedal 2; 6. Signal of accelerator pedal 2.
85

2）Working Principle
The accelerator pedal position sensor internally adopts the damping structure and internally incorporates two same
potentiometer sensors. The signal pointers of the sensors are coaxial with the pedal. When the accelerator pedal is
stepped down, the potentiometer pointer will rotate coaxially with the pedal and, following the sliding of the
potentiometer pointer, the signal terminals output different voltage or resistance signal. Two movable potentiometer
sensors with different resistances within the position sensor output different resistances. However, there is a defined
relationship between the resistances outputted by two sensors. The ECU adopts the voltage signals, instead of the
resistance signals of the sensor, in order to prevent the signal distortion caused by the voltage fluctuation of the
alternator. A comparison circuit is adopted to compare the signal voltage outputted by the sensor with the standard
voltage and the ECU adopts the comparison result to judge the movement amplitude of the pedal. The ECU compares
the signals inputted by the sensor 1 and sensor 2 and considers other sensors (engine speed, load, etc.) to jointly judge
the trueness of the signals outputted by the sensors. If the signal distortion is judged in any of two sensors, the ECU
controls the engine to actuate malfunction mode and adopt restrained driving measures.
The accelerator pedal position sensor provides one signal voltage varying along with the accelerator pedal position.
The engine control unit (ECU) will provide independent 5V reference voltage and low level reference voltage to each
accelerator pedal position sensor. When the accelerator pedal is stepped down, the signal voltage of the accelerator
pedal position sensor 1 is increased, namely from approximate 0.7V at the free position to above 4V at the fully
stepped down position. When the accelerator pedal is stepped down, the signal voltage of the accelerator pedal
position sensor 2 is increased, namely from approximate 0.3V at the free position to above 2V at the fully stepped
down position. Two data monitor mutually via control system.
Wiring terminals: 1 - +5V; 2 - +5V; 3 - Grounding of accelerator pedal 1; 4 - Signal of accelerator pedal 1; 5 -
Grounding of accelerator pedal 2; 6 - Signal of
accelerator pedal 2.
Power supply of sensor 1
Working voltage of sensor: 5V
Signal 1
Malfunction Mode
Accelerator Grounding of sensor 1
Short-circuit or open-circuit of sensor 1; pedal
module Power supply of sensor 2
Short-circuit or open-circuit of sensor 2;
Signal 2
Unstable sensor signal;
Grounding of sensor 2
Sensor signal is out of range.
4) Troubleshooting
Characteristic of sensor internal structure: Two potentiometer sensors within the sensor adopt independent power
supply and independent grounding wire, which can guarantee the system safety. When one sensor is damaged, another
sensor can still work. However, the engine system has already actuated the malfunction mode in such case and the
electronic control system will adopt the restrained driving measures.
9. Vehicle speed sensor
1) Overview
The vehicle speed sensor is located at the rear portion of the transmission and is mainly functioned to provide speed
signal to the engine control unit and instruments.
86

2）Working Principle
The signal of vehicle speed sensor provides vehicle speed signal to the ECU, based on which the ECU calculates the
vehicle speed. It’s internally composed of one Hall speed sensor. Please refer to the camshaft position sensor for the
working principle.
3）Measurement analysis
Input signal
of vehicle
speed sensor
10. Clutch switch

1) Overview
The clutch switch is located on the upper portion of the clutch pedal and is mainly functioned for cruise control and
engine torque smoothness control.
The clutch switch is installed at the clutch pedal and transmits the operation signal of clutch pedal to the engine ECU.
Its inside is one two-pin contact switch. When the clutch pedal is stepped down, the lower central position of the
clutch switch springs out. In such case, two pins of the clutch switch are connected. When the clutch pedal is released,
two pins of the clutch switch are disconnected. Therefore, the engine can learn the operation state of the driver by
measuring the electric level (high or low) of the clutch switch signal wire.
4) Malfunction Mode
Short-circuit or open-circuit of sensor;
Unstable sensor signal;
Sensor signal is out of range.
5) Troubleshooting
87

11.Dual brake switch
1) Overview
The dual brake switch is located on the upper portion of the brake pedal and internally incorporates two independent
switches.
The brake switch monitors the action of the brake pedal and transmits the signal measured to the engine ECU. The
brake switch is equipped with two switching mechanisms, which are the main and secondary units of the brake switch.
When the signals from both units are inputted, the engine ECU will judge as normal braking signal. These switching
signals are related to the accelerator pedal and are used to control the fuel amount during the braking. This means that
the operation of accelerator pedal will not lead to malfunction when the brake pedal is stepped down, but the operation
of accelerator pedal will reduce the fuel amount when the brake pedal is stepped down.
12. A/C switch
1) Overview
The A/C switch is located on the A/C control panel and is mainly functioned to transmit actuation directive of A/C
compressor to the engine control unit.
2). Working Principle

A/C request is the input signal that the driver requests the working of A/C and controls the working of A/C relay as
well as the speed promotion of the engine.
Low pressure A/C switch

High pressure
z Short-circuit or open-circuit of signal circuit;
z Unstable signal;
z The signal is out of range.
88

5) Troubleshooting
Use Sunray special diagnosis instrument to check the
trouble code and determine the malfunction position.
Mainly check the circuit of sensor and determine whether
there is short-circuit or open-circuit between circuit and the
grounding wire, whether there is short-circuit or
open-circuit to power supply, and whether the circuit is
consistent with the given pin definition.
II. Engine control unit (ECU)

1) Overview
The engine control unit is located on the firewall on the
back of the bottom of the glove box.
The ECU has one metal housing and the sensors, actuators, and power supply are connected to the ECU via multi-pole
plug. The power supply parts for direct control of actuators are integrated in the ECU so that their heat can be
effectively expanded to the ECU housing.
Requirements for ECU are as below:
- Surrounding (ambient) temperature: -40ºC~+85ºC
- Resistance to fuel, lubricating oil, etc.
- Resistance to moisture.
- The mechanical load has high requirements of the exposure to electromagnetic compatible (EMC) signal.
The ECU is used to calculate the signal received from the external sensors and control at the allowable voltage level.
Based on these input data and stored characteristic graph, the microprocessor can calculate out the duration and
accurate moment for fuel injection and convert into time-signal curve. The specific accuracy requirement and high
dynamic response of engine require high level calculation capability.
The driver stage is actuated by means of the output signal and supplies proper power to the actuators to control the
common rail pressure and the high pressure pump units. In addition, the actuators can control the engine functions
(such as relays for exhaust gas recirculation actuator, turbocharger pressure actuator, and electronically controlled fuel
pump) and other auxiliary functions (such as fan relay, auxiliary heater relay, and electric heating plug relay, and air
conditioner). The driver stage has the short-circuit protection and the protection against damage due to current
overload. These types of malfunctions and the open-circuit will be reported to the microprocessor. The diagnosis
function of the fuel injector driver stage can identify the error signal curve occurred. In addition, one series of output
signal can be transmitted to other vehicle systems via different interfaces. Within the specific safety concept
framework, the ECU can monitor the entire injection system.
The actuation of fuel injector advances special requirements over the driver stage. Within the fuel injector, the current
from the driver stage generates one magnetic field force in the magnetic coil that applies onto the hydraulic high
pressure system. To ensure the accurate tolerance and high repeatability of the fuel injection amount, this coil must be
actuated in front of a steep current wave. This requires ECU to form high voltage.
The actuation time (fuel injection duration) can be classified by the current control circuit into start current stage and
holding stage. It must work accurately to ensure that the fuel injectors can guarantee the repeatability of fuel injection
under all working conditions. In addition, it must reduce the energy loss in the ECU and the fuel injectors.
89

Outlet
Interface A
Outlet
Interface K
Definition for ECU pins of EDC17 control system:
Terminal Terminal
Description Description
No. No.
Interface A
A01 High fuel injector of 3rd cylinder A31 Low fuel injector of 2nd cylinder
nd
A02 High fuel injector of 2 cylinder A32
A03 A33 Low fuel injector of 4th cylinder
A04 Power supply of EGR actuator A34
A05 A35 Earthing of camshaft position sensor
A06 5V power supply of rail pressure sensor A36
A07 5V power supply of absolute pressure sensor A37 High coolant temperature signal
90

Terminal Terminal
No. No.
A08 5V power supply of camshaft position sensor A38
A09 A39
A10 A40 Earthing of rail pressure sensor
A11 A41
A12 A42
A13 Signal of crankshaft position sensor A43
A14 Earthing of crankshaft position sensor A44
A15 A45
st
A16 High fuel injector of 1 cylinder A46 Low fuel injector of 3rd cylinder
A17 High fuel injector of 4th cylinder A47 Low fuel injector of 1st cylinder
A18 A48
A19 Earthing of EGR actuator A49
A20 A50 Low coolant temperature signal
A21 A51
A22 Air conditioner relay control A52 Rail pressure sensor signal
Temperature signal of absolute pressure
A23 A53
sensor
Pressure signal of absolute pressure
A24 A54
sensor
A25 A55
Shielding wire of crankshaft position
A26 A56
sensor
A27 A57 Signal of camshaft position sensor
A28 Earthing of absolute pressure sensor A58
A29 A59
A30 A60 Control of fuel metering unit
Interface K
K01 Positive pole of battery K48 Vehicle speed sensor output
K02 Negative pole of battery K49
K03 Positive pole of battery K50
K04 Negative pole of battery K51 Cruise control lamp
K05 Positive pole of battery K52 Cruise control mode
K06 Negative pole of battery K53 Cruise control mode
K07 K54 Anti-theft cable
K08 K55 Clutch switch control
K09 K56
K10 K57 Preheating feedback signal
K11 K58 Grounding of accelerator pedal sensor 2
K12 Intake temperature signal of air flowmeter K59 Pressure difference sensor signal
91

Terminal Terminal
No. No.
K13 K60 Accelerator pedal sensor signal 2
K14 K61
K15 K62
K16 K63 Earthing signal of air flowmeter
K17 K64
K18 K65
K19 Vehicle speed signal input K66 CAN communication
K20 Intake flow signal of air flowmeter K67 Grounding of accelerator pedal sensor 1
K21 Exhaust brake switch control K68
K22 Power supply 2 of accelerator pedal sensor K69 Control signal of turbocharger actuator
K23 5V power supply of EGR K70 Malfunction indicator lamp
K24 K71 OBD indicator lamp
K25 K72
K26 K73
K27 5V power supply of pressure difference sensor K74 Cruise control mode
K28 Power supply 1 of accelerator pedal sensor K75
K29 Exhaust brake relay control K76
K30 Anti-theft cable K77 Water level signal
K31 Position signal of EGR K78 Auxiliary brake switch
K32 K79
K33 K80 Earthing of pressure difference sensor
K34 K81 Accelerator pedal sensor signal 1
K35 K82
K36 K83
K37 Air conditioner switch signal K84
K38 Main brake switch K85
K39 Earthing of EGR position sensor K86
K40 Cruise control mode K87 CAN communication
K41 K88
K42 K89
K43 Engine speed signal output K90 Preheating control signal
K44 Line K diagnosis K91 Preheating indicator lamp
K45 K92
K46 Ignition switch power switch control K93
K47 Main relay control K94
4) Malfunction Mode
Unstable idling, poor acceleration, start failure, high idling, out-of-tolerance of emission, difficult start, failure of air
conditioner, control failure of fuel injector, engine flameout, etc.
Failure arising from the burnout of ECU internal parts due to electric overload of external devices; rusting of circuit
92

board due to water ingress of ECU.
5) Troubleshooting
Connect the plug and use engine data diagnosis cable to read the engine malfunction records; disconnect the plug and
check whether the ECU connecting wire is intact. Mainly check whether ECU power supply and grounding circuit are
normal, whether the external sensors are working normally, whether the output signal are reliable, and whether the
circuit is intact.
Check whether the actuators are working normally and whether their circuits are intact. Finally replace the ECU for
test.
III. Actuators
1. Fuel injector
1) Overview
The fuel injectors are located on the engine cylinder head and are mainly functioned to provide accurate fuel injection
for the engine at the correct moment.
To realize effective fuel injection start point and accurate injection amount, the common rail system adopts the special
fuel injector with hydraulic servo system and electronic control unit (solenoid valve). At the start of fuel injection
process, the fuel injector needs to adopt a relatively high current to rapidly open the solenoid valve. Till the needle
valve of the fuel injector nozzle reaches the maximum travel and the fuel injector nozzle is fully opened, the control
current is reduced to a relatively low constant current. In Fuel injector
such case, the fuel injection amount depends on the open a. Close of fuel injector (Still state) b. Open of fuel injector (Fuel
injection)
moment and the pressure in the common rail. When the 1. Fuel return pipe 2. Electric connector 3. Control unit
solenoid valve is no longer working and is closed, the fuel (electromagnetic field) 4. Rail fuel inlet (high pressure) 5. Ball
supply process is completed. valve 6. Fuel drainage hole 7. Fuel inlet hole 8. Valve control
chamber 9. Valve control plunger 10. Fuel inlet groove to
The fuel injection start moment and the fuel injection injector nozzle 11. Injector nozzle needle valve
amount are regulated by the electronically controlled fuel
injector. These fuel injectors substitute the fuel injector
assembly (injector nozzle and fuel injector body). Similar to
the fuel injector assembly of modern direct injection diesel
engine, the holders are used to install the fuel injector on the
cylinder head. In other words, it’s unnecessary to make any
large modification to the cylinder head to install the
common rail fuel injectors onto the modern direct injection
diesel engine.
Design structure
The fuel injector (figure) can be divided into several
functional blocks:
- Injector nozzle
- Hydraulic servo system
- Solenoid valve
As shown in the figure, the fuel enters into nozzle through
high pressure connecting pipe (4) and fuel inlet groove (10)
and enters into the valve control chamber (8) through fuel
inlet (7). The control chamber is connected with fuel return
pipe (1) via fuel drainage hole (6) and the fuel drainage hole
93

is opened by solenoid valve. After the fuel drainage hole is closed, the hydraulic force applied onto the valve
controlled plunger (9) exceeds the pressure on the pressure shoulder of injector nozzle needle valve (11). Therefore,
the needle valve is pushed into the needle valve seat to block the high pressure passage to the combustion chamber.
When the solenoid valve of the fuel injector is actuated, the fuel drainage hole opens. In such case, the pressure in the
control chamber drops and thus the force applied onto the plunger reduces. Once the hydraulic pressure is less than the
force applied onto the pressure shoulder of the needle valve, the injector nozzle needle valve opens and the fuel injects
into the combustion chamber via the injection hole. The cause to indirectly control the injector nozzle needle valve by
hydraulic gain system is that the solenoid valve can’t directly generate the force required to rapidly open the needle
valve. The control amount required to open the injector nozzle needle valve is not included from the actual fuel
injection amount and is conveyed to the fuel return pipe through the fuel drainage hole of the control chamber.
Besides the control amount, the loss control fuel and the leak fuel at the injector nozzle needle valve and the valve
plunger chamber are conveyed to the fuel tank via the fuel return pipe and the fuel collection pipe connecting the
relief valve.
Depending on the working condition of the engine and the pressure generated by the high pressure fuel pump, the fuel
injector can be classified to 4 working conditions:
- Close of fuel injector (due to application of high pressure)
- Open of fuel injector (start of fuel injection)
- Full open of fuel injector
- Close of fuel injector (complete of fuel injection)
These working conditions are generated by means of the pressure distribution applied onto the fuel injector parts.
When the engine is stopped and there is no pressure in the common rail, the injector nozzle spring will close the fuel
injector.
Close of fuel injector (still state):
The solenoid valve is not actuated under still state and thus the fuel injector is closed (a). When the fuel drainage hole
is closed, the valve spring will press the ball vale of armature onto the fuel return orifice. The high pressure of
common rail is formed in the valve control chamber. Afterwards, a similar pressure is formed within the injector
nozzle chamber. The pressure applied onto the end face of control plunger by the rail pressure and the injector nozzle
spring force work together against the open force applied onto the conical pressure bearing face of needle valve by
fuel to maintain the needle valve at close state.
Open of fuel injector (start of fuel injection):
While the injector nozzle is at still state, the solenoid valve is actuated by the start current to ensure rapid open (b).
The force generated by the actuated solenoid valve overcomes the spring force so that the armature opens the fuel
drainage hole. Almost at the same time, the high start current drops to the low holding current required by the electric
magnet. This is possible as the air cap of the magnetic circuit becomes really small. When the ball valve of the fuel
drainage hole opens, the fuel flows from the valve control chamber to the empty chamber above and then returns to
the fuel tank via the fuel return pipe. The fuel drainage hole makes the pressure not completely balanced so that the
pressure in the valve control chamber drops. Therefore, the pressure in the valve control chamber is less than the
pressure of the fuel rail, which is still maintained in the fuel injector chamber, and the pressure drop in the valve
control chamber reduces the force applied onto the control plunger so that the injector nozzle needle valve opens and
the fuel injection starts.
The open speed of the injector nozzle needle valve depends on the flow difference between the fuel drainage hole and
the fuel inlet hole. The control plunger reaches its top dead center and then is held by one film of fuel, which is
formed by the fuel flow between the fuel drainage hole and the fuel inlet hole. In such case, the injector nozzle
completely opens and the fuel is injected into the combustion chamber at a pressure almost equaling to the fuel
pressure in the common rail. The pressure distribution in the injector nozzle is similar to that at the open stage.
Close of fuel injector (complete of fuel injection):
When the solenoid valve is no longer actuated, the valve spring pushes down the armature so that the ball of the valve
94

closes the fuel drainage hole. The armature is of two-part design. Though the armature block is guided by the pressure
shoulder during the downward movement, it can bounce back following the return spring and thus will not apply
downward force onto the armature and the ball valve.
The close of fuel drainage hole enables the entry of fuel via fuel inlet hole into the control chamber for pressure
establishment. This pressure is equivalent to the rail pressure and applies additional force onto the end face of the
control plunger. The resultant force from this force and spring force overcomes the pressure in the injector nozzle
chamber to close the injector nozzle needle valve.
The close speed of the injector nozzle needle valve depends on the flow passing through the fuel inlet hole. Once the
injector nozzle needle valve hits its lower seat again, the fuel injection stops.
Fuel injector 1 “high”
Fuel injector 1 "Low” Cylinder 1

Fuel injector 4 "Low”
Cylinder 4

Fuel injector 3 "Low”
Cylinder 3
Fuel injector 2 "Low” Cylinder 2
4) Matching of fuel injector

The matching of fuel injector must be performed in event of any
of the following conditions:
z Replacement of fuel injector.
z Replacement of ECU
z Confusion of installation serial number before and after the
maintenance.
While performing the matching, input the matching code on the
fuel injector (as shown in the figure) in order into the diagnosis
instrument for matching.
2. EGR valve control system
EGR valve
1) Overview
z The electronically controlled EGR valve controls the
open extent of the valve by means of the positive and
reverse rotation of the DC motor and performs the
close-loop control as per the feedback signal of the
position sensor.
z To guarantee the NOx emission of the engine, the ECU
measures and calculates the EGR percentage as per the
input parameters of the engine (such as speed and intake
pressure) and the calibrated MAPs), issues control Intake manifold
assembly
signal to the EGR valve, and performs the close-loop
control via the position sensor.
z The EGR valve is installed on the intake manifold. The constant temperature of the EGR valve inlet emission
95

can't exceed 260ºC, with the peak temperature no more than 300ºC.
EGR power supply
EGR position signal

EGR passage section
EGR signal grounding
EGR control signal terminal

EGR control grounding
terminal
EGR actuator
3. Variable nozzle turbocharger (VNT) control

1) Overview
z HFC4DA1-2C adopts variable section turbocharger technology so that the turbocharger and the engine are well
matched under all working conditions to realize best engine performance.
z The blades of the VNT are connected to the control tie rod and the displacement of the control tie rod is
controlled by the vacuum pressure of the vacuum chamber on the VNT. Changing the vacuum pressure of the
vacuum chamber can change the position of VNT blades and control the flow area of the turbine. The vacuum
pressure of the vacuum chamber is controlled by VNT solenoid valve, of which one port is connected to the
vacuum chamber on the VNT, one port is connected to the vacuum pump, and another port is connected to the air.
This connector in the engine is additionally fitted with filter to prevent the ingress of contaminant (such as dust)
into the valve. The open extent of the VNT solenoid valve is regulated by the PWM wave issued by ECU and the
solenoid valve is installed on the crossbeam of the body water tank.
Turbocharger actuator
Turbocharger control signal
4. Fuel metering unit

1) Overview
The fuel metering unit is located on the high pressure fuel pump and is functioned to control the fuel amount from the
low pressure pump to the high pressure pump.
The fuel metering valve is installed at the high pressure fuel inlet of high pressure fuel pump and is functioned to
regulate the fuel supply amount and fuel pressure, of which the regulation requirement is subject to the control of
ECU. The control coil of the metering valve is closed when not electrified, which cuts off the fuel supply to the
plunger of high pressure fuel pump. The ECU changes the fuel inlet section area of metering unit by means of pulse
signal to increase or reduce the fuel supply amount.
Wiring terminals: 1 – Signal terminal; 2 – 12V voltage.
96

Fuel metering unit signal
Fuel metering unit
4) Malfunction Mode
Short-circuit or open-circuit of metering valve; damage of metering valve; contamination of metering valve.
5) Troubleshooting
check the circuit of metering valve and determine whether there is short-circuit or open-circuit between circuit and the
CP1H and CP4.x metering unit
Fuel supply to high
Fuel amount pressure pump
Full load fuel amount

Fuel amount characteristic
Idling fuel amount
Ampere
5. Preheating control unit

1) Overview
The preheating control unit is located in the engine compartment and is mainly functioned for the rapid start of engine
under cold state.
The preheating control unit is functioned to ensure effective cold start and shorten the warm-up time, which is closely
related to the exhaust emission. The preheating time is a function of coolant temperature. At the start of the engine or
during the actual running, the turn-on duration of the electric heating plug depends on one series of parameters,
including the fuel injection amount and engine speed. The control of the electric heating plug is realized by one power
relay (GCU).
The main part of the electric heating plug is the tubular heating unit. The heating unit is firmly and air-tightly installed
within the electric heating plug housing to guard against corrosion and thermal gas impact. The heating unit is one
97

helical metal wire embedded within the magnesium oxide powder (Figure). This helical metal wire is composed of
two resistors in series connection and one heating oil and one control coil are installed on the tip of the heating tube.
The heating coil maintains one resistance almost irrelevant to the temperature and the control coil is made of positive
temperature coefficient (PTC) material. In the new generation heating plug (GSK2), the rise amplitude in the
resistance of control coil is larger than common electric heating plug. With capability of rapidly reaching the
temperature required for ignition (up to 850ºC within 4s) and relatively low constant temperature, new electric heating
plug GSK features outstanding performance. Therefore, the temperature of the electric heating plug is restrained at
one critical value. Therefore, after the start of the engine, the GSKZ electric heating plug can continue to maintain
electrified for 3min. This after-combustion performance improves the noise and exhaust emission of start and
warm-up stages.
The control instrument of the electric heating plug adopts one power relay and the electric switch set to control the
electric heating plug, which control the heating time of electric heating plug and feature the protection and monitoring
functions. Thanks to its diagnosis function, higher grade of electric heating plug control instrument can identify the
malfunction of single electric heating plug and display to the driver. The control input terminal of the electric heating
plug control instrument is connected to the electronic control unit (ECU) via multi-pole plug. To prevent the voltage
drop, the series connection circuit connected to the electric heating plug adopts the threaded pin or connector.
The controlled preheating process and the start process are controlled by the electric heating plug starter switch. The
preheating process is started when the key is turned to “ON” position. When the heating control lamp goes out, the
electric heating plug reaches sufficient temperature and the start process can be conducted. In the subsequent start
process, the fuel drips injected will be atomized and get combusted in the compressed hot air so that the heat released
starts the combustion process.
The after-heating after the successful start can help the warm-up process to form one speed promotion and idle run
with no interruption and little smoke. This can reduce the combustion noise at the cold start. In event of
non-successful start, the protection circuit of the electric heating plug is turned off to prevent the excessive discharge
of the battery.
Fuse 5
To preheating
plug Power supply
Preheating relay
Preheating time feedback
Preheating control unit
Short-circuit or open-circuit of preheating control unit;
Damage of preheating control unit;
5) Troubleshooting:
Use special diagnosis instrument to check the trouble code and determine the malfunction position. Mainly check the
circuit of preheating control unit and determine whether there is short-circuit or open-circuit between circuit and the
98

6. Malfunction indicator lamp
1) Overview
The malfunction indicator lamp is located on the instrument. In event of malfunction of engine control system units,
the engine malfunction indicator lamp will light up to
remind the driver for checking and service by the service
station as soon as possible.
The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) is located on the
instrument panel and is directly powered by the voltage of
battery. The engine control unit (ECU) lights up the
malfunction indicator lamp by grounding the control circuit
of malfunction indicator lamp. When the ignition switch is
turned on but the engine is not started, the malfunction
indicator lamp (MIL) shall light up for 5s and then go out.
Functions of malfunction indicator lamp:
z The malfunction indicator lamp reminds the driver of the occurrence of malfunction. The vehicle shall be
serviced as soon as possible.
z The malfunction indicator lamp lights up during the test of the malfunction indicator lamp.
z If the diagnosis procedure requests to light up the malfunction indicator lamp, one diagnosis trouble code will be
stored.
Light-up of malfunction indicator lamp
z When the ignition switch is turned on but the engine is not started, the malfunction indicator lamp will light up
for 5s and then go out.
z The malfunction indicator lamp goes out after the engine is started.
z If any malfunction is detected by the self-diagnosis system, the malfunction indicator lamp will keep lighted up.
z If no malfunction is detected, the malfunction indicator lamp will go out.
Malfunction indicator lamp
OBD indicator lamp
4) Malfunction Mode
Short-circuit or open-circuit between engine control
unit to instrument circuit.
5) Troubleshooting:
Use Sunray special diagnosis instrument to check the
trouble code and determine the malfunction position.
Mainly check the circuit from engine control unit to
99

instrument circuit and determine whether there is short-circuit or open-circuit between circuit and the grounding wire,
whether there is short-circuit or open-circuit to power supply, and whether the circuit is consistent with the given pin
definition.
7. Diagnosis interface
1) Overview
The diagnosis interface is located in the electric box beneath the driver’s side instrument panel and is used to connect
the special diagnosis instrument.
This is one data transmission interface for communication with ECU and is one standard OBD interface.
4) Malfunction Mode
Short-circuit or open-circuit between engine control unit and diagnosis interface.
Working failure of engine control unit.
5) Troubleshooting:
check the circuit from engine control unit to diagnosis interface circuit and determine whether there is short-circuit or
open-circuit between circuit and the grounding wire, whether there is short-circuit or open-circuit to power supply,
and whether the circuit is consistent with the given pin definition.
100

Chapter IV Engine Diagnosis
Section I. Precautions
1. Removal/Installation Requirements for Electronic Control Unit (ECU):
z Remove the controller before welding or baking finish;
z When removing the controller, turn off the ignition switch and disconnect the battery from the system at the same
time, in order to avoid damaging the ECU.
z It is not allowed to remove power cord from the battery when the engine or the electrical system is working.
z Large-current equipment such as charger is not allowed to be directly connected to the starting motor.
z Note: The ambient temperature of ECU should not be greater than 75 degree.
2. Cleaning Requirements:
Please observe the following rules before the operation of fuel supply system and fuel injection system:
z The removed components should be placed at clean field and properly covered by the cloth other than fiber type
(cotton cloth or gauze cloth)
3. All types of harness connectors and the connector for diagnostic instrument should be
connected and disconnected only when the ignition switch is turned off:
z When measuring the power voltage or ground wire of the ECU, please ensure the wiring sequence and method is
correct.
z Disconnecting the power cord or the ground wire of the battery from the system or removing ECU harness
connector will result in the loss of diagnosis and self-learning information stored in ECU. (If the vehicle model is
different, the time of retaining Pleas of the ECU is also different after the loss of power.)
4. Please pay attention to the following points when maintaining the fuel supply system (fuel
supply pipe, fuel pump and fuel injection system):
z Please be very careful during installation/removal of fuel pump on the fuel tank with fuel.
z Prepare proper materials around the fuel tank opening to absorb a lot of fuel leaked from it timely..
z Avoid the fuel contacting your body.
z Thoroughly clean the part and its surrounding before loosening a connector.
z Please prevent any fuel from splashing from the loose part and place a rug around the connector.
z If the disassembled parts could not be timely repaired or properly treated, store the parts properly.
z Take the spare parts out of the package only when they are needed to be installed. Do not use unpacked spare
parts and the spare parts in severe damaged package
z Do not damage the O-ring of return pipe when assembling fuel injector return pipe. Coat a little diesel oil on the
O-ring for assembling convenience.
z Do not use the compressed air and do not move the vehicle after the fuel supply system is disassembled.
5. Safety Measures
To prevent the maintenance technicians from being injured and the fuel and ECU being damaged, please pay attention
101

to the following points:
z If the engine is working or at the starting speed, it is not allowed to check for any single cylinder failure by the
way of disconnecting the fuel injector harness.
z If the engine needs to be dragged but not started by the starter, such as when you check the engine cylinder
pressure, the harness plug should be disconnected from the crankshaft position (engine speed) sensor and
camshaft position (phase) sensor. After inspection, all sensors should be well connected and system DTCs should
be cleared by using the special diagnostic instrument for JAC commercial vehicles.
z It is not allowed to touch the engine gear train and rotating parts when the engine is at high speed;
z When the engine reaches normal operating temperature, the coolant temperature and pressure of cooling system
is very high; therefore, stop the engine and let the cooling system fully cool down if it is needed to repair the
engine cooling system.
z If the engine compartment relevant maintenance is necessary to be conducted in repairing engine fuel system,
please do it after the engine compartment is fully cooled down.
z Don’t touch the engine cooling fan at any time when the system is normally electrified, for the cooling fan is
likely to be started suddenly.
102

Section II. Maintenance Procedures

Fuel system of common rail engine consists of low-pressure delivery pipes and high-pressure oil pipes and maximum
pressure of it is over 1800bar. Some components of fuel injector and HP pump are machined with accuracy of 0.1mm.
Pressure regulation and fuel injection are controlled by engine ECU. In the case of stuck internal needle valve, fuel
injector will maintain open and HP pump keeps operating to supply high-pressure fuel oil. Therefore, excessive fuel
will be sprayed into combustion chamber and this will lead to rapid increase of combustion chamber internal pressure
(over 250bar) and even serious engine damage.
Core component of fuel system possesses very high accuracy and will be easily influenced by dust or tiny foreign
matters. Therefore, the following preparations and procedures should be carried out or there will be a lot of system
failures.
Operation Procedures:
1. It is necessary to keep maintenance site clean (it should be free of dust especially);
2. It is necessary to keep maintenance tools clean (they should be free of oil and foreign matters);
3. Wear ethylene pinafore to prevent hairs, dust and foreign matters from entering engine fuel system. Wash your
hands instead of wear gloves;
4. Prior to fuel system maintenance, carry out the following procedures:
Carefully listen to customer’s description about

symptoms and faults
Check appearance and connection of wire harness

and connectors in engine compartment
Carry out test procedures with special diagnostic

apparatus (carry out road test when necessary)
Confirm the fault. If the fault is in fuel system,

please carry out Step1~3 above.
5. If the fault is in HP pump, fuel delivery line or fuel injector, prepare clean special tools and sealing covers and carry
out relevant procedures for engine fuel system. Prior to maintenance, clean relevant areas to engine compartment
completely;
6. Find out faulted parts according to the above operation procedures and replace these parts with parts from OEM;
103

Remove battery negative cable.
For safety reasons: Confirm whether system

pressure is low prior to high-pressure system
disassembly.
Apply special tools and torque wrenches in

calibration.
In disassembly or replacement of fuel injector, it is necessary to apply new copper washers and tighten fixing bolts for
fuel injector according to fixed torque at the same time. Otherwise, injection position of fuel injector will deviate from
correct position and this will make engine operation out of control.
7. Apply clean and intact sealing covers on disassembled components and keep them well;
8. After fuel injector replacement, carry out fuel injector matching with special diagnostic apparatus;
9. Keep pressing manual oil delivery pump on oil-water separator to provide low-pressure line with fuel oil until the
pump can not be pressed any longer.
Attention: Do not start the engine before the pump is filled up.
10. Recheck installed components, connect battery cable and start the engine for engine operation condition
inspection;
11. Apply special diagnostic apparatus to check current faults for existence and eliminate historical faults.
104

Section III. Fault Diagnosis

1. Fault Information Record
Electronic control unit continually monitors sensors, actuators, relevant circuits, MILs, battery voltage and even its
self and carries out reliability tests to sensor output signals, actuator drive signals and internal signals. Once there are
faults in certain link or certain signal is unreliable, electronic control unit sets fault information record in RAM fault
memory immediately. Fault information record is stored in the form of diagnostic trouble code (DTC) and shown in
the sequence of fault occurrence.
Faults can be divided into “steady fault” and “random fault” (such as faults caused by temporary open circuit of
harness or poor contact of connectors) according to fault occurrence frequency.
2. Fault Condition
If duration of an identified fault exceeds set stabilization time for the first time, ECU identifies it as a steady fault and
stores it as a “steady fault”. If the fault disappears, ECU identifies it as a “random fault” and “nonexistent”. If the fault
is identified once again, it is still a “random fault”. However, “existent” historical faults will not influence normal
application of engine.
3. Fault Type
Short to power supply positive pole
Short or open to ground (In the case of pull-up or pull-down resistor for input stage, ECU will identify open circuit
failure of input port as the fault of input port short to power supply positive pole or short to ground)
Unreliable signal
4. Fault Frequency Counter

For every identified fault, there is an individual frequency counter value (HZ). Frequency counter value (Hz)
determines storage time of corresponding fault information record in the memory after fault disappearance (fault
elimination).
For the first time fault identification, it (Hz) is set to be its initial value as 40. If fault condition does not change, this
value will maintain the same forever.
Once identified fault has disappeared and then the condition has been maintained for certain period of time, the value
(Hz) is reduced by 1 after every successful engine start (engine speed exceeds that of engine start completion). At this
moment, ECU recognizes the fault has disappeared but fault information record still exists.
If the fault (such as fault caused by poor contact) appears and disappears frequently, the value (Hz) is increased by 1
but the value will not exceed set upper limit of 100.
When the value (Hz) becomes zero, all fault information records in the fault memory are cleared completely.
5. Fault Alarm
In the case of electronic control system, when there are faults in some important components such as ECU, coolant
temperature sensor, phase sensor, boost pressure sensor, revolution speed sensor, air flow meter, fuel injector, fan relay
and etc, ECU will give alarms via MIL flashing until faults are eliminated.
6. Fault Reading
Fault information records can be brought out from electronic control unit via fault diagnostic apparatus. However,
some faults can be detected only when vehicle reaches corresponding operation condition.
105

7. Elimination of Fault Information Record
Fault information records in memory should be cleared after fault elimination. DTC can be cleared with ways as
follows:
When value of ECU frequency counter (Hz) becomes 0, fault information records in fault memory are all cleared
automatically.
In the case of “Fault memory zero clearing” command, fault information records can be cleared with the application
of fault diagnostic apparatus.
8. Fault Detection
After obtaining fault information records with means above, only suspicious positions for fault occurrence are known.
However, this does not mean faults have been detected. Therefore, cause for one fault may be damaged electrical
component (like sensor or actuator or ECU, etc), wire in open circuit, wire short to ground or battery positive pole and
even mechanical failure.
Faults are internal with their external expressions as various symptoms. When symptoms are detected, check fault
information record for existence with fault diagnostic apparatus or flash code first of all and then eliminate
corresponding faults. Finally, detect faults according to engine symptoms.
106

Section IV. DTC List

S/N DTC Meaning
1 P0030 The linear oxygen sensor heater circuit is open.
2 P0031 The linear oxygen sensor heater circuit is short to ground.
3 P0032 The linear oxygen sensor heater circuit is short to battery.
4 P0045 EGR valve circuit is open.
5 P0046 Overtemperature of EGR valve bridge-H chip
6 P0047 EGR valve circuit is short to ground.
7 P0048 EGR valve circuit is short to power supply.
8 P0068 Short-term drifting error in the process of throttle offset self-adaption
The absolute difference between intercooler downstream air pressure and ambient
9 P0069
pressure is unreliable.
10 P0070 Reliability check function for ambient temperature
11 P0072 Too low ambient temperature
12 P0073 Too high ambient temperature
13 P0087 The minimum rail pressure is below the lower limit.
14 P0088 The maximum rail pressure is above the upper limit.
15 P0097 The signal level of intercooler downstream temperature is too low.
16 P0098 The signal level of intercooler downstream temperature is too high.
17 P00BE The original value of fuel rail pressure is incoherent.
18 P0100 The supply voltage of air flow sensor exceeds the limit.
19 P0101 Timeout error of air flow sensor hardware signal
20 P0102 The sensitivity deviation of air flow sensor is below the lower limit.
21 P0103 The sensitivity deviation of air flow sensor is above the upper limit.
22 P010C The signal level measured by air flow sensor is too low.
23 P010D The signal level measured by air flow sensor is too high.
24 P0112 The voltage is below the lower limit of intake air temperature sensor.
25 P0113 The voltage is above the upper limit of intake air temperature sensor.
26 P0116 Error reported in dynamic reliability test of coolant temperature sensor
27 P0117 Coolant temperature signal level is too low (downstream).
28 P0118 Coolant temperature signal level is too high (downstream).
29 P0119 Error reported in static reliability test of coolant temperature sensor
30 P0122 The signal level of accelerator pedal position sensor 1 is relatively low.
31 P0123 The signal level of accelerator pedal position sensor 1 is relatively high.
32 P0127 The signal level of air temperature sensor is relatively high.
107

S/N DTC Meaning

33 P0128 Closed-loop control is actuated due to too low coolant temperature.
34 P0131 Oxygen sensor IAIPUNVG point is short to ground.
35 P0132 Oxygen sensor IAIPUNVG point is short to battery.
36 P0168 The signal level of fuel temperature sensor is relatively high.
37 P0182 The signal level of fuel temperature sensor is below the lower limit.
38 P0183 The signal level of fuel temperature sensor is above the upper limit.
39 P0191 The uncorrected rail pressure value is above the upper limit of drift.
40 P0192 The voltage of fuel rail pressure sensor is below the lower limit.
41 P0193 The voltage of fuel rail pressure sensor is above the upper limit.
42 P0194 The uncorrected rail pressure value is below the lower limit of drift.
43 P0195 Engine oil temperature signal fault on CAN
44 P0196 The oil temperature signal is unreliable.
45 P0197 The oil temperature signal level is too low.
46 P0198 The oil temperature signal level is too high.
47 P0201 The 1st cylinder fuel injector circuit is open.
48 P0202 The 2nd cylinder fuel injector circuit is open.
49 P0203 The 3rd cylinder fuel injector circuit is open.
50 P0204 The 4th cylinder fuel injector circuit is open.
An error is reported when the time for electrifying the 1st cylinder reaches to the
53 P020A
maximum.
An error is reported when the time for electrifying the 2nd cylinder reaches to the
54 P020B
maximum.
An error is reported when the time for electrifying the 3rd cylinder reaches to the
55 P020C
maximum.
An error is reported when the time for electrifying the 4th cylinder reaches to the
56 P020D
maximum.
57 P020E
maximum.
58 P020F
maximum.
59 P0215 Avoid resonance of double mass flywheel when stopping.
60 P0219 Overspeed protection for engine parts
61 P0222 The signal level of accelerator pedal position sensor 2 is relatively low.
62 P0223 The signal level of accelerator pedal position sensor 2 is relatively high.
108

S/N DTC Meaning

63 P022A EGR valve circuit is open.
64 P022B EGR valve circuit is short to ground.
65 P022C EGR valve circuit is short to power supply.
The signal level at the output position of EGR cooling bypass valve position sensor
66 P022E
is below the lower limit.
The signal level at the output position of EGR cooling bypass valve position sensor
67 P022F
is above the upper limit.
68 P0234 The actual air intake flow is greater than the target set by system.
The original voltage of intercooler downstream air pressure sensor is below the
69 P0237
lower limit.
The original voltage of intercooler downstream air pressure sensor is above the
70 P0238
upper limit.
71 P023D The long-term jitter of EGR valve exceeds the limit.
72 P023E The short-term jitter of EGR valve exceeds the limit.
An error is reported when the temperature of EGR cooler bypass valve in
73 P024A
electrifying phase is too high.
The signal level measured by EGR cooler bypass valve position sensor is below the
74 P024E
limit.
The signal level measured by EGR cooler bypass valve position sensor is above the
75 P024F
limit.
76 P0251 The fuel metering unit circuit is open.
77 P0252 The temperature of fuel metering unit driver module is too high.
78 P0253 The fuel metering unit circuit is short to ground.
79 P0254 The fuel metering unit circuit is short to power supply.
80 P0255 Poor contact between ECU and fuel metering unit
81 P025C The voltage of fuel metering unit is below the lower limit.
82 P025D The voltage of fuel metering unit is above the upper limit.
83 P0263 An error is reported when the electrifying time reaches to the maximum.
89 P0299. The positive deviation of pressure controller is above the upper limit.
90 P0335 No signal from crankshaft
91 P0336 Crankshaft speed signal is irrational.
92 P0339 Camshaft speed signal is irrational.
109

S/N DTC Meaning

93 P0340 No signal from camshaft
94 P0341 The offset angle of camshaft is too large.
95 P0380 The preheating indicator light output circuit is high.
96 P0382 The preheating indicator light output circuit is low.
99 P0401 The actual air intake flow is greater than the target set by system.
100 P0402 The actual air intake flow is less than the target set by system.
102 P0404 The short-term jitter of EGR valve exceeds the limit.
103 P0405 The original voltage of EGR valve sensor signal is below the lower limit.
104 P0406 The original voltage of EGR valve sensor signal is above the upper limit.
106 P040C The signal level of EGR cooler downstream temperature sensor is relatively low.
107 P040D The signal level of EGR cooler downstream temperature sensor is relatively high.
108 P0426 Upstream temperature fault of oxidation catalytic converter
The signal level of upstream temperature of oxidation catalytic converter is
109 P0427
relatively low.
The signal level of upstream temperature of oxidation catalytic converter is
110 P0428
relatively high.
115 P0487 CJ945 Power level no-load fault
116 P0488 CJ945 Overheating fault
119 P0500 Wheel fault
120 P0501 Unreliable vehicle speed
121 P0503 Signal of speed sensor exceeds the upper limit.
122 P0504 Unreliable brake signal
123 P0520 Engine oil pressure signal fault on CAN
124 P0521 The maximum oil pressure signal is unreliable.
125 P0522 The signal level of oil pressure sensor is relatively low.
110

S/N DTC Meaning

126 P0523 The signal level of oil pressure sensor is relatively high.
127 P0524 The minimum oil pressure signal is unreliable.
128 P0532 The signal level measured by A/C coolant pressure sensor is too low.
129 P0533 The signal level measured by A/C coolant pressure sensor is too high.
130 P0537 The signal level of A/C evaporator’s temperature is relatively low.
131 P0538 The signal level of A/C evaporator’s temperature is relatively high.
132 P0562 The signal level of battery voltage sensor is too low.
133 P0563 The signal level of battery voltage sensor is too high.
134 P0571 False brake signal
135 P0575 The analog cruise control signal is unreliable.
136 P0576 The analog cruise control signal level is too low.
137 P0577 The analog cruise control signal level is too high.
138 P0578 The analog cruise control button is stuck.
139 P0607 Cy320 Hardware error reported
140 P060A Error reported in monitoring too high voltage
141 P060D The accelerator pedal voltage signal is unreliable.
142 P0611 The injection frequency is limited by system.
143 P061B Error reported in torque comparison
The deviation difference between the engine speed signals obtained from the 1st level
144 P061C
and the 2nd level is too large.
145 P061D The set value of air system is limited by the torque limit of the function control unit.
146 P061F Error reported in the process of throttle offset self-adaption
147 P0627 The control line of priming fuel pump is open.
148 P0628 The control line of priming fuel pump is short to ground.
149 P0629 The control line of priming fuel pump is short to power supply.
150 P062A Overheating of priming pump
The set value of fuel injection amount is limited by the torque limit of the function
151 P062B
control unit.
152 P062F Error reported in EEP read-write
153 P0643 The sensor power supply monitoring fault 1
154 P0645 The compressor circuit is open.
155 P0646 The compressor circuit is short to ground in electrifying phase.
156 P0647 The compressor circuit is short to power supply in electrifying phase.
111

S/N DTC Meaning

159 P0660 The positive deviation of throttle controller exceeds the upper limit for a long time.
160 P0661 The Port 1 of EGR valve bridge-H chip is short to ground.
161 P0662 The Port 1 of EGR valve bridge-H chip is short to power supply.
162 P0663 Short circuit / overload of EGR valve bridge-H
165 P0668 The voltage of ECU temperature sensor is below the lower limit.
166 P0669 The voltage of ECU temperature sensor is above the upper limit.
168 P0686 The main relay opens too early.
169 P0687 The main relay opens too late.
175 P0704 Clutch signal error
176 P0737 Then engine speed output signal circuit is open.
177 P0738 Then engine speed output signal circuit is short to ground.
178 P0739 Then engine speed output signal circuit is short to power supply.
179 P0A32 Parking counter error
180 P1000 The long-term jitter of EGR valve exceeds the limit.
181 P1001 The relief valve reaches to the maximum permissible opening position.
182 P1002 The relief valve reaches to the maximum permissible opening time.
183 P1003 The average fuel rail pressure regulated by relief valve is out of the range.
184 P1004 Check the flow equilibrium if the relief valve is opened normally.
185 P1005 The relief valve opens.
186 P1006 The relief valve is forced open to implement the pressure shock.
The torque in MAP for torque and fuel conversion does not increase along the fuel
187 P1007
direction strictly and monotonically.
188 P1008 PhyMod_trq2qBas_MAP contains non-strict and non-monotonic Q curve.
189 P1011 The positive deviation of rail pressure is above the upper limit.
190 P1012 The negative deviation of rail pressure is below the lower limit.
191 P1013 The maximum negative deviation of rail pressure is below the lower limit.
112

S/N DTC Meaning

192 P1020 The heating drive circuit of fuel filter is open.
193 P1021 The heating drive circuit of fuel filter is short to power supply.
194 P1022 The heating drive circuit of fuel filter is short to ground.
195 P102A The signal level of ambient pressure sensor is relatively high.
196 P102B The signal level of ambient pressure sensor is relatively low.
197 P102C The signal level of ambient temperature sensor is relatively high.
198 P102D The signal level of ambient temperature sensor is relatively low.
200 P1031 Short circuit / overload of EGR valve bridge-H
201 P1032 Overcurrent of EGR valve bridge-H based on temperature
202 P1033 Under-voltage of EGR valve bridge-H
203 P1034 The EGR valve in closed status is stuck.
204 P1035 The EGR valve in open status is stuck.
205 P1036 The long-term jitter of EGR valve exceeds the limit.
206 P1037 An error is reported when the EGR valve is stuck in closing or opening.
207 P1038 The physical value of EGR valve position sensor is too high.
208 P1039 The physical value of EGR valve position sensor is too low.
209 P103A The signal level of intercooler downstream temperature is relatively high.
210 P103B The signal level of intercooler downstream temperature is relatively low.
211 P103C EGR valve offset is unreliable.
212 P103D The positive deviation of regeneration controller is above the limit.
213 P103E The positive deviation of regeneration controller is below the limit.
214 P1040 Overheating of throttle bridge-H
215 P1041 Short circuit / overload of throttle bridge-H
216 P1042 Overtemperature caused by overcurrent of throttle bridge-H
217 P1043 Long-term deviation in the process of throttle self-adaption
218 P1044 Output circuit 2 of throttle bridge-H is short to ground.
219 P1045 Under-voltage of throttle bridge-H
220 P1046 Output circuit 2 of throttle bridge-H is short to power supply.
221 P1047 The physical value of throttle position is below the lower limit.
222 P1048 The throttle circuit is short to ground.
223 P1049 The physical value of throttle position is above the upper limit.
224 P104A The throttle circuit is short to power supply.
225 P1060 OBD General fault 1
113

S/N DTC Meaning

235 P106A OBD General fault 4
236 P106B OBD General fault 5
237 P106C OBD General fault 6
238 P106D OBD General fault 7
239 P106E OBD General fault 8
240 P106F OBD General fault 9
241 P1070 Blockage of particulate filter
242 P1100 The regulated idling value of air flow sensor is above the upper limit.
The duty cycle of air temperature sensor on the air flow meter is above the upper
243 P1102
limit.
The duty cycle of air temperature sensor on the air flow meter is below the lower
244 P1103
limit.
The time interval measured by the air temperature sensor on the air flow meter is
245 P1106
above the upper limit.
The time interval measured by the air temperature sensor on the air flow meter is
246 P1107
below the lower limit.
247 P110A System degradation 0
248 P110B Level-1 degradation
249 P110C Level-2 degradation
250 P110D Level-3 degradation
251 P110E Vehicle performance limit function is activated.
252 P1110 The detected signal within physical range is relatively high.
253 P1111 The engine coolant temperature signal level is relatively low.
254 P1120 The correction of air flow sensor load exceeds the maximum deviation limit.
255 P1121 The physical value of air flow meter is above the upper limit.
256 P1122 The physical value of air flow meter is below the lower limit.
114

S/N DTC Meaning

The signal level of intake air temperature sensor (integrated inside the air flow
257 P1123
sensor) is relatively low.
258 P1130 The signal level of fuel temperature sensor is relatively low.
259 P1131 The signal of fuel temperature is unreliable.
260 P113A The signal of too high oil temperature is unreliable.
261 P113B The signal level of oil temperature sensor is relatively high.
262 P113C The signal level of oil temperature sensor is relatively low.
263 P1200 Short circuit between the high end and low end of the 1st cylinder fuel injector
264 P1201 Short circuit between the high end and low end of the 2nd cylinder fuel injector
265 P1202 Short circuit between the high end and low end of the 3rd cylinder fuel injector
266 P1203 Short circuit between the high end and low end of the 4th cylinder fuel injector
269 P1207 1st cylinder special error
270 P1208 2nd cylinder special error
271 P1209 3rd cylinder special error
272 P120A 4th cylinder special error
273 P120B 5th cylinder special error
274 P120C 6th cylinder special error
An error is reported when the time for electrifying the 1st cylinder reaches to the
275 P1210
minimum.
An error is reported when the time for electrifying the 2nd cylinder reaches to the
276 P1211
minimum.
An error is reported when the time for electrifying the 3rd cylinder reaches to the
277 P1212
minimum.
278 P1213
minimum.
279 P1214
minimum.
280 P1215
minimum.
281 P1216 Maximum deviation error in the inner control circuit of electronic throttle
282 P1217 Minimum deviation error in the inner control circuit of electronic throttle
283 P1218 Maximum deviation error in the outer control circuit of electronic throttle
284 P1219 Minimum deviation error in the outer control circuit of electronic throttle
285 P121A 1st cylinder IQA error
286 P121B 2nd cylinder IQA error
115

S/N DTC Meaning

rd
287 P121C 3 cylinder IQA error
288 P121D 4th cylinder IQA error
289 P121E 5th cylinder IQA error
290 P121F 6th cylinder IQA error
291 P1220 The signal level of intercooler downstream temperature sensor is relatively high.
292 P1221 The signal level of intercooler downstream temperature sensor is relatively low.
293 P122A The positive deviation of throttle controller exceeds the upper limit for a long time.
294 P122B The negative deviation of throttle controller is below the lower limit for a long time.
295 P1230 Error reported in monitoring the OBDII maximum threshold correction
296 P1231 Error reported in monitoring the OBDII minimum threshold correction
297 P1245 System degradation information
An error is triggered when the ET time of the 1st cylinder reaches the maximum limit
298 P1250
(when the ZEL comes into effect).
An error is triggered when the ET time of the 2nd cylinder reaches the maximum
299 P1251
limit (when the ZEL comes into effect).
An error is triggered when the ET time of the 3rd cylinder reaches the maximum limit
300 P1252
An error is triggered when the ET time of the 4th cylinder reaches the maximum limit
301 P1253
An error is triggered when the ET time of the 1st cylinder reaches the minimum limit
302 P1254
An error is triggered when the ET time of the 2nd cylinder reaches the minimum limit
303 P1255
An error is triggered when the ET time of the 3rd cylinder reaches the minimum limit
304 P1256
An error is triggered when the ET time of the 4th cylinder reaches the minimum limit
305 P1257
310 P140A The signal level of the EGR cooler downstream temperature is relatively high.
311 P140B The signal level of the EGR cooler downstream temperature is relatively low.
312 P1410 The positive deviation of throttle controller exceeds the upper limit for a long time.
313 P1411 The negative deviation of throttle controller is below the lower limit for a long time.
314 P1415 The time for transforming from RGN to NRM mode is too long.
315 P1418 The indicator actuator circuit for EGR bypass regulating valve is open.
116

S/N DTC Meaning

316 P1419 Overheating of indicator actuator for EGR bypass regulating valve
317 P141A The indicator actuator circuit for EGR bypass regulating valve is short to battery.
318 P141B The indicator actuator circuit for EGR bypass regulating valve is short to ground.
319 P141C The relay actuator circuit for EGR bypass regulating valve is open.
320 P141D Overheating of relay actuator for EGR bypass regulating valve
321 P141E The relay actuator circuit for EGR bypass regulating valve is short to battery.
322 P141F The relay actuator circuit for EGR bypass regulating valve is short to ground.
323 P1420 The maximum exhaust temperature signal of the 1st cylinder is too strong.
324 P1421 The maximum exhaust temperature signal of the 2nd cylinder is too strong.
325 P1422 The maximum exhaust temperature signal of the 3rd cylinder is too strong.
326 P1423 The maximum exhaust temperature signal of the 4th cylinder is too strong.
329 P1426 The minimum exhaust temperature signal of the 1st cylinder is too strong.
330 P1427 The minimum exhaust temperature signal of the 2nd cylinder is too strong.
331 P1428 The minimum exhaust temperature signal of the 3rd cylinder is too strong.
332 P1429 The minimum exhaust temperature signal of the 4th cylinder is too strong.
333 P142A The minimum exhaust temperature signal of the 5th cylinder is too strong.
334 P142B The minimum exhaust temperature signal of the 6th cylinder is too strong.
335 P1430 The exhaust temperature T0 in cold start is unreliable.
341 P1436 The exhaust temperature signal is unreliable.
342 P1437 Unreliable monitoring of the 1st cylinder exhaust temperature
343 P1438 Unreliable monitoring of the 2nd cylinder exhaust temperature
344 P1439 Unreliable monitoring of the 3rd cylinder exhaust temperature
345 P143A Unreliable monitoring of the 4th cylinder exhaust temperature
346 P143B Unreliable monitoring of the 5th cylinder exhaust temperature
347 P143C Unreliable monitoring of the 6th cylinder exhaust temperature
348 P1440 Negative deviation error of oxygen sensor regulator
349 P1441 Positive deviation error of oxygen sensor regulator
117

S/N DTC Meaning

350 P1442 Conversion failure of oxygen sensor regulator
351 P1450 The particulate filter upstream temperature is unreliable.
352 P1451 The signal level of particulate filter upstream temperature is relatively high.
353 P1452 The signal level of particulate filter upstream temperature is relatively low.
354 P1453 The signal level of particulate filter upstream temperature sensor is relatively high.
355 P1454 The signal level of particulate filter upstream temperature sensor is relatively low.
356 P1455 Connection failure of particulate filter differential pressure sensor hose
357 P1456 The particulate filter differential pressure sensor is unreliable.
358 P1457 Maximum characteristic differential pressure of particulate filter
359 P1458 Minimum characteristic differential pressure of particulate filter
360 P1459 Minimum deviation of particulate filter
361 P145A The signal level of particulate filter flow impedance is high.
362 P145B Maximum deviation of particulate filter smoke mass
363 P145C Minimum deviation of particulate filter smoke mass
364 P145D Maximum value of particulate filter smoke mass
365 P145E The signal level of particulate filter flow impedance is relatively high.
366 P145F The signal level of particulate filter flow impedance is relatively low.
367 P1460 The maximum differential pressure signal of particulate filter is enhanced.
368 P1461 The minimum differential pressure signal of particulate filter is enhanced.
369 P1462 The dynamic differential pressure of particulate filter is unreliable.
370 P1463 The differential pressure self-adaption of particulate filter hose is unreliable.
371 P1464 Particulate filter differential pressure error
The physical value of differential pressure sensor for particulate oxidation catalyst
372 P146A
exceeds the upper limit.
The physical value of differential pressure sensor for particulate oxidation catalyst
373 P146B
falls below the lower limit.
374 P146C CAN Signal error
375 P146D CAN Signal error
376 P1470 Nernst signal error of oxygen sensor
377 P1471 The oxygen sensor is virtually grounded.
378 P1472 The dynamic signal level of oxygen sensor is relatively low.
379 P1473 Oxygen sensor heater coupling signal fault
380 P1474 The oxygen sensor heater signal is unreliable.
381 P1475 The oxygen sensor battery voltage is relatively low.
382 P1476 The calibration signal level of oxygen sensor is relatively high.
118

S/N DTC Meaning

383 P1477 The calibration signal level of oxygen sensor is relatively low.
384 P1478 The oxygen concentration of oxygen sensor exceeds the maximum threshold.
385 P1479 The oxygen concentration of oxygen sensor exceeds the minimum threshold.
386 P147A Relatively high oxygen concentration is unreliable.
387 P147B Relatively high oxygen concentration is unreliable.
388 P147C Relatively high oxygen concentration is unreliable.
389 P147D Relatively low oxygen concentration is unreliable.
390 P147E Relatively low oxygen concentration is unreliable.
391 P147F Relatively low oxygen concentration is unreliable.
392 P1480 The calibration value of oxygen sensor internal impedance is too high.
393 P1481 The calibration value of oxygen sensor internal impedance is too low.
394 P1482 The SPI battery voltage of oxygen sensor is too low.
395 P1483 The SPI signal of oxygen sensor is unreliable.
396 P1484 The oxygen sensor temperature is above the upper limit.
397 P1485 The oxygen sensor temperature is below the lower limit.
398 P1486 The oxygen sensor voltage in shunting exceeds the threshold.
399 P148A The signal level of turbocharger upstream temperature sensor is relatively high.
400 P148B The signal level of turbocharger upstream temperature sensor is relatively low.
401 P1500 The voltage signal level of vehicle speed sensor is relatively high.
402 P1501 The voltage signal level of vehicle speed sensor is relatively low.
Power supply diagnosis is disabled in electrifying phase due to overvoltage of
403 P150A
battery.
Power supply diagnosis is disabled in electrifying phase due to under-voltage of
404 P150B
battery.
Overtemperature of compressor torque reduction command circuit in electrifying
409 P1514
phase
410 P1515 A/C switch CAN input signal is unreliable.
The compressor torque reduction command circuit in electrifying phase is short to
411 P1516
ground.
The compressor torque reduction command circuit in electrifying phase is short to
412 P1517
power.
413 P1520 Short circuit of turbocharger bridge-H
119

S/N DTC Meaning

414 P1521 Under-voltage of turbocharger bridge-H
415 P1522 Overcurrent of turbocharger bridge-H
416 P1523 Overtemperature of turbocharger bridge-H
417 P1524 Overcurrent of turbocharger bridge-H temperature sensor
418 P1525 The valve is stuck in deviation learning process.
419 P1526 Output circuit 1 of turbocharger bridge-H is short to ground.
420 P1527 Output circuit 1 of turbocharger bridge-H is short to ground.
421 P1528 Output circuit 1 of turbocharger bridge-H is short to battery.
422 P1529 Output circuit 2 of turbocharger bridge-H is short to battery.
424 P1602 Too high downstream temperature of coolant temperature sensor is unreliable.
429 P160A EGR valve circuit is open.
430 P160B Overtemperature of EGR valve bridge-H chip
431 P160C Overcurrent of turbocharger bridge-H temperature sensor
432 P1610 Execute closing fuel injection under standard ICO mode.
433 P1613 The electrifying time detected by galloping prevention monitor is too long.
434 P1614 Several faults occur during SPI communication.
435 P1615 Time-out when trying to set up or cancel alarm task
436 P1617 Error reported in monitoring under-voltage
437 P1618 WDA works abnormally.
439 P161A EGR valve circuit is short to ground.
440 P161B EGR valve circuit is open.
441 P161C EGR valve circuit is open.
442 P161D Failure in software reset visibility
443 P161E Failure in software reset visibility
444 P161F Failure in software reset visibility
445 P1620 TTLAMP drive circuit is open.
446 P1621 The drive circuit for fuel consumption display is short to power supply.
447 P1622 The drive circuit for fuel consumption display is short to ground.
120

S/N DTC Meaning

448 P1623 The drive circuit for fuel consumption display is open.
449 P1624 Overtemperature of the drive circuit for fuel consumption display
450 P1625 TTLAMP drive circuit is short to power supply.
451 P1626 TTLAMP drive circuit is short to ground.
452 P1627 Overheating of TTLAMP drive circuit
453 P1633 The signal level of ECU temperature sensor is relatively high.
454 P1634 The signal level of ECU temperature sensor is relatively high.
455 P1635 The signal level of ECU temperature sensor is relatively low.
456 P1636 The signal level of ECU temperature sensor is relatively low.
457 P1637 The power supply voltage is too high.
458 P1638 The power supply voltage is too low.
459 P1639 The physical value of ECU temperature sensor exceeds the upper limit.
460 P163A The physical value of ECU temperature sensor falls below the lower limit.
461 P163B ECU temperature sensor SPI fault (LM71)
462 P1640 Compressor overtemperature in electrifying phase
463 P1643 Signal safety checkout error
464 P1645 The injection frequency is limited by the boosting electric quantity charging balance.
The injection frequency is limited by the high pressure fuel pump fuel quantity
465 P1646
balance.
466 P1647 The injection frequency is limited by the runtime.
467 P164C EGR valve circuit is open.
468 P164D EGR valve circuit is short to power supply.
469 P164E EGR valve circuit is short to ground.
470 P1650 EEP Clear Error
471 P1651 EEP Clear Error
472 P1652 An error is reported when the module’s data-writing is disabled for three times.
473 P165A Null dataset identifier
474 P165B Dataset switchover fault
475 P165C EEPROM data-reading error
476 P1660 ADC open circuit pulse test fault
477 P1662 The voltage being transformed by ADC module exceeds the set range of test voltage.
478 P1663 The radiometry correction exceeds the set range.
479 P1664 Monitoring control communication fault
480 P1665 SPI Monitoring control communication fault
121

S/N DTC Meaning

481 P1666 Several faults occur when testing the whole ROM zone.
The number of responsive bytes obtained from CPU in monitoring mode is too small
482 P1667
/ Error of the set response time of monitoring mode
483 P1668 Error of the set response time of monitoring mode
484 P166A OFF-route test time-out
485 P166B The electrifying time for injection is unreliable.
486 P166C The initial electrifying angle (SO E) is unreliable.
487 P166D ZFC is unreliable.
488 P166E Fuel injection monitoring mode 1
489 P166F Fuel injection monitoring mode 2
490 P1670 Error reported in fuel injection correction
491 P1671 Unreliable rail pressure
The torque limit is set once any error is detected before the MoCSOP's error is
492 P1672
generated.
493 P1673 Monitoring OFF-route forward test fault
494 P1674 Monitoring fault mode 3
495 P1675 The negative deviation of throttle controller is below the lower limit for a long time.
496 P1676 Open circuit of EGR valve bridge-H
497 P1677 Overload of EGR valve bridge-H
499 P167B CY33X fault
The set value of rail pressure is limited by the torque limit of the function control
500 P167C
unit.
501 P1680 The cruise indicator drive circuit is open.
502 P1681 Overtemperature of cruise indicator drive circuit
503 P1682 The cruise indicator drive circuit is short to power supply or high level.
504 P1683 The cruise indicator drive circuit is short to ground.
505 P1684 The grill heater is always ON.
506 P1685 DFC mechanical fault when turning on ignition switch
507 P1686 Fuel filter heating power level temperature fault
508 P1687 CJ945 Power level no load fault
509 P1688 CJ945 Power level no load fault
510 P1689 Overheating of intake air heater drive circuit
511 P168A CJ945 Overheating fault
512 P168B CJ945 Power level is short to battery.
122

S/N DTC Meaning

513 P168C CJ945 Power level is short to battery.
514 P168D CJ945 Power level is short to ground.
515 P168E CJ945 Power level is short to ground.
516 P1700 Unreliable clutch signal / Clutch signal error
517 P1710 Overheating of engine speed sensor
518 P1720 Transmission neutral position signal
519 P2002 The particulate oxidation catalyst device is removed.
520 P2004 Overcurrent of EGR valve bridge-H based on temperature
524 P2014 Under-voltage of EGR valve bridge-H
525 P2015 The turbocharger control valve is stuck.
526 P2072 The throttle valve is frozen.
527 P2076 An error is reported when the EGR valve is stuck in closing or opening.
528 P2077 The signal level of swirl valve position sensor is relatively low.
The signal level measured by the variable swirl valve position sensor is above the
529 P2078
limit.
530 P207A Overtemperature of EGR valve bridge-H chip
531 P207B The short-term jitter of EGR valve exceeds the limit.
532 P2100 Open circuit of throttle bridge-H
533 P2101 Overcurrent of throttle bridge-H
534 P2102 Output circuit 1 of throttle bridge-H is short to ground.
535 P2103 Output circuit 1 of throttle bridge-H is short to battery.
536 P2135 Signals of accelerator pedal position sensor 1 and 2 are unreliable.
537 P213A Open circuit of EGR valve bridge-H
538 P213B Overload of EGR valve bridge-H
539 P213C The Port 2 of EGR valve bridge-H chip is short to ground.
540 P213D The Port 2 of EGR valve bridge-H chip is short to ground.
543 P2146 Short circuit
544 P2149 Short circuit
545 P2157 Unreliable vehicle speed signal
123

S/N DTC Meaning

546 P2173 False positive deviation of throttle regulator
547 P2175 False negative deviation of throttle regulator
548 P2226 Fault of signal obtained from CAN by air pressure sensor
549 P2228 The signal value of ambient pressure is below the lower limit.
550 P2229 The signal value of ambient pressure is above the upper limit.
552 P2265 An error is reported when the moisture content in fuel is detected.
556 P2269 The sensor self-checking signal level is above the upper limit.
557 P2290 The rail pressure is below the minimum set value.
558 P242F The particulate filter smoke load exceeds the maximum.
559 P2454 The signal level of particulate filter differential pressure sensor is relatively low.
560 P2455 The signal level of particulate filter differential pressure sensor is relatively high.
561 P2458 Particulate filter regeneration permanent fault
562 P245A EGR cooler bypass valve fault
563 P245B Too low EGR cooling efficiency
564 P245D The signal level of EGR cooler sensor is relatively high.
565 P250F Danger is caused by too low fuel level and air ingress into hydraulic system.
566 P2519 A/C switch CAN input signal error
567 P2522 The compressor torque reduction command circuit in electrifying phase is open.
568 P2562 The turbocharger bridge-H chip circuit is open.
569 P2563 The turbocharger control valve is stuck.
570 P2564 The original voltage of EGR valve sensor signal is below the lower limit.
571 P2565 The original voltage of EGR valve sensor signal is above the upper limit.
572 P2621 The throttle signal level is relatively low.
573 P2622 The throttle signal level is relatively high.
574 P2626 The oxygen sensor pump current terminal IP is in open circuit.
575 B0020 Airbag collision status
576 U0121 ABS ECU main data loss
577 U0400 CAN received frame BCM1 message length error
578 U0415 CAN received frame ABS1 message length error
124

Section V. Fault Diagnosis for Electronic-Controlled Common Rail Diesel Engines

z Prior to disconnecting or reconnecting the power cord of engine control module (ECM), be sure to turn off the
ignition switch, in order not to damage the ECM.
z All types of engine DTCs are stored in the ECM memory.
z The engine DTCs should be cleared after the maintenance.
Common DTCs and Troubleshooting Methods for Electronic Control Systems of Diesel Engines
1.
DTC P0475 The exhaust brake valve control line is open.

P0476 The ECU internal driver module of exhaust brake valve control line is
overheating.
P0477 The exhaust brake valve control line is short to ground.
P0478 The exhaust brake valve control line is short to high level.
Exhaust brake actuator
Fault Description: The engine control unit (ECU) shall actuate the exhaust braking after processing the signal
received from the exhaust brake switch and also check if the exhaust brake feedback signal matches with the ECU
control command. If not, DTC shall be reported.
Diagnosis Hint: The intermittent failure may be caused by poor contact of wire, abrasion of the insulation or damage
of the wire inside insulation.
Check for the following conditions:
z Poor contact of ECU or exhaust brake valve – Check the harness connector
– Loose terminal
– Poor matching and connection
– Breakage of keeper
– Distortion or damage of terminal
– Poor contact between terminal and wire
z Damage of harness – Check the harness for any damage
Terminal ECU
K29 Exhaust brake actuator
125

Fault Tree:
Check the检查制动阀连接
connection of brake valve.
Connector
插接件问题 fault Y Repair or replace it.
检修或更换
对制动阀外观检测
Check the appearance of brake valve.
制动阀问题
Fault of brake valve Y 更换制动阀
Replace the brake valve.
Check the ECU connector.

检查ECU插接件 Y 检修或更换
Repair or replace it.
Replace
更换ECUthe ECU.
联系技术支持
Get the Technical Support.
126

2.
DTC P0069 The boost pressure sensor drift

The boost pressure sensor output voltage is below the lower limit (the wiring
P0237
is short to ground).
The boost pressure sensor output voltage is above the upper limit (the wiring
P0238
is open or short to high level).
The voltage of intake air temperature sensor is too low (the wiring is short to
P0097
ground).
The voltage of intake air temperature sensor is too high (the wiring is open
P0098
or short to high level).
5V power supply
Boost pressure /
Pressure signal
intake air
temperature sensor Ground
Temperature signal
Fault Description: The boost pressure sensor shall make response to the pressure change of intake manifold. The
pressure changes with the engine load. The ECU shall supply 5V voltage to the 5V reference voltage circuit of boost
pressure sensor and also supply grounding for the low reference voltage circuit. The boost pressure sensor shall
provide a signal that is related to the pressure change of intake manifold to ECU via the boost pressure sensor signal
circuit. When the intake manifold pressure is relatively low (for example: during idling period), the low level signal
voltage shall be detected by the ECU. When it is relatively high (for example: with the accelerator pedal fully open
(WOT)), the high level signal voltage shall be detected. The boost pressure sensor is also for determining the
barometric pressure (BARO). When the ignition switch is turned on without starting the engine, the following
condition shall occur. As long as the accelerator pedal position sensor signal is more than 28%, the barometric
pressure reading shall be updated. The boost pressure sensor includes the following circuits:
z A 5V reference voltage circuit
z A low reference voltage circuit
z A MAP sensor signal circuit
If the boost pressure sensor signal detected by ECU is beyond the set range, relevant DTC shall be generated.
The intake air temperature (IAT) sensor is a kind of variable resistor that can measure the temperature of air into the
engine. The ECU shall supply 5V voltage to the signal circuit of IAT sensor and also supply grounding for the
reference voltage circuit of IAT sensor. When the IAT sensor is in cold state, the sensor resistance is relatively high.
When the air temperature increases, the sensor resistance shall decrease. When the sensor resistance is relatively high,
the voltage of IAT sensor signal circuit detected by ECU shall be relatively high. With the decrease of sensor
resistance, the voltage of IAT sensor signal circuit detected by ECU shall decrease also. If the signal voltage of IAT
sensor detected by ECU is too low (indicating the temperature is too high), or too high (indicating the temperature is
too low), relevant DTC shall be generated.
127

Diagnosis Hint:
The normal boost pressure sensor shall make quick response to the change of accelerator pedal position, so its slow
action should not appear or it should not act slower than the change of accelerator pedal position.
For poor contact inspection between ECU and IAT sensor, please check the ECU harness connector for the following
conditions:
− Loose terminal
− Poor matching and connection
− Breakage of keeper
− Distortion or damage of terminal
− Poor contact between terminal and wire
Terminal ECU
A07 Power supply terminal of sensor
A53 Temperature signal terminal
A54 Pressure signal terminal
A28 Ground terminal of sensor
128

Fault Tree:
Check the component connector.
Connector fault Repair or replace it.
Detect the sensor.
Sensor fault Replace the sensor.
Fault of ECU connector Repair or replace it.
Check continuity and insulating

property.
Electrical fault Repair the harness.
Replace the component.
Does the problem still exist? Get the Technical Support.
129

3.
DTC P0087 The fuel pressure is below the lower limit.

P0088 The fuel pressure is above the upper limit.
P0191 The forward drift of common rail pressure sensor is too large.
The common rail pressure sensor output voltage is below the lower limit (the wiring
P0192
is short to ground).
The common rail pressure sensor output voltage is above the upper limit (the
P0193
wiring is open or short to high level).
P0194 The reverse drift of common rail pressure sensor is too large.
P1011 The positive deviation of rail pressure control is above the upper limit.
P1012 The positive deviation of rail pressure control exceeds the upper limit greatly.
P1013 The negative deviation of rail pressure control is below the lower limit.
5V power supply
Common rail Rail pressure signal
pressure sensor
Ground
Fault Description: The common rail pressure sensor shall make response to the change of fuel pressure in common
rail pipe. The pressure changes with the engine load. The ECU shall supply 5V voltage to the 5V reference voltage
circuit of common rail pressure sensor and also supply grounding for the low reference voltage circuit. The common
rail pressure sensor shall provide a signal that is related to the change of fuel pressure in common rail pipe to ECU via
the common rail pressure sensor signal circuit. When the fuel pressure in common rail pipe is relatively low (for
example: during idling period), the low level signal voltage shall be detected by the ECU. When it is relatively high
(for example: with the accelerator pedal fully open (WOT)), the high level signal voltage shall be detected. The
common rail pressure sensor provides an important parameter for determining engine operation. When its signal is
lost, the engine shall stop operation. The common rail pressure sensor includes the following circuits:
z A common rail pressure sensor signal circuit
If the common rail pressure sensor signal detected by ECU is beyond the set range, relevant DTC shall be generated.
Diagnosis Hint: When the ignition switch is turned on with engine off, the pressure in common rail pipe is zero and
the signal voltage level is low. By comparing the readings with those of the same sensor that is known good, the
accuracy of the suspicious sensor can be checked. Their difference should be no more than 0.4V. Perform overall
inspection for common rail pressure sensor to see if it is damaged.
During engine starting, any pressure change in the common rail pipe should be detected by the common rail pressure
sensor, through which, we can determine if the sensor is stuck at a certain value.
The normal common rail pressure sensor shall make quick response to the change of accelerator pedal position, so its
slow action should not appear or it should not act slower than the change of accelerator pedal position.
130

Terminal ECU
A06 Power supply terminal of common rail pressure sensor
A52 Signal terminal of common rail pressure sensor
A40 Ground terminal of common rail pressure sensor
131

Fault Tree:
Read DTC.
Fault of fuel metering unit Repair accordingly.
Check the common rail pressure

sensor.
Fault of common rail pressure

sensor Repair accordingly.
Check the low pressure oil circuit

by referring to fault tree of “Low
Pressure Oil Circuit”.
Fault of the low pressure oil

circuit Repair accordingly.
Fault of the high pressure oil

Repair the harness.
circuit
132

Inspection for Low Pressure/High Pressure Oil Circuit:
Low pressure oil circuit
Check fuel tank supply. Only checking the fuel tank

level indicator is not enough, for its indication may
be invalid.
Is there no fuel in the fuel tank? Add fuel.
Check the status and function of manual pump.
Fault of manual pump Repair accordingly.
Visually inspect the low pressure pipeline (leakage,

coordination, connection)
Fault of low pressure pipeline Repair accordingly.
Ensure there is no air bubble in the low pressure oil

circuit.
Find out where the air comes from
Is there air in the oil circuit? and repair the system, and then clean
the fuel pipe.
Ensure the diesel filter model and the connection of

fuel inlet and outlet are correct.
Replace the current filter with the

Incorrect signal or connection original one or connect the inlet and
outlet pipes of filter correctly.
High pressure oil circuit
Make diagnosis for the high pressure oil circuit in

strict accordance with the diagnostic procedures for
high pressure oil circuit.
Is there any problem? Repair accordingly.
The high pressure oil circuit is intact.
133

4.
DTC P0116 The dynamic characteristics of coolant temperature sensor are unreliable.
The coolant temperature sensor output voltage is below the lower limit (the
P0117
wiring is short to ground).
The coolant temperature sensor output voltage is above the upper limit (the
P0118
wiring is open or short to high level).
P0119 The static characteristics of coolant temperature sensor are unreliable.
Coolant temperature
Coolant temperature signal (High)
sensor Coolant temperature
signal (Low)
Fault Description: The engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor is a kind of negative temperature coefficient
variable resistor, which can measure the engine coolant temperature. Its resistance shall decrease with the increase of
temperature, so the signal value input into ECU in the form of voltage shall decrease accordingly. The voltage signal
range is 0-5V. The ECU searches the characteristic curve of the sensor and converts it into engine coolant temperature.
The diagnostic module of engine coolant temperature sensor shall make fault judgment based on this temperature
value. The ECU shall supply 5V voltage to the signal circuit of engine coolant temperature sensor and also supply
grounding for the low reference voltage circuit. If the signal voltage of engine coolant temperature sensor detected by
ECU is too low (indicating the temperature is too high), or too high (indicating the temperature is too low), relevant
DTC shall be generated.
The following table illustrates the difference among temperature, resistance and voltage.
Resistance of coolant temperature Signal voltage of coolant temperature

Engine coolant temperature
sensor sensor
Low High High
High Low Low
Diagnosis Hint:
Overheating may result in generation of this DTC. After the engine is started, the temperature of engine coolant
temperature sensor should increase steadily and become stable after the thermostat is disconnected. Test the engine
coolant temperature sensor under different temperature to check for any error of sensor. If any, the error may result in
failure of control performance. After the engine is laid up for a night, the indication difference between IAT sensor and
engine coolant temperature sensor should be within 3°C (5°F). Refer to “Temperature and Resistance”.
Poor contact between ECU and engine coolant temperature sensor – Check the harness connector for:
− Loose terminal
134

Check the harness for any damage. If the harness appears normal, observe the ECT indication on the diagnostic tool
while moving relevant connector and harness of ECT sensor. If the ECT indication changes, there must be failure in
that part. If the DTC won’t appear again, the fault record data can be used for determining the self-diagnostic code and
the running mileage after the previous setting can be used for determining the occurrence frequency of that condition,
which can facilitate the troubleshooting for overheating.
After the engine is started, the engine coolant temperature shall increase steadily to about 90°C (194°F) and then
become stable after the thermostat is disconnected.
Terminal ECU
A37 Signal terminal of ECT sensor
A50 Ground terminal of ECT sensor
135

Fault Tree:
Check the sensor connection.
Connector fault Repair accordingly.
Detect the sensor resistance. (Is it consistent with

the vehicle condition?)
Fault of sensor resistance Replace the sensor.
Fault of ECU connector Repair accordingly.
Check continuity and insulating property.
136

5.
DTC P0122 The output voltage of accelerator pedal potentiometer 1 is below the lower limit.
P0123 The output voltage of accelerator pedal potentiometer 1 is above the upper limit.
P0222 The output voltage of accelerator pedal potentiometer 2 is below the lower limit.
P0223 The output voltage of accelerator pedal potentiometer 2 is above the upper limit.
Power supply of sensor

1
Signal 1
Ground of sensor 1
Electronic
accelerator pedal Power supply of sensor
2
Signal 2
Ground of sensor 2
Fault Description: The accelerator pedal assembly consists of two accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor. The APP
sensors are installed on the pedal assembly and are not repairable. The APP sensor shall supply a signal voltage that
changes with the accelerator pedal position. The ECU shall supply an individual 5V reference voltage circuit and a
low level reference voltage circuit to each APP sensor. With the pedal depressed, the signal voltage of APP sensor 1
shall increase, viz. increasing from about 0.7V (at the released position) to above 4V (at the fully depressed position).
With the pedal depressed, the signal voltage of APP sensor 2 shall increase, viz. increasing from about 0.3V (at the
released position) to above 2V (at the fully depressed position).
APP sensor 1 and 2 are installed in the accelerator pedal assembly. Each one consists of the following circuits:
z A signal circuit
With those circuits, the APP sensors can provide the signal voltage that is proportional to the displacement of
accelerator pedal to the ECU. Two processors, located in the ECU, are adopted to monitor the data of throttle actuator
control system. Each signal circuit shall provide the signal voltage that is proportional to the displacement of
accelerator pedal to two processors. Those two processors shall monitor each other to verify whether the indicated
value of pedal position is correct or not. The test method of ECU is: making the signal of APP sensor 2 lower
instantaneously to see if the signal of APP 1 is also made lower.
Diagnosis Hint: During testing, if it is necessary to detect the ECU harness connector or component harness
connector, a diagnostic connector should be adopted to test the adapter component.
If several DTCs appear simultaneously, please check if the signal circuits for APP sensor 1 and 2 are short to each
other.
137

Terminal ECU
K28 Power supply terminal of APP sensor 1
K81 Signal terminal of APP sensor 1
K67 Ground terminal of APP sensor 1
K22 Power supply terminal of APP sensor 2
K60 Signal terminal of APP sensor 2
K58 Ground terminal of APP sensor 2
138

Fault Tree:
Visually check the component.
Component fault Replace the component.
ECU connector fault Repair accordingly.
139

6.
DTC P0201 The 1st cylinder fuel injector circuit is open.

P0263 Other errors of the 1st cylinder fuel injector
P1200 The forward error correction of the 1st fuel injector is too large.
P1201 The reverse error correction of the 1st fuel injector is too large.
P120C The dynamic forward error correction of the 1st fuel injector is too large.
P120D The dynamic reverse error correction of the 1st fuel injector is too large.
P1613 The electrifying time detected by galloping prevention monitor is too long.
1st cylinder fuel injector “High”
1st cylinder fuel injector “Low” 1st cylinder
Fault Description: The ECU controls the switching-on circuit of fuel injector directly. The ECU controls the time for
switching on each fuel injector via adopting a device named “Driver” to supply PWM current to each fuel injector
control circuit. The driver owns a feedback circuit, which is monitored by ECU to verify if the control circuit is open
or short. If any failure in the fuel injector control circuit is detected by ECU, the fuel injector control circuit DTC shall
be generated.
Diagnosis Hint: For the failure in wire connector shall trigger the setting of DTC, be sure to check the connectors
relevant to this diagnostic procedure for short circuit of terminal or poor contact of wire, prior to replacement of any
component. Observe the state parameter of relevant fuel injector on the diagnostic tool while shaking the wire and
connector relevant to the test. If any intermittent failure is existed in the tested wire or connector, the relevant failure
shall be displayed on the diagnostic tool.
Performing compression test is helpful for locating the intermittent failure.
Terminal ECU
A16 1st fuel injector “High”
A47 1st fuel injector “Low”
140

Fault Tree:
Turn off the ignition switch and check the fuel
injector connector.
Disconnect the fuel injector and turn on the ignition

switch.
Refer to “Inspection of Fuel Injector

Does the problem still exist? Wiring” listed below.
Clear the DTC, turn off the ignition switch, reconnect

the fuel injector and turn on the ignition switch.
Replace relevant fuel injector and

update the ECU data.
Does the problem reoccur?
Repeat the above procedures for other fuel injectors.
Check the wiring of fuel injector.
141

7.
DTC P0202 The 2nd cylinder fuel injector circuit is open.

P0264 The low end of the 2nd fuel injector is short to the high end.
P0265 The low end of the 2nd fuel injector is short to the high level.
P0266 Other errors of the 2nd cylinder fuel injector
P1202 The forward error correction of the 2nd fuel injector is too large.
P1203 The reverse error correction of the 2nd fuel injector is too large.
P120E The dynamic forward error correction of the 2nd fuel injector is too large.
P120F The dynamic reverse error correction of the 2nd fuel injector is too large.
2nd cylinder fuel injector “High”
2nd cylinder fuel injector “Low” 2nd cylinder
be generated.
Diagnosis Hint:
For the failure in wire connector shall trigger the setting of DTC, be sure to check the connectors relevant to this
diagnostic procedure for short circuit of terminal or poor contact of wire, prior to replacement of any component.
Observe the state parameter of relevant fuel injector on the diagnostic tool while shaking the wire and connector
relevant to the test. If any intermittent failure is existed in the tested wire or connector, the relevant failure shall be
displayed on the diagnostic tool.
Terminal ECU
A02 2nd fuel injector “High”
A31 2nd fuel injector “Low”
142

Fault Tree:
injector connector.

switch.
Does the problem still exist? Refer to “Inspection of Fuel Injector

Wiring” listed below.


Does the problem reoccur? update the ECU data.
143

8.
DTC P0203 The 3rd cylinder fuel injector circuit is open.

P0267 The low end of the 3rd fuel injector is short to the high end.
P0268 The low end of the 3rd fuel injector is short to the high level.
P0269 Other errors of the 3rd cylinder fuel injector
P1204 The forward error correction of the 3rd fuel injector is too large.
P1205 The reverse error correction of the 3rd fuel injector is too large.
P1210 The dynamic forward error correction of the 3rd fuel injector is too large.
P1211 The dynamic reverse error correction of the 3rd fuel injector is too large.
P1239 Other errors of the 3rd cylinder fuel injector
P123A Other errors of the 3rd cylinder fuel injector
P123B Other errors of the 3rd cylinder fuel injector
1st fuel injector “High”

3rd cylinder
1st fuel injector “Low”
be generated.
Terminal ECU
A01 1st fuel injector “High”
A46 1st fuel injector “Low”
144

Fault Tree:
injector connector.

switch.

Does the problem still exist?
Wiring” listed below.
Clear the DTC, turn off the ignition switch,

reconnect the fuel injector and turn on the ignition
switch.

145

9.
DTC P0204 The 4th cylinder fuel injector circuit is open.

P0270 The low end of the 4th fuel injector is short to the high end.
P0271 The low end of the 4th fuel injector is short to the high level.
P0272 Other errors of the 4th cylinder fuel injector
P1206 The forward error correction of the 4th fuel injector is too large.
P1207 The reverse error correction of the 4th fuel injector is too large.
P1212 The dynamic forward error correction of the 4th fuel injector is too large.
P1213 The dynamic reverse error correction of the 4th fuel injector is too large.
P123C Other errors of the 4th cylinder fuel injector
P123D Other errors of the 4th cylinder fuel injector
P123E Other errors of the 4th cylinder fuel injector
2nd fuel injector “High”

4th cylinder
2nd fuel injector “Low”
be generated.
Terminal ECU
A17 2nd fuel injector “High”
A33 2nd fuel injector “Low”
146

Fault Tree:
injector connector.

switch.

Does the problem still exist? Wiring” listed below.


147

10.
DTC P0251 The control line of fuel level control unit is open.
P0252 The ECU internal driver module of fuel level control unit is overheating.
P0253 The control line of fuel level control unit is short to ground.
P0254 The control line of fuel level control unit is short to high level.
Control of fuel metering unit Fuel metering unit
Fault Description: The fuel metering unit is for adjusting the fuel supply and the fuel pressure. When the control coil
of metering unit is off, the inlet fuel metering proportional valve of the unit shall be closed, cutting off the fuel
supplied to the high pressure fuel pump plunger component. When the control coil of metering unit is electrified, the
ECU shall change the fuel inlet sectional area of metering component via pulse signal according to the actual demand,
through which, the fuel supplied to the high pressure fuel pump plunger component shall be changed. If the fuel
metering control signal voltage detected by ECU is abnormal, the DTC shall be generated.
Diagnosis Hint: The metering component is mounted at the fuel inlet of high pressure pump. The engine’s fuel
supply shall be affected directly by the opening sectional area of the fuel metering unit control valve. Provided that the
fuel metering unit control line is normally connected, monitor the engine fuel supply amount and pressure while
moving relevant connector and wire to check if any fault is triggered. If any, the indication of fault diagnostic unit
shall change. This is help for locating the intermittent failure.
The intermittent failure may be caused by poor contact of control part. As for poor contact between ECU and fuel
metering unit, please check the ECU harness connector for the following conditions:
− Loose terminal
Check the harness for any damage. If the harness appears normal, observe the fuel pressure indicated on the diagnostic
tool while moving relevant connector and harness of fuel metering unit. If the pressure indication changes, there must
be failure in that part.
Terminal ECU
A19 Power supply terminal of fuel metering unit
A49 Signal terminal of fuel metering unit
148

Fault Tree:
Check the connector of fuel metering unit.
Measure the resistance of fuel metering unit

(it is about 5.3 Ohms at 20℃)
Resistance fault Repair the fuel metering unit.
149

11.
DTC P0335 No signal from crankshaft sensor

P0336 False signal from crankshaft sensor
Signal
Wheel speed sensor Ground
Shielded wire
Diagnosis Hint: The signal of crankshaft position (CKP) sensor is used for indicating the rotary speed and position of
crankshaft. The CKP sensor shall generate an AC voltage of different amplitude and frequency. The frequency relies
on the rotary speed of crankshaft and the output AC voltage relies on the crankshaft position. The CKP sensor shall
coordinate with a 58X variable reluctance rotor fixed on the crankshaft. The ECU can synchronize the timing control
for fuel injectors according to the input signals of CKP sensor and camshaft position sensor. The CKP sensor can also
be applied for testing misfire and tachometer indication. The signal circuit and the low reference voltage circuit of
CKP sensor are directly connected to ECU. The shielded and grounded circuit should be grounded. In addition, when
the 1st and the 4th cylinders are at TDC, the CKP sensor shall also send a signal to ECU. The ECU shall monitor the
signals of CKP sensor and camshaft position sensor to determine whether the 1st cylinder is in compression stroke or
not. The circuits between CKP sensor and ECU include:
Signal circuit of CKP sensor
Low reference voltage circuit of CKP sensor
Shielded and grounded circuit
If the number of crankshaft position pulses sent out by the CKP sensor detected by the ECU is incorrect, the DTC
shall be generated.
Diagnosis Hint: There is failure in camshaft position sensor circuit.
CKP sensor variable reluctance rotor is dislocated or incorrectly installed.
Large crankshaft end play leads to dislocation of variable reluctance rotor.
There is blockage between CKP sensor and variable reluctance rotor.
Check connectors of CKP sensor and ECU for any corrosion.
Prior to maintenance, all fragments should be removed from the connector surfaces. Prior to diagnosis or replacement,
please check the connector gaskets to ensure they are properly installed to avoid ingress of any pollutant.
z Poor terminal connection – Check the harness connector for any loose terminal, mismatching, damaged keeper,
improper form or damage, poor contact between terminal and wire. Check if the matched terminal is adopted.
Check if the test tension is appropriate.
z Harness damage – Check the harness for any damage. If the harness appears normal, observe the indication on
the diagnostic tool while moving relevant connector and harness of the sensor. If the indication changes, there
must be failure in that part.
150

z Check if the ground and connection of ECU and engine is reliable and clean. If the DTC is determined to be
intermittent failure, please refer to the fault records to find out when the previous DTC is set.
Terminal ECU
A13 Signal terminal of CKP sensor
A14 Negative signal terminal of CKP sensor
A56 Shielded terminal of CKP sensor
151

Fault Tree:
The new sensor is connected.
Does the problem still exist? Replace the target wheel.
The new target wheel is installed.
152

12.
DTC P0340 No signal from phase sensor

P0341 False signal from phase sensor
5V power supply
Camshaft position
sensor CMP signal
Ground
Fault Description: The camshaft position (CMP) sensor is a Hall Effect switch. The ECU shall supply 5V voltage to
the 5V reference voltage circuit and also supply grounding for the low reference voltage circuit. The CMP sensor shall
provide a signal voltage to ECU by coordinating with 1X variable reluctance rotor. The ECU shall make use of this
signal voltage to determine the camshaft position. The CMP sensor links the crankshaft with the camshaft position to
facilitate ECU to determine which cylinder the fuel should be injected to. During the rotation of camshaft, the variable
reluctance rotor changes the magnetic field generated by the magnet in sensor and send a signal to ECU via the signal
circuit. The CMP sensor circuit is directly connected to ECU. The CMP sensor can also be adopted to tell which
cylinder has misfire. The circuits between CMP sensor and ECU include:
High reference voltage circuit of CMP sensor
Ground circuit
Camshaft position signal circuit
When no occurrence of minimum camshaft position synchronization is detected by ECU or there is failure in CMP
sensor signal circuit, DTCs shall be generated.
Diagnosis Hint: Prior to maintenance, all fragments should be removed from the connector surfaces. Prior to
diagnosis or replacement, please check the connector gaskets to ensure they are properly installed to avoid ingress of
any pollutant.
Poor terminal connection – Check the harness connector for any loose terminal, mismatching, damaged keeper,
improper form or damage, poor contact between terminal and wire. Check if the matched terminal is adopted. Check
if the test tension is appropriate.
Harness damage – Check the harness for any damage. If the harness appears normal, observe the indication on the
diagnostic tool while moving relevant connector and harness of the sensor. If the indication changes, there must be
failure in that part.
Check if the ground and connection of ECU and engine is reliable and clean. If the DTC is determined to be
intermittent failure, please refer to the fault records to find out when the previous DTC is set.
Terminal ECU
A08 Signal terminal of phase sensor
A57 Negative signal terminal of phase sensor
A35 Shielded terminal of phase sensor
153

Fault Tree:
Visually check the sensor.
Sensor fault Replace the sensor.
Check the signals of camshaft and crankshaft

sensor with oscilloscope if possible.
Signal fault Repair accordingly.
Check the target wheel of camshaft.
Fault of target wheel Replace the target wheel.
Check the positioning of camshaft target wheel.
False positioning of camshaft target wheel Correct the positioning of target wheel.
154

13.
DTC P0380 The glow plug works without the command from ECU.
P0382 The glow plug doesn’t work with the command from ECU.
P0383 ECU control line for glow plug is short to ground.
P0384 ECU control line for glow plug is short to high level.
P0670 ECU control line for glow plug is open or its driver module is overheating.
Glow plug
Power supply
Preheating control signal

Preheating relay Main relay
Preheating feedback signal
Fault Description: The main part of glow plug is tubular heating element, which is securely and tightly installed
inside the glow plug shell, making it resistant to corrosion and thermal shock. The heating element is composed of
two resistance elements connected in series; they are installed in the top of heat pipe forming respectively a heating
coil and a control coil. The glow plug controller controls over the glow plug via a power relay and electrical switch
group. It can control the heating time of glow plug and also serve as a protection and monitoring device. The higher
level glow plug controller has diagnosis function, so it can distinguish an individual fault of glow plug and indicate it
to the driver. A multilevel socket is equipped on the control input terminal of glow plug controller for connecting with
ECU. To avoid voltage drop, screw pins or plugs should be equipped in the series circuit that is connected with the
glow plug. The post-heating upon a success start can facilitate the uninterrupted speed increase and idling with little
smoke in the process of heating, which can reduce the combustion noise in cold starting. If it fails, the glow plug
protection circuit shall open to avoid overdischarging of battery. If no preheating control signal is detected by ECU or
the detected control signal is inconsistent with the actual, relevant DTCs shall be generated.
Diagnosis Hint: The failure may be caused by poor contact of wire or loose connector. As for poor contact of ECU or
preheating control unit, check the harness connector for the following conditions:
Loose terminal
Poor matching and connection
Distortion or damage of terminal
Poor contact between terminal and wire
Damage of harness – Check the harness for any damage
Terminal ECU
K90 Control signal of preheating relay
K57 Preheating time feedback signal
155

Fault Tree:
Check检查预热塞接插件
the connector of glow plug.
接插件问题
Connector fault Y 做必要的修理
Repair accordingly.
N
检查ECU接插件
接插件问题
Repair accordingly.
Check continuity
检查连续性和绝缘性 and insulating property.
电气问题
Electrical fault Y 修理线束
Repair the harness.
Replace
更换预热塞the glow plug.
Does 问题仍否存在
the problem still exist? Y 联系技术支持
156

14.
DTC P0500 Error of vehicle speed sensor acquisition hardware

P0501 The vehicle speed sensor signal is unreliable.
Fault Description: Vehicle speed sensor (VSS) provides vehicle speed signals to ECU. It is a kind of Hall Effect
sensor. When the rotor gear tooth of transmission output shaft passes through the magnetic field of sensor, the VSS
shall generate a signal voltage, whose frequency shall increase with the vehicle speed. The ECU shall convert the
signal voltage into vehicle speed and make use of the vehicle speed signal to determine the working status of vehicle.
If this signal is lost or abnormal, relevant DTCs shall be generated.
Diagnosis Hint: Check the harness for any damage. If the harness appears normal, observe the indication on the
digital multimeter while moving relevant connector and harness of the actuator. If the indication changes in testing,
there must be failure in that part. The intermittent failure may be caused by poor contact, abrasion of wire insulation
or breakage of the wire inside insulation. Make sure the vehicle speed sensor is correctly fixed onto the transmission
housing.
Terminal ECU
K75 VVS input signal
157

Fault Tree:
Check the VVS.
VVS fault Replace the VVS.
158

15.
DTC P0504 Unreliable comparison between main and auxiliary brake pedal signals
Main brake switch

Auxiliary brake switch
Fault Description: The brake switch detects the brake pedal action and sends the signal to ECU. The brake switch is
equipped with two switches, viz. main and auxiliary brake switches. When these two signals are input, these signals
are determined by ECU to be normal brake signals. The switch signals are relevant to the accelerator pedal, for
controlling the fuel amount during braking. There should be no failure when you operate the accelerator pedal at the
point of depressing the brake pedal, but the fuel amount shall be reduced when you operate the accelerator pedal with
the brake pedal depressed. If the voltage signal of brake switch is inconsistent with the actual, the DTC shall be
generated.
Diagnosis Hint: Check the wiring connector for poor contact, distorted or damaged terminal.
Terminal ECU
K17 Main brake switch signal
K80 Auxiliary brake switch signal
159

Fault Tree:
Visually check the component.
Component fault Replace the component.
ECU connector fault Repair accordingly.

property.
160

16.
DTC P0562 Too low battery voltage

P0563 Too high battery voltage
P1617 The engine cannot be shut down with too high internal supply voltage.
P1618 The engine cannot be shut down with too low internal supply voltage.
P1637 Too high voltage in ECU internal power supply module
P1638 Too low voltage in ECU internal power supply module
Ignition
switch
Power supply of main relay Main relay
Control of main relay
Power supply of ignition switch
Fault Description: The ECU monitors the system voltage via the ignition voltage circuit. When the voltage exceeds
the set range, the parts may be damaged and the input reading may be incorrect. When the system voltage detected by
ECU is too low (below 11V) or too high (above 16V), relevant DTCs shall be generated.
Diagnosis Hint: Check if the diagnostic system is normal.
Check if the charging system is normal.
Perform relevant test for intermittent failure or poor contact.
Terminal ECU
K01 Positive battery terminal +Ra
K03 Positive battery terminal +Rb
K05 Positive battery terminal +Rc
K47 Main relay control
K46 Ignition switch power supply
161

Fault Tree:
Check the battery voltage at
igniting.
Battery fault Charge the battery.
Check the battery connection.
Fault of battery connectors Repair accordingly.
Check the resistance between chassis

and ECU ground.
Is the resistance too high? Adjust the ECU ground.
Check the charging circuit of battery.
Fault of charging circuit Repair accordingly.
162

17.
DTC P060A Communication failure of ECU internal chip CJ940
Fault Description: It is mainly used for monitoring the internal microprocessor integrity failure in ECU to determine
whether the ECU program is executed. With engine OFF and ignition switch ON, the ECU shall perform
self-diagnosis. If the self-diagnosis process is not finished, the control module shall record the corresponding
operating condition and store this information into “Fault Records” to set DTC.
Diagnosis Hint: If the self-diagnosis process is finished smoothly, the current DTC shall be cleared.
If this diagnostic instrument and other diagnosis irrelevant to exhaust pass the test in 40 continuous preheating
processes, the history DTC shall be cleared.
Fault Tree:
Read DTC.
Replace the ECU with a good one for debugging.
163

18.
DTC P0642 Sensor supply voltage 1 is too low.

P0643 Sensor supply voltage 1 is too high.
P0652 Sensor supply voltage 2 is too low.
P0653 Sensor supply voltage 2 is too high.
Fault Description: Due to the nature of sensor, some sensors require a voltage to finish the required function and
operation. The supply voltage of sensor is supplied by ECU. The ECU shall calculate the required voltage of sensor
according to its characteristic and supply the voltage to the sensor via control circuit. In the process of voltage
signaling, DTCs may occur due to virtual connection or poor connection of control circuit, etc.
Sensor supply voltage 1: The power supply for accelerator pedal 1 and CMP sensor
Sensor supply voltage 2: The power supply for accelerator pedal 2, absolute pressure sensor and common rail
pressure sensor.
Diagnosis Hint: Check the ECU power voltage for any fault. The power voltage detected by multimeter should
generally be 5V. Check the voltage signal supplied to relevant sensor. The fault may be caused by virtual connection,
poor contact of wire, abrasion of insulation or damage of the wire in insulation. Check the circuit for the following
conditions:
– Loose terminal
– Poor matching and connection
– Breakage of keeper
– Distortion or damage of terminal
– Poor contact between terminal and wire
– Damage of harness – Check the harness for any damage
164

Fault Tree:
Read DTC.
Provided that the signal lost is caused

by a certain sensor, disconnect each
sensor one by one until the fault
Read DTCs of all sensors corresponding disappears and the failed sensor is
to the power connector located. If all sensors are normal, check
for short circuit and the insulating
property of wires.
Match the connector correctly.
The problem is solved.
165

19.
DTC P0686 The main relay opens too early.

P0687 The main relay opens too late.
Ignition
switch
Power supply of main relay Main relay
Control of main relay
Power supply of ignition switch
Fault Description: With the ignition switch OFF, the input circuit of main relay through K47 is actuated by V3 and
ECU Pin K46 and the electromagnet picks up the contact of output circuit, so the output circuit of main relay is in
continuity. Then, the power supply into the internal control module via ECU Pin K01, K03 and K05. If the ECU
signal for relay control is distorted, DTC shall be generated.
Diagnosis Hint: The intermittent failure may be caused by poor contact, abrasion of wire insulation or breakage of
the wire inside insulation. The ignition 1 relay fault shall lead to the failed starting of engine, for there is no voltage in
the ignition coil or fuel injectors in electronic ignition system and they cannot work without being electrified.
Terminal ECU
K47 Main relay control signal
166

Fault Tree:
Check the relay connector.
Replace the relay (running ISO

circulation.)
Fault of ISO circulation Get the Technical Support.
167

20.
DTC P0704 Clutch signals are unreliable.
Clutch switch
Fault Description: Transmission control unit (TCU) is integrated with engine control unit (ECU) and calculates
optimal time and speed for clutch engagement according to feedback information from sensors of accelerator pedal,
transmission gear position, transmission input/output shaft speed, engine speed, throttle opening and etc. Automatic
transmission (AT) actuating mechanism consists of electric oil pump, solenoid valve and clutch cylinder. When ECU
gives command to drive electric oil pump, high-pressure fluid generated in the pump goes through solenoid valve and
gets into clutch cylinder. ECU controls magnitude of current of solenoid valve for the control of fluid flow and fluid
passage change. Thus piston movement of clutch cylinder is realized in order to complete clutch operation during
vehicle starting and shift. In the case of inconformity between clutch signal and actual condition, DTC occurs.
Diagnosis Hint: clutch switch fault
Check switch wire harness (Check Terminal 58 of ECU for open circuit, short circuit and poor contact.)
Check switch power supply voltage and operation condition.
Determine ECU replacement according to actual condition.
Terminals ECU
K55 Clutch switch signal
168

Fault Tree:
Check clutch switch.
Clutch switch fault Replace the clutch switch.
Check clutch switch harness.
Harness fault Repair the harness.
Check clutch switch power supply voltage.
Power supply signals are distorted. Repair accordingly.
Replace ECU and check
169

21.
There are faults (short circuit or open circuit) in ECU OBD malfunction
DTC P0650
indicator lamp (MIL) output connecting wire.
Connection of ECU system MIL output connecting wire is short to high
P1619
level.
P161A Connection of ECU system MIL output connecting wire is short to ground.
P161B ECU system MIL output connecting wire is open.
P161C ECU system MIL drive module is overheated.
Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL)
OBD indicator lamp
Fault Description: Malfunction indicator lamps (MIL) are located on instrument panel cluster (IPC). MILs inform
driver about fault generation and necessary maintenance for engine control system. Control module monitors MIL
control circuit for inconformity of commands for MILs. For example, when MIL is disconnected by command, control
module monitors low voltage or when MIL is connected by command, control module monitors high voltage. This is
indicated that there are faults. When control module discovers incorrect voltage or overhigh temperature of MIL
control circuit, DTC occurs. In the case of 20 samplings for output status of MIL drive, open circuit or overhigh
temperature faults are detected in 15 samplings at least. There are 100msec for each sampling. ECU detects incorrect
output status or overlarge current of MIL drive and such status lasts for more than 2sec; for every 10 samplings of
MIL drive output status, there are short circuit faults in 5 samplings at least with time consumption for each sampling
process as 12.5msec and ECU detects short circuit for more than 1sec under MIL drive output status. In the case of
conditions above, DTCs occur.
Diagnosis Hint: When short circuit fault is detected, control module should stop starting MIL drive within remained
travel. Control module records operation condition when diagnosis is failed. For the first diagnosis failure, control
module will keep this information in fault record. If diagnosis failure occurs during the second continuous ignition
cycle, control module records operation condition under diagnosis failure and writes the operation condition in frozen
fault condition and updates fault record.
Terminal ECU
K70 System MIL output signal
K71 OBD indicator lamp
170

Fault Tree:
Check connection between instrument panel and ECU.

检查仪表板与ECU的连接

接插件问题 Y 做必要的修理
Check continuity and insulating property..

检查连续性和绝缘性

电气问题 Y 修理线束
Replace corresponding components.

更换相应的器件

问题仍存在 Y 联系技术支持
171

22.
Mass air flow (MAF) signals measured by air flow meter without correction
DTC P0100
are too strong or too weak (Connection is in open circuit or short circuit).
Mass air flow (MAF) signals measured by air flow meter with correction are
P0101
too strong or too weak (Connection is in open circuit or short circuit).
P0102 Mass air flow sensor negative drift
P0103 Mass air flow sensor positive drift
P0104 Mass air flow sensor zero drift
P1100 Air mass flowmeter software correction is excessive.
Intake air temperature signal Power supply
Intake air flow signal

Air flow meter
Ground signal
Fault Description: Mass air flow (MAF) sensor is an air flow meter which is used in measurement of air inflow of
engine. ECU correctly supplies fuel supply with the use of signals from mass air flow sensor for all engine speeds and
loads. In the case of small air inflow of engine, it is indicated there is vehicle deceleration or engine idling. In the case
of large air inflow of engine, it is indicated there is vehicle acceleration or high engine load. Mass air flow (MAF)
sensor possesses circuits as follows:
One ignition 1 voltage circuit
One ground circuit
One signal circuit
ECU applies a voltage to sensor via signal circuit. The sensor uses the voltage to generate a corresponding frequency
for air inflow which gets through the sensor. During idle running, the frequency changes in the range around 2000Hz.
ECU calculates predicted air flow value with input signals from sensors as follows:
Atmosphere pressure in the case of ignition key connection
Intake manifold absolute pressure sensor
Intake air temperature sensor
Engine coolant temperature sensor
Engine speed
ECU compares mass air flow sensor frequency signal with predicted air flow valve and verify signal lag (lack of
change), too low or too high signal level under given operation condition with the comparison. When D-value
between actual mass air flow sensor frequency signal which is detected by ECU and air flow meter calculated value is
not in preconcerted range, DTC occurs.
Diagnosis Hint: Check mass air flow sensor harness and verify whether harness arrangement is too close to
components as follows:
172

— Additional accessories after sale
— Secondary ignition wires or coils
— Solenoid valve
— Relay
— Motor
In the case of idle running or deceleration, air flow goes through sensor may reach its minimum and this may lead to
DTC occurrence. Check down stream of mass air flow sensor for vacuum leaks. Check mass air flow sensing elements
for affixed dirt or scraps. Check intake system for water penetration. Once there is water in mass air flow sensor, it
will lead to sensor deviation and DTC occurrence.
Wide open throttle during vehicle acceleration for starting may lead to rapid parameter increase of mass air flow
sensor on fault diagnostic apparatus. In other words, 3-10g/sec during idle running will increase to 150g/sec for shift
from the 1st gear to the 2nd. If parameters do not increase, check intake system and exhaust system for clogging.
Check engine coolant temperature sensor for deviation or lag.
In the case of too high resistance in ignition 1 voltage circuit (i.e. equals to or more than 15Ω), DTC occurs.
Terminal ECU
K12 Intake air temperature signal
K20 Intake air flow signal
K63 Ground signal
173

Fault Tree:
Check air flow meter connectors.

检查空气流量计接插件
Repair accordingly.
接插件问题
检查ECU接插件
Check ECU connectors.
接插件问题
Repair accordingly.
Check for continuity and insulating property.

Repair the harness.

电气问题
更换空气流量计
Replace air flow meter.

问题仍否存在 Y 联系技术支持
174

23.
Connection for additional air temperature sensor of air mass flowmeter is

DTC P0110
short or open.
Temperature for additional air temperature sensor of air mass flowmeter is
P0112
too low.
Temperature for additional air temperature sensor of air mass flowmeter is
P0113
too high.
Analog output voltage for additional air temperature sensor of air mass
P1101
flowmeter is too high or too low.
Output duty ratio signal level of additional air temperature sensor of air
P1102
mass flowmeter is too high or too low.
Output duty ratio signal cycle of additional air temperature sensor of air
P1106
mass flowmeter is too long.
Output duty ratio signal cycle of additional air temperature sensor of air
P1107
mass flowmeter is too short.
Fault Description: Intake air temperature (IAT) sensor is a variable resistance for measurement of engine intake air
temperature. Air temperature sensor possesses a signal circuit and a low reference voltage circuit. ECU provides air
temperature sensor signal circuit with 5V voltage and provides air temperature sensor reference voltage circuit with
grounding. When air temperature sensor is under cold status, sensor resistance value is high. When air temperature
increases, sensor resistance value decreases. In the case of high sensor resistance, voltage of air temperature sensor
signal circuit detected by ECU is high. With decrease of sensor resistance, voltage of air temperature sensor signal
circuit detected by ECU reduces. In the case of too low detected air temperature signal voltage by ECU (it is indicated
that temperature is too high) or too high signal voltage (it is indicated that temperature is too low), DTC for this
occurs.
Differences among temperature, resistance and voltage are shown as the table below:
Temperature Temperature Sensor Resistance Temperature Sensor Signal Voltage

Low High High
High Low Low
Diagnosis Hint: Test air temperature sensor under different temperatures for evaluation of sensor errors. In the case of
sensor error, there will be control performance fault. Lay the engine up for one night, D-value between air temperature
sensor and engine coolant temperature sensor displayed values should be within 3°C (5°F). Please refer to
“Temperature and Resistance”. In the case of too high resistance of temperature sensor signal circuit or low reference
voltage circuit, DTC may not occur.
Check ECU harness connector for poor contact between ECU and temperature sensor
− Terminal looseness
− Poor fit of matching parts
− Locking plate fracture
− Terminal deformation or damage
175

Check harness damage. If the harness seems to be normal, move relevant connector and harness for intake air
temperature (IAT) sensor and check display about IAT on diagnostic tool. If display of IAT changes, it is indicated that
there is fault in the part.
Fault Tree:
检查传感器连接
Check sensor connection.
接插件问题
Repair accordingly.
检查传感器电阻（检查其是否与车辆
Check sensor resistance (for conformity with vehicle
状态一致
status).
器件问题
Component fault Y 更换传感器
Replace the sensor.
检查是否为ECU插接件问题
Check ECU for connector faults. Y 做必要的修理
Repair accordingly.
电气问题
Repair the harness.
Get联系技术支持
the Technical Support.
176

24.
DTC P0300 Multi-cylinder misfire

P0301 The 1st cylinder misfire
P0302 The 2nd cylinder misfire
P0303 The 3rd cylinder misfire
P0304 The 4th cylinder misfire
Fault Description: ECU determines when engine misfire occurs with the help of information from ignition control
(IC) module and camshaft position (CMP) sensors. ECU can detect single misfire via crankshaft speed change for
each cylinder. In the case of some vehicle running condition, too high misfire rate will lead to three way catalytic
converter (TWC) overheating. In the case of three way catalytic converter overheating, MIL will flash. If misfire rate
detected by ECU is enough to make emission level to exceed mandatory standard, DTC occurs. If diagnosis operation
fails in two continuous ignition cycle, control module lightens MIL. Control module records operation condition when
diagnosis is failed. For the first diagnosis failure, control module will keep this information in fault record. If
diagnosis failure occurs during the successive ignition cycle, control module records operation condition under
diagnosis failure and writes the operation condition in frozen fault condition and updates fault record.
Diagnosis Hint: Influence factors for misfire diagnosis—In the case of misfire diagnosis, it is required that all
vehicle parts are under mass production or equivalent. All changes which may influence engine crankshaft speed will
interfere with correct diagnosis for misfire.
In the case of faults in components as follows, misfire diagnosis will pause to avoid incorrect diagnostic
results—intake pressure/throttle position rationality fault; low voltage or open circuit of intake pressure sensor circuit;
high voltage of intake pressure sensor circuit; low voltage or open circuit of coolant temperature sensor circuit; high
voltage of coolant temperature sensor circuit; high voltage of throttle position sensor; low voltage of throttle position
sensor; signal interference of crankshaft position sensor circuit; no signals in crankshaft position sensor circuit; no
signals in camshaft position sensor circuit; camshaft position sensor rationality fault; high voltage or open circuit of
intake air temperature sensor circuit; low voltage of intake air temperature sensor circuit; no signals in vehicle speed
sensor.
Severe vibration which is not caused by engine may lead to setting fault (vibration source may lead to wears or
damages to brake discs with different thicknesses and additional drive belts).
177

Fault Tree:
关闭点火开关并检查喷油器接插件
Turn off ignition switch and check fuel injector connectors.
接插件问题
Repair accordingly.
检查曲轴位置传感器间隙
Check crankshaft position sensor clearance.
调整曲轴位置传感器间隙
Adjust clearance of crankshaft position sensor
曲轴位置传感器间隙问题？
Are faults in crankshaft position sensor clearance? Y
（0.6~0.7mm）
(0.6mm~0.7mm)
检查减震皮带轮与传感器
Check damping belt pulley and sensor.
Readjust installation of crankshaft damping belt

重新调整曲轴减震皮带轮安装，
Check belt pulley and sensor for interference. pulley. If faults occur again, replace damping
皮带轮与传感器是否干涉 Y 还不行，更换减震皮带轮并进行
齿讯学习
belt pulley and carry out gear message learning
Check crankshaft position sensor.

检查曲轴位置传感器
Faults are in crankshaft position sensor. Replace crankshaft position sensor.

曲轴位置传感器问题 Y 更换曲轴位置传感器
Get the 联系技术支持

Technical Support.
178

25.
DTC P0401 Actual fresh air inflow is larger than target air inflow set by EGR system.
P0402 Actual fresh air inflow is smaller than target air inflow set by EGR system.
ECU internal drive module of EGR valve actuator control wire is
P0403
overheated.
P0404 EGR valve actuator control wire is open.
Voltage of EGR valve position sensor is below the lower limit (Connection is
P0405
short to ground).
Voltage of EGR valve position sensor is above the upper limit (Connection is
P0406
open short to high level).
P0489 EGR valve actuator control wire is open.
P0490 EGR valve actuator control wire is short to high level.
EGR5V Power supply
EGR position signal EGR position sensor
EGR ground signal
EGR actuator power supply
EGR actuator ground EGR actuator
Fault Description: Exhaust gas recirculation system is applied in reduction of Nitrogen oxides emission due to high
temperature combustion. Main component of the system is electronic control exhaust gas recirculation valve. Exhaust
gas recirculation valve delivers a small amount of exhaust gas into intake manifold to reduce combustion temperature.
Recirculation gas flow is controlled by ECU according to changes in engine load. In the case of deceleration, gas flow
test for exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) system is carried out by ECU. Therefore, ECU gives a transient command to
open exhaust gas recirculation valve and simultaneously monitors signals of intake manifold air pressure (MAP)
sensor and exhaust gas recirculation position sensor. In the case of inconformity of intake manifold absolute pressure
signals with exhaust gas recirculation valve spool shaft position, ECU records measured D-value of intake manifold
absolute pressure and adjust calibrated failure counter to failure technical threshold value. For error quantities of
detected exhaust gas recirculation flow are different, required test times for exhaust gas recirculation flow concerned
excessive failure technical threshold value of may be different, too. When ECU detects incorrect control signals, DTC
occurs.
Diagnosis Hint: Carry out inspection to engine control system; check engine for historical faults; check exhaust gas
recirculation system for faults as follows—vacuum leaks between exhaust gas recirculation valve and intake manifold.
In the case of carbon deposition or exhaust gas noise around component faying surface, it is indicated there is external
leakage. Check passage and exhaust gas recirculation valve for clogging; check exhaust system for relevant faults
(such as leakage due to exhaust component damage, clogging due to excessive back pressure and too low engine
vacuum and etc.); finally, carry out inspection to mechanical system.
179

Terminal ECU
K23 EGR position sensor 5V power supply
K31 EGR position sensor position signal
K39 EGR position sensor ground
A04 EGR actuator power supply
A19 EGR actuator ground
180

Fault Tree:
Check actuator connectors.
Check actuator resistance.
Actuator resistance faults Replace the actuator.
Check ECU for connector faults. Repair accordingly.
Replace components.
181

26.
DTC P0480 ECU Fan I control wire is open

P0481 ECU Fan II control wire is open.
P0483 ECU Fan I control wire internal drive module is overheated.
P0484 ECU Fan II control wire internal drive module is overheated.
P0691 ECU Fan I control wire is short to ground.
P0692 ECU Fan I control wire is short to high level.
P0693 ECU Fan II control wire is short to ground.
P0694 ECU Fan II control wire is short to high level.
Fault Description: ECU provides low-speed relay with grounding via so-called “drive” internal solid component in
order to control cooling fan low speed operation. For cooling fan high speed operation, ECU adopts the method of
high speed and S/P replay control circuit grounding with simultaneous low-speed control circuit grounding. Battery
positive voltage is provided to low-speed, high-speed and S/P fan relays. When ECU commands fan relay to be
connected, control circuit voltage is low level which is close to 0V. When ECU commands fan relay to be
disconnected, control circuit voltage should be high level which is close to battery voltage. ECU monitors relay
control circuit for conditions as follows:
It is short to ground.
It is short to voltage.
It is open.
When ECU detects incorrect voltage in low-speed or high-speed drive circuit, DTC occurs and corresponding drive
will stop operating.
Cooling Fan Relay I control circuit controls low-speed cooling fan relay.
Cooling Fan Relay II control circuit controls high-speed cooling fan relay.
Diagnosis Hint: Check harness for intermittency and good contact.
Prior to maintenance, remove all fragments from connector surface. Check connector pads for correct installation to
prevent contamination from entering prior to diagnosis and component replacement.
z Poor terminal connection—Check harness connectors for looseness, mismatching, retainer damage, improper
shape or damage and connection failure with wires. Apply corresponding matching terminals for test of proper
tension.
z Harness damage—Check wire harness for damage. In the case of no harness faults, move relevant connectors and
wire harness and observe display of fault diagnostic apparatus. Fault diagnostic apparatus displays changes to
indicate fault positions.
z Check ECU and engine ground connection for reliability and cleanness. If it is determined that DTC is an
intermittent fault, please refer to Fault Record to check the time of last DTC occurrence.
182

Fault Tree:
Check relay connectors.
Replace the relay (carry out ISO cycle).
ISO cycle faults Get the Technical Support.
183

27.
DTC P0487 Throttle valve actuator control wire is open.

P0488 ECU internal drive module of throttle valve actuator is overheated.
P2141 Throttle valve actuator control wire is short to ground.
P2142 Throttle valve actuator control wire is short to high level.
Fault Description: ECU is the control center for throttle valve actuator control system. ECU can judge driver’s
intention and then calculate corresponding throttle valve response. ECU realizes throttle valve positioning via
providing throttle valve actuator control motor with pulse width modulation (PWM) voltage. Throttle valve actuator
control system adopts circuits as follows:
Motor control 1
Motor control 2
Besides, two processors are applied in throttle valve actuator control system data monitoring. These two processors
are located in ECU, testing data of each other to prove correctness of throttle valve position.
Diagnosis Hint: Check for connection and disconnection faults or seizures due to temperature. Under extremely hot
or cold condition, existed contaminations or freeze may lead to unsmooth component movement.
If it is an intermittent fault, the possible causes may be poor contact, worn wire insulating layer or damaged wire in
insulating layer.
z Poor contact of ECU or exhaust brake valve—Check harness connectors.
– Terminal looseness
– Poor fit of matching parts
–Locking plate fracture
–Terminal deformation or damage
–Poor contact between terminal and wire
z Harness damage—Check harness for damage.
184

Fault Tree:
Check throttle valve actuator
connection.
Connector fault Repair or replace.
Check throttle valve appearance.
Throttle valve faults Replace the throttle valve.
Check ECU connectors. Repair or replace.
Replace the ECU.
185

28.
DTC P0615 ECU starting motor control wire is open or drive module is overheated.
P0616 ECU starting motor control wire is short to ground.
P0617 ECU starting motor control wire is short to high level.
Fault Description: ECU provides starting motor with grounding via so-called “drive” internal solid component in
order to control starting motor operation. Under starting motor control circuit command, when fault diagnostic
apparatus is connected, it is indicated that starting motor circuit is grounded via control module in order to provide
starting motor with voltage; when fault diagnostic apparatus is disconnected, it is indicated that starting motor circuit
is not connected via control module command currently. ECU monitors starting motor circuit for conditions as
follows:
It is open.
When ECU detects incorrect voltage signals, DTC occurs and corresponding drive will stop operating.
Prior to component maintenance, remove all fragments from connector surface. Check connector pads for correct
installation to prevent contamination from entering prior to diagnosis and component replacement.
tension.
186

Fault Tree:
Check starting motor connectors.
Check for continuity and insulating property
Replace starting motor relay.
Are faults still in existence? Get the Technical Support.
187

29.
ECU instrument panel engine speed output connecting wire is short to high
DTC P1605
level.
ECU instrument panel engine speed output connecting wire is short to
P1606
ground.
P1607 ECU instrument panel engine speed output connecting wire is open.
Fault Description: Vehicle speed sensor (VSS) provides ECU with vehicle speed information. When rotor teeth on
transmission output shaft go through sensor magnetic field, vehicle speed sensor generates signal voltage. Frequency
of this signal voltage increases with vehicle speed increase. ECU transforms the signal voltage into vehicle speed and
displays the speed on instrument panel via control circuit. ECU determines vehicle operation condition with vehicle
speed signals in order to guide driver operation. ECU monitors the circuit between ECU and instrument panel for
conditions as follows:
It is open.
When ECU detects incorrect voltage signals, DTC occurs
tension.
188

Fault Tree:
Check connection between instrument panel
检查仪表板与ECU的连接
and ECU.
接插件问题
Repair accordingly.
Check continuity and insulating property
电气问题
Repair the harness.
更换相应的器件
问题仍存在
Does the problem still exist? Y 联系技术支持
189

30.
ECU instrument panel preheating indicator lamp output connecting wire is

DTC P1608
short to high level.
P1609
short to ground.
P160A
open.
ECU instrument panel preheating indicator lamp output wire drive module
P160B
is overheated.
Fault Description: During glow plug operation, preheater relay will send a signal to ECU. Then, ECU sends
command to preheating indicator lamp on instrument panel via control circuit. Driver carries out the next operation
via observing preheating indicator lamp status. ECU monitors the circuit between ECU and instrument panel for
conditions as follows:
It is open.
When ECU detects incorrect voltage signals, DTC occurs.
tension.
Terminal ECU
K92 Preheating time indicator lamp
190

Fault Tree:
Check connection between instrument
panel and ECU.
Check for continuity and insulating

property.
191

31.
DTC P2228 Atmosphere pressure sensor output voltage is too low.

P2229 Atmosphere pressure sensor output voltage is too high.
Fault Description: Atmosphere pressure indicates connection of ignition switch. When engine stops operation,
control module calculates atmosphere pressure with signals sent by intake manifold absolute pressure sensor. Intake
manifold absolute pressure sensor responses to internal pressure changes of intake manifold and the pressure changes
according to different engine loads. Intake manifold absolute pressure sensor possesses circuits as follows:
5V reference voltage circuit
Low reference voltage circuit
Intake manifold absolute pressure sensor signal circuit
ECU provides intake manifold absolute pressure sensor with 5V voltage via 5V reference voltage circuit. ECU
supplies grounding via low reference voltage circuit and intake manifold absolute pressure sensor provides ECU with
a signal via signal circuit. This signal is related to intake manifold internal pressure changes. When ignition switch is
connected and engine is shut down, intake manifold absolute pressure sensor displays signals of atmosphere pressure.
In the case of engine running with wide open throttle, reading of atmosphere pressure will be renewed. ECU
determines whether voltage exceeds normal range via detecting intake manifold absolute pressure sensor signals.
When intake manifold absolute pressure sensor displays atmosphere pressure, if sensor signal voltage is not in
specified range, DTC occurs.
Diagnosis Hint: When ignition switch is connected and engine is shut down, intake manifold pressure equals to
atmosphere pressure and signal voltage is low level. ECU takes this information as vehicle elevation indication.
Moreover, to make comparison between this reading with that of an intact vehicle which possesses the same sensor is
a good method for sensor accuracy inspection. D-value of two readings should not exceed 0.4V. It is necessary to
carry out comprehensive inspection to pressure source of supercharger pressure sensor in order to check intake system
for clogging.
In the case of engine start, intake manifold absolute pressure sensor can detect any change of manifold pressure. This
test is carried out to determine sensor lag at a certain value.
In the case of normal intake manifold absolute pressure sensor, it will make rapid response to changes of acceleration
pedal positions and it should not be “lagged” or slower than changes of acceleration pedal position.
192

Fault Tree:
Check sensor connection.
Check sensor resistance (for conformity with

vehicle status).
Sensor resistance faults Replace the sensor.
Check ECU for connector faults. Repair accordingly.
Replace components.
193

32.
DTC P2264 There are faults in water level sensor of diesel filter oil-water separator.
P2267 Water in diesel filter oil-water separator is overflowed.
Water level signal
Drain switch
Fault Description: Main function of oil-water separator is to separate moisture from oil in fuel to ensure combustion
quality of fuel. When fuel oil goes through oil-water separator, oil content and moisture content in the fuel are
separated. For water density is larger than that of oil, separated water is stored in “water tank” under filter element.
Fuel filter lower water level sensor is applied in water level detection in “water tank”. When accumulated water
reaches certain level, warning lamp on instrument panel will be lightened to remind driver to carry out draining. In the
case of delayed water drainage, DTC occurs.
Diagnosis Hint: In the case of DTC existence, it is necessary to check water level first of all. Normally, carry out
water drainage for every 8000-10000km engine running. For oil quality problems, water drainage should be carried
out ahead of time for fuel which contains much moisture. Besides, test relevant connectors for this diagnostic
procedure for short circuit of terminals or poor contact of wire, avoiding water level sensor signal distortions caused
by short circuit or poor contact.
194

Fault Tree:
Drain filter.
Is there still water? Eliminate the fault.
Check water level sensor for electrical faults.
Are there still electrical faults? Repair accordingly.
Check water level sensor connectors.
Are there still connector faults? Repair accordingly.
Check water level sensor resistance.
Replace water level sensor.

Is there still resistance fault?
Are there still connector faults? Repair accordingly.
195

33.
DTC P2299 Depress accelerator pedal and brake pedal at the same time.
Fault Description: Accelerator pedal assembly consists of two accelerator pedal position (APP) sensors. Accelerator
pedal position sensors are installed on pedal assembly and they are not maintainable. When driver depresses
accelerator pedal, air inflow of cylinder is increased and ECU increases fuel injector pulse width in order to supply
additional fuel during acceleration process for engine demand. Brake switch is a normally open one. When brake
pedal is depressed, this switch is closed in order to provide TCU with voltage for brake application. In the case of
misoperation of driver during driving, brake system will be locked after depressing brake pedal and brake pedal can
not return to its original position. Under such condition, depressing accelerator pedal will lead to DTC occurrence due
to conflict between acceleration and brake signals in the case of engine braking status. In addition, improper
maintenance or ECU control circuit failures will lead to such faults.
Diagnosis Hint: Check brake system and acceleration system for stuck pedal position without pedal returns. Check
the circuit between ECU and components for good contact of connection and good harness insulating property. For
connection test for ECU and components, diagnostic connectors should be applied.
196

Fault Tree:
Check brake system and acceleration system
mechanical parts.
Mechanical part failures Replace it accordingly.
Check accelerator switch adjusting position.
Adjust accelerator switch position

Check switch position for improper (accelerator pedal electric
adjustment. potential standard value: 750±
85mv)
Check ECU for connector faults.

Replace it accordingly.
Check connecting circuit

between ECU and the system.
Connecting circuit failures Replace the harness.
Replace the ECU and carry out debugging.
197

34.
In the case of the maximum fault reading, there are EEPROM errors/ICM
DTC U0167
time-out communication failures.
Fault Description: They are mainly taken as integrity failures for ECU internal microprocessor, being applied in
determination of ECU programming procedure implementation. In the case of engine shutdown and ignition switch
connection, ECU carries out self-diagnosis. In the case of diagnosis failure, control module records operation
condition under diagnosis failure and stores this information in “Fault Record”, DTC occurs. During engine operation,
when there is deviation between ECU detected signals and standard signals, the fault will be stored and expressed as
DTC via internal communication module of ECU. In the case of external signal intrusion, this will lead to system
disorder and DTC occurs. When various faults occur at the same time under the same operation condition, there will
be multiple DTCs. For there is a process for ECU response to each fault, ECU response time will be longer in the case
of multiple simultaneous faults in existence. During response process, DTC may occur due to ECU internal
communication errors or hardware faults.
Diagnosis Hint: In the case of fault occurrence, relevant test can be carried out after ECU replacement for possible
fault cause may be too long ECU internal response time. Check ECU circuit to verify whether it is circuit failure that
leads to fault occurrence.
198

Fault Tree:
Control circuit failures Repair the harness.
Check ECU.
Replace the ECU or refresh ECU

ECU faults data.
199

35.
DTC P0045 Supercharger actuator control wire is open.

ECU internal drive module of supercharger actuator control wire is
P0046
overheated.
P0047 Supercharger actuator control wire is short to ground.
P0048 Supercharger actuator control wire is short to high level.
Control signal Booster actuator
ECU is the control center fro supercharger actuator control system. ECU calculates corresponding supercharger
actuator response according to engine operation condition. ECU realizes actuator positioning via providing
supercharger actuator control motor with pulse width modulation voltage.
Diagnosis Hint: Check for connection and disconnection faults or seizures due to temperature. Under extremely hot
or cold condition, existed contaminations or freeze may lead to unsmooth component movement.
If it is an intermittent fault, the possible causes may be poor contact, worn wire insulating layer or damaged wire in
insulating layer.
z Poor contact of ECU or exhaust brake valve —Check harness connectors.
– Terminal looseness
– Poor fit of matching parts
–Locking plate fracture
–Terminal deformation or damage
–Poor contact between terminal and wire
z Harness damage—Check harness for damage.
200

Fault Tree:

检查ECU的接插件
Connector
接插件问题 fault Y Repair
做必要的修理accordingly.
Check for 检查连续性和绝缘性

continuity and insulating property.
Control
控制线路问题circuit failures Y Repair
修理线束the harness.
Check
检查ECUECU.
ECU faults
ECU问题 Y Replace the ECU or refresh ECU
更换ECU或者刷新ECU数据
data.

联系技术支持
201

36.
DTC P1070 Catalytic converter is clogged.

P2002 Catalytic converter is removed.
P2454 Catalytic converter front and rear differential pressure is too low.
P2455 Catalytic converter front and rear differential pressure is too high.
5V power supply
Differential
pressure Differential pressure signal
sensor
Ground
Differential pressure sensor is a Hall Effect switch. ECU provides differential pressure sensor with 5V voltage via 5V
reference voltage circuit and provides the sensor with grounding via low reference voltage circuit. Differential
pressure sensor provides ECU with signal voltage according to front and rear differential pressure changes of catalytic
converter. ECU determines catalytic converter differential pressure with this signal voltage. Differential pressure
sensor circuit is connected to ECU directly. Moreover, differential pressure sensor can be applied in determination of
catalytic converter damages. Circuits between differential pressure sensor and ECU include the followings:
Differential pressure sensor high reference voltage circuit
Ground circuit
Differential pressure signal circuit
When ECU detects incorrect sensor signals or no signals, DTC occurs.
Diagnosis Hint: Poor terminal connection—Check harness connectors for looseness, mismatching, retainer damage,
improper shape or damage and connection failure with wires. Apply corresponding matching terminals for test of
proper tension.
Harness damage—Check wire harness for damage. In the case of no harness faults, move relevant connectors and
wire harness and observe display of fault diagnostic apparatus. Fault diagnostic apparatus displays changes to indicate
fault positions.
Check ECU and engine ground connection for reliability and cleanness. If it is determined that DTC is an intermittent
fault, please refer to Fault Record to check the time of last DTC occurrence.
Terminal ECU
K27 Differential pressure sensor power supply
K59 Differential pressure sensor signal terminal
K80 Ground
202

Fault Tree:
Connector fault Repair or replace.
Check the sensor.
Sensor faults Replace the sensor.
Check ECU connectors. Repair or replace.

property
Replace components.
203

Preface
This SUNRAY Service Manual is hereby compiled by the Customer Service

Department of JAC to help the technical service personnel correctly understand and
get familiar with SUNRAY products of JAC INTERNATIONAL better and to provide
them with the ability of quick repair and proper maintenance. This manual comprises
five volumes: Engine Control, Engine Mechanical, Chassis, Body Electrical, and
Body Accessories.
The Body Electrical Volume details the technical standards of electrical component
removal/installation, test, debugging and diagnosis for SUNRAY long-wheelbase
vehicles, including whole vehicle circuit diagrams, definitions of connectors and
locations of ground points for SUNRAY vehicles for quicker service and maintenance
of customer.
When replacement is necessary, only genuine spare parts recommended by JAC can
be adopted.
No part of this manual can be reproduced or used in any form or by any mean without
written permission. All Rights Reserved.
JAC INTERNATIONAL
March 2011

Contentss
Body Electrical Volume Content
Contentss
Battery and Charging System
Battery........................................................................................................................................................................ SC 2
Mounting Position................................................................................................................................................. SC 2
Precautions.............................................................................................................................................................SC 3
Generator....................................................................................................................................................................SC 4
Overview............................................................................................................................................................... SC 4
Battery........................................................................................................................................................................ SC 5
Maintenance...........................................................................................................................................................SC 5
Fault diagnosis....................................................................................................................................................... SC 7
Generator..................................................................................................................................................................SC 11
Fault determination.............................................................................................................................................. SC 11
Operating principle.............................................................................................................................................. SC 12
Battery...................................................................................................................................................................... SC 14
Removal of Battery..............................................................................................................................................SC 14
Installation of Battery.......................................................................................................................................... SC 16
Generator..................................................................................................................................................................SC 18
Removal of Generator..........................................................................................................................................SC 18
Installation of Generator...................................................................................................................................... SC 21
Instrument and Warning System

Instrument..................................................................................................................................................................IP 24
Mounting position................................................................................................................................................ IP 24
Performance characteristics..................................................................................................................................IP 25
Instrument..................................................................................................................................................................IP 26
Function description.............................................................................................................................................IP 26
Definitions of pins................................................................................................................................................IP 32
Instrument..................................................................................................................................................................IP 33
Removal of Instrument.........................................................................................................................................IP 33
Instrument..................................................................................................................................................................IP 35
Basic parameters.................................................................................................................................................. IP 35
ETACS Body Computer
ETACS..................................................................................................................................................................... ET 38
Mounting position...............................................................................................................................................ET 38
Information functions..........................................................................................................................................ET 39
ETACS..................................................................................................................................................................... ET 40
System structure..................................................................................................................................................ET 40
Introduction functions.........................................................................................................................................ET 41
Control strategy...................................................................................................................................................ET 47
Diagnosis and Service.........................................................................................................................................ET 49
ETACS Pin Definition........................................................................................................................................ ET 50
ETACS..................................................................................................................................................................... ET 52
Removal of ETACS............................................................................................................................................ ET 52
-1-

Contentss
Installation of ETACS.........................................................................................................................................ET 53
ETACS..................................................................................................................................................................... ET 54
Basic parameters................................................................................................................................................. ET 54
Lighting System
Lighting.................................................................................................................................................................... LT 56
Overview............................................................................................................................................................. LT 56
Lighting configuration table................................................................................................................................LT 58
Introduction to functions..................................................................................................................................... LT 59
Fault diagnosis.................................................................................................................................................... LT 62
Removal of headlamp..........................................................................................................................................LT 76
Removal of clearance lamps................................................................................................................................LT 77
Removal of front fog lamps................................................................................................................................ LT 78
Removal of ceiling lamps....................................................................................................................................LT 79
Removal of rear tail lamps.................................................................................................................................. LT 80
Removal of high-mounted brake lamp................................................................................................................ LT 81
Removal of rear fog lamp....................................................................................................................................LT 82
Lighting System........................................................................................................................................................LT 83
Basic parameters................................................................................................................................................. LT 83
Wiper and Washer System
Wiper..................................................................................................................................................................... WW 86
Mounting position............................................................................................................................................ WW 87
Information functions.......................................................................................................................................WW 89
Wiper..................................................................................................................................................................... WW 91
Definitions of pins............................................................................................................................................WW 91
Troubleshooting................................................................................................................................................WW 92
Wiper..................................................................................................................................................................... WW 95
Removal of the wiper....................................................................................................................................... WW 95
Removal of the windshield washing fluid reservoir.........................................................................................WW 97
Removal of the Wiper washing nozzle.............................................................................................................WW 98
Wiper..................................................................................................................................................................... WW 99
Basic parameters.............................................................................................................................................. WW 99
Reversing Radar
Reversing Radar..................................................................................................................................................... PT 102
Mounting position sensor..................................................................................................................................PT 102
Operating principle........................................................................................................................................... PT 103
Definitions of reversing radar computer pins....................................................................................................PT 104
Troubleshooting................................................................................................................................................ PT 106
Removal of the reversing radar computer......................................................................................................... PT 108
Removal of the reversing radar sensor.............................................................................................................. PT 110
Reversing Radar......................................................................................................................................................PT 111
Basic parameters................................................................................................................................................PT 111
-2-

Contentss
Audio/ Video System
Audio/Video
Radio...................................................................................................................................................................... AV 114
Mounting position.............................................................................................................................................AV 114
Introduction functions.......................................................................................................................................AV 115
Precautions........................................................................................................................................................AV 119
Radio......................................................................................................................................................................AV 121
Troubleshooting................................................................................................................................................AV 121
Radio......................................................................................................................................................................AV 124
Removal of Radio.............................................................................................................................................AV 124
Removal of loudspeakers..................................................................................................................................AV 125
Radio......................................................................................................................................................................AV 127
Basic parameters...............................................................................................................................................AV 127
Seat Belt
Seat Belt................................................................................................................................................................. SB 130
Overview...........................................................................................................................................................SB 130
Seat Belt................................................................................................................................................................. SB 131
Troubleshooting................................................................................................................................................ SB 131
Seat Belt................................................................................................................................................................. SB 132
Removal of seat belt......................................................................................................................................... SB 132
Removal of seat belt buckle lock...................................................................................................................... SB 134
Power Window
Power Window..................................................................................................................................................... GW 136
Installation position.........................................................................................................................................GW 136
Operation Instructions..................................................................................................................................... GW 137
Power Window..................................................................................................................................................... GW 138
Troubleshooting.............................................................................................................................................. GW 138
Power Window..................................................................................................................................................... GW 142
Removal of window regulator motor.............................................................................................................. GW 142
Removal of window regulator switch............................................................................................................. GW 143
Electric rear-view mirro

Electric rear-view mirro........................................................................................................................................ EM 148
Overview......................................................................................................................................................... EM 148
Electric rear-view mirro........................................................................................................................................ EM 149
Removal of rear view mirror........................................................................................................................... EM 149
Removal of rear view mirror switch................................................................................................................ EM 150
Horn
orn......................................................................................................................................................................HO 152
Horn
Mounting position............................................................................................................................................HO 152
orn......................................................................................................................................................................HO 153
Horn
Troubleshooting............................................................................................................................................... HO 153
orn......................................................................................................................................................................HO 156
Horn
Removal of Horn..............................................................................................................................................HO 156
-3-

Contentss
Air Conditioner
Air Conditioner...................................................................................................................................................... AT 158
Overview...........................................................................................................................................................AT 158
Precautions........................................................................................................................................................AT 159
Functional operation......................................................................................................................................... AT 162
Operating principle........................................................................................................................................... AT 165
Air distribution system introduction................................................................................................................. AT 167
Leak test............................................................................................................................................................AT 168
A/C system performance testing....................................................................................................................... AT 169
Refrigerant recovery ....................................................................................................................................... AT 172
A/C System Performance Table........................................................................................................................ AT 174
System Testing.................................................................................................................................................. AT 176
Removal of front A/C........................................................................................................................................AT 189
Removal of top evaporator tank........................................................................................................................AT 191
Removal of front condenser..............................................................................................................................AT 193
Removal of bottom condenser.......................................................................................................................... AT 195
Removal of heater water tank........................................................................................................................... AT 196
Removal of after motor.....................................................................................................................................AT 198
Removal of compressor.................................................................................................................................... AT 202
Installation of compressor assembly................................................................................................................. AT 204
Removal of front A/C panel.............................................................................................................................. AT 205
Removal of rear A/C panel............................................................................................................................... AT 206
Basic parameters............................................................................................................................................... AT 207
Circuit Diagram
Diagram specification............................................................................................................................................ EC 210
Circuit Diagram..................................................................................................................................................... EC 218
Interior fuse box................................................................................................................................................EC 218
Exterior fuse box.............................................................................................................................................. EC 219
Start charging system........................................................................................................................................EC 220
Engine ECU electronic control unit..................................................................................................................EC 222
Horn..................................................................................................................................................................EC 217
ABS system...................................................................................................................................................... EC 228
Airbag system................................................................................................................................................... EC 229
Reversing system..............................................................................................................................................EC 230
Electric rear view mirror...................................................................................................................................EC 231
Audio system.................................................................................................................................................... EC 231
Cigarette lighter and fuel heater....................................................................................................................... EC 233
Rear ceiling lamp and front fog lamp............................................................................................................... EC 234
Rear fog lamp................................................................................................................................................... EC 235
High beam and low beam................................................................................................................................. EC 236
-4-

Body Electrical Volume Content Contentss
Turn signal lamp and hazard warning lamp......................................................................................................EC 237
Small lamp........................................................................................................................................................EC 238
Central control.................................................................................................................................................. EC 239
Wiper and washer............................................................................................................................................. EC 240
Power window.................................................................................................................................................. EC 241
Front A/C system.............................................................................................................................................. EC 242
Rear A/C system............................................................................................................................................... EC 243
ETACS..............................................................................................................................................................EC 244
Instrument.........................................................................................................................................................EC 247
Self diagnosis....................................................................................................................................................EC 250
Harness layout........................................................................................................................................................EC 251
Main harness.....................................................................................................................................................EC 251
Engine compartment harness............................................................................................................................EC 252
Left front door harness..................................................................................................................................... EC 255
Right front door harness................................................................................................................................... EC 256
Left tail lamp harness....................................................................................................................................... EC 257
Right tail lamp harness..................................................................................................................................... EC 258
Left back door harness......................................................................................................................................EC 259
Rear loud speaker harness................................................................................................................................ EC 260
ABS harness..................................................................................................................................................... EC 261
Fuel tank harness.............................................................................................................................................. EC 262
Reversing radar harness....................................................................................................................................EC 263
-5-

SC Battery and Charging System
Battery and Charging System

Applied models: SUNRAY products manufactured by JAC
Subject Page
Instruction and Operation
Battery..............................................................................................................................................................................2
Mounting Position....................................................................................................................................................... 2
Precautions.................................................................................................................................................................. 3
Generator..........................................................................................................................................................................4
Overview..................................................................................................................................................................... 4
Diagnosis and Testing
Battery..............................................................................................................................................................................5
Maintenance................................................................................................................................................................ 5
Fault diagnosis.............................................................................................................................................................7
Generator........................................................................................................................................................................11
Fault determination....................................................................................................................................................11
Operating principle.................................................................................................................................................... 12
Removal and Installation
Battery............................................................................................................................................................................14
Removal of Battery....................................................................................................................................................14
Installation of Battery................................................................................................................................................ 16
Generator........................................................................................................................................................................18
Removal of Generator............................................................................................................................................... 18
Installation of Generator............................................................................................................................................21
-1-

Battery
Maintenance-free battery is adopted by Sunray series with characteristics in low electrolyte consumption. In the
service life of the battery, there is no need to replenish with distilled water. Moreover, other characteristics of the
battery are shock resistance, high temperature resistance and low self discharge. Therefore, the service life of this
battery is twice as long as that of general batteries.
Mounting Position of Battery

The battery is mounted on the right side of the engine compartment.
-2-

Instruction and Operatio
Operationn
Precautions of Battery
tools or fault diagnosis with metal wires.

Warning: Keep the battery out of the reach of
children. Since there is sulfuric acid in the battery, the
contact of the sulfuric acid with the skin, eyes or Warning: It is necessary to connect the charger
clothes should be avoided. In the case of working with the battery properly before turning on the
close to the battery, it is necessary to protect your eyes charger or it may lead to personal injury.
from being hurt by the spilled out acid solution. Once
the acid solution comes into contact with skin or eyes,
it is necessary to wash with clean water for 15 minutes Warning: It is necessary to turn off the charger
at least and go to a doctor immediately. In the case of before disassembling the battery or it may lead to
mistakenly swallow, it is necessary to go to a doctor personal injury.
immediately or it may lead to personal injury.
Attention: It is avoided to carry out battery
Warning: In general, explosive gas may be charging onboard.
generated by the battery. In the case of misconduct of
it, it may lead to personal injury. Therefore, keep the
Attention: It is not allowed to get close to the
battery out of flames, sparks or burning objects. In the
battery being charged by the generator. If only
case of battery charging or working close to the battery,
generator is applied in battery charging, it is required
it is necessary to protect your face and eyes and
continuous driving over 8 hours for complete charging
maintain good ventilation. Please follow relevant
without any extra load on the charging system.
instructions or it may lead to personal injury.
Warning: In the process of charging equipment

Warning: In the case of mistakenly short circuit
application, it is necessary to follow the instruction of
between the positive and negative terminal posts with
the manufacture or it may lead to personal injury.
a metal conductor (eg.metal tools, metal wires, metal
parts, etc.), in other word, the external short circuit of
the battery occurs, the generated electric arc may Protection: Please wear safety goggles and
result in electrode erosion and melted lead alloy gloves.
splashing even the burning due to the generation of a
lot of heat.
Emergency treatment: In the case of battery
burning, disconnect the external short-circuited metal
Precautionary measure: Prevent direct short wire with the battery, using a monkey spanner or other
circuit between the positive and negative terminal tools and it is not allowed to contact it with hands. At
posts of the battery in battery assembly with metal the same time, put out the fire with extinguisher.
-3-

Generator
Air-cooled generator is adopted by Sunray series vehicle, conducting cooling via the air blowing from the fan behind
the pulley into the generator shell. The generator is the main power of the vehicle with the function of power
supplying to all electric equipments (except starter) in the normal operation of the starter (above the idle speed) as
well as battery charging.
Explosive View of Generator
1. Stator 2.Rear bearing 3.Rotor assembly 4.Retainer

5. Front bearing 6.Front cover 7.Pulley 8.Pulley nut
9.Fan guider 10. Double labyrinth seal 11.IC voltage regulator assembly 12.Diode assembly
13. Rear cover
-4-

Maintenance of Battery
1. Battery status indicator (electric eye): As dual-purpose charger, one with constant
Green: There is sufficient electric quantity in the voltage of 16.0V (maximum permitted voltage
battery for starting the vehicle normally. is equal or under 16.2V or large quantity of
Black: There is no sufficient electric quantity in water shall be electrolyzed which may lead to
the battery and battery boost charge is needed. liquid level decrease, white electric eye and
White: The battery is scrapped and it is necessary scrapped battery) and rated current of 25 ampere
to carry out replacement. shall be applied in battery charging until the
electric eye becomes green. The green electric
2. Boost charge of Battery eye indicates the battery is charged completely.
Under the condition of vehicle starting, in the In the case of no constant voltage charger for
case of abnormal applications like excessively battery charging, charge the battery with
long-term operation of electricals, the electric eye constant current according to following
of the battery becomes darkened even the vehicle specifications:
fails to start because of the power loss of battery (1) Select the charging current with rated
due to the lack of normal battery charging caused capacity of 1/8 ～ 1/10 ampere for battery
by long-term parking and vehicle electric leakage charging and at the end of charging, the
or charging fault in vehicle generator. In this case, voltage of battery shall reach 16V without
it is necessary to carry out external charging any exceedance (in the case of black electric
treatment to the battery. eye of the battery with voltage under 16V at
the end of battery charging, there is no
� Appearance inspection of the battery prior to influence to battery application.) When it
boost charge: can not guaranteed the charging voltage
It is not allowed to charge the battery with a limit of the charger is under 16V, it is
broken case or acid leakage. Please replace the necessary to monitor the end voltage of
battery after identifying the cause. battery to be charged, or there shall be
It is not allowed to carry out boost charge for the battery water loss due to overvoltage
battery with a broken terminal post. Please charging even battery failure.
replace the battery after identifying the cause. (2) After charging completion, verify the color
It is not allowed to charge the battery with a of battery electric eye. In the case of green
white electric eye. Please replace the battery. electric eye, it indicated that the battery is
Prior to boost charge, please clean the terminal charged completely. In the case of black
post, removing the oxide on the surface. electric eye, verify whether charging
connecting wires are connected firmly,
� Precautions in charging: connection points are clean and charging
Wear safety goggles. voltage is 16V. Leave the battery as it is for
Maintain ventilation in charging under normal 24 hours, measure its voltage and carry out
temperature. boost charge according to charging interest.
It is not allowed to smoke in charging to prevent (3) In the case of white electric eye, it indicates
the introduction of fire. that there are bubbles in the electric eye and
In the wire connection after charging, connect the shake the battery slightly to remove these
positive connecting wire firstly; in the wire bubbles. If the electric eye is still white after
disconnection before charging, disconnect the battery shaking (indicating electrolyte loss),
negative connecting wire firstly. replace the battery.
For battery with voltage lower than 11V, there
� Battery boost charge: may be incapable charging phenomenon at the
Confirm that battery terminals are clean and beginning of battery charging. The proportion of
charging circuit is in good connection. sulfuric acid in the battery is close to pure water
Connect the positive pole of the charger with that and battery internal resistance becomes very
of the battery while the negative pole of the large due to serious battery power loss. In this
charger with that of the battery. Do not charge the case, reduce the charging current or use a
series connected battery (24V). charger with a higher power instead, with the
battery charging goes on, the proportion of
sulfuric acid in the battery increases and the
-5-

charging current for battery can return to normal phenomenons like underpowered vehicle starting,
gradually. dim lighting, abnormal honk etc., off-board boost
In the process of charging, if there is a large charge for battery shall be carried out as well as
quantity of acid spraying out from battery vent, normal maintenance. At the same time, pay
stop charging and identify the cause. attention to batteries in the process of charging
In the process of charging, when the battery for batteries with the same capacity and different
temperature exceeds 45 ℃, stop charging. When voltages shall not be charged together. It is not
the battery is cooled down to room temperature, allowed the mixed use of new and old batteries.
go on to charge it with half charging current. � The output voltage of vehicle voltage regulator
In the process of battery boost charge, check the shall be measured after battery loading and shall
status of electric eye once an hour. In the case of be regulated in the range of 13.8~14.8 V
green electric eye, it indicates that the battery is according to vehicle service condition. The
charged completely and stop charging. recommended voltage is 14.4V. In the case of
After charging completion and relevant test, it is frequent vehicle application, it is easy to cause
recommended to apply grease on battery battery overcharge and the voltage should be
terminals to avoid electrolytic corrosion. regulated to a lower one. On the contrary, in the
case of infrequent vehicle application or frequent
3. Correct Application of Battery vehicle start, the voltage should be regulated to a
� The discharging time of battery in large current higher one. To avoid overcharge, the voltage
should not be too long or pole plate shall be should be heightened while in summer it should
deformed due to overheating that may lead to be lowered.
short circuit or battery capacity reduction caused � In the case of long-term parking, the negative
by active material shedding. In the case of vehicle terminal should be disconnected with vehicle to
start, each start time should not exceed 5 seconds avoid excessive self discharge and serious
and the interval between continuous starts should sulfating. Under the condition of no battery
not less than 10~15 seconds; power loss, recharge the maintenance-free battery
� In capacity inspection with high rate discharging once every 3 months. In the case of instant power
gauge (discharging meter), the discharging time loss at the beginning of parking, it is necessary to
should not exceed 5 seconds; recharge the battery timely according to the
� In normal vehicle running, battery is in charging voltage. In general, when battery voltage is under
state generally; In the case of low power supply 12.6V, it is necessary to recharge the battery.
capacity of generator due to improper regulation It is not allowed for the battery discharging current to
of regulator, excessive battery power exceed that of the maximum battery of the
consumption due to frequent vehicle start or manufacturer. In general, the discharging current is
serious battery power loss due to short circuit in 4~5 times as large as that of 4～5C20 battery capacity.
electric appliance, it is necessary to carry out It is not allows to test battery electrification with
battery boost charge. short-circuit method.
� After 3 months of battery service time, when the
battery capacity is lower than 50% or
-6-

Diagnosis and Test
1. Fault diagnosis of Battery
Fault Fault symptoms Cause analysis Troubleshooting
Insufficient ① Voltage is approximately 12V ① Too low set value of vehicle ① Replace the regulator
battery power regulator
② Density is under 1.220dt ② Carry out the off-board
② Power consumption is larger than charging
③ Underpowered vehicle starting, dim
that of charging.
lighting, low honk ③ Eliminate generator or
③ High start frequency and short circuit faults
④ The capacity test is in the yellow
driving distance
area. ④ Clean corrosions on
④ Insufficient power generation or terminals.
circuit fault
⑤ Terminal corrosion or unfirm
connection
Overcharge ① Perpetual reddish yellow of battery ① Too high set valve of vehicle ① Regulate or replace the
case inner wall (operating bolt) regulator regulator
② Separator carbonization or softening ② Too large current in charging and ② Charge according to relevant
too long charging time regulations
③ Red brown and thick electrolyte
③ Closed operating bolt in charging ③ For mild overcharge, clean it
④ Pulpy shedding of positive active
with water and recharge it
material for application.
Overdischarge ① Voltage is under 10V ① Apply the undercharged battery ① Replace the circuit regulator
② Density (proportion) is 1.100g/cm3 ② V ehicle undercharge and too ② Guarantee the quality and
long service time of battery quantity of off-board
③ Tattletale gray and thick electrolyte
charging
③ Short circuit in vehicle circuit
③ Eliminate circuit faults
④ Forget to turn off electric switch
④ Keep a clear head in parking
⑤ Impure electrolyte or serious self
(to turn off the switch)
discharge
⑤ Replace with a new battery
Short circuit ① Voltage is under 10V ① Lead leakage or foreign matter ① Disassemble and analyze it
dropping in battery assembly
② No voltage in faulted cell ② Replace with a new battery
② Pole plate bending in battery
③ No proportion in faulted cell
assembly
④ Smoking and bubbling in ③ Burrs of cluster plate pins
discharging
④ Holes or cracks in separators.
⑤ No response from the faulted cell in
charging ⑤ Artificial damage
Open circuit ① Unusually instability of voltage ① Poor welding of terminal posts ① Repair
② Lead leakage and cavities at the ② Broken busbar ② Replace with a new battery
place 5mm upper than the terminal
③ Open welding of wall weld
top
③ Measure voltage is under 10V and ④ Broken intermediate terminal post
discharging returns zero
④ Unable current input in charging or
there is abnormal noise
-7-

Diagnosis and Test
Improper ① Peculiar smell of electrolyte ① Impure electrolyte ① Replace with a new battery
electrolyte filling
② Density (proportion) is above ② Too high ratio of electrolyte ② Adjust the density and carry
1.300dt out boost charge
③ Insufficient density
③ Density is about 1.100dt after filling. ③ After changing the
④ Do not fill pure water
electrolyte, adjust charging
④ Liquid color is light and whitish.
with acid of 1.400dt
Sulphating of ① Excessively low battery capacity in ① Insufficient charging time and too ① Overcharge method
pole plate discharging long service time
② Repetitive charging method
② Too fast voltage descent speed in ② Too long storage of battery with
③ Washing treatment
discharging electrolyte and no timely boost
③ Early bubble generation in charging
charge ④ Replace with a new battery
③ Battery is in the status of liquid
④ Too fast and high voltage rise in
loss and the exposure time of
charging terminal cluster is too long.
⑤ There are white granules and spots ④ Too high electrolyte density
on pole plate surface.
⑤ Too high electrolyte temperature
⑥ Impure electrolyte
Battery cell ① Low voltage 1 Electrolyte flows among battery ① Repair or replace the case
electrolyte cells and cracks on battery case
leakage ② When connecting battery cells are ② Replace with a new battery
tilted, electrolyte flows. 2 There is vibration in
transportation.
③ There is boiling in discharging.
③ There is vibration in vehicle
running.
④ There are sparking and implosion.
⑤ The heat seal is not firm.
Excessive ① Excessive sediments at the battery ① Too high set valve of vehicle ① Clean the sediments with
shedding of bottom circuit regulator washing method and charge
active material it for reuse
② Excessive low battery capacity ② Too large current in charging and
too long charging time ② Replace with a new battery
③ Perpetual red brown of cell wall and
operating bolt ③ Too large discharge capacity and
too long discharge time
④ Red brown electrolyte
④ High temperature and long service
⑤ The electrolyte is reddish and there
time due to long-term vehicle
is pulpy shedding of pole plate running
active materials, separators are in
softening state and negative pole ⑤ Unqualified pole plate
plate active materials are softening manufacture
expansion.
⑥ Massive shedding
-8-

Diagnosis and Test
Excessive ① Excessive sediments at the battery ① Too high set valve of vehicle ① Clean the sediments with
shedding of bottom circuit regulator washing method and charge
active material it for reuse
② Excessive low battery capacity ② Too large current in charging and
too long charging time ② Replace with a new battery
③ Perpetual red brown of cell wall and
operating bolt ③ Too large discharge capacity and
too long discharge time
④ Red brown electrolyte
④ High temperature and long service
⑤ The electrolyte is reddish and there
time due to long-term vehicle
is pulpy shedding of pole plate running
active materials, separators are in
softening state and negative pole ⑤ Unqualified pole plate
plate active materials are softening manufacture
expansion.
⑥ Massive shedding
Reverse ① For one reversed cell, 8V Manufacturing quality ① Replace with a new battery
installation of
polarities ② For two reversed cells, 4V ② Disassemble and reinstall
③ For the whole reversed cells-12V
Reverse charging ① The voltage is negative ① Misconnection of positive and ① Discharge the capacity of
of polarities negative polarities in charging battery after its reverse
② The colors of positive and negative
charging of polarities
terminal posts are reversed. completely
③ The colors of pole plates are ② Charge the battery with
reversed. small current and then with
normal current in the case of
response of every cell
③ For serious cases, replace
with a new battery
Battery ① Terminal post sparking ① Incorrect installation ① Firmly install
explosion
② Broken positive circuit ② Aged and thin circuit ② Replace the circuit
③ Holes and cracks in battery case and ③ Faulted operation of generator ③ Eliminate generator fault
cover
④ Interference of external sparks ④ Keep the battery away from
heat source
⑤ Insufficient solder for terminal
post ⑤ Always keep vent
unblocked.
⑥ Broken busbar
⑥ Replace with a new battery
⑦ Dropped plate
⑧ Broken intermediate terminal post
⑨ Broken pole plate
Low capacity in ① Underpowered start ① Unfirm connection or circuit fault ① Inspect the circuit carefully
early stage
② Low voltage value ② It exceeds the storage period. ② Carry out boost charge
③ Slow response ③ Positive pole plate passivation
④ Negative pole plate oxidation
⑤ Slightly leaky separator
-9-

Diagnosis and Test
Fault determination of battery
2. Appearance inspection
Items of Inspection Cause Troubleshooting
① Battery case crash Replace with a new one
Damage
② Incorrect installation
① Loose connection or poor contact of terminal post Replace with a new one
Burn
② External short circuit
① Internal short circuit Replace with a new one
Case
Explosion ② In the case of low electrolyte level, there will be internal spark.
③ Blocked vent
① Overcharge Replace with a new one
Deformation ② Overcurrent charging
③ Blocked vent
① Damaged plastic case due to external impact Replace with a new one
Battery acid leakage ② Inversion or too large tilt angle of battery
③ Unfirm heat seal
① External short circuit Replace with a new one
Terminal post melting loss ② Poor contact
③ Poor welding
3. Voltage inspection
When it is above 12.5V,the electric Normal Load test
eye is green
When it is between 12.4 ～ 11V, the Undercharge Boost charge
electric eye is black
Voltage
① Overdischarge (Black electric) Replace with a new one
When it is equal to or under 10.5V ② Short circuit (in general, green electric eye)
③ Open circuit
Green area Normal —
Yellow area Undercharge Boost charge
Load test
① Undercharge Replace with a new one
Red area
② Short circuit or open circuit
- 10 -

Diagnosis and Test
Fault determination of Generator
Fault diagnosis of charging system
Fault symptoms Fault diagnosis Troubleshooting
No lightened charging indicator lamp ① Bulb fault ① Install a new bulb.

when the ignition switch is at the 2nd
gear ② Looseness or oxidation of generator ② Clean and tighten cables of battery or
connectors or battery terminals, poor generator and apply acid proof grease.
connection of ground wire Inspect ground wire connectors, clean
and tighten if necessary.
③ Faults in voltage regulator, rotor or brush
circuit ③ Eliminate the open circuit fault
④ Ignition switch fault ④ Install a new ignition switch
Incorrect go-out of charging ① Loose drive belt ① Tension drive belt again
indicator lamp when the engine is in
operation ② Loose or oxidized generator connector, ② Clean and tighten connectors
poor connection of ground wire
③ Inspect brush connector, clean/loosen
③ Unable contact of brush with rotor ring, brush if necessary, install a new voltage
stuck brush in conduction direction, wear regulator or replace the faulted generator
and oil stains of brush. Wear of bearing
and slip ring, faults in voltage regulator or
rectifier assembly
Undercharge ① Loose drive belt ① Tension drive belt again
② Fault in welding points of generator ② Install a new voltage regulator or replace
connector the faulted generator if necessary
③ Poor connection of ground wire between ③ Clean and tighten connectors
voltage regulator and generator housing
Overcharge ① Voltage regulator fault ① Install a new voltage regulator or replace
the faulted generator if necessary
Noise in operation ① Bearing wear ① Install a new generator
② Loose pulley ② Tension the pulley according to
specified torque. In the case of broken
③ Belt wear
shaft, replace the generator
③ Install a new belt
- 11 -

Diagnosis and Test
Operating principle of generator
The operating principle of generator: divide three-phase
alternating currents (AC) generated by the three-phase
windings into two paths: take one as field current to go
through 3 excitation diodes 1 to D+ end and voltage
regulator 5, then go through moving contacts and slip
rings to field winding, finally, return to the voltage
regulator through slip rings and sliding contacts; The
other one goes through positive rectifier diode of
three-phase full-wave velocity converter bridge to
electric appliances in the vehicle and then returns
through negative power diodes.
Terminal B+ is an output one and Terminal D+ is

connected to charging indicator lamp and ignition
switch in the external circuit and then is connected to
battery positive pole. When starting the engine, contact
points of the ignition switch are closed and form initial
field current in field winding with the charging indicator
lamps lightening simultaneously (lighting inspection). In
the case of engine in idling operation condition, the
indicator lamp goes out. During vehicle running, if the
charging indicator lamp is lightened, it indicates faults
in generator system.
The hybrid germanium transistor voltage regulator is

adopted in this generator, consisting of a ceramic wafer
with protective resistance and an integrated circuit
enclosed in seal housing. It plays a role in: keeping a
constant output current of AC generator in the case of
wide engine speed range and large output current
change.
- 12 -

Diagnosis and Test
Precautions of generator maintenance
For the output current of generator is generated by 5. In the joint operation of generator and voltage
stators and rectified by rectifier diodes, please pay regulator, the output voltage is very stable.
attention to following aspects in generator inspection However, in the case of their inspections and
and regulation: applications, they should be connected to
on-board battery in parallel for application. When
1. Pay attention to generator ground polarities and it the generator is outputting a large current, sudden
is not allowed to connect reversely. In the case of disconnection with battery may generate an
reverse connection of generator and battery excessively high peak voltage. In this case, even
polarities, it leads to positive conduction of there is only a short-time existence of the peak
power diode and the diode is burnt by the large voltage, it may lead to damage of other electronic
current goes through it. Therefore, correct parts. Therefore, pay attention to relevant
polarities are necessary in battery replacement. inspection and application, do not disconnect the
connection of generator in operation with battery
2. It is not allowed to use screw drivers or wires to at any case.
ground output terminal and housing of generator
for live wire test. For instant large current or high 6. It is necessary to guarantee the reliable
voltage electromotive force generated by connection of the connecting ground wire
induction may puncture or burn down the power between the generator and chassis.
diode.
7. It is not allowed to ground the power supply lead
3. It is not allowed to connect two terminal posts for in the operation of generator or it may lead to
test with screw drivers or wires or there shall be harness burn.
fast rise of generator voltage which may lead to
voltage regulator damage. 8. In generator inspection, it is necessary to fill the
generator sealed bearing with sufficient No.2
4. In the case of fast charging with large current lithium base grease before the next maintenance.
from AC generator to battery, when the charging
current is discovered getting smaller or ever 9. It is not necessary to maintain the voltage
being close to 0, please verify for the existence of regulator, In the case of its damage, replace the
faults in charging part. In the case of voltage voltage regulator assembly.
regulator fault or excessively high voltage
regulation, please carry out maintenance as soon
as possible to avoid early damage in battery and
electric appliance of generator field winding.
- 13 -

Removal of Battery
Warning: In general, explosive gas may be

generated by the battery. In the case of The sequence of battery disconnection:
misconduct of it, it may lead to personal injury. disconnect the negative connecting wire of the
Therefore, keep the battery out of flames, sparks battery and then the positive one.
or burning objects. In the case of battery
charging or working close to the battery, it is
necessary to protect your face and eyes and Warning: In the maintenance of auxiliary
maintain good ventilation. Please follow relevant restraint system or fuel system, do not apply the
instructions or it may lead to personal injury. audio hosting or the storage device of key
password. For the applications of these devices at
this moment, there is still a low current in vehicle
Warning: Since there is sulfuric acid in the electric system. Please follow relevant
battery, the contact of the sulfuric acid with the instructions or it may lead to personal injury.
skin, eyes or clothes should be avoided. In the
case of working close to the battery, it is
necessary to protect your eyes from being hurt by Notice:: Prior to battery ground wire removal, it is
Notice
the spilled out acid solution. Once the acid necessary to confirm that the engine is stopped in
solution comes into contact with skin or eyes, it order to avoid vehicle electric system damage.
is necessary to wash with clean water for 15
minutes at least and go to a doctor immediately. Notice: In the case of battery removal mentioned
In the case of mistakenly swallow, it is necessary in maintenance manual, please follow the
to go to a doctor immediately or it may lead to procedure for the removal.
personal injury.
- 14 -

Removal of Battery
1. Open the engine hood.
2. Unscrew mounting bolts of battery negative pole.

Remove the negative connecting wire of
battery.
3. Unscrew mounting bolts of battery positive pole.

Remove the positive connecting wire of
battery.
4. Take down the battery from vehicle.
- 15 -

Installation of Battery
Warning: In general, explosive gas may be

generated by the battery. In the case of Warning: Since there is sulfuric acid in the
misconduct of it, it may lead to personal injury. battery, the contact of the sulfuric acid with the
Therefore, keep the battery out of flames, sparks skin, eyes or clothes should be avoided. In the
or burning objects. In the case of battery case of working close to the battery, it is
charging or working close to the battery, it is necessary to protect your eyes from being hurt by
necessary to protect your face and eyes and the spilled out acid solution. Once the acid
maintain good ventilation. Please follow relevant solution comes into contact with skin or eyes, it
instructions or it may lead to personal injury. is necessary to wash with clean water for 15
minutes at least and go to a doctor immediately.
In the case of mistakenly swallow, it is necessary
Caution: Prior to connection of battery ground to go to a doctor immediately or it may lead to
wire, it is necessary to confirm that all electric personal injury.
systems are turned off in order to avoid vehicle
electric system damage.
Notice: In the case of battery removal mentioned
in maintenance manual, please follow the
Do not tilt the battery with an angle over 40° procedure for the removal.
It is not allowed to place the battery up side down Prior to battery installation, it is necessary to
or place it laterally. confirm that the electric eye is green.
It is not allowed to install the battery with It is not allowed to install the battery with a black
electric leakage onto the vehicle. electric eye onto the vehicle.
Inspect the transportation tray for battery for the It is not allowed to knock or twist terminal posts
existence of screws and nuts and remove them in in battery installation.
order to avoid secondary damage of the battery.
In battery installation, make sure that all electric

The sequence of battery connection: connect the appliances are “OFF”.
positive connecting wire of the battery and then
the negative one.
- 16 -

Installation of Battery
1. Open the engine hood.
2. Place the battery on its support plate steady.
3. Install the positive connecting wire of battery.

Tighten mounting bolts of battery positive
pole.
4. Install the negative connecting wire of battery.

Tighten mounting bolts of battery
negative pole.
- 17 -

Removal of Generator
1. Disconnect the battery connection.
2. Remove the front bumper.
3. Remove the condenser, intercooler and water tank.
4. Remove the cooling fan.
- 18 -

5. Unscrew tension bolts of generator.
6. Remove the generator belt.
7. Remove the mounting bolts of generator.
8. Disconnect the generator harness connectors.
- 19 -

9. Remove the generator.
- 20 -

Installation of Generator
1. Connect the generator harness connectors.
2. Install mounting bolts of generator.
3. Install the generator belt.
4. Tighten tension bolts of generator.
- 21 -

- 22 -

IP Instrument and Warning System
Instrument and Warning System

Subject Page
Instrument...................................................................................................................................................................... 24
Mounting position.....................................................................................................................................................24
Performance characteristics...................................................................................................................................... 25
Instrument...................................................................................................................................................................... 26
Function description................................................................................................................................................. 26
Definitions of pins.................................................................................................................................................... 32
Removal/Installation
Instrument...................................................................................................................................................................... 33
Removal of Instrument............................................................................................................................................. 33
Specification
Instrument...................................................................................................................................................................... 35
Basic parameters.......................................................................................................................................................35
- 23 -

Combination instrument
Sunray instruments are all-digital instruments which take stepping motors as the structural forms. Analog or
digital signals of all sensors are converted into digital signals via processing of central processing units (CPU) to
drive the stepping motors. After the processing, the drive signals are sent to respective indicating instruments of
stepping motors and actuate their operations.
Locations of combination instruments:

Sunray combination instrument is in front of the driver.
- 24 -

Performance characteristics of the combination instrument:
All-digital instruments are adopted in Sunray series, which do not only eliminate disadvantages of conventional
analog display instruments, but also possess following advantages:
1. The indication accuracy may reach 1/12°as the 9. LCD is applied for mileage display and mileage
highest. subtotal to avoid stuck phenomenon with the
2. It enables the stable indication without the application of gear display and it is easily installed
application of damping oil and pointer balancer. and debugged.
3. It enables easy installation and debugging without 10. SMD parts and reflow soldering technology may
any hysteresis errors that the instrument possesses prevent the instrument from faults caused by
good reliability, good consistency and strong insufficient solder and void and enable lower
vibration resistance. weight of the instrument.
4. It enables long service life and wide operating 11. Software warning is adopted in fuel warning and
range of -40°~+85°. the fuel warning switch in the sensor can be
5. It enables low voltage (5V) and low current drive, revocatory.
all-digital control and low consumption. 12. With proper modifications of instrument software
6. It enables strong anti-interference. parameters, the instrument can be applicable to
7. It enables smaller thickness and weight of the vehicles with different gear ratios, speeds, fuels and
instrument. temperature sensors and the applicable range is
8. LED is applied as indicator lamps and backlights very wide.
which enables lower power consumption, longer
service life and lower heat. And LED backlight
technology is adopted for homogeneous and soft
lighting.
- 25 -

Diagnosis and Test
Function description of the combination instrument
1. Water temperature gauge
It processes water temperature signals received by
the instrument, converts these signals to voltage
signals firstly then to digital signals via AD and
controls the water temperature stepping motor for
the indication of corresponding values.
2. Tachometer
It carries out the algorithmic-processing for signals
sent by the generator, controls the speed stepping
motor for the indication of corresponding values.
Corresponding speed signal frequency for every
1000R/MIN is 260HZ.
3. Speedometer
It carries out the algorithmic-processing for signals
sent by the vehicle speed sensor and controls the
vehicle speed stepping motor for the indication of
corresponding values.
4. Fuel gauge
It processes resistance signals sent by the fuel
sensor, converts these signals to voltage signals
firstly then to digital signals via AD and controls
the fuel stepping motor for the indication of
corresponding values.
- 26 -

Diagnosis and Test
5. Accumulative total and subtotal odometer
The LCD is applied for the indication of total
mileage and subtotal mileage. The display interface
can be switched via the application of the adjusting
lever at the right side. The subtotal odometer can
be reset via pressing the adjusting lever for 2S.
6. Water temperature warning lamp

In the case of overhigh engine antifreeze
temperature, the warning lamp lightens.
7. Brake shoe wear indicator lamp

In the case of friction lining wear with a certain
extent, the brake shoe wear indicator lamp will be
lit to remind you of brake lining replacement.
8. Engine oil pressure warning lamp

In the case of excessively low engine oil pressure,
the warning lamp will keep lit after engine start or
it will be lit during vehicle running, indicating
insufficient engine oil pressure.
- 27 -

Diagnosis and Test
9. Charging warning lamp
If the indicator lamp keeps lit or it will be lit during
vehicle running, it indicates that there may be
electrical faults in the charging system.
10. Exhaust fault indicator lamp

In the case of exhaust emission exceeding the
standard value, this lamp will be lit.
11. Fuel filter warning lamp

In the case of water level of oil-water separator
reaching danger level, the oil-water separator water
volume indicator lamp lightens.
12. Diesel oil preheating indicator lamp

The preheating indicator lamp may keep lit for a
while or go out immediately. The lit time varies
according to the engine and coolant temperatures.
- 28 -

Diagnosis and Test
13. EPC indicator lamp
If the indicator lamp is in the state of normally on,
it indicates that there are electronic faults.
14. Seat belt warning lamp

It will keep lit until the driver’s seat belt has been
fastened.
15. Left turn signal indicator lamp

When the left turn signal lamp is lit, this indicator
lamp will be lit together with a turn indicator lamp
in the corresponding direction. When the turn
signal lamp is turned off, this indicator lamp will
go out automatically.
16. Right turn signal indicator lamp

When the right turn signal lamp is lit, this indicator
lamp will be lit together with a turn indicator lamp.
When the turn signal lamp is turned off, this
indicator lamp will go out automatically.
- 29 -

Diagnosis and Test
17. Upper beam indicator lamp
When the upper beam headlamp is connected, this
indicator lamp will be lit.
18. Airbag indicator lamp

If the airbag indicator lamp keeps lit or is lit during
vehicle running, it indicates that there are
abnormalities in airbag system.
19. ABS signal lamp

In the case of opening door with key or vehicle
self-inspection, the ABS lamp may keep lit for a
few seconds then go out. If the lamp does not
lighten or keep lit, it indicated that there are faults
in ABS.
20. Parking brake indicator lamp

When the hand brake is pulled up, the indicator
lamp lightens automatically and the lamp will go
out with the hand brake down.
- 30 -

Diagnosis and Test
21. Front fog lamp indicator lamp
When the front fog lamp is lit, corresponding mark
of the indicator lamp will be lit. When the fog lamp
is turned off, corresponding indicator lamp goes
out.
22. Rear fog lamp indicator lamp

When the rear lamp is lit, corresponding mark of
the indicator lamp will be lit. When the fog lamp is
turned off, corresponding indicator lamp goes out.
23. Door open warning lamp

When doors are not closed, the indicator lamp
keeps lit until all doors are closed and locked
completely.
24. Fuel warning lamp

When the remaining fuel in the fuel tank is lower
than the warning level, the fuel warning lamp
lightens to remain the driver of fuel filling.
- 31 -

Diagnosis and Test
Definitions of instrument pins
Terminal NO. Terminal name Terminal NO. Terminal name
A1 Back lighting(-) B1 Right turn(+)
A2 Back lighting (+) B2 Upper beam(+)
A3 Frequency division output B3 NC
A4 Main relay B4 Instrument LIN communication
A5 Oil-water separator(+) B5 NC
A6 NC B6 NC
A7 NC B7 NC
A8 NC B8 NC
A9 NC B9 NC
A10 Engine fault(-) B10 NC
A11 Charging indicator lamp(-) B11 NC
A12 Engine oil pressure(-) B12 NC
A13 Brake fault(-) B13 NC
A14 Engine inspection(EPC)(-) B14 NC
A15 NC B15 NC
A16 Engine fault(-) B16 NC
A17 NC B17 Parking brake(-)
A18 Water temperature signal B18 Preheating(-)
A19 Fuel signal B19 Seat belt(-)
A20 Vehicle speed signal B20 Door open indicator lamp(-)
A21 Speed signal B21 NC
A22 Constant power supply B22 Rear fog lamp(+)
A23 GROUND B23 Front fog lamp(+)
A24 Ignition B24 NC
A25 GROUND B25 NC
A26 NC B26 NC
A27 ABS B27 NC
A28 NC B28 NC
A29 GROUND B29 NC
A30 NC B30 NC
A31 NC B31 NC
A32 Left turn(+) B32 NC
- 32 -

Removal of the instrument
1. Disconnect the connecting wire of battery.
2. Remove the steering wheel.
3. Remove the protecting cover of the steering wheel.
4. Remove mounting bolts of the instrument.
- 33 -

Removal of the instrument
5. Disconnect the connector plug of the instrument.
6. Take out the instrument.
- 34 -

Specification
Technical parameter of the instrument
Item Technical parameter Remark
Operating temperature range of the
-30℃～65℃
instrument
Storage temperature range of the
-40℃～75℃
instrument
Operating voltage range of the
10.8V～16V
instrument
Static operating current of the instrument 〈3mA
Item Technical parameter Remark

①Elementary errors of speedometer under
higher speed shall be according to the
agreement of the customer and
manufacture.
②The error for upper limit shall not be
The tolerance of speedometer indication errors
Speedometer reviewed.
should be equal to or under ±2%.
③ In the case of special requirements of
customers, the elementary errors shall be
reviewed according to enterprise
standard approved via specified
procedures or customers’ requirements.
①Under low speed, the error shall be equal
to or smaller than 30% of scale upper
limit.
②Under medium and high speed, the
The elementary errors of the tachometer
should be equal to or under ±10% under low error shall be larger than 30% of scale
Tachometer upper limit.
speed and ±10% under medium and high
speed. ③In the case of special requirements of
customers, the elementary errors shall be
reviewed according to enterprise
standard approved via specified
procedures or customers’ requirements.
In the case of special requirements of
The elementary errors of the fuel gauge customers,the elementary errors shall be
Fuel gauge should not exceed ±8% of scale full arc reviewed according to enterprise standard
length. approved via specified procedures or
customers’ requirements.
In the case of special requirements of
The elementary errors of the water customers,the elementary errors shall be
Water temperature gauge temperature gauge should not exceed ±6% reviewed according to enterprise standard
of scale full arc length. approved via specified procedures or
customers’requirements.
- 35 -

- 36 -

ET ETACS Body Computer
ETACS Body Computer

Subject Page
ETACS........................................................................................................................................................................... 38
Information functions............................................................................................................................................... 39
ETACS........................................................................................................................................................................... 40
System structure....................................................................................................................................................... 40
Introduction functions...............................................................................................................................................41
Control strategy........................................................................................................................................................ 47
Diagnosis and Service...............................................................................................................................................49
ETACS Pin Definition.............................................................................................................................................. 50
ETACS........................................................................................................................................................................... 52
Removal of ETACS.................................................................................................................................................. 52
Installation of ETACS...............................................................................................................................................53
Specification
ETACS........................................................................................................................................................................... 54
- 37 -

ETACS body computer
SUNRAY ETACS is for controlling a majority of electrical systems and equipments on vehicle, such as front water
sprayer, front wiper, key hole lamp, interior ceiling lamp, anti-theft alarm bell, seat belt alarm, power window, rear fog
lamp, rear defroster, front fog lamp, step lamp, small lamp, headlamp, hazard warning lamp, and locking device.
ETACS control is achieved based on status of various equipments, including signals from driver side door and its
locking device, front passenger door and its locking device, vehicle speed signal, rear fog lamp switch, front fog lamp
switch, small lamp switch, headlamp switch, front water sprayer switch, front wiper switch, hand brake switch, rear
defroster switch, key insertion, ignition switch, seat belt and so on.
Mounting position of ETACS

ETACS is installed below the glove box of instrument panel.
- 38 -

Introduction to ETACS functions
SUNRAY ETACS defines 17 kinds of function listed below:
A. Washer & Wiper Control
B. Variable Intermittent Wiper Control
C. Ignition Key Hole Illumination Control
D. Front Ceiling Lamp Illumination Control
E. Parking Start Warning
F. Seat Belt Warning Timer
G. Power Window Timer
H. Tail Lamp Auto Cut
I. Rear Fog Lamp Control
J. Power Door Latch Control
K. Key Management Control
L. Induction Conflict Control
M. Auto Locking
N. Key-Out Auto Door Unlock
O. Step Lamp Control
P. Middle Door Control
Q. Password Input
- 39 -

System structure
System structure chart:
Remote control
receiving
Sensor
input
Interior
electrical
equipments
Switch
input
1. SUNRAY ETACS is a centralized control module

for body electrical equipments.
2. Body electrical control system mainly consists of
ETACS, sensor input, switch input, remote control
receiving input and interior electrical equipments.
3. Every parts of body electrical control system are
connected through interior harnesses.
4. ETACS shall make the interior electrical
equipments actuate after judgment based on
various input quantities.
- 40 -

1. Washer & Wiper Control
Turn the ignition switch to “ON” position.
Ignition
switch
� If the washer is switched on over 0.6 sec, the
wiper shall operate in T1 (0.6±0.1s) after the
Over 0.6 sec start of washer switch and it shall perform 3
Front/rear T4 cycles (viz. 3 times) of wiping after the
washer
switch switch is off.
� If the washer is switched on within 0.2-0.6 sec
Front/rear
(T3), the wiper shall perform one time of
wiper wiping.
T1: 0.6±0.1 sec
T2: 2.5—3.8 sec
T3: 0.2—0.6 sec (MAX)
T4: One cycle of wiping
2. Variable intermittent wiper
Turn the ignition switch to “ON” position. The
Ignition
switch
wiper shall operate after the intermittent switch is
turned on in T1 (0.3S), each time of wiping for T2
(0.7±0.1S) with interval adjustable within
Front 2.6±0.7S(VR=0KΩ)~18.0±1S(VR=50KΩ) when
intermittent
switch the vehicle speed is 0Km/h.
When the vehicle speed is over 100Km/h, the
wiping interval is adjustable within
Front wiper
1.0±0.2S(VR=0KΩ)~10.0±1S(VR=50KΩ).
T1: 0.3 sec

T2: 0.7±0.1 sec
T3: When the vehicle speed is 0Km/h, the interval
is adjustable within:
� 2.6±0.7S～8.0±1S(VR=50KΩ)
When the vehicle speed is 100Km/h, the
interval is adjustable within:
� 1.0±0.2S～10.0±1S(VR=50KΩ)
3. Ignition Key Hole Illumination Control

Turn the ignition switch to “OFF” position. The
Front door
switch
ignition key hole lamp shall lighten when any of
front doors open and shall go out in T1 (10±1S)
Ignition
after the front door is closed. With the front doors
switch open, if your turn the ignition switch to “ON”
position, the lamp shall go out.
Front ceiling
illumination
T1: 10±1sec
T2: 0～10sec
- 41 -

4. Front Ceiling Lamp Illumination Control (Decayed
Room Lamp)
Front door
switch
With the front ceiling lamp set to “DOOR”
position, the front ceiling lamp shall lighten when
the front door is open. When the front door is
Ignition
switch closed, the lamp shall go out gradually in
T1(5.5±0.5S) with the ignition switch turned to
“ACC” position or shall go out directly with the
Front ceiling
ignition switch turned to “ON” position.
illumination
T1: 5.5±0.5 sec
5. Parking Start Warning

Ignition switch Turn the ignition switch to “ON” position. With the
parking brake handle unreleased, when the vehicle
speed is over 17Km/h, the door bell shall ring
Parking control intermittently with interval of T1(0.3±0.1S) and it
switch
shall stop ringing with the handle released. If the
Vehicle speed
vehicle speed is lower than 17Km/h, there is no
sensor alarm.
TI: 0.3±0.1 sec

Harmonic bell
6. Seat Belt Warning Timer

Ignition Turn the ignition switch to “ON” position. If the
switch
driver’s seat belt is unfastened, the seat belt
warning lamp shall flicker with 50% duty cycle and
Seat belt Unfastened
switcch time of T1(0.3±0.1sec), and the door bell shall ring
Fastened
for T3 (6±1sec) with an interval of
T2(0.45±0.1sec). If the seat belt is fastened, the
Seat belt
warning lamp warning lamp shall flicker once without any alarm.
If the seat belt is released, the warning lamp shall
Harmonic bell flicker with alarm and if the seat belt is fastened
again, the alarm shall stop. Unfastening seat belt
indicator shall be normally on after one cycle of
flickering, but the the seat belt indicator shall go
out after one cycle of flickering.
T1: 0.3±0.1 sec
T2: 0.45±0.1 sec
T3: 6±1 sec
7. Power Window Auto Rising
Auto window rising shall be achieved after the
vehicle is locked properly by remote control.
Windows at both driver and front passenger sides
shall rise simultaneously and the maximum rise
time is 4.5 sec.
- 42 -

8. Power Window Timer
When the ignition switch is turned to “ON”
Ignition position, the power windows are operable with
switch
front doors closed. When the ignition switch is
turned to “LOCK” or “ACC” position, the power
Front door windows are operable within T1 (30±3sec);
switch
however, if any of front doors opens within this
period, the power windows are inoperable.
Power T1: 30±3 sec
window
motor
9. Tail Lamp Auto Cut

Insert in Tail lamps shall lighten in any case once the
Ignition switch lighting switch (on the left of combination switch)
Pull out
is turned from OFF to ON.
Tail lamp auto cut is controlled by the procedures
Small lamp switch
below:
� Lighting switch (on the left of combination
Driver side
door switch
switch) is turned from ON to OFF.
� With the key pulled out, when the driver side
Tail lamp
door opens, the tail lamp shall go out.
relay
� If you insert the key again, the tail lamp shall
lighten.
Note: Tail lamps mentioned here refer to small
lamps.
10. Rear Fog Lamp Control
Tail lamp With the ignition switch turned to “OFF” position,
relay
the lighting switch (on the left of combination
switch) and front fog lamp switch turned on, if you
Ignition
switch turn on the rear fog lamp switch, the rear fog lamps
won’t lighten. With the ignition switch turned to
Front fog
lamp switch “ON” position, the lighting switch (on the left of
combination switch) turned to small lamp position,
Rear fog lamp
switch and front fog lamp switch turned on, if you turn on
the rear fog lamp switch, the rear fog lamps shall
Rear fog
lamp
lighten and at this time if you turn off the front fog
lamps, the rear fog lamps shall be turned off
simultaneously. When the lighting switch is turned
to lighting position, the operation of rear fog lamps
won’t be affected by the front fog lamps, viz. with
front fog lamp switch off, the rear fog lamps can be
separately controlled by the rear fog lamp switch.
- 43 -

11. Power Door Latch Control
Driver side door
Pull up Four door locks can be controlled through doors at
latch switch
Pull down
driver side and front passenger side. If you push
down the driver side door latch, doors shall be
Front passengerPull up
side door latch locked with the door lock signal output by locking
switch
Pull down device; if you pull up the driver side door latch,
doors shall be unlocked with the door unlock signal
Door lock
output
output by locking device. It is the same for the
front passenger side door.
Door unlock
output
12. Key Management Control

Insert in
Ignition With the key in and driver side door open, if you
key
Pull out push down the latch switch, doors cannot be locked
Driver ON after a door lock signal output by locking device.
side door
switch OFF
If you hold the latch switch, a door unlock signal is
output by locking device and then 3 unlock signals
Door lock are output. The driver side door is closed within T3
switch
(0sec.<T3<0.5sec.) after the latch switch is
pressed; at the same time, if latch switch is pulled
Front door
unlock
up, doors won’t be locked with an unlock signal
output output.
T1: 0.5±0.1 sec
T2: 1±0.1 sec
T3: 0SEC.<T3<0.5 sec
13. Induction Conflict Control
Exploded In case of collision, the airbag expands and the
Airbag status
airbag controller outputs a 0V signal to ETACS,
Unexploded and then ETACS output an unlock signal to the
locking device, which output an unlock action
lasting for T3 (5sec) in T2 (40msec), so the doors
Airbag module
impact signal are under unlocked status.
T1: 200 msec

Power door open
output signal
T2: 40 msec
T3: 5 sec
- 44 -

14. Auto Locking.
Ignition switch
With the ignition switch turned to “ON” position
and the doors unlocked, the doors shall be locked
automatically in T1 (1±0.3sec) after the vehicle
Vehicle speed
sensor speed exceeds 40Km/h. If the doors are unlocked
by locking device during travelling, they shall be
locked automatically again in T1 (1±0.3sec).
All door lock
switch
T1: 1±0.3 sec

Locking
relay
15. Key-Out Auto Door Unlock

Insert in
With the door locked, if the ignition key is pulled
Ignition key out, the doors shall be unlocked after an unlock
Pull out signal of T1 (0.5±0.1 sec) is output by the locking
relay.
All door
lock switch T1: 0.5±0.1 sec
Locking relay
15 min. =15 min.

16. Step Lamp Control
The left step lamp shall lighten with the left middle
Open
door open and go out with the door closed. The
Left middle
door
right step lamp shall lighten with the right middle
Closed
door open and go out with the door closed. The step
Left step ON lamps shall go out automatically if the middle door
lamp
OFF open time exceeds 15 minutes.
Right middle Open
door
Closed
ON
Right step
lamp OFF
17. Middle Door Control

Unlock
Front door Middle door auto locking
lock status
signal Lock � With the left and right front doors locked, if
Middle door
Unlock you open and then close the middle door, the
lock status middle door shall be locked automatically in 8
signal Lock sec. (Please refer to the left figure.)
Open
Middle door
switch signal
Closed
Door locking
output action
- 45 -

� With the middle door open, if you press
Remote control
locking
“Unlock” key on the remote control, the middle
door shall be locked in 0.5 sec after the door is
Open
closed. (Please refer to the left figure.)
Middle door
switch signal
Closed
Unlock
Middle door
lock status Lock
signal
Door locking
output action
18. Password Learning Input

� If you press the password learning switch, the
fault lamp shall lighten entering into password
learning mode. The learning time is 10 sec in
total.
� Press every key of the remote controller once.
The fault lamp shall go out after the first key is
pressed. Four keys in total can be learned
within 10 sec after starting the password
learning key.
� Conduct detection for remote control password
learning.
� Enter into password learning mode with the
previous memory deleted automatically.
- 46 -

Control strategy
S/N Item Function
Turn the ignition switch to “ON” position. 1. If the washer is switched on over 0.6 sec, the wiper
Washer & Wiper shall operate in T1 (0.6±0.1s) after the start of washer switch and it shall perform 3 T4 cycles (viz. 3
1
Control times) of wiping after the switch is off; 2. If the washer is switched on within 0.2-0.6 sec (T3), the
wiper shall perform one time of wiping.
Turn the ignition switch to “ON” position. The wiper shall operate after the intermittent switch is
Variable intermittent
2 turned on in T1 (0.3S), each time of wiping for T2 (0.7±0.1S) with interval adjustable within
wiper
(1±0.5S~11±1S). When the vehicle speed is over 40Km/h, the interval T3 shall shorten by 4 sec.
With the generator being charged, if you turn on the defroster switch, the defroster relay shall operate
Back window defroster
3 for T1 (20±2min). If the interval of pressing defroster switch is less than T1, the defrosting function
timer
is cancelled after the second time of pressing switch.
Turn the ignition switch to “OFF” position. The ignition key hole lamp shall lighten when any of
front doors open and shall go out in T1 (10±1S) after the front door is closed. With the front doors
open, if your insert the key in, the lamp shall go out. If the key is pulled out with the front door open,
Ignition Key Hole
4 the lamp shall lighten and shall go out in T1 (10±1S) after the front door is closed. With the key not
Illumination Control
inserted, if you open the front door, the lamp shall lighten. The lamp shall go out immediately if the
key is inserted within T2 (0-10S) after the front door is closed and it shall go out in T1 (10±1S) after
the front door is closed if the key is not inserted within T2 (0-10S).
With the front ceiling lamp set to “DOOR” position, the front ceiling lamp shall lighten when the
Front Ceiling Lamp front door is open. When the front door is closed, the lamp shall go out gradually in T1 (5.5±0.5S)
5
Illumination Control with the ignition switch turned to “ACC” position or shall go out directly with the ignition switch
turned to “ON” position.
Turn the ignition switch to “ON” position. With the parking brake handle unreleased, when the
vehicle speed is over 3 Km/h, the door bell shall ring intermittently with interval of T1 (0.3±0.1S)
6 Parking Start Warning
and it shall stop ringing with the handle released. If the vehicle speed is lower than 3 Km/h, there is
no alarm.
Turn the ignition switch to “ON” position. If the driver’s seat belt is unfastened, the seat belt warning
lamp shall flicker with 50% duty cycle and time of T1(0.3±0.1 sec), and the door bell shall ring for
Seat Belt Warning
7 T3 (6±1 sec) with an interval of T2(0.45±0.1 sec). If the seat belt is fastened, the warning lamp shall
Timer
flicker once without any alarm. If the seat belt is released, the warning lamp shall flicker with alarm
and if the seat belt is fastened again, the alarm shall stop.
When the ignition switch is turned to “ON” position, the power windows are operable with front
doors closed. When the ignition switch is turned to “LOCK” or “ACC” position, the power windows
8 Power Window Timer
are operable within T1 (30±3 sec); however, if any of front doors opens within this period, the power
windows are inoperable.
With the key inserted, the lighting switch (on the combination switch) turned on and the driver side
door closed, the tail lamp shall lighten; with the key pulled out and the tail lamp switch still on, the
tail lamp shall lighten but it shall go out if the driver side door opens; when the key is inserted again,
9 Tail Lamp Auto Cut
the tail lamp shall lighten until the key is pulled out. Under normal condition, with the tail lamp
switch on, the tail lamps shall lighten regardless of key insertion or not or the door status. (Tail lamps
mentioned here refer to small lamps.)
With the ignition switch turned to “OFF” position, the lighting switch (on the left of combination
switch) and front fog lamp switch turned on, if you turn on the rear fog lamp switch, the rear fog
lamps won’t lighten. With the ignition switch turned to “ON” position, the lighting switch (on the left
10 Rear Fog Lamp Control of combination switch) turned to small lamp position, and front fog lamp switch turned on, if you
turn on the rear fog lamp switch, the rear fog lamps shall lighten and at this time if you turn off the
front fog lamps, the rear fog lamps shall be turned off simultaneously. If the lighting switch is turned
off at this time, the rear fog lamps shall go out.
Four door locks can be controlled through doors at driver side and front passenger side. If you push
Power Door Latch down the driver side door latch, doors shall be locked with the door lock signal output by locking
11
Control device; if you pull up the driver side door latch, doors shall be unlocked with the door unlock signal
output by locking device. It is the same for the front passenger side door.
- 47 -

Control strategy
S/N Item Function
With the key in and driver side door open, if you push down the latch switch, doors
cannot be locked after a door lock signal output by locking device. If you hold the latch
switch, a door unlock signal is output by locking device and then 3 unlock signals are
12 Key Management Control
output. The driver side door is closed within T3 (0 sec.<T3<0.5 sec.) after the latch
switch is pressed; at the same time, if latch switch is pulled up, doors won’t be locked
with an unlock signal output.
In case of collision, the airbag expands and the airbag controller outputs a 0V signal to
ETACS, and then ETACS output an unlock signal to the locking device, which output an
13 Induction Conflict Control
unlock action lasting for T3 (5 sec) in T2 (40 msec), so the doors are under unlocked
status.
With the ignition switch turned to “ON” position and the doors unlocked, the doors shall
be locked automatically in T1 (1±0.3 sec) after the vehicle speed exceeds 40Km/h. If the
14 Auto Locking
doors are unlocked by locking device during travelling, they shall be locked
automatically again in T1 (1±0.3 sec).
With the door locked, if the ignition key is pulled out, the doors shall be unlocked after
15 Key-Out Auto Door Unlock
an unlock signal of T1(0.5±0.1 sec) is output by the locking relay.
With all doors and engine hood closed, if you use remote controller for locking, the
vehicle shall be under warning status after the hazard warning lamp flickers T2 (1.0±0.2
16 Warning Function sec); if you use remote controller for locking under all doors are not closed, the doors
shall be locked but the vehicle is not under warning status and it shall be under warning
status if all doors are closed.
If you use the remote controller to release warning status, the doors shall be unlocked,
17 Warning Off the hazard warning lamp shall flicker T1 (0.5±0.1 sec) and flicker another T1 sec in T2
(0.5±0.1 sec).
The step lamp shall lighten with the middle door open and go out with the door closed.
18 Step Lamp Control The step lamp shall go out automatically if the middle door open time exceeds 15
minutes. (Please refer to figure below.)
a. With the left and right front doors locked, if you open and then close the middle door,
the middle door shall be locked automatically in 8 sec.
19 Middle Door Control
b. With the middle door open, if you press “Unlock” key on the remote control, the
middle door shall be locked in 0.5 sec after the door is closed.
Remote Control Window When using remote controller to set warning and perform locking, ETACS shall output
20
Rising left/right front window rising signal.
a. Start the decoder switch;
b. Press any one of keys on the remote controller and press again after 3 sec of pause;
21 Password Input c. Perform remote control detection;
d. If more than one remote controller is in need of learning, please repeat steps a, b and
c. One key can be learned each time. Two keys can be learned in total.
- 48 -

Diagnosis and Service
S/N Function Service Methods and Phenomena
a．Press “Learning” key on decoder and the fault lamp lightens.
b．If you press the “Warning-off” switch on the remote control, the fault lamp shall go out; if you
press “Unlock” switch in 8 sec, the fault lamp shall flicker twice and then go out with the door latch
unlocked; if you press the “Lock” switch on the remote control, the fault lamp shall lighten and then
go out with door latch locked and power window auto rising.
1 Warning-off
c．At this time, if you open the left door, the front ceiling lamp, ignition key hole lamp and anti-theft
relay shall operate with intermittent flickering of fault lamp and alarm sound; if you close the left
door and press the “Lock” key on the remote control, the interior lamp and ignition key hole lamp
shall go out and the anti-theft relay shall stop operating, with fault lamp and alarm off, power
window auto rising on, door latch locked.
Detection of ignition With the ignition switch turned to “ON” position, the power windows are operable and the seat belt
2
switch and power window indicator flickers.
With the generator turned on, the rear defogging device shall operate once the switch is pressed and
Back window defogging
3 shall stop operation once it is pressed again. With the generator turned off, the rear defogging shall
detection
stop.
Press the front washer switch for 1 sec and release it. Check if the wiper stops after operating for 2
4 Front washer detection
sec.
With the ignition key in and front wiper intermittent switch pressed, check the operating cycle of
Front wiper delay front wiper. If you press the front wiper regulating switch, the front wiper operating cycle shall be
5
detection lengthened. Release the wiper intermittent switch and wiper regulating switch, and then turn off the
ignition switch.
If you open the driver side door, the front ceiling lamp and ignition key hole lamp shall lighten; if
Driver side door (left
6 you close the door, the front ceiling lamp shall go out gradually and the ignition key hole lamp shall
door) detection
go out in 6 sec.
Front passenger side door
7 Same as the driver side door detection.
(right door) detection
If you open the middle door, the front ceiling lamp and step lamp shall lighten; if you close the door,
8 Middle door detection
the step lamp shall go out and the front ceiling lamp shall go out gradually.
With the ignition switch turned to “ON” position, if the seat belt is unfastened, the seat belt indicator
9 Seat belt detection
shall flicker 10 times with buzzer ringing 10 times.
With the driver side door open, small lamp switch on and key inserted, the small lamps and front
ceiling lamp lighten; with key pulled out, the small lamps go out.
With ignition switch turned to “ON” position, small lamp switch and front fog lamp switch on, rear
fog lamps lighten once the switch is pressed and they go out once the switch is pressed again. With
10 Detection of lamps
rear fog lamps on, they go out once the front fog lamp switch is turned off. Then if the small lamp
switch is turned off and headlamp switch is turned on, rear fog lamps are operable separately without
the front fog lamp switch on. With lighting lamp reset, front fog lamps, rear fog lamps and small
lamps go out.
If the left front door latch is locked, all door latches inside shall be locked; if the left front door latch
11 Door latch detection
is unlocked, all door latches inside shall be unlocked. It is the same for the right front door latch.
12 Auto unlocking With door latch locked and ignition key pulled out, the door latch shall be unlocked.
With the ignition switch turned to “ON” position, if the vehicle speed exceeds 40Km/h, the door
13 40Km auto locking
latch shall be locked automatically.
a．With ignition switch turned off and ignition key pulled out, if you open the middle door, the front
ceiling lamp and step lamps shall lighten; if you press “Lock” key, the locking lamp shall lighten and
then go out, with power window auto rising. If you close the middle door, the front ceiling lamp and
step lamps shall go out and the fault lamp shall lighten and then go out.
b．If you open and then close the left door, the front ceiling lamp and ignition key hole lamp shall
lighten and the anti-theft relay shall operate with intermittent flickering of fault lamp and alarm
14 Warning detection sound; if you press “Lock” key, door latch shall be locked, fault lamp shall lighten and then go out,
and power window shall rise automatically.
c．It is the same for right door.
d．If you open the middle door, the front ceiling lamp and step lamps shall lighten and the anti-theft
relay shall operate with intermittent flickering of fault lamp and alarm sound; if you close the middle
door, the step lamps shall go out; if you press “Lock” key, door latch shall be locked, fault lamp shall
lighten and then go out, and power window shall rise automatically.
- 49 -

ETACS Pin Definition
(White) (Gray)
Port No. Port Name Input/Output Initial Status Operating Status Remark
A1 Interior lamp Output High level Low level

A2 Anti-theft relay Output High level (NC) Low level Reserved
A3 Front wiper relay Output High level Low level
A4 Rear defroster relay Output High level Low level
A5 Seat belt warning lamp Output High level Low level
A6 Rear fog lamp relay Output High level Low level
A7 Step lamps Output NC Low level
A8 Door locking relay Output High level Low level
A9
A10 B+
A11 Door unlocking relay Output High level Low level
Low level (door
A12 Middle door switch Input NC (door closed)
open)
A13 Small lamp relay Output High level Low level
A14 Anti-theft alarm bell Output High level Low level Reserved
A15 Power window relay Output High level Low level
A16
A17 Front passenger side door switch Input NC Low level
A18 Hazard warning lamp relay Output High level Low level
A19 Ground
A20 Key hole lamp Output High level Low level
A21
A22
A23
- 50 -

ETACS Pin Definition (Continued)
Port No. Port Name Input/Output Initial Status Operating Status Remark
A24 Vehicle speed signal Input NC Pulse
B1 Driver side door switch Input NC Low level
B2 Rear fog lamp switch Input NC Low level
B3 Left/right front window relay Output NC Low level
B4 Front water sprayer switch Input NC Low level
Front passenger side door lock
B5 Input NC Low level
switch
B6 Hand brake switch Input NC Low level
B7 Rear defroster switch Input NC Low level
B8 Front fog lamp switch Input NC Low level
B9 IG2 Input NC High level
B10 Door switch Input NC Low level
B11 Key insertion switch Input NC High level
B12 Headlamp switch Input NC Low level
B13 Small lamp switch Input NC Low level
B14 Driver side door lock switch Input NC Low level
B15 Middle door locking device Input NC (locked) Low level (unlocked)
B16 Seat belt switch Input NC Low level
B17 Storage code Input NC Pulse
B18 IG1 Input NC High level
B19 Front wiper intermittent switch Input NC Low level
B20
B21 Airbag signal Input NC Low level
B22 Front wiper interval adjustment Input
B23 Generator L Input NC High level
B24 External antenna
- 51 -

Removal of ETACS
1. Disconnect the negative cable of battery.
2. Remove the glove box.
3. Remove the mounting bolts from body computer.
4. Disconnect the harness connector of controller and

remove the body computer.
- 52 -

Installation of ETACS
1. Connect the harness connector of controller.
2. Tighten the mounting bolts of body computer.
3. Install the glove box.
4. Connect the battery cable.
- 53 -

Specification
Parameters
Electrical Parameter Requirement
Operating voltage DC12V
Operating voltage range DC9V～DC16V
Quiescent current ＜10mA
Insulating resistance 100MΩ (DC500V megger)
Remote control transmitting frequency 315MHz±0.075MHz
Receiving frequency of body controller 315MHz±100KHz
Remote control distance 20M dead zone free
Operating temperature at -30ºC～+85ºC
Storage temperature at -40ºC～+90ºC
Relative humidity ≤95%
- 54 -

LT Lighting System
Lighting System
Subject Page
Overview.................................................................................................................................................................. 56
Lighting configuration table..................................................................................................................................... 58
Introduction to functions...........................................................................................................................................59
Fault diagnosis.......................................................................................................................................................... 62
Removal of headlamp............................................................................................................................................... 76
Removal of clearance lamps..................................................................................................................................... 77
Removal of front fog lamps...................................................................................................................................... 78
Removal of ceiling lamps......................................................................................................................................... 79
Removal of rear tail lamps........................................................................................................................................80
Removal of high-mounted brake lamp..................................................................................................................... 81
Removal of rear fog lamp......................................................................................................................................... 82
Specification
Lighting System............................................................................................................................................................. 83
- 55 -

LT Lighting System
Lighting system
SUNRAY front lamps (headlamps) are installed on both sides of vehicle head, for lighting when driving at night.
Fog lamps are installed on head positions lower than headlamps, for roadway lighting when driving in rainy or foggy
days. Light color of fog lamp is required to be yellow or orange, for yellow is of longer optical wave and excellent fog
penetrating capability.
Headlamps
- 56 -

LT Lighting System
Tail lamps
- 57 -

LT Lighting System
Lighting configuration table
S/N Name Qty. (For single vehicle)
1 Rear ceiling lamp assembly 2
2 Front ceiling lamp assembly 1
3 Left front courtesy lamp 1
4 Right front courtesy lamp 1
5 License plate lamp assembly 2
6 Left side turn signal lamp 1
7 Right side turn signal lamp 1
8 Left front fog lamp assembly 1
9 Right front fog lamp assembly 1
10 Left rear fog lamp assembly 1
11 Right rear fog lamp assembly 1
12 Left front combination lamp assembly 1
13 Right front combination lamp assembly 1
14 Left rear combination lamp assembly 1
15 Right rear combination lamp assembly 1
16 High-mounted brake lamp assembly 1
- 58 -

LT Lighting System
Introduction to functions
1. Position switch.
Rotate the cylinder at the end of multifunctional
switch lever to the first position to turn on small
lamps, tail lamps, license plate lamps and
instrument panel lamp.
2. Headlamp switch.
Rotate the cylinder at the end of multifunctional
switch lever to the first position to turn on small
lamps, tail lamps, license plate lamps and
instrument panel lamp.
Rotate it to the second position to turn on
headlamps.
3. Turn signal lamp switch.

Turn signal lamps only operate when the ignition
switch is turned on.
To turn right, pull up the turn signal lamp switch
lever.
To turn left, push down the turn signal lamp switch
lever.
4. High beam switch.

To turn on high beam of headlamp, push the
control lever forward (direction away from
yourself) with headlamp on, the high beam lightens
with high beam indicator on the instrument on. To
switch to low beam, pull the control lever
backward.
- 59 -

LT Lighting System
5. Front fog lamp switch.
Turn the headlamp switch knob to position lamp,
press the front fog lamp switch knob, and the front
fog lamp lightens.
6. Rear fog lamp switch.

Turn the headlamp switch knob to position lamp,
press the front fog lamp switch knob and then the
rear fog lamp switch knob, and the rear fog lamp
lightens.
7. Rear ceiling lamp switch.

Press the rear ceiling lamp switch and the rear
ceiling lamp lightens.
8. Front ceiling lamp switch.

OFF: Ceiling lamp off.
DOOR: Ceiling lamp on with door open.
ON: Ceiling lamp normally on.
- 60 -

LT Lighting System
9. Hazard warning lamp switch.
If you press the hazard warning lamp switch, turn
signal lamps on both sides and instrument indicator
shall lighten.
10. Headlamp flickering.

To make the headlamp flicker, pull the switch
towards yourself and release it.
Even though the headlamp switch is located at
“OFF” position, the headlamp flickering can still
be achieved.
- 61 -

LT Lighting System
Fault diagnosis
1. Front fog lamp diagnosis
Step Operation Yes No
①Turn on the ignition switch and set the headlamp to “position lamp” position.
1 Go to Step 2. Check circuit.
②Does the front fog lamp lighten when it is turned on?
2 Does the front fog lamp indicator in combination instrument lighten? System is normal. Go to Step 3.
①Turn off the fog lamps.
②Turn off the ignition switch. Replace
Repair fault
3 ③Remove the combination instrument. combination
circuit.
instrument.
④Using the multimeter as a ohmmeter, measure the circuit resistance. Is the
reading below 1 Ohm？
①Check if the system operates normally.
4 System is normal. Go to Step 1.
②Does the system operate normally?
- 62 -

LT Lighting System
Fault diagnosis
2. Turn signal indicator diagnosis
Turn on the ignition switch and press the hazard warning lamp switch.
1 Go to Step 2. Go to Step 5.
Are front/rear left/right turn signal lamps flickering continuously?
2 Are left/right turn signal indicators flickering continuously? Go to Step 3. Check circuit.
Turn on the ignition switch and set the turn signal lamp switch to left/right
3 turning position. Go to Step 4. Go to Step 6.
Does left/right turn signal indicator flicker as expected?
Turn on the ignition switch and set the turn signal lamp switch to left/right
turning position.
Does left/right turn signal indicator in combination instrument flicker as
expected?
Connect the temporary vehicle ground to body control module terminal. Hazard warning
Check body
5 lamp operates
Does the hazard warning lamp flicker as expected? computer.
normally.
Use multimeter to measure the voltage of flasher relay. Replace flasher
6 Check circuit.
Does the multimeter indicate the battery voltage? relay.
Use multimeter to measure the circuit voltage of turn signal lamp.

7 Check circuit. Check circuit.
Does the multimeter indicate the battery voltage?
①Turn off the hazard warning lamp.
②Turn off the ignition switch. Replace
8 ③Remove the combination instrument. combination Repair circuit.
instrument.
④Use the multimeter to measure the circuit resistance. Is the reading below 1
Ohm？
①Check if the system operates normally.
②Does the system operate normally?
- 63 -

LT Lighting System
Fault diagnosis
3. High-mounted brake lamp failed
1 Is the fuse blown out? Go to Step 4. Go to Step 2.
2 Connect the test lamp with two terminals of brake signal lamp switch. Does Go to Step 5. Go to Step 3.
the test lamp lighten?
3 ①Connect the test lamp with two terminals of high-mounted brake signal Go to Step 6. Go to Step 7.
lamp.
②Depress the brake pedal to check if the test lamp lightens?
4 Replace fuse.
5 Replace brake signal lamp switch.
6 Replace high-mounted brake signal lamp.
7 Repair the circuit of poor contact.
- 64 -

LT Lighting System
Fault diagnosis
4. Ceiling lamp failed
1 Check if the bulb filament of ceiling lamp is burnt out. Is the filament burnt out? Go to Step 4. Go to Step 2.
3 Connect the test lamp respectively with two terminals of contact switch (left front,
right front, left rear, right rear) and terminals of lighting switch. Does the test lamp Go to Step 6. Go to Step 7.
lighten?
4 Replace bulb.
5 Replace fuse.
6 Replace contact switch or lighting switch.
- 65 -

LT Lighting System
Fault diagnosis
5. Glove box lamp failed
2 Check if the bulb filament of glove box is burnt out. Is the filament burnt out? Go to Step 4. Go to Step 5.
3 Replace fuse.
4 Replace bulb.
- 66 -

LT Lighting System
Fault diagnosis
6. Both high and low beams failed
1
Set the switch to position and the high/low beam switch to high beam Go to Step 2. Go to Step 3.
position. Is the fuse intact?
2 Measure the fuse voltage. Is the voltage normal? Go to Step 7. Go to Step 4.
3 Please replace the damaged fuse. Does it still fail after replacement? Go to Step 7. Go to Step 2.
4 Check the high/low beam switch. Is it normal? Go to Step 5.
5 Check switches. Are they normal? Go to Step 6.
6 Check wiring harness of instrument panel as per circuit diagram. Go to Step 8.
7 Check the high beam signaling device. Does it operate normally? Go to Step 9.
8 Check high/low beam and wiring harness connector. Are there intact? Go to Step 9. -
９ Check lamp connector pin. Is wire well-grounded? Go to Step 10.
10 Disconnect the connector between high/low beam and front body harness. Is the
Go to Step 11. Go to Step 12.
pin voltage normal?
11 Check connector for good contact and check the front body harness from
connector to lamp as per circuit diagram.
12 Check connector for good contact and check the instrument panel harness from
fuse to connector as per circuit diagram.
- 67 -

LT Lighting System
Fault diagnosis
7. Only high beam failed
Check if the high beam signaling device operates normally (only for high
beam)?
Check lamps and harness connectors and ensure they are normal when the
2 Go to Step 3.
high beam position is selected.
Disconnect the connector between instrument panel and front body harness. Is
the voltage normal?
Check the front body harness from connector to high beam as per circuit
4 Go to Step 5.
diagram. Is it intact?
Check the instrument panel harness from fuse to connector as per circuit
5
diagram.
6 Is the fuse intact? Go to Step 7. Go to Step 9.
7 Measure the fuse voltage. Is it normal? Go to Step 8. Go to Step 11.
8 Check the instrument panel harness from fuse to connector. Go to Step 10.
９ Replace the fuse. Does it still fail after replacement? Go to Step 8. Go to Step 7.
10 Check connector and front body harness. Go to Step 2.
Check high/low beam switch and the instrument panel harness from switch to
11
fuse.
- 68 -

LT Lighting System
Fault diagnosis
8. Low beam failed
1 Check lamps and wiring harness connectors. Are they intact? Go to Step 2.
Check connector between instrument panel and front body harness. Is the Go to Step 5.
4
measured voltage normal?
5 Check front body electric harness.
6 Check instrument panel harness.
Check high/low beam switch and the instrument panel harness from switch to
7
fuse.
8 Replace the fuse. Does it still fail after replacement? Go to Step 4. Go to Step 3.
- 69 -

LT Lighting System
Fault diagnosis
9. Diagnostic program for front rear fog lamp
1 Set the lamp switch to “ ” position, turn on the front fog lamp
switch and check whether the switch indicator is intact.
2 Is the Fuse 9 intact? Go to Step 4. Go to Step 3.
3 Replace the damaged fuse. Go to Step 4.
Remove the front fog lamp relay and measure the relay voltage. Is the voltage Go to Step 6. Go to Step 5.
4
normal?
Check whether the instrument panel harness and the front fog lamp switch
5
circuit is normal as per circuit diagram. Replace when necessary.
6 Replace relay. Are fog lamps normal? Go to Step 7.
7 Check fog lamp connector. Are voltage and grounding normal? Go to Step 8.
8 Check instrument panel harness from relay to fog lamp as per circuit diagram.
- 70 -

LT Lighting System
Fault diagnosis
10. Rear fog lamp failed with front fog lamp and rear fog lamp turned on simultaneously
Turn on low beam and front fog lamp and then turn on rear fog lamp switch.
Does the switch indicator operate normally?
Check rear fog lamp and wiring harness connector. Ensure voltage and
grounding is normal.
Check connector between instrument panel and rear body harness. Is the
３ Go to Step 4. Go to Step 5.
Check rear body harness from connector and rear fog lamp. Repair when
４
necessary.
Check instrument panel harness from rear fog lamp switch to connector.
5
Repair when necessary.
Remove the rear fog lamp switch. Measure the voltage of wiring harness. Is
the voltage normal?
7 Replace the rear fog lamp switch. Is the rear fog lamp normal? Go to Step 3.
8 Replace the relay. Is the rear fog lamp normal? Go to Step 9.
9 Check the instrument panel harness from relay to switch. Is it normal?? Go to Step 10.
Check the instrument panel harness connected to rear fog lamp relay. Repair
10
when necessary.
11 Replace rear fog lamp.
- 71 -

LT Lighting System
Fault diagnosis
11. Diagnostic program for reversing lamps
2 Replace the damaged fuse. Are the reversing lamps intact? Go to Step 3.
3 Check connector between instrument panel and rear body harness. Is the
4 Check connector between reversing lamp and wiring harness. Is it normal?? Go to Step 5. Go to Step 10.
5 Check rear body harness from connector to reversing lamp.
6 Disconnect the connector of reversing lamp switch. Is the measured voltage
normal?
7 Check the instrument panel harness from fuse to reversing lamp switch.
8 Check the instrument panel harness from connector of reversing lamp switch
Go to Step 9.
to joint. Is it normal??
9 Check connector between brake lamps and wiring harness. Go to Step 10.
10 Check the ground point of rear body harness. Is it well grounded?
- 72 -

LT Lighting System
Fault diagnosis
12. Diagnostic program for brake lamps
1 Turn on the ignition switch to check fuse. Is the fuse intact? Go to Step 3. Go to Step 2.
2 Please replace the damaged fuse. Does it still fail after replacement? Go to Step 5. Go to Step 3.
4 Check the instrument panel harness.
5 Disconnect the brake switch connector and check the brake switch. Ensure the
brake switch is normal. Is the measured voltage normal?
6 Check the instrument panel harness from brake switch to fuse.
7 Check connector between instrument panel and rear body harness. Is it normal?? Go to Step 8.
8 Check the rear body harness from connector to brake lamp. Go to Step 9.
9 Check the connector between brake lamp and wiring harness. Go to Step 10.
10 Check the ground point of rear body harness. Is it well grounded?
- 73 -

LT Lighting System
Fault diagnosis
13. Hazard warning lamp failed but with normal operation of turn signal lamps
2 Replace the damaged fuse. Is the hazard warning lamp normal? Go to Step 3.
3 Remove the hazard warning switch and check if it is normal. Go to Step 4.
4 Check if the voltage of hazard warning lamp switch is normal? Go to Step 6. Go to Step 5.
5 Check the instrument panel harness from fuse to hazard warning lamp switch.
6 Check the ground wire of hazard warning lamp switch. Is it normal? Go to Step 8. Go to Step 7.
7 Check the ground wire of instrument panel harness.
8 Check the lead from instrument panel harness to hazard warning lamp switch.
- 74 -

LT Lighting System
Fault diagnosis
14. Turn signal lamp failed but with normal operation of hazard warning lamp
2 Replace the damaged fuse. Is the turn signal lamp normal? Go to Step 3.
3 Remove the hazard warning lamp switch and measure the switch voltage. Is the Go to Step 5.
voltage normal?
4 Check the instrument panel harness from fuse to hazard warning lamp switch.
5 Check if the hazard warning lamp switch is normal.
- 75 -

LT Lighting System
Removal of headlamp
2. Remove the front grille, front compartment panel,

and front bumper.
3. Remove mounting bolts from headlamps.
4. Disconnect the connecting wire to remove

headlamps.
- 76 -

LT Lighting System
Removal of clearance lamps
2. Hold the side turn signal lamp with hands and push
it forwards, and then pull the lamp outwards with
force.
3. Disconnect the connecting wire of clearance lamp.
4. Remove the clearance lamp.
- 77 -

LT Lighting System
Removal of front fog lamps
3. Disconnect the connecting wire of fog lamp.
4. Remove the front fog lamp.
- 78 -

LT Lighting System
Removal of ceiling lamps
2. Remove the casing of ceiling lamp.
3. Remove the mounting bolts from ceiling lamp.
4. Remove the ceiling lamp.
- 79 -

LT Lighting System
Removal of rear tail lamps
2. Remove the mounting bolts from tail lamp.
3. Disconnect the connecting wire of tail lamp.
4. Remove the tail lamp.
- 80 -

LT Lighting System
Removal of high-mounted brake lamp
2. Open the back door.
3. Remove the mounting bolts and disconnect the

connecting wire of high-mounted brake lamp.
4. Remove the high-mounted brake lamp.
- 81 -

LT Lighting System
Removal of rear fog lamp
2. Remove the rear bumper.
3. Disconnect the connecting wire of rear fog lamp.
4. Remove the rear fog lamp.
- 82 -

LT Lighting System
Specification
Basic parameters
S/N Name Bulb Type Power

H4 12V 60/55W 60/55W
Front High/low beam
H4 12V 60/55W 60/55W
1 combination
Position lamp 12V 16W 16W
lamp
Turn signal lamp 12V 21W 21W
Turn signal lamp 12V 21W 21W
Rear Brake lamp 12V 21W 21W
2 combination Reversing lamp 12V 21W 21W
lamp Rear fog lamp 12V 21W 21W
Position lamp 12V 5W 5W
3 Front fog lamp 12V 55W 55W
4 Side turn signal lamp 12V 5W 5W
5 High-mounted brake lamp LED module 1.5W
6 License plate lamp 12V 10W 10W
7 Front ceiling lamp assembly 12V 10W 10W
8 Rear ceiling lamp assembly 12V 10W 10W
- 83 -

LT Lighting System
- 84 -

WW Wiper and Washer System
Wiper and Washer System

Subject Page
Wiper..............................................................................................................................................................................86
Information functions............................................................................................................................................... 89
Wiper..............................................................................................................................................................................91
Definitions of pins.................................................................................................................................................... 91
Troubleshooting........................................................................................................................................................ 92
Wiper..............................................................................................................................................................................95
Removal of the wiper................................................................................................................................................95
Removal of the windshield washing fluid reservoir................................................................................................. 97
Removal of the Wiper washing nozzle..................................................................................................................... 98
Specification
Wiper..............................................................................................................................................................................99
- 85 -

Wiper system
Wiper system is the system used for cleaning raindrops on windshield and rear window in order to maintain clear
vision. The application of spray washer in the system is for dirt removal on the windshield. Therefore, it is a necessary
system for driving safety.
Component drawing of wiper system:
- 86 -

Mounting position of wiper system components
1. Wiper motor
Mounting position: in the engine compartment
2. Wiper switch
Mounting position: on the combination switch
under the steering wheel
3. Wiper blade
Mounting position: on the front windshield
4. Wiper linkage
Mounting position: connecting with wiper blade at
the front windshield
- 87 -

Mounting position of wiper system components
5. Washer nozzle
Mounting position: on the wiper decorative panel
6. Washer motor and washing liquid reservoir

Mounting position: at the right front lower part of
engine compartment
- 88 -

Operation of wiper system function
1. OFF gear
When it is at this gear, the wiper is in off state and
does not operate.
2. INT gear
When it is at this gear, the wiper operates
intermittently.
3. LOW gear
When it is at this gear, the wiper operates with a
low speed.
4. HI gear
When it is at this gear, the wiper operates with a
high speed.
- 89 -

Operation of wiper system function
5. Operation of windshield cleaning
In the case of windshield cleaning, pull up the
wiper/washer lever. When the washer is turned on,
water which is sprayed from the water sprayer
cleans the windshield automatically and the wiper
shall operate simultaneously. Loosen the lever and
cleaning operation is stopped.
6. Wiper intermittent operation

Shift the wiper switch to “INT” and the wiper shall
operate intermittently. Turn the adjustment knob of
intermittence when the wiper switch is at “INT”,
there shall be corresponding intermittence change.
The swing interval of wiper controlled by the
adjustable switch is in the range of 1~18 seconds.
- 90 -

Diagnostic Test
Definitions of pins
No. 1 2 3 4 5
Color Red Green Blue Yellow Black
Positive Low High Negative
Function Return
pole speed speed pole
- 91 -

Diagnostic Test
Troubleshooting
1. Fault mode：No matter what gear is the wiper switch at, there are no operations of the wiper and washer.
1 Inspect the wiper fuse for the existence of damage. Go to Step 3 Step 2
Remove the wiper switch, inspect it and confirm that there are no faults in it.
Then measure the wire harness with a digital multimeter.
2 Go to Step 5 Go to Step 4
Inspect the voltages from the connector to the wiper switch and verify whether
they are normal.
3 Replace the damaged fuse. Go to Step 2
Inspect the instrument panel wire harness between the fuse and the wiper switch
4 Go to Step 5
and repair if necessary.
Verify the existence of good contact between the wiper switch and wire harness
connector.
5 Disconnect the wire harness and wiper motor, inspect the instrument panel wire Go to Step 6
harness among the wiper switch, the fuse and the wiper motor according to
relevant circuit diagrams. Repair the harness if necessary.
Inspect the wiper motor and repair if necessary. Confirm that there are no faults —
6 in the wiper motor and verify the existence of good contact of the wiper motor Go to Step 7
connector.
Inspect the ground wire of the wiper motor in the instrument panel wire harness
7 Go to Step 8
and repair if necessary.
8 Verify whether the system is intact.
2. Fault mode: No operation at HI gear

Disconnect the wire harness from the wiper motor. Measure the voltage at wire
harness side with a digital multimeter and verify whether the voltage is normal.
2 Inspect the internal structure of the wiper motor, replace or repair if necessary.
Remove the wiper switch and inspect it to confirm that there are no faults in it.
3 Inspect the instrument panel wire harness between the wiper switch and the wiper
motor. Repair the instrument panel wire harness if necessary.
3. Fault mode: No operation at LOW gear

Disconnect the wire harness connector from the wiper motor. Measure the
1 voltage at wire harness side with a digital multimeter and verify whether the Go to Step 2 Go to Step 3
voltage is normal.
2 Inspect the internal structure of the wiper motor, replace or repair if necessary.
Remove the wiper switch and inspect it to confirm that there are no faults in it.
3 Go to Step 4
Replace or repair it if necessary.
Inspect the instrument panel wire harness between the wiper switch and the wiper
4
motor. Repair the instrument panel wire harness if necessary.
- 92 -

Diagnostic Test
Troubleshooting
4. Fault mode: No operation at INT gear only
Remove the wiper relay and shift the ignition switch to ON and shift the wiper Go to Step 4 Go to Step 2
1 switch to internal gear. Measure the voltage of relay pin with a digital multimeter
and verify whether the voltage is normal.
Remove the wiper switch and inspect it to confirm that there are no faults in it. Go to Step 3
2
Replace or repair it if necessary.
Inspect the instrument panel wire harness between the wiper switch and the wiper Go to Step 7
3
relay, repair the harness if necessary.
4 Inspect the ground wire at the relay for its good grounding. Go to Step 6 Go to Step 5
5 Repair the ground wire and confirm whether it is in good grounding.
6 Replace the wire relay and confirm whether the system is intact.
Inspect the instrument panel wire harness between the wiper switch and the relay Go to Step 8 Go to Step 10
7
and confirm that there are no faults in it.
Remove the new wiper relay and measure the voltage of the relay with a digital Go to Step 10
8
multimeter to verify whether the voltage is normal.
Inspect the instrument panel wire harness and repair it if necessary. Confirm that Go to Step 10
9
there are no faults in it.
Inspect the instrument panel wire harness between the relay and the wiper motor
10 and repair the instrument panel if necessary. Confirm that there are no faults in it
and verify whether the system is intact.
5. Fault mode: No operation of the washer

1 Remove the wiper/washer switch and shift the ignition switch to ON. Measure
the pin voltage of the switch at its original position with a digital multimeter to Go to Step 3 Go to Step 2
verify whether the voltage is normal.
2 Inspect the instrument panel wire harness between the fuse and the wiper/washer
switch. Repair the instrument panel if necessary and confirm that there are no Go to Step 3
faults in it
3 Inspect the internal structure of the wiper switch, replace or repair if necessary.
Confirm that there are no faults in the switch and verify whether the system is Go to Step 4
intact.
4 Install the wiper/washer switch. Disconnect the washer motor connector and shift
the wiper/washer switch to WASHING. Measure the pin voltage of the washer
Go to Step 6 Go to Step 5
motor at its connector (the side of wire harness) with a digital multimeter to
verify whether the voltage is normal.
5 Inspect and repair the wire harness between the wiper/washer and the washer
Go to Step 6
motor according to relevant circuit diagrams.
6 Inspect the instrument panel wire harness between the wiper motor and the
wiper/washer switch according to relevant circuit diagrams and verify whether it Go to Step 7
is intact.
7 Replace the washer motor and verify whether the system is intact.
- 93 -

Diagnostic Test
Troubleshooting
6. Fault mode: Deviation of the wiper blade form its original position
1 Remove the wiper switch and inspect the internal structure of it. Repair or Go to Step 2
replace it if necessary and confirm that there are no faults in it.
2 Disconnect the wiper motor connector. Measure the pin voltage at the wire Go to Step 4 Go to Step 3
harness side with a digital multimeter to verify whether the voltage is normal.
3 Inspect the instrument panel wire harness between the fuse and the wiper motor Go to Step 4
according to relevant circuit diagrams and confirm that there are no faults in it.
4 Remove the wiper motor and inspect its structure. Repair or replace it if
necessary and verify whether the system is intact.
7. Fault mode: Nonstop operation of the wiper

1 Inspect the fuse and verify whether it is intact. Go to Step 2 Go to Step 3
2 Replace the damaged fuse. Go to Step 3
3 Remove the wiper switch and measure the voltage of the switch with a digital Go to Step 5 Go to Step 4
multimeter to verify whether the voltage is normal.
4 Inspect the instrument panel wire harness between the fuse and the wiper switch Go to Step 5 Go to Step 6
and repair it if necessary.
5 Inspect the internal structure of the wiper switch and replace or repair it if Go to Step 10
necessary. Confirm that there are no faults in it and verify whether the system is
intact.
6 Disconnect the connector from the wiper motor, shift the ignition switch to ON Go to Step 7 Go to Step 10
and shift the wiper switch to HI gear. Measure the pin voltage at the connector
(wire harness side) with a digital multimeter to verify whether the voltage is
normal.
7 Inspect the instrument panel wire harness between the wiper switch and the Go to Step 8 Go to Step 9
relay. Confirm that there are no faults in it.
8 Verify the existence of good grounding of the ground wire with a digital
multimeter.
9 Remove the wiper motor and replace or repair it if necessary. Verify whether the Go to Step 10
system is intact.
10 Inspect the instrument panel wire harness between the wiper switch and the wiper
motor according to relevant circuit diagrams. Repair it if necessary. Confirm that
there are no faults in it and verify whether the system is intact.
- 94 -

Removal of the wiper
2. Remove mounting bolts of the wiper.
3. Disconnect the connecting pipe of the windshield

washing fluid nozzle.
4. Remove sealing rubber strips and fixing clamps of

the wiper decorative panel.
- 95 -

Removal of the wiper
5. Take down the wiper blade and wiper decorative
panel.
6. Remove connecting bolts of the wiper linkage.
7. Take down the wiper linkage and wiper motor.
- 96 -

Removal of the windshield washing fluid reservoir
2. Lift the vehicle.
3. Remove mounting bolts of the windshield washing

fluid reservoir.
4. Take out the windshield washing fluid reservoir.
- 97 -

Removal of the Wiper washing nozzle
2. Pull up the washing nozzle with hand.
3. Disconnect the water pipe of nozzle.
4. Take down the washing nozzle.
- 98 -

Specification
Technical parameter
No load Loaded 4.4N.m
Low speed High speed Low speed High speed
Speed r/min Current A Speed r/min Current A Speed r/min Current A Speed r/min Current A
45±5 ≤2 65±8 ≤3.5 ≥20 ≤5.5 ≥45 ≤6.8
High speed braking Low speed braking

Torque N.m Current A Torque N.m Current A
19.6 ≤32 27 ≤26
Noise High speed≤60dB(A) Low speed≤50dB(A)
- 99 -

- 100 -

PT Reversing parking assistance system
Reversing Radar
Subject Page
Reversing Radar...........................................................................................................................................................102
Mounting position sensor....................................................................................................................................... 102
Operating principle................................................................................................................................................. 103
Reversing Radar...........................................................................................................................................................104
Definitions of reversing radar computer pins......................................................................................................... 104
Troubleshooting...................................................................................................................................................... 106
Reversing Radar...........................................................................................................................................................108
Removal of the reversing radar computer...............................................................................................................108
Removal of the reversing radar sensor....................................................................................................................110
Specification
Reversing Radar........................................................................................................................................................... 111
Basic parameters..................................................................................................................................................... 111
- 101 -

Reversing radar sensor
There are 4 sensor probes for Sunray reversing radar. With the application of ultrasonic sensor, the distance
measurement of the obstacle and the vehicle can be carried out. In the process of reversing, the buzzer plays a role in
supporting reminding for the driver via beeps with different frequencies.
Mounting position of the reversing radar sensor:

The reversing radar computer is mounted on the rear bumper.
- 102 -

Operating principle of the reversing radar
1. Schematic diagram of reversing radar system
Sensor Sensor Sensor Sensor
Buzzer
Controller
assembly
Display (reserved)
2. Schematic diagram of ultrasonic distance

measurement
Obstacle
3. The reversing radar controller sends ultrasonic

signals to the sensor in order to drive the sensor for
ultrasonic wave generation; Ultrasonic signals are
received by the sensor via obstacle reflection and
the internal circuit of the sensor amplifies the
reflected signals and sends them to the controller.
After analysis and calculation of the controller, the
distance information of obstacle is processed by the
controller and the buzzer is driven to beep. For
obstacles at different distances from the vehicle,
the buzzer is controlled by the controller to beep in
different frequencies thus to remind the driver of
obstacles.
4. Factors which may affect the operation of reversing
radar:
� Temperature
� Air pressure
� Humidity
- 103 -

Diagnosis and Test
Definitions of reversing radar computer pins
1. Control logic
In the case of no fault in sensor, the buzzer 2HZ beeps once; in the case of one or more faulted sensors, the buzzer 2HZ beeps twice and
then turns into normal distance measurement.
Distance 0-30 ﹥30-60 ﹥60-90 ﹥90-180 ﹥180
Beeping frequency of the buzzer ON 8HZ 4 HZ 2 HZ OFF
2. Definitions of control module interfaces

Connector figure Pin Signal name Function
1 R-SHIFT Reversing signal
2 NC
3 NC
4 S-CR Right intermediate
probe
5 NC
6 NC
7 S-L Left probe
8 S-CL Left intermediate
probe
9 NC
10 NC
11 NC
12 NC
13 DATA Data display
14 Buzzer Control signal of
buzzer
15 S-R Right probe
16 GND Ground
3. Probe interfaces
Connector figure Pin Current Function
1 0.1 Power supply
2 0.1 Ground
- 104 -

Diagnosis and Test
Definitions of reversing radar computer pins continued
pins（continued
continued）
4. Buzzer connectors
Connector figure Pin Current Function
1 0.1 Ground
2 0.1 Power supply
- 105 -

Diagnosis and Test
Possible conditions for the out of operation reversing radar
1. Verify whether there is snow or mud on radar
probes.
2. Verify whether the surface of the radar probe is

frozen.
3. Verify whether the obstacles approaching are thin

objects like iron wires, ropes and mesh walls.
4. Verify whether the obstacles approaching are too

low.
- 106 -

Diagnosis and Test
Possible conditions for the reversing radar false alarms
1. The vehicle is running downward from steep hills.
2. The vehicle is equipped with the radio or antenna

with high output and these equipments are in
operation.
3. Other vehicles with honk, motorcycles with engine

noise and objects with noise of exhaust brake are
approaching the vehicle.
4. The vehicle is running in jelly snow or rain.
- 107 -

Removal of the reversing radar computer
2. Remove the rear seat.
3. Remove the trim panel at the left rear side of the

vehicle.
4. Remove mounting bolts of the reversing radar.
- 108 -

Removal and Installation (continued)
Removal of the reversing radar
5. Disconnect the connecting wire of the reversing
radar computer.
6. Take out the reversing radar.
- 109 -

Removal of the reversing radar sensor
2. Remove the rear bumper.
3. Disconnect the connecting wire of probe.
4. Screw out the probe.
- 110 -

Specification
Basic parameter of the reversing radar:
Technical parameter of the control module:
Rated operating voltage DC12V
Range of operating voltage DC9V～16V
Operating temperature -30～+80℃
Storage temperature -40～+85℃
Operating frequency 58KHz
Max.detection distance For intermediate probe180cm；For left/right probe 60cm
Technical parameter of the probe:

Rated operating voltage DC12V
Range of operating voltage DC9V～16V
Operating temperature -30～+80℃
Storage temperature -40～+85℃
Operating frequency 58KHz
Detection angle Horzontal 80°,vertical 34°
Technical parameter of the buzzer:

Rated voltage DC12V
Operating voltage DC9V～16V
Operating temperature -30℃～+80℃
Storage temperature -40℃～+85℃
Sound level of the buzzer ≥90dB～105dB/10cm/12V(min)
Frequency of the buzzer 2.9±0.3kHz
- 111 -

- 112 -

AV Audio/ Video System
Audio/Video
Audio/ Video System

Audio/Video
Subject Page
Radio............................................................................................................................................................................ 114
Mounting position...................................................................................................................................................114
Introduction functions.............................................................................................................................................115
Precautions..............................................................................................................................................................119
Radio............................................................................................................................................................................ 121
Radio............................................................................................................................................................................ 124
Removal of Radio................................................................................................................................................... 124
Removal of loudspeakers........................................................................................................................................125
Specification
Radio............................................................................................................................................................................ 127
Basic parameters.....................................................................................................................................................127
- 113 -

Audio/Video
Audio system
SUNRAY audio control system, powered by 12V DC power supply, is composed of CD module, radio module and
MP3 module, which features with 10 seconds electronic anti-vibration reliability, USB data reading function and
FM/AM radio, and can supports play formats of CD, MP3 and WMA.
The host, featuring with four-way audio output function, can be connected with four-way loudspeaker; therefore,
vehicle occupants can adjust proper voice and select play format freely based on actual road condition, as well as
adjust various output volume by audio balance setting.
Mounting position of audio host:

In the middle of center console of instrument panel.
-- 114 --

Audio/Video
Introduction to CD player function
1. Press it shortly.
BASS: Low pitch
TREBLE: High pitch
BAL: Left/right balance
FADER: Front/rear balance
CUSTOM: Set by customer
Under “CUSTOM” mode, sound effect can be
achieved by adjusting volume up or down.
JAZZ: Jazz music
VOCAL: Vocal
POP : Popular music
ROCK: Rock and roll
CLASSIC: Classic music
FLAT: Flat voice
Loudness enhancement ON;
Press and hold it.

Loudness enhancement OFF.
The machine is turned on if it is under OFF status.
Press and hold it.

Mute mode is turned on if it is under ON status.
Turn counterclockwise.
To decrease volume.
Turn clockwise.
To increase volume.
-115-

Audio/Video
Under radio mode, the first radio station is
selected; under playback mode, random play starts.
Press and hold it.

The current radio station is stored onto No.1
position.
Under radio mode, the second radio station is
selected; under playback mode, repeat play starts.
Press and hold it.

position.
Under radio mode, the third radio station is
selected; under playback mode, scan play starts.
Press and hold it.

position.
Under radio mode, the fourth radio station is
selected; under playback mode, it starts to play
from the last 10th songs.
Press and hold it.

position.
-116-

Audio/Video
Under radio mode, the fifth radio station is
selected; under playback mode, it skips the first 10
songs to play.
Press and hold it.

position.

CD quit if it is inside.

Cycle selection of band from FM1, FM2, FM3,
AM and AM2.
Press and hold it.

Under FM mode, maximum 15 radio stations can
be searched automatically and stored onto FM1,
FM2 and FM3; under AM mode, maximum 10
radio stations can be searched automatically and
stored onto AM1 and AM2.

Cycle selection of radio/playback sound source.
-117-

Audio/Video
Auto searching to low end.
Press and hold it.

Manual searching to low end.

Auto searching to high end.
Press and hold it.

Manual searching to high end.
15. With U disk inserted, MP3/WMA format play can

be achieved.
-118-

Audio/Video
Precautions
1. Don’t place CD player under hot environment.
2. Don’t remove the CD player violently.
3. Don’t use the CD player when driving on bumpy

road surface.
4. The deformed CD cannot be applied.
-119-

Audio/Video
Precautions
5. Handle the CD properly.
6. The CD is not allowed to be exposed under strong

sunlight.
7. Don’t write or stick label on the CD.
8. Keep the CD clean.
-120-

Audio/Video
Troubleshooting
1. Poor reception of antenna.
Does the reception effect decrease or are there more than one radio stations cannot
be received?
Check if there are specific frequencies interfered by the electrical system of vehicle
as per procedures below:
①Turn the ignition switch to ON position.
2 ②Select the influenced radio station. Check radio system. —

③Remove one fuse each time until the failed one is found out.
④Perform necessary maintenance for the failed circuit.
Is the maintenance finished?
①Disconnect the negative cable of battery.
②Disconnect the antenna lead connector from the radio receiver.
③Measure the resistance between antenna lead connector and battery ground cable.
Is the resistance higher than the specified?
①Disconnect the radio antenna lead connector from the windshield.
4 ②Measure the resistance between co-axial cable shielded ground and radio Go to Step 8. Go to Step 10.
connector shielded circuit.
Measure the resistance of center conductor (signal input) between the antenna
5 connector and the radio connector. Go to Step 7. Go to Step 6.
Measure the resistance between center conductor (signal input) and coaxial cable
6 shielded ground. Go to Step 9. Go to Step 1.1
Is the resistance lower than the specified?
①Check coaxial cable and interconnection for failed connection or corrosion.
②Repair cable and interconnection when necessary.
7 ③If the cable and interconnection are normal, please replace the coaxial cable of Check radio system. —
antenna.
①Check coaxial cable ground for failed connection or corrosion.
②Repair the ground when necessary.
8 Check radio system. —
③Replace the coaxial cable if the ground is normal.
9 Replace the affected section of coaxial cable. If the maintenance finished? Check radio system. —
Perform maintenance for the failed connection or corrosion at the coaxial ground
10 cable. Check radio system. —
①Check coaxial cable connector on the windshield for failed connection or
corrosion.
11 ②Replace the good radio already known. Check radio system. —
③Replace the windshield if the reception is not improved.
-121-

Audio/Video
Troubleshooting
2. No radio display with the parking lamp on.
①Turn the ignition key to ACC position.
②Turn on the radio.
1 ③Turn the parking lamp. Check harness. Go to Step 2.
④Adjust the instrument panel lamp dimmer switch.
Does the fluorescent shield display of radio operate normally?
Test the DC dimmer signal circuit for:
Open circuit
High resistance
Short circuit to ground
Poor contact
Is the fault detected and eliminated?
In the DC dimmer signal circuit, test the output DC voltage of the headlamp and
instrument panel lamp dimmer switch.
Does the voltage change with the rotation of instrument panel lamp dimmer
switch?
Replace the radio.
4 Go to Step 6. —
Replace headlamp and instrument panel lamp dimmer switch.
5 Go to Step 6. —
Operate the system to check the maintenance result.
6 System is intact. Go to Step 1.
Is the fault eliminated?
-122-

Audio/Video
Troubleshooting
3. Loudspeaker failed to operate.
1 Does every loudspeaker fail to operate? Go to Step 6. Go to Step 2.
Regulate the radio balance and find out the suspected loudspeaker.
Does this loudspeaker operate normally?
①Remove the radio.
3 ②Use an appropriate jumper to make instantaneous contact with the 1.5V battery Go to Step 7. Go to Step 4.
in relevant loudspeaker circuit.
Is there any bang of loudspeaker?
Test relevant loudspeaker circuit for open circuit or too high voltage.
Check loudspeaker for poor contact.
Test every loudspeaker circuit for short circuit to positive battery voltage or ground.
Check radio harness connector for poor contact.
Replace relevant loudspeaker.
8 Go to Step 10. —
If the replacement finished?
Replace the radio.
Replace the failed system.
10 Go to Step 1. System is intact.
Does the system return to normal?
-123-

Audio/Video
Removal of CD player
2. Remove the outer cover plate of CD player.
3. Unscrew the mounting bolts from CD player.
4. Disconnect the connecting wire of radio and

remove the CD player.
-124-

Audio/Video
Removal of loudspeakers
2. Remove the third and fourth rows of seat.
3. Remove the inner trims.
4. Remove the mounting bolts.
-125-

Audio/Video
Removal of loudspeakers
5. Disconnect the connecting harness and remove the
loudspeaker.
-126-

Audio/Video
Specification
Basic parameters of audio system
1. Operating condition and performance parameter:
Item Range Typical Value
Operating voltage DC 10.8V ～ 16V 12V
Operating temperature -20℃ ～ 70℃ /
Storage temperature -40℃ ～ 80℃ /
Relative humidity 40% ～ 93% /
Atmospheric pressure 86KPa ～ 106KPa /
2. AM technical data:
Item Unit Performance Parameter
Frequency range KHz 531 ～ 1629
Intermediate frequency KHz 455±5
S/N sensitivity dBuV ≤40
S/N ratio dB ≥40
Selectivity dBuV ≥40
Intermediate frequency rejection ratio dBuV ≥50
Image rejection ratio dBuV ≥60
Automatic gain control dBuV ≥40
Maximum output power W ≥10
Distortion % ≤3
3. FM technical data:
Frequency range MHz 87.5 ～ 108
Intermediate frequency MHz 10.7 ± 0.3
S/N sensitivity dBuV ≤12
-3dB amplitude limiting dBuV ≤10
S/N ratio dBuV ≥50
Intermediate frequency rejection ratio dBuV ≥65
Image rejection ratio dBuV ≥50
AM rejection ratio dBuV ≥35
Selectivity dB ≥20
Search sensitivity dBuV 14 ～ 24
Channel separation L/R dB ≥25
Distortion % ≤2
Overload distortion % ≤5
Maximum output power W ≥15W
Stereo S/N ratio dB ≥46
-- 127 --

Audio/Video
4. Technical data for USB-MP3 play:

Frequency response dB 100Hz/100KHz ±3dB
Standard distortion / ≤3%
S/N ratio dB ≥50
Channel separation dB ≥45
Maximum output power W ≥10
5. Technical data for CD play:

Item Unit Test Condition Performance Parameter
S/N ratio dB 0dB Track ≥60
dB 20Hz ≥45
Channel separation dB 1KHz ≥50
dB 10KHz ≥45
% 1KHz ≤0.35
Distortion
% 10KHz ≤0.5
dB 20Hz 0± 3
Frequency response
dB 20KHz 0± 3
Maximum output power W 1KHz ≥15
CD read time S TCD-784 ≤10
CD quit time S TCD-784 ≤8
Time to next track S TCD-784 ≤3
Time between first and last track S TCD-784 ≤5
Pause and play time S TCD-784 ≤6
Error correction during reading core shift
um TCD-712R ≥140
CD
Error correction during reading plane
mm TCD-731RA ≥0.6
polarized CD
Breakpoint/macula during reading error
mm TCD-725B ≥0.7 / ≥0.6
correction CD
Fingerprint during reading error correction
um TCD-725B ≥65
CD
6. Technical data for loudspeakers:

Rated impedance Ω 4Ω± 0.6
Rated power W 20W
Maximum rated power W 30W
Rated resonance frequency HZ 80HZ±20
Rated frequency range HZ f0-8KHZ
Rated characteristic sensitivity dB 87±3
Low temperature resistance ℃ -40℃
High temperature resistance ℃ 85℃
-- 128 --

SB Seat Belt
Seat Belt
Subject Page
Seat Belt....................................................................................................................................................................... 130
Overview................................................................................................................................................................ 130
Seat Belt....................................................................................................................................................................... 131
Seat Belt....................................................................................................................................................................... 132
Removal of seat belt............................................................................................................................................... 132
Removal of seat belt buckle lock............................................................................................................................134
- 129 -

SB Seat Belt
Seat Belt
The seat belts are assembled on each seats for Sunray. The seat belt is designed to limit the movement of passengers
and protect the passengers when a collision occurs to the vehicle.
Seat Belt
- 130 -

SB Seat Belt
Troubleshooting
Fault of driver’s seat belt indicator lamp circuit
①Turn the ignition switch on and the engine switch is off.
Important precautions: When the driver’s seat belt is not fastened, the seat belt
indicator lamp should illuminate.
1 ②Fasten, unfasten the driver’s seat belt and check the seat belt indicator lamp in — Go to Step 2
instrument panel combination instrument.
When unfasten and fasten the driver’s seat belt, do the corresponding seat belt
indicator lamps illuminate and extinguish?
Replace the instrument panel combination instrument.
3 Go to Step 6 —
Has the replacement operation been completed?
①Turn the ignition switch off.
②Disconnect the connector of left seat belt switch.
③Test if the signal circuit of left seat belt switch is open or high-impedance.
Has the condition been found and corrected?
Test if ground circuit of left seat belt switch is open or high-impedance.
Has the problem been found and resolved?
Replace the left seat belt switch.
5 Go to Step 6 —
Has the replacement operation been completed?
Operate the system to check the maintenance effect. The system is
6 Go to Step 2
Has the problem been found and resolved? normal
- 131 -

SB Seat Belt
Removal of seat belt
2. Remove the left front door stepping shield.
3. Remove the bottom mounting bolts of seat belts.
- 132 -

SB Seat Belt
4. Remove the B pillar inner trim panel.
- 133 -

SB Seat Belt
Removal of seat belt
5. Remove the covers of top mounting bolts.
6. Remove the top mounting bolts.
7. Remove the bottom mounting bolts.
8. Remove the seat belt.
- 134 -

SB Seat Belt
Removal of seat belt buckle lock
2. Remove the front seat inner lateral panel assembly.
3. Remove the nuts of lower fastening buckle lock

from cushion frame.
4. Remove the seat belt buckle locks from seats.
- 135 -

GW Power Window
Power Window
Subject Page
Power Window.............................................................................................................................................................136
Installation position................................................................................................................................................ 136
Operation Instructions............................................................................................................................................ 137
Power Window.............................................................................................................................................................138
Power Window.............................................................................................................................................................142
Removal of window regulator motor......................................................................................................................142
Removal of window regulator switch..................................................................................................................... 143
-135-

GW Power Window
Power Window
Both front door windows for Sunray adopt electric up/down operation. Power window system can lift or lower
windows electrically by turning on the switches on each door trims. The main switch on front door trim at the driver’s
side enables the driver to lift or lower windows at the passenger’s side. Power window system includes power window
switches on each door trims, body control module and power window motors inside each doors. Window glass
regulator assembly is used instead of window motor. If the window motor is required to be replaced, the window glass
regulator must be replaced.
Installation position of power window:

Inside the left/right front doors.
-136-

JAC Multifunctional Commercial Vehicle Company Sunray series Power Window
Instruction and operation
Instructions for power window function
1. Power window switch.
Power window is controlled by 2 window switches
on front door trims. The window switch at the
driver’s side enables the driver to control windows
at the passenger’s side.
2. Power window motor.

Permanent-magnetic reversible motor enables
window regulator upper window bracket to move
by the rope wheel mechanism. Connect the battery
positive and negative to both terminals of motor
and enable the motor to rotate towards one
direction. The reverse current flowing to the 2
same connections enables the motor to rotate in
reverse.
3. Operation mode.
Operation mode of power window includes：
Manual up;
Manual down;
Auto down (only driver side door)
4. After the ignition switch off, the power window

can still be operated, and cannot be operated when
the following situation occurs:
� Time for ignition switch off is more than 30
seconds.
� Any door is opened.
� Lock the doors from outside.
- 137 -

GW Power Window
Troubleshooting
1. All the door power windows cannot operate.
Step Operation Method Yes No
Check if F31 50A fuse of engine compartment fuse block, F29 15A fuse, F7
10A fuse, F12 10A fuse of meter fuse block are disconnected.
Check if the power supply for ETACS is normal
①Turn the ignition switch off and the voltage between Terminal 10 of
2 ETACS connector M36 and ground is the battery voltage. Go to Step 3 Go to Step 9
②Turn the ignition switch on and the voltage between Terminal 18, Terminal
9 of ETACS connector M37 and ground is the battery voltage.
Check if the ground for ETACS is normal
3 Turn the ignition switch off and disconnect the ETACS connector. Terminal Go to Step 4 Go to Step 10
19 of connector M36 and ground are conductive.
Check if the operation of power window relay is normal.
①Terminal 2 and 4 of relay are constant power supply.
②After the ignition switch is turned on, the voltage for Terminal 1 of relay is
the battery voltage.
Turn the ignition switch on and check if Terminal 3 of power window relay
grounds.
Check if the harnesses of ETACS and power window relay are conductive.
6 Terminal 15 of ETACS connector M36 should be conductive with Terminal 3 Go to Step 13 Go to Step 14
of relay.
Check if the power supply and ground wire for left front door power window
switch are normal
①Turn the ignition switch on and the battery voltage exists between Terminal
11 of left front door power window switch connector D04 and ground.
②Terminal 10 of left front door power window switch connector D04 and
ground are conductive.
After servicing the fault due to circuit, replace the fuse. Is the fault
8 Go to Step 2
eliminated?
Repair the open or short power supply circuit for ETACS. Is the fault
9 Go to Step 3
eliminated?
10 Check if the ground circuit for ETACS is open. Go to Step 4
Repair the circuit fault and replace the power window relay. Is the fault
11 Go to Step 7
eliminated?
12 Replace the left front door power window switch.
13 Replace the ETACS. Go to Step 7
Repair the connecting circuit between ETACS and power window. Is the fault
14 Go to Step 13
eliminated?
Repair the harnesses of left front door power window switch. Is the fault
15 Go to Step 12
eliminated?
-- 138 --

Troubleshooting
2. The left front door power window cannot operate.
Check if the output signal from power window main switch is normal
Disconnect the left front door power window motor connector and turn the ignition switch
1 on. When the power window main switch goes up, the voltage between Terminal 2 of left Go to Step 2 Go to Step 3
front door power window motor connector D08 and ground is the battery voltage, the voltage
between Terminal 1 and ground is 0 V, and it is reverse when going down.
2 Replace the left front door power window motor.
Check if the harness connection between left front door power window switch and motor is
normal.
Repair the harness connector between left front door power window switch and motor. Is the
4 Go to Step 2
fault eliminated?
- 139 -

GW Power Window
Troubleshooting
3. The right front door power window cannot operate.
Check if the output signal from power window main switch is normal
Disconnect the right front door power window motor connector and turn the
1 ignition switch on. When the right front door power window main switch Go to Step 2 Go to Step 3
goes up, the voltage between Terminal 1 of right front door power window
motor connector D15 and ground is the battery voltage, the voltage of
Terminal 2 is 0 V, and it is reverse when going down.
2 Replace the right front door power window motor.
Check if the conductivity of right front door power window switch is normal
Disconnect the right front door power window switch connector D12 and
3 check the conductivity between Terminal 4, 6, 8 and Terminal 1, 3. Terminal Go to Step 5 Go to Step 4
1 and 6, Terminal 2 and 8 are conductive when going up. Terminal 3 and 6,
Terminal 1 and 4 are conductive when going down. Terminal 3 and 8,
Terminal 1 and 4 are conductive when no operation.
4 Replace the right front door power window switch.
Check if the harnesses of right front door power window switch and right
front door power window motor are conductive. Terminal 3 and 1 of right
5 front door power window switch connector D12 are respectively conductive Go to Step 7 Go to Step 6
with Terminal 2 and 1 of right front door power window motor connector
D15.
Repair or replace the harnesses of right front door power window switch and
6 Go to Step 7
right front door power window motor. Is the fault eliminated?
Check if the power supply for replacing right front door power window
switch is normal
Turn the ignition switch on and the voltage between Terminal 6 of right front
door power window switch connector D12 and ground is the battery voltage.
Check if Terminal 1 of the left front door power window switch connector
8 D04 and Terminal 6 of right front door power window connector D12 are Go to Step 10 Go to Step 9
conductive.
Repair or replace the connecting wire of left front door power window switch
9 connector and right front door power window switch connector. Is the fault Go to Step 10
eliminated?
-- 140 --

Troubleshooting
4. The auto down function for left front door power window fails.
The normal replacement and check operation for left front door power
1 Go to Step 2
window switch. Does the auto down function operate?
- 141 -

GW Power Window
Removal of window regulator motor
2. Remove the left front door inner trim.
3. Disconnect the harness connection and remove the

mounting bolts of motor.
4. Remove the motor.
-- 142 --

Removal of window regulator switch
2. Remove the left front door inner trim.
3. Disconnect the connecting wire and remove the

mounting bolts of switch.
4. Remove the window switch.
- 143 -

GW Power Window
Installation of window regulator motor
1. Install the motor.
2. Connect the harness and install the mounting bolts

of motor.
3. Install the left front door inner trim.
4. Install the connecting wire of battery.
-- 144 --

Installation of window regulator switch
1. Install the window switch.
2. Connect the harness and install the mounting bolts

of switch.
3. Install the left front door inner trim.
4. Install the connecting wire of battery.
- 145 -

GW Power Window
-- 146 --

EM Electric rear-view mirro
Electric rear-view mirro

Subject Page
Electric rear-view mirro............................................................................................................................................... 148
Overview................................................................................................................................................................ 148
Electric rear-view mirro............................................................................................................................................... 149
Removal of rear view mirror.................................................................................................................................. 149
Removal of rear view mirror switch....................................................................................................................... 150
- 147 -

Rear view mirror
Sunray rear view mirrors is devided into interior rear view mirror and exterior interior rear view mirror. The exterior
rear view mirrors are fixed on the top of front windshield and at left and right outboard sides of vehicle body for
observation of conditions inside and behind the vehicle.
- 148 -

Removal of rear view mirror
2. Remove the interior trim panel of the left front

door.
3. Disconnect the connector plug of the rear view

mirror.
4. Remove mounting bolts of the rear view mirror and

take down the rear view mirror.
- 149 -

Removal of rear view mirror switch
2. Remove the interior trim panel of the left front

door.
3. Disconnect the connector plug of the switch.
4. Remove mounting bolts and take down the switch.
- 150 -

HO HORN
Horn
Subject Page
orn............................................................................................................................................................................ 152
Horn
Mounting position...................................................................................................................................................152
orn............................................................................................................................................................................ 153
Horn
orn............................................................................................................................................................................ 156
Horn
Removal of Horn.................................................................................................................................................... 156
- 151 -

HO HORN
Mounting position of horn
- 152 -

HO HORN
Troubleshooting
1. Horn always on.
1 Is the vehicle equipped with any anti-theft system? Go to Step 2. Go to Step 3.
Check vehicle
2 Is the vehicle diagnostic system check performed? Go to Step 4.
diagnostic system.
3 Is horn operation and other necessary inspection performed? Go to Step 4. Check horn harness.
Press and then release the horn botton.
4 Go to Step 5. Check horn harness.
Is the horn always on?
Disconnect the body control module.
Disconnect the horn relay.
8 Check horn relay for poor contact. Is any fault detected and elimilated? Go to Step 15. Go to Step 14.
Repair the horn relay control circuit that is shorted to ground.
Check harness connector of body control module for poor contact.
Is any fault detected and elimilated?
Repair the shorted horn control circuit.
Replace the body control module.
Is the replacement finished?
Replace the horn relay.
15 Is the horn able to operate normally? System is normal. Go to Step 1.
- 153 -

HO HORN
Troubleshooting
2. Horn failed to work.
Check vehicle
diagnostic system.
Press and then release the horn botton.
4 Check horn harness. Go to Step 5.
1. Disconnect the horn relay.
2. Connect a test lamp between the positive battery voltage circuit of horn
relay coil and a sound ground.
Is the test lamp lit?
1. Connect a test lamp between the positive battery voltage circuit of horn
relay coil and the horn relay control circuit.
2. Press the horn button and hold it.
Connect a test lamp between the positive battery voltage circuit of horn
7 relay button and a sound ground. Go to Step 8. Go to Step 15.
Connect a jumper with a 15A fuse between the positive battery voltage
8 circuit of horn relay button and the horn control circuit. Go to Step 11. Go to Step 9.
Does the horn ring?
1. Reconnect the horn relay.
2. Disconnect the horn connector.
3. Connect a test lamp between the horn control circuit and a sound
ground.
1. Connect a test lamp between the horn control circuit and the horn
ground circuit.
Perform troubleshooting for the high impedence in the horn control circuit
12 or horn ground circuit. Go to Step 19. —
Perform troubleshooting for the open circuit or high impedence in the
13 positive battery voltage circuit of horn relay coil. Go to Step 19. —
Perform troubleshooting for the open circuit in horn relay control circuit or
shorted positive battery circuit. Horn relay control circuit is composed of
horn slip ring and horn button.
Perform troubleshooting for the open circuit or high impedence in the
15 positive battery voltage circuit of horn relay button. Go to Step 19. —
Perform troubleshooting for the open circuit or high impedence in the horn
16 control circuit. Go to Step 19. —
Perform troubleshooting for the open circuit or high impedence in the horn
17 ground circuit. Go to Step 19. —
Replace the horn relay.
Operate the horn.
19 System is normal. Go to Step 1
Is the horn able to operate normally?
- 154 -

HO HORN
Troubleshooting
3. Inferior tone quality of horn.
Check vehicle
diagnostic system.
Press the horn button.
4 Go to Step 5. Check horn harness.
Is there any screak or buzz?
1. Check the horn for proper mounting torque.
2. Check if there is any fragment at the connecting part between horn and
vehicle.
Is any fault detected and elimilated?
Perform procedures below for each horn:
1. Disconnect the horn connector.
2. Connect a jumper with a 15A fuse between the positive battery terminal
6 of horn and the control circuit of horn. Go to Step 8. Go to Step 7.
3. Connect aother jumper between the negative battery terminal of horn
and the grounding terminal of horn.
Is there any screak or buzz?
Perform troubleshooting for the high impedence in the horn control circuit
7 or the horn ground circuit. Go to Step 9. —
Replace the horn.
8 Go to Step 9. —
Operate the horn.
Is the horn able to operate normally?
- 155 -

HO HORN
Removal of horn
3. Remove the mounting bolt of horn and disconnect

the horn plug.
4. Remove the horn.
- 156 -

AT Air Conditioner
Air Conditioner (A/C)

Subject Page
Air Conditioner............................................................................................................................................................ 158
Overview................................................................................................................................................................ 158
Precautions..............................................................................................................................................................159
Functional operation............................................................................................................................................... 162
Air Conditioner............................................................................................................................................................ 165
Air distribution system introduction....................................................................................................................... 167
Leak test..................................................................................................................................................................168
A/C system performance testing.............................................................................................................................169
Refrigerant recovery ............................................................................................................................................. 172
A/C System Performance Table..............................................................................................................................174
System Testing........................................................................................................................................................176
Air Conditioner............................................................................................................................................................ 189
Removal of front A/C............................................................................................................................................. 189
Removal of top evaporator tank..............................................................................................................................191
Removal of front condenser....................................................................................................................................193
Removal of bottom condenser................................................................................................................................ 195
Removal of heater water tank................................................................................................................................. 196
Removal of after motor...........................................................................................................................................198
Removal of compressor.......................................................................................................................................... 202
Installation of compressor assembly.......................................................................................................................204
Removal of front A/C panel....................................................................................................................................205
Removal of rear A/C panel..................................................................................................................................... 206
Specification
Air Conditioner............................................................................................................................................................ 207
Basic parameters.....................................................................................................................................................207
- 157 -

AT Air Conditioner
A/C system
SUNRAY adopts dual A/C system, with the front and rear A/C controlled independently. In this system, the front and
rear A/C use independent condenser and evaporator but share the same compressor.
A/C system schematic diagram:
1. Evaporator 2. Expansion valve 3. Compressor

4. Condenser 5. Fluid reservoir
- 158 -

AT Air Conditioner
Precautions
1. Refrigerant is of low freezing point and strong
volatility, so please wear gloves and goggles in
order to avoid frostbite, blindness and other
phenomena caused by its contact with skin.
2. In case of the refrigerant gets into your eyes or

having contact with skin, please flush the affected
areas with fresh water and go to the doctor for
help. Please don’t rub your eyes with hand or
handkerchief.
3. The handling of refrigerant shall be performed in

well-ventilated areas.
Although refrigerant is innoxious, abundant
exhaust of refrigerant into enclosed space may lead
to hypoxia.
4. During the handling of refrigerant, the ambient

environment shall be free from water and foreign
matters such as dust, for which may cause damage
to A/C system when flowing into. Therefore,
special attention must be paid.
- 159 -

AT Air Conditioner
Precautions
5. R-134a shall be adopted as refrigerant.
Use of other kinds of refrigerant may bring
negative effect to system components.
6. R-134a refrigerant and R-12 refrigerant are

incompatible, so even little amount of R-12
refrigerant is not allowed to be mixed into R-134a
refrigerant.
7. When handling refrigerant, please note that the

surroundings must be free from any tinder or
inflammable, for the exposure of refrigerant
reservoir to heat source shall lead to explosion.
Keep Away From

Inflammables
8. R134a refrigerant container is under high pressure

status, so please don’t place it under high
temperature condition and the ambient temperature
for storage should be below 52℃.
Keep Away From Heat
- 160 -

AT Air Conditioner
Precautions
9. Generally, dust covers are adopted for A/C
components, in order to avoid access of sewage,
dust and moisture. Dust covers should be removed
before operation and sealed after operation.
Moisture
Dust
10. During the reinstallation of A/C system after

removal, please apply refrigerant oil onto the
O-ring. As for screwed joints, install them by hand
and then use two wrenches for tightening. As for
the flanged joints, install nuts and bolts when
pushing the pipeline gently.
First by hand and then with tools
11. During A/C installation, over tightening or

clamping of O-ring may cause refrigerant leakage,
so please operate as per specified torque.
Tighten to the specified torque
12. Hoses shall be free from distortion.
Don’t distort hose.
- 161 -

AT Air Conditioner
Functional operation
1. “TO-FACE” mode
Air is adjusted when passing through system and
vented out through upper air vent. This mode is
applied to most of places using A/C.
2. “TO-FACE/FEET” mode
Air is adjusted and vented out through upper air
vent and floor air vent. The air from floor air vent
is hotter than that from upper air vent. However,
when the temperature knob is rotated
counterclockwise to the end (hottest) or clockwise
to the end (coldest), air temperature from two
different positions are the same.
3. “TO-FEET” mode
Air is vented out through the bottom air vent.
4. “TO-FEET” plus “DEFROST” mode

Air is vented out through the bottom air vent and a
little air is vented out through defroster air vent and
air vent of side window defroster.
- 162 -

AT Air Conditioner
5. Defroster
Air is adjusted and vented out through defroster air
vent and a little air is vented out through side
window defroster. It is recommended to use this
mode only in foggy or icy weather.
6. Internal/external circulation select button

Press this button and the indicator shall lighten,
indicating the internal circulation mode is applied;
press this button again and the external circulation
mode is selected.
7. Front control panel air volume knob

Rotate the air volume knob shown in the right
figure to achieve perfect control of the air volume
of blower. Rotate leftwards, the air volume shall
decrease, and rightwards, the air volume shall
increase.
8. A/C switch
Press this switch with the indicator on, indicating
the A/C system is in operation. Press this switch
again, and the A/C system is turned off.
If the fan knob is located at off position instead of
at certain position within speed setting range, the
A/C system cannot operate.
- 163 -

AT Air Conditioner
9. Front control panel temperature control knob
Rotate the knob within the range shown in the
right figure, and the interior temperature can be
controlled within the indicated range.
10. Rear control panel cold/warm select knob

Rotate the knob within the red zone, the vented air
is warm air; rotate the knob within the blue zone,
the vented air is cold air.
11. Rear control panel air volume knob

Rotate the air volume knob shown in the right
figure to achieve perfect control of the air volume
of blower. Rotate leftwards, the air volume shall
decrease, and rightwards, the air volume shall
increase.
- 164 -

AT Air Conditioner
Operating principle
1. During operation, low pressure gaseous refrigerant
from evaporator transforms into high pressure and
high temperature gas after passing through
compressor, which transforms into high pressure
and low temperature liquid after being cooled by
condenser radiating pipe; the liquid, after being
dehumidified and buffered by receiver drier, flows
into expansion valve at stable pressure and flow
rate, and finally flows into evaporator through
throttling and depressurization; the refrigerant
evaporates and absorbs abundant heat once
encountering low pressure condition.
2. High-pressure side of refrigerating system.
3. Low-pressure side of refrigerating system.
4. Compression process.
- 165 -

AT Air Conditioner
Operating principle
5. Condensation process.
6. Throttling and expansion process.
7. Evaporation process.
- 166 -

AT Air Conditioner
Air distribution system introduction
1. Mixing flow.
The outside air is mixed through:
� Instrument panel air vent
� Floor air vent
2. Ventilation.
The outside air comes in through the instrument
panel air vent.
No operation of compressor during ventilation.
3. Heater.
Air is mostly from floor air vent and a little air is
from defrosting air duct.
4. Defogging.
Equivalent air from floor air vent and defrosting air
vent.
- 167 -

AT Air Conditioner
Leak test
1. Required tools.
R-134a A/C system dye tracer (24 pcs.).
General purpose 12V leak detector lamp.
Fluorescent dye scavenger.
A/C dye injection tool kit.
Dye cell for replacement.
Electronic leak detector.
Spray bottle with soap water.
2. Fluorescence leak detector.

IMPORTANT: Be sure to wear dark color goggles
with UV lamp, so the color of dye can be
deepened.
The application of fluorescent dye can facilitate the
detection of leak position in A/C system.
3. Electronic leak detector.

IMPORTANT: Perform testing in continuous path
to ensure detection of any possible leak. Check
every position of system for leak.
4. Soap water.
Fill a bottle with solution consisting of 50% water
and 50% detergent.
Run A/C system and spray the soap water onto
connectors and components.
In case of any obvious leak, bubbles shall appear.
This is an ideal method for detecting leak of hoses
and connectors.
- 168 -

AT Air Conditioner
A/C system performance testing
1. Test the vehicle under direct sunlight.
2. Don’t test the vehicle under airflow obstruction of

condenser, such as the vehicle is parked closely
against wall.
3. Set the blower motor to the highest speed mode.
4. External air circulation mode.
- 169 -

AT Air Conditioner
5. Set the cooling temperature to the coldest status.
6. Open the instrument panel air vent facing right

ahead. Insert the temperature gauge into the panel
air vent center in thickness of 50mm.
7. Test under idling status.
8. Both front windows are closed.
- 170 -

AT Air Conditioner
9. The engine hood is closed.
10. Connect the precision pressure gauge to A/C

system.
11. As for the precise testing of humidity (relative

humidity %), the pressure and temperature of air
supply outlet shall vary with humidity (relative
humidity %). Please refer to “A/C System
Performance Table” in this section for details.
12. Shut down the engine. Compare the readings with

data listed in “A/C System Performance Table” and
no big difference can be found under normal
operation of A/C system.
The best status
Normal
In need of maintenance
- 171 -

AT Air Conditioner
Refrigerant recovery
1. Park the vehicle in well-ventilated areas.
2. Connect to the refrigerant recovery machine.
3. Turn on the refrigerant recovery machine and select

the refrigerant reclaimer on the control panel.
4. Open the manual valves at both high-pressure and

low-pressure sides.
- 172 -

AT Air Conditioner
Refrigerant recovery
5. The refrigerant recovery machine shall start to
recover refrigerant and lubricating oil from A/C
system, which respectively flows into a fluid
reservoir and a removable oil reservoir.
6. Refrigerant recovery machine shall drain all

refrigerant out of A/C system, achieving partial
vacuum of A/C system with pressure at about 34
kPa (10 Hg).
7. Once partial vacuum is realized, it is recommended

to turn off the refrigerant recovery machine and
two manual valves and record the pressure
readings. If the vacuum reading rises up to positive
pressure in 2 min, there is still surplus refrigerant
(after boiling) in the receiver drier; therefore, you
should continue to execute the reclaimer until no
obvious positive pressure rise occurs.
8. Check the oil reservoir for oil recovery and record

the recovered volume, for the same volume of oil
shall be added into A/C system later.
- 173 -

AT Air Conditioner
A/C System Performance Table
Engine Relative Ambient air Temperature of central Pressure at low-pressure Pressure at high-pressure
speed humidity temperature air vent side of pressure gauge side of pressure gauge
(r/min) (%) °F ℃ °F ℃ psi kPa psi kPa
59 15 37 3.00 27 162 142 943
68 20 37 3.00 31 185 168 1106
77 25 40 4.64 36 209 191 1296
20 86 30 47 8.60 42 236 225 1494
95 35 54 12.49 50 265 266 1653
104 40 62 16.45 58 300 304 1864
113 45 69 20.47 63 334 323 2155
59 15 37 3.00 25 171 139 956
68 20 38 3.50 28 197 164 1129
77 25 44 6.79 32 222 192 1323
40 86 30 52 11.27 36 252 209 1445
95 35 61 15.94 42 288 248 1709
104 40 69 20.76 48 329 279 1925
Idling 113 45 77 25.18 54 375 306 2110

speed 59 15 37 3.00 26 177 140 966
68 20 40 4.47 30 205 166 1146
77 25 48 8.92 34 233 192 1326
60 86 30 57 13.93 39 269 215 1480
95 35 66 19.11 45 310 249 1718
104 40 76 24.59 52 358 300 2072
113 45 86 29.82 59 406 318 2196
59 15 37 3.00 27 186 142 976
68 20 43 6.11 31 214 168 1160
77 25 52 11.15 36 250 191 1320
80 86 30 62 16.95 42 289 225 1551
95 35 74 23.23 50 342 266 1833
104 40 85 29.27 58 398 304 2096
113 45 96 35.65 63 436 323 2226
- 174 -

AT Air Conditioner
A/C System Performance Table
℃ ℉ kPa psi ℃ ℉ kPa psi
Definition: This table lists the pressure of refrigerant 134a under different temperature. For example, under room temperature of 26.6
℃ (80°F), the pressure of refrigerant reservoir reaches 595.6 kPa (86.4 psi). If the refrigerant is heated up to 51.6 ℃ (125°F), the
pressure shall rise up to 1278.8 kPa (185.5 psi). You can also determine the boiling point of refrigerant 134a based on different
pressure. For example, under the pressure of 188.2 kPa (27.3 psi), the boiling point of refrigerant R134a is 0℃ (32°F).
15.5 60 392.3 56.9
-23.3 -10 12.4 1.8 18.3 65 438.2 63.6
-20.5 -5 27.0 3.9 21.1 70 487.3 70.7
-17.7 0 43.2 6.3 23.8 75 539.7 78.3
15.0 5 60.8 8.8 26.6 80 595.6 86.4
-12.2 10 80.1 11.6 29.4 85 655.1 95.0
9.4 15 101.3 14.7 32.2 90 718.5 104.2
-6.6 20 124.3 18.0 35.0 95 785.6 113.9
-3.8 25 149.4 21.7 37.7 100 856.9 124.3
-1.1 30 176.6 25.6 40.5 105 932.3 135.2
0.0 32 188.2 27.3 43.3 110 1012.1 146.8
1.6 35 206.2 29.9 46.1 115 1096.4 159.0
4.4 40 238.0 34.5 48.8 120 1185.2 171.9
7.2 45 272.5 39.5 51.6 125 1278.8 185.5
10.0 50 309.5 44.9 54.4 130 1377.3 199.8
12.7 55 349.4 50.7 60.0 140 1589.6 230.5
- 175 -

AT Air Conditioner
A/C system performance diagnosis
1. Air heater performance diagnosis.
Whether or not to conduct this diagnosis based on “ symptoms ” or
1 Go to Step 2. —
instruction of other diagnosis tables?
①Start the engine.
2 ②Let the engine idling. Go to Step 3. Go to Step 9.
Does the engine temperature reach normal operating temperature?
①Let the engine idling.
②Select “FLOOR” mode.
③Set the minimum speed of blower.
④Set the warmest temperature.
⑤Sense the temperature of inlet and outlet hoses at the heater core.
Is the inlet hose of heater warmer than the outlet hose?
①Place the temperature gauge at the central air vent.
②Fix the temperature gauge onto the outlet hose at the heater core.
③Set the maximum speed of blower.
④Set the warmest temperature.
4 ⑤Record temperature at the position listed below: Go to Step 5. Go to Step 6.
Central air vent on instrument panel.
Outlet hose at the heater core.
⑥Compare the recorded temperatures.
Are these two temperatures nearly the same?
①Check the following parts of vehicle for cold air leak and conduct
relevant maintenance:
Front shield plate.
5 Internal circulation damper. Go to Step 10. —
Air heater, ventilation and A/C system module housing.
②Conduct necessary maintenance.
①Check the operation of temperature damper.
6 ②Conduct necessary maintenance. Go to Step 10. —
①Shut down the engine.
②Backflush the heater core.
③Start the engine.
④Select “FLOOR” mode.
⑤Set the minimum speed of blower.
⑥Set the warmest temperature.
⑦Sense the temperature of inlet and outlet hoses at the heater core.
Replace the heater core.
Troubleshoot too low engine temperature.
- 176 -

AT Air Conditioner
Run the system to check the maintenance result.
- 177 -

AT Air Conditioner
2. Insufficient defrosting.
Whether or not to conduct this diagnosis based on “symptoms” or
1 Go to Step 2. —
②Select “DEFROST” mode.
③Set the maximum speed of blower.
Is there sufficient airflow from defroster outlet?
Measure the operating temperature of engine.
Does the engine temperature reach normal operating temperature?
①Set the minimum speed of blower.
②Set the warmest temperature.
③Sense the temperature of inlet and outlet hoses at the heater core.
Test the operation of A/C compressor.
Does the A/C compressor run?
Replace the A/C compressor.
Conduct A/C system performance test.
Does the operation of A/C system meet the requirements?
Troubeshoot too low engine temperature.
Check whether the internal circulation damper operates normally.
Does the internal circulation damper operate normally?
Conduct troubleshooting for air outlet.
Conduct troubleshooting for air heater.
Conduct troubleshooting on A/C performance.
Conduct troubleshooting for internal circulation damper.
- 178 -

AT Air Conditioner
3. Blower motor noise diagnosis.
1 Go to Step 2. —
Check if there is any chip at air inlet grille.
Is there any chip?
1.Sit in the vehicle.
2.Close doors and windows.
3.Turn the ignition switch to ON position with the engine off.
4.Run the blower motor at every speed and mode to determine the time
and place of noise generating.
Is the noise under operation of blower is obvious?
Touch the blower casing to check for vibration when the blower motor
4 operating at different speed. Go to Step 6. Go to Step 5.
Is there any overvibration?
Listen to the sound of blower motor at different speed.
Is there any abnormal noise such as squeak or chirp?
1. Remove the blower motor.
2. Check the blower motor impeller for any abnormal deposition.
6 3. Check the blower motor for any abnormal deposition. Go to Step 8. Go to Step 7.
Do you find any foreign matter on blower motor or blower motor
impeller?
Check blower motor for:
Vane crack.
7 Looseness of impeller fasteners. Go to Step 9. Go to Step 10.
Improper positioning of impeller.
Do you find any abnormality mentioned above?
Clear foreign matter.
Is the operation finished?
Replace blower motor.
Install blower motor.
- 179 -

AT Air Conditioner
4. Refrigerating system noise diagnosis.
Whether or not to conduct this diagnosis based on “A/C system
1 Go to Step 2. —
symptoms” or instruction of other diagnosis tables?
Check accessory drive belt and drive belt tensioner for failure and conduct
2 Go to Step 3. —
troubleshooting when necessary.
Run the engine to check compressor for any abnormal noise:
Does the noise last for over 30 seconds?
Generation of liquid
slugging noise is a
common
Let the engine run for several minutes. phenomenon, which
shall occur when the
Stop the engine for 1 minute. system experience a
4 Go to Step 6.
Restart the engine. long time of shutdown
under high
Is any noise detected by using this procedure? temperature and the
ambient temperature
lowers after a whole
night.
Check if the refrigerant level in system is too low.
Is the system refrigerant sufficient?
Check if the heat expansion valve is stuck at closed or open position. Replace expansion
6 Go to Step 7.
Is the heat expansion valve is stuck at open position? valve.
Check if the compressor bolt and/or A/C pipeline scratches body parts. Tighten bolt and/or
7 Go to Step 8.
Is the mounting bolt loosened? rearrange pipeline.
①Recover refrigerant and replace compressor.

The system inspection is
8 ②Refill the system. finished.
Go to Step 1
Is the gas pressure within the specified range?
- 180 -

AT Air Conditioner
5. A/C system actuator noise diagnosis.
1 Go to Step 2. —
②Finish the settings below:
Blower motor speed
Air heater, ventilation and A/C system modes
Temperature control setting
2 ③Define the noise types: Go to Step 6. Go to Step 3.
Scraping, bang
Tick/click, chirp or creak
Whish/howling
Is the scraping or bang obvious during mode selection or temperature
setting?
When the blower motor speed reduces, is there still tick/click 、 chirp,
squeak or scraping but with lower sound?
Is whish/howling obvious under every mode but not so under every
temperature setting?
Is there obvious whish/howling only under “DEFROST” or “FLOOR”
mode？
Remove the instrument panel bracket.
①Check damper for normal operation.
②Check air duct for blockage or foreign matter.
Does any of the above condition occur?
Check modes, temperature dampers and seals for warpage or crack.
Is the damper under normal status?
Replace relevant dampers and/or seals.
Remove obstruction or foreign matter.
Install the instrument panel bracket.
- 181 -

AT Air Conditioner
6. Odour diagnosis.
1 Go to Step 2. —
①Sit in the vehicle.
②Close all doors and windows.
③Start the engine.
④Let the engine idling under normal operating temperature.
⑤Set the maximum speed of blower.
⑥Set the coldest temperature.
⑦Run the A/C under every blower speed, mode and temperature to
determine what kind of odour (musty taste, smell of coolant or oil)
occurs.
Check air heater, ventilation and A/C system module assembly filter and
3 air inlet grille for any chip? Go to Step 4. Go to Step 5.
Is there any chip?
Clear all chip.
Check if the carpet is moist.
Is the carpet moist?
Check the existence of the conditons below:
Leak at front windshield periphery
6 Drain pipe blockage of air heater, ventilation and A/C system module Go to Step 7. Go to Step 14.
Leak at door seal
Is there any leak?
Repair leak when necessary.
8 Does the odour smell like coolant? Go to Step 9. Go to Step 12.
Check cooling system for any leak.
Is there any leak?
Check vehicle inside for coolant leak or check the front windshield for a
10 layer of film. Go to Step 11. Go to Step 15.
Is there any fault?
Replace the heater core.
12 Does the odour smell like engine oil? Go to Step 13. Go to Step 15.
①Check engine compartment for any leak.
13 ②Repair leak. Go to Step 15. —
Musty taste is probably caused by molds on evaporator and heater core or
14 inside air heater, ventilation and A/C system module assembly. Go to Step 15. —
15 Run the system to check the maintenance result. System is normal. Go to Step 2.
- 182 -

AT Air Conditioner

7. Diagnosis of failed blower motor operation.
①Turn the ignition switch to ON position with the engine off.
1 ②Turn the blower motor switch to each speed position. Go to “Fault 8”. Go to Step 2.
Is the blower motor able to operate at each speed position?
①Turn the ignition switch to OFF position.
②Disconnect the blower motor.
③Set a test lamp between blower motor power voltage circuit and
2 control circuit. Go to Step 9. Go to Step 3.
④Turn the ignition switch to ON position with the engine off.
⑤Turn the blower motor switch to each speed position.
Is the test lamp on under every speed.
Test blower motor power voltage circuit for open circuit or excessive
3 resistance. Go to Step 15. Go to Step 4.
Test blower motor circuit for open circuit or excessive resistance.
②Connect the blower motor.
③Air heater, ventilation and A/C system control module.
④Turn the ignition switch to ON position with the engine off.
⑤Turn the blower motor switch to each speed position.
Check serial data code or check for any fault.
Is there any fault?
Test circuit.
Test blower motor switch control circuit for open circuit or excessive
8 resistance. Go to Step 15. Go to Step 11.
Check blower motor for poor contact.
Check air heater, ventilation and A/C system control module for poor
10 contact. Go to Step 15. Go to Step 13.
Check audio system for poor contact.
Replace blower motor.
12 Go to Step 15.
Replace air heater, ventilation and A/C system control module.
13 Go to Step 15.
Replace blower switch.
14 Go to Step 15.
15 Run the system to check the maintenance result. System is normal. Go to Step 1.
- 183 -

AT Air Conditioner
- 184 -

AT Air Conditioner
8. Fault diagnosis of blower motor.
1 ②Turn the blower motor switch to each speed position. Go to Step 3. Go to Step 2.
If there any speed position failed?
Check blower motor fuse for blowout. Replace the fuse with a
2 new one of the same Go to Step 3.
Is the fuse blown out? rating.
Check the power supply of blower motor.
3
The blower motor won’t run even though there is voltage.
①Run the blower under every speed and run once at the integrated radio
control position of blower.
②20 blower speeds should be effective.
Is every blower speed effective?
①Plug a 2-pin connector into the back of blower motor.
②Use integrated radio to control blower and run the blower once at each
one of 20 blower speeds.
5 ③Compare the voltage with the illustrated voltage. Please refer to Go to Step 8. Go to Step 6.
“1.2.1.2 Sensor Resistance Table” in “Automatic Air Heater,
Ventilation and A/C System” for details.
Does the voltage approach to the illustrated voltage?
Connect the fault diagnosis instrument. Conduct combined testing for
switch data. Use fault diagnosis instrument to increase/decrease the soft Conduct integrated radio
6 key to select from 20 different blower speeds. control testing for blower Go to Step 7.
switch function.
Is every speed effective
7 Go to Step 8.
- 185 -

AT Air Conditioner
9. Diagnosis of poor A/C system refrigeration.
Check the operation of air mixing damper to confirm no blockage or
1 rupture. Replace actuator. Go to Step 2.
Is air mixing damper blocked or ruptured?
2 ②Turn the blower motor switch to each speed position. Go to Step 3. Go to “Fault 7”.
3 Does blower motor run at corresponding speed? Go to Step 4. Go to “Fault 8”.
②Set the mode switch to “TO-Face” mode. Go to “Internal Air
③Set the internal circulation switch to “ON” position. Circulation Fault
Diagnosis Help” in
4 ④Observe the internal circulation damper. Go to Step 5.
“Automatic Air
Heater, Ventilation
⑤Set the internal circulation switch to “OFF” position.
and A/C System”.
Does the internal circulation damper transfer from internal circulation to
ventilation?
②Use the fault diagnosis instrument to clear all fault codes stored in air
heater, ventilation and A/C system control module.
5 ③Set the left side air temperature switch to coldest position. Go to Step 6. Replace compressor.
④Set the mode switch to “TO-FACE/FEET” position.
⑤Set the blower motor switch to high speed position.
Conduct A/C system performance test.
Install a temperature gauge near the interior air temperature sensor.
Is the indicated temperature below 3℃(5°F)?
Check air suction pipe for leak or blockage.
8 Go to Step 9. —
- 186 -

AT Air Conditioner
10. Diagnosis for insufficient warm air.
Check the operation of air mixing damper to confirm no blockage or
1 rupture. Replace actuator. Go to Step 2.
Is air mixing damper blocked or ruptured?
Turn the blower motor switch to each speed position.
2 Go to Step 3. Go to “Fault 7”
3 Does blower motor run at corresponding speed? Go to Step 4. Go to “Fault 8”
②Set the mode switch to “TO-Face” mode. Go to “Internal Air
③Set the internal circulation switch to “ON” position. Circulation Fault
Diagnosis Help” in
4 ④Observe the internal circulation damper. Go to Step 5.
“Automatic Air
Heater, Ventilation
⑤Set the internal circulation switch to “OFF” position.
and A/C System”.
Does the internal circulation damper transfer from internal circulation to
ventilation?
Set the temperature switch to “OFF” position.
When heating or defrosting is applied, is it still cold?
6 ②Shut down the air heater, ventilation and A/C control system. Replace compressor. Go to Step 8.
Check cooling system for:
Too low coolant level.
Looseness or wear of accessory drive belt.
Leak of radiator hose or heater hose.
Distortion of radiator hose or heater hose.
Lack of radiator cap pressure seal.
Leak of radiator cap.
①Set the mode switch to “TO-FACE” mode.
②Turn the ignition switch to ON position with the engine off.
③Set the blower motor switch to maximum speed position.
④Cover the sensor air inlet with a piece of paper of 5mm2 (2 square
inch) to check whether there is any airflow through the interior air
temperature sensor.
Is the paper still at the original position?
Check aspirator pipeline for leak or blockage.
- 187 -

AT Air Conditioner
11. Inadequate air out.
1 ②Set the mode switch to “OFF” position. Go to Step 2. Go to Step2
Does the blower stop operation?
①Set the mode switch to “VENT” position.
2 ②Turn the blower motor switch to each speed position. Go to Step 4. Go to “Fault 7”
3 Does blower motor run at corresponding speed? Go to Step 4. Go to “Fault 8”
Check mode damper for any damage or blockage.
4 Replace mode damper. Go to Step 5.
Is the mode damper damaged or blocked?
- 188 -

AT Air Conditioner
12. Fault diagnosis of internal/external circulation.
②Set the blower motor switch to maximum speed position.
③Set the mode switch to “TO-FACE/FEET” position.
1 ④Set the internal circulation switch to “VENTILATION” position. Go to Step 2. Go to Step 2.
⑤Set the internal circulation switch to “INTERNAL CIRCULATION”
position.
Do you hear any change in air flow sound when setting the internal
circulation switch to “INTERNAL CIRCULATION” position?
①Set the internal circulation switch to “VENTILATION” position.
②Observe the drive shaft of internal circulation actuator.
2 ③Set the internal circulation switch to “INTERNAL CIRCULATION” Go to Step 3. Go to Step 3.
position.
Does the drive shaft of internal circulation actuator rotate?
①Observe the drive shaft of internal circulation actuator.
②Use the fault diagnosis instrument and command the internal
3 circulation actuator transfer to “INTERNAL CIRCULATION” and Go to Step 11. Go to Step 4.
“VENTILATION” positions.
Does the drive shaft of internal circulation actuator rotate?
②Disconnect the internal circulation actuator.
4 ③Turn the ignition switch to ON position with the engine off. Go to Step 5. Go to Step 12.
④Use a test lamp connected to sound ground to detect the ignition
voltage circuit 3 of internal circulation actuator.
Is the test lamp on?
①Set a test lamp between damper control Circuit A and ignition voltage
circuit 3 of internal circulation actuator.
5 ②Use the fault diagnosis instrument and command the internal Go to Step 6. Go to Step 7.
circulation actuator transfer to “INTERNAL CIRCULATION” and
Is the test lamp on when this command is executed?
①Set a test lamp between damper control circuit B and ignition voltage
circuit 3 of internal circulation actuator.
②Use the fault diagnosis instrument and command the internal
circulation actuator transfer to “INTERNAL CIRCULATION” and
Is the test lamp on when this command is executed?
Check the internal circulation actuator control Circuit A for open circuit,
7 excessive resistance, short circuit to ground or voltage. Go to Step 15. Go to Step 11.
Check the internal circulation actuator control Circuit B for open circuit,
8 excessive resistance, and short circuit to ground or voltage. Go to Step 15. Go to Step 11.
- 189 -

AT Air Conditioner
13. Fault diagnosis of internal/external circulation.
Check internal circulation damper and internal circulation actuator for:
Dislocation of circulation actuator.
Linkage fractured or stuck.
Internal circulation damper fractured or stuck.
9 Obstacle blocking the internal circulation damper moving within the Go to Step 15. Go to Step 10.
whole range.
Lack of internal circulation damper seals.
Dislocation of internal circulation damper seals.
Check the harness connector of internal circulation actuator for poor
10 contact. Go to Step 15. Go to Step 13.
Check the harness connector of air heater, ventilation and A/C system
11 control module for poor contact. Go to Step 15. Go to Step 14.
Repair the ignition voltage circuit of internal circulation actuator.
Is the repair finished?
Replace the internal circulation actuator.
- 190 -

AT Air Conditioner
Removal of front A/C assembly
1. Recover refrigerant.
2. Disconnect negative cable of battery.
3. Remove instrument panel.
4. Remove mounting bolts from expansion valve.
- 191 -

AT Air Conditioner
Removal of front A/C assembly
5. Remove mounting bolts from front A/C.
6. Disconnect the connector and remove the front A/C

assembly.
- 192 -

AT Air Conditioner
Removal of top evaporator tank
3. Remove luggage rack.
4. Remove ceiling and interior trim.
- 193 -

AT Air Conditioner
Removal of top evaporator tank
5. Disconnect the A/C drain pipe.
6. Remove mounting bolts from expansion valve.
7. Remove mounting bolts.
8. Remove the top evaporator tank assembly.
- 194 -

AT Air Conditioner
Removal of front condenser
3. Remove front bumper.
4. Remove mounting bolts.
- 195 -

AT Air Conditioner
Removal of front condenser
5. Disconnect pipeline.
6. Remove condenser.
- 196 -

AT Air Conditioner
Removal of bottom condenser
3. Remove mounting bolts and disconnect pipeline.
4. Remove bottom condenser assembly.
- 197 -

AT Air Conditioner
Removal of heater water tank
3. Remove connecting pipe of heater water tank.
4. Disconnect the plug.
- 198 -

AT Air Conditioner
Removal of heater water tank
5. Remove mounting bolts from heater water tank.
6. Remove heater water tank assembly.
- 199 -

AT Air Conditioner
Removal/installation of temperature control motor
3. Disconnect harness connector and remove

mounting screws from temperature control motor.
4. Take down the temperature control motor.
- 200 -

AT Air Conditioner
Removal/iinstallation of mode damper motor
Removal/
3. Disconnect harness connector and connections and

remove mounting screws from mode damper
motor.
4. Remove the mode damper motor.
- 201 -

AT Air Conditioner
Removal/iinstallation of speed governing module
Removal/
3. Disconnect the harness connector of speed

governing module and remove mounting screws.
4. Remove the speed governing module.
- 202 -

AT Air Conditioner
Removal/iinstallation of internal/external air damper motor
Removal/
3. Disconnect harness connector and remove

mounting screws from internal/external air damper
motor.
4. Take down the internal/external air damper motor.
- 203 -

AT Air Conditioner
Removal/iinstallation of compressor assembly
Removal/
3. Disconnect A/C clutch switch harness.
4. Unscrew mounting bolts from pipeline and make

high and low pressure pipes separated.
- 204 -

AT Air Conditioner
Removal/iinstallation of compressor assembly
Removal/
5. Loosen mounting nuts from tension pulley,
unscrew adjusting bolt for tension pulley and
remove the compressor drive belt.
7. Remove mounting bolts from compressor.
8. Remove the compressor from vehicle bottom.
- 205 -

AT Air Conditioner
Installation of compressor assembly
1. Refill compressor with compressor oil and tighten
the oil filler bolt.
2. Install the compressor onto vehicle in reverse order

of removal.
3. Adjust belt tension after installation.
4. Check pipeline for leak after replenishment of

refrigerant.
- 206 -

AT Air Conditioner
Removal of front A/C control panel
2. Remove outer cover plate of A/C control panel.
3. Remove mounting bolts from A/C control panel

and disconnect harness.
4. Remove the A/C control panel.
- 207 -

AT Air Conditioner
Removal of front A/C control panel
2. Remove outer cover plate of A/C control panel.
3. Remove mounting bolts from A/C control panel

and disconnect harness.
4. Remove the A/C control panel.
- 208 -

AT Air Conditioner
Specification
Basic parameters
Name Item Parameter
Type: 10-cyliner swash-plate compressor

Air displacement: ml/r 210ml/r
A/C compressor Lubricating oil grade: PAG
Lubricating oil volume: g 400±15g
Electromagnetic clutch: Four-groove disc clutch of 110mm diameter.
Front heater assembly Rear heater assembly

Air heater: Type: All-aluminum welding heater
Power: 4000W 4500W
Front A/C blower Rear A/C blower (2)

Blower: Operating voltage: DC 12 V DC 12 V
Operating current: 18.3 A 12 A
Front A/C Rear A/C

Dual parallel flow-type
Refrigerating device: Type: Laminated evaporator
evaporator
Evaporator power: ＞4500 W ＞5000W
Front condenser
Rear condenser assembly
assembly
Condenser Aluminum parallel flow Aluminum parallel flow
Type:
type type
Power: 12000 W 12000 W
Fluid reservoir Model and capacity 400 ml R134a
Refrigerant: Model and filling amount R134a, 1550 g
- 209 -

AT Air Conditioner
- 210 -

EC Circuit Diagram
Circuit Diagram
Subject Page
Diagram specification.................................................................................................................................................. 210
Circuit Diagram............................................................................................................................................................ 218

Interior fuse box......................................................................................................................................................218
Exterior fuse box.................................................................................................................................................... 219
Start charging system..............................................................................................................................................220
Engine ECU electronic control unit........................................................................................................................222
Horn........................................................................................................................................................................ 217
ABS system............................................................................................................................................................ 228
Airbag system......................................................................................................................................................... 229
Reversing system.................................................................................................................................................... 230
Electric rear view mirror.........................................................................................................................................231
Audio system.......................................................................................................................................................... 231
Cigarette lighter and fuel heater..............................................................................................................................233
Rear ceiling lamp and front fog lamp..................................................................................................................... 234
Rear fog lamp......................................................................................................................................................... 235
High beam and low beam....................................................................................................................................... 236
Turn signal lamp and hazard warning lamp............................................................................................................237
Small lamp..............................................................................................................................................................238
Central control........................................................................................................................................................ 239
Wiper and washer................................................................................................................................................... 240
Power window........................................................................................................................................................ 241
Front A/C system.................................................................................................................................................... 242
Rear A/C system..................................................................................................................................................... 243
ETACS....................................................................................................................................................................244
Instrument...............................................................................................................................................................247
Self diagnosis..........................................................................................................................................................250
Harness layout..............................................................................................................................................................251
Main harness...........................................................................................................................................................251
Engine compartment harness.................................................................................................................................. 252
Left front door harness............................................................................................................................................255
Right front door harness......................................................................................................................................... 256
Left tail lamp harness..............................................................................................................................................257
Right tail lamp harness........................................................................................................................................... 258
Left back door harness............................................................................................................................................259
Rear loud speaker harness...................................................................................................................................... 260
ABS harness........................................................................................................................................................... 261
Fuel tank harness.................................................................................................................................................... 262
Reversing radar harness.......................................................................................................................................... 263
- 209 -

EC Circuit Diagram
Instruction
This chapter consists of two parts as circuit diagram and harness layout drawing.
Circuit Diagram
Start to understand every system form understanding its circuit diagram for circuit diagram indicates all operating
paths of every component. For example, it indicates power supply and negative ground of electric load, position of
wire connector and relative fuse, switch, etc. consist of circuit. For trouble diagnosis and troubleshooting, the full
understanding of circuit diagram is necessary.
- 210 -

EC Circuit Diagram
Harness layout drawing
Mounting and fixed position of main harness and wire connector and route of main harness are indicated in this part.
With the help of these harness layout drawings, circuit repair would become easier.
- 211 -

EC Circuit Diagram
Notation
The following electrical notations, electrical symbols and abbreviations are adopted in this manual.
Notation of circuit diagram
- 212 -

EC Circuit Diagram
- 213 -

EC Circuit Diagram
- 214 -

EC Circuit Diagram
Wire color description
Wire color Code Wire color Code
Black B Orange O
Blue L Pink P
Brown Br Red R
Green G Violet V
Gray Gr Yellow Y
Light green Lg White W
Identification of wire connector codes

Wire connector identification code consists of harness position identification code and wire connector identification
code. For example:
Notice:
Wire connectors between harnesses are expressed by following codes. For example:
Identification of relays
Relay identification code consists of relay abbreviation and its main number (series number). For example:
- 215 -

EC Circuit Diagram
Electrical symbols of circuit diagram
- 216 -

EC Circuit Diagram
- 217 -

EC Circuit Diagram
- 218 -

EC Circuit Diagram
- 219 -

EC Circuit Diagram
- 220 -

EC Circuit Diagram
- 221 -

EC Circuit Diagram
- 222 -

EC Circuit Diagram
- 223 -

EC Circuit Diagram
- 224 -

EC Circuit Diagram
- 225 -

EC Circuit Diagram
- 226 -

EC Circuit Diagram
- 227 -

EC Circuit Diagram
- 228 -

EC Circuit Diagram
- 229 -

EC Circuit Diagram
- 230 -

EC Circuit Diagram
- 231 -

EC Circuit Diagram
- 232 -

EC Circuit Diagram
- 233 -

EC Circuit Diagram
- 234 -

EC Circuit Diagram
- 235 -

EC Circuit Diagram
- 236 -

EC Circuit Diagram
- 237 -

EC Circuit Diagram
- 238 -

EC Circuit Diagram
- 239 -

EC Circuit Diagram
- 240 -

EC Circuit Diagram
- 241 -

EC Circuit Diagram
- 242 -

EC Circuit Diagram
- 243 -

EC Circuit Diagram
- 244 -

EC Circuit Diagram
- 245 -

EC Circuit Diagram
- 246 -

EC Circuit Diagram
- 247 -

EC Circuit Diagram
- 248 -

EC Circuit Diagram
- 249 -

EC Circuit Diagram
- 250 -

EC Circuit Diagram
Main harness specification
Identification code Name Identification code Name
M01 Relay box M42 Key and faulted door switch
M02 Left front fog lamp M43 Buzzer
M03 Left headlamp M45 Rear air heater
M04 Left electric horn M50 BCM controller interface 1
M05 Oil-water separator sensor M51 BCM controller interface 2
M06 Oil temperature sensor M52 Right electric horn
M07 Heater M53 Left door switch
M08 Brake fluid level switch M54 Right door switch
M09 Front wiper motor M58 Driver’s seat belt switch
M10 Odometer sensor MH01 Connected to front A/C harness
M12 Rear ceiling lamp switch MH02 Connected to rear A/C harness
M13 Dual brake switch MD01 Connected to left door harness 1
M14 Clutch switch MD02 Connected to left door harness 2
M15 Electronic accelerator pedal MD03 Connected to right door harness 1
M16 Instrument 1 MD04 Connected to right door harness 2
M17 Instrument 2 MV01 Connected to airbag harness
M18 Ignition switch MB01 Connected to ABS harness
M19 Cigarette lighter ML01 Connected to left tail lamp harness 1
M20 Combination switch 1 ML02 Connected to left tail lamp harness 2
M21 Combination switch 2 ML11 Connected to right tail lamp harness
M22 Hand brake switch MG01 Connected to fuel tank harness
M23 Radio CD-player MS01 Connected to loud speaker harness
M24 Right headlamp ME01 Connected to engine harness
M25 Left side turn signal lamp ME02 Connected to engine harness
M26 Front washer motor ME03 Connected to engine harness
M27 Front fog lamp switch ME04 Connected to engine harness
M28 Rear fog lamp switch ME05 Connected to engine harness
M29 Combination switch 3
M30 Engine ECU
M31 GCU-1
M32 GCU-2
M33 GCU-3
M34 Right front fog lamp
M35 Warning lamp switch
M36 Right side turn signal lamp
M37 A/C compressor
M38 High/low pressure switch
- 251 -

EC Circuit Diagram
Main harness 1
- 252 -

EC Circuit Diagram
Main harness 2
- 253 -

EC Circuit Diagram
Engine compartment harness specification
Identification code Name
E01 Connected to generator control
E02 Connected to generator positive pole
E03 Connected to starter control
E04 Connected to starter positive pole
E05 Connected to oil pressure switch
E06 Connected to reversing lamp switch
E07 Connected to water temperature sensor
E08 Connected to preheating harness
E12 Connected to battery positive pole
E13 Connected to battery negative pole
E14 Engine ground
E15 Vehicle body ground
EM01 Connected domain harness
- 254 -

EC Circuit Diagram
Left front door harness specification
D01 Left window regulator motor
D02 Left electric rear view mirror
D03 Window regulator main switch
D04 Left door loud speaker
D06 Left door lock actuator
D08 Electric rear view mirror switch
MD01 Connected to left main harness
MD02 Connected to left main harness
- 255 -

EC Circuit Diagram
Right front door harness specification
D11 Right power window motor
D12 Right electric rear view mirror
D13 Power window auxiliary switch
D14 Right door loud speaker
D16 Right door lock actuator
MD03 Connected to right main harness
MD04 Connected to right main harness
- 256 -

EC Circuit Diagram
Left tail lamp harness specification
L01 Front ceiling lamp
L02 Left rear combination lamp
L03 High-mounted brake lamp
L04 Reversing radar ECU
L05 Antenna amplifier
L06 Rear blower
LR01 Connected to reversing radar harness
LT01 Connected to left back door harness
LM01 Connected to main harness 1
LM02 Connected to main harness 2
Ground G
- 257 -

EC Circuit Diagram
Right tail lamp harness specification
N01 Intermediate ceiling lamp
N02 Rear ceiling lamp
N03 Right rear combination lamp
N04 Right rear fog lamp
NM01 Connected to right main harness
Ground G
- 258 -

EC Circuit Diagram
Left back door harness specification
T03 Left license plate lamp
T04 Right license plate lamp
LT01 Connected to left roof harness
Ground G
- 259 -

EC Circuit Diagram
Rear loud speaker harness specification

S01 Left rear loud speaker
S02 Right rear loud speaker
SM01 Connected to main harness
- 260 -

EC Circuit Diagram
ABS harness specification
B01 ABS system control module
B02 Left front wheel speed sensor
B03 Right front wheel speed sensor
B04 Right front wheel speed sensor
B05 Right rear wheel speed sensor
BM01 Connected to fuse box
BM02 Connected to main harness 1
Ground G01
- 261 -

EC Circuit Diagram
Fuel tank harness specification
G01 Fuel sensor
G02 Condenser fan motor
GM01 Connected to main harness 1
- 262 -

EC Circuit Diagram
Reversing radar harness specification
R01 Left rear fog lamp
R02 Left external probe
R03 Left intermediate probe
R04 Right intermediate probe
R05 Right external probe
RL01 Connected to left tail lamp harness
- 263 -

Preface

Body Accessories.
The Chassis Volume details the technical standards on removal/installation, testing,

debugging and diagnosis for systems and components of SUNRAY long-wheelbase
vehicle chassis.
be adopted. During maintenance, please conduct tightening in strict accordance with
tightening torque specified in the Manual. If locking device is damaged during
removal, please replace it with new one.
JAC INTERNATIONAL
March 2011

Chassis Volume Contents
Contentss
Chassis Volume Content
Clutch
Clutch...............................................................................................................................................................................1
Explosive View of Clutch........................................................................................................................................... 1
Introduction of Clutch................................................................................................................................................ 1
Clutch...............................................................................................................................................................................2
Operating Principle.....................................................................................................................................................2
Inspection and Maintenance....................................................................................................................................... 3
Fault Symptom Table..................................................................................................................................................4
Clutch...............................................................................................................................................................................7
Specification
Specification.................................................................................................................................................................. 14
Tightening Torque.....................................................................................................................................................14
Manual Transmission
Manual Transmission..................................................................................................................................................... 16
Explosive View of Manual Transmission................................................................................................................. 16
Introduction of Manual Transmission.......................................................................................................................16
Manual transmission...................................................................................................................................................... 17
Inspection and confirmation..................................................................................................................................... 17
Fault Symptom Table................................................................................................................................................18
Specifications................................................................................................................................................................. 43
Care and Maintenance.............................................................................................................................................. 44
Brake System
Brake System................................................................................................................................................................. 46
Explosive View......................................................................................................................................................... 46
Introduction of Brake................................................................................................................................................47
Brake System................................................................................................................................................................. 49
Removal/installation of brake disc...........................................................................................................................50
Removal/installation of brake caliper assembly.......................................................................................................54
Removal/installation of rear wheel brake shoe........................................................................................................ 56
Parking brake adjustment.........................................................................................................................................59
Removal/installation of parking brake lever............................................................................................................ 60
Removal/installation of parking brake cable............................................................................................................61
Replacement of parking brake cable........................................................................................................................ 62
Removal/installation of brake pedal.........................................................................................................................63
Removal/installation of brake master cylinder.........................................................................................................65
Removal/installation of vacuum pump.................................................................................................................... 66
Removal/installation of vacuum booster..................................................................................................................68
Air bleeding for hydraulic pressure brake system....................................................................................................71
-1-

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
ABS system....................................................................................................................................................................74
ABS system....................................................................................................................................................................79
Operating principle................................................................................................................................................... 79
ABS system..................................................................................................................................................................101
Wheel speed sensor.................................................................................................................................................103
Transmission Shaft
Transmission Shaft...................................................................................................................................................... 106
Explosive View of Transmission Shaft.................................................................................................................. 106
Introduction of Transmission Shaft........................................................................................................................106
Inspection and Confirmation..................................................................................................................................107
Fault Symptom Table............................................................................................................................................. 108
Removal of Transmission shaft................................................................................................................................. 109
Installation of Transmission shaft................................................................................................................................ 110
Front Suspension
Front Suspension..........................................................................................................................................................112
Front Suspension.....................................................................................................................................................112
Inspection and Confirmation...................................................................................................................................114
Fault symptom Table...............................................................................................................................................115
Removal and Installation of Subframe.........................................................................................................................116
Specification.................................................................................................................................................................131
Tightening Torques................................................................................................................................................. 131
Rear Axle
Rear axle...................................................................................................................................................................... 134
Explosive View of Rear Axle..................................................................................................................................134
Introduction of Rear Axle....................................................................................................................................... 135
Rear axle...................................................................................................................................................................... 136
Inspection and Confirmation.................................................................................................................................. 137
Fault symptom Table.............................................................................................................................................. 140
Rear axle...................................................................................................................................................................... 141
Differential..............................................................................................................................................................141
Specification
Specification.................................................................................................................................................................148
Tightening torque....................................................................................................................................................148
-2-

Steering System
Steering System............................................................................................................................................................152
Explosive View of Steering System........................................................................................................................152
Introduction of Steering System............................................................................................................................. 153
Steering System............................................................................................................................................................154
Operating Principle.................................................................................................................................................155
Inspection and confirmation................................................................................................................................... 156
Fault Symptom Table..............................................................................................................................................159
Removal and Installation of Steering System........................................................................................................ 164
Removal and Installation of steering wheel........................................................................................................... 167
Wheels and Tires

Wheels and Tires..........................................................................................................................................................174
Explosive View of Wheels and Tires...................................................................................................................... 175
Precaution for Tire Usage....................................................................................................................................... 175
Removal/Installation Instruction of Tire Assembly................................................................................................ 176
Removal/installation
Removal/installation of wheel and Tires........................................................................................................ 178
Four-Wheel Alignment
Four-Wheel Alignment.................................................................................................................................................184
Preparation before four-wheel alignment............................................................................................................... 184
Function of each angle............................................................................................................................................185
Common fault symptom......................................................................................................................................... 186
Adjustment
Four/wheel alignment.................................................................................................................................................. 187
Attached List—SUNRAY Special Service Tools

List—
-3-

CL Clutch
Clutch
Subject Page
Clutch...............................................................................................................................................................................1
Explosive View of Clutch........................................................................................................................................... 1
Introduction of Clutch................................................................................................................................................ 1
Clutch...............................................................................................................................................................................2
Operating Principle.....................................................................................................................................................2
Inspection and Maintenance....................................................................................................................................... 3
Fault Symptom Table..................................................................................................................................................4
Clutch...............................................................................................................................................................................7
Specification
Specification.................................................................................................................................................................. 14
- 1-

CL Clutch
Clutch
System diagram:
Diagram of Clutch Control System

1.Clutch 2.Clutch release cylinder 3.Release fork 4.Release bearing 5.Clutch line
6.Clutch master cylinder 7.Clutch pedal 8.Fluid reservoir
Schematic Diagram of Clutch Control Principle

1.Clutch pedal 2.Clutch master cylinder 3.Clutch hydraulic line 4.Clutch release cylinder 5.Release fork
6.Pressure plate 7.Driven disc 8.Flywheel
- 2-

CL Clutch
Instruction and Operation driven disc.
Operating Principle
The clutch control is realized via remote hydraulic
control of clutch engagement and release for the power
transmission and cutting-off. Specific implementations
are as follows:
In clutch release: The driver steps on the clutch pedal 1
and push the special clutch hydraulic fluid stored in the
master cylinder via the push rod connecting the pedal
and the clutch master cylinder 2 to flow through the line
3 consisting of pipes and hoses and enter the release
cylinder 4. The release fork 5 pushes the release bearing
shaft forward and then pushes the diaphragm spring of
clutch pressure plates 6 separated. Then, the chamber
clearance between the driven disc 7 and flywheel 8 Limit value: 0.3mm
becomes larger. Because of the decreased friction force, ③ Inspect the torsion spring for looseness, breakage.
the driven disc 7 can not transmit power to the input In the case of such problems, replace the clutch
shaft of the transmission, the power is cut off. driven disc.
In clutch engagement: The driver releases the clutch ④ Install the clutch driven disc onto the input shaft,
pedal slowly, the pressure applied on the diaphragm inspect it for its sliding condition and rotation
spring separated finger of clutch pressure plates 6 direction for looseness. In the case of poor sliding,
decreases and the spring returns gradually. With clean and reinspect it after installation. In the case
relevant level effect, the fluid chamber of the slave of obvious looseness, replace the clutch driven disc
cylinder becomes smaller while the fluid chamber of the or input shaft or replace both simultaneously.
master cylinder becomes larger and the clutch pedal is 3. Clutch release bearing
lifted slowly; At the same time, the distance between the Attention:
pressure plate 6 and flywheel becomes smaller that the Inspect the bearing for burns, damages, abnormal noise,
chamber clearance among the driven disc 7, flywheel 8 and unsmooth rotation.
and pressure plate 6 becomes smaller. Because of the Inspect the release bearing and diaphragm spring or
increased friction force, the driven disc 7 starts power inspect the contact surface of the release fork for
transmission to the input shaft of the transmission, the abnormal wears. In case of such problems, carry out
power is engaged. replacement.
Inspection and Maintenance 4. Release fork
Clutch： In the case of abnormal wears between the release fork
1. Clutch pressure plate and the contact surface with the bearing, carry out
① Inspect the end of the diaphragm spring for wears replacement.
and altitude difference. In the case of obvious Clutch release cylinder：
wears and altitude difference out of the limit value, Release cylinder：
replace the clutch pressure plate. 1. Inspect the inner surface of the release cylinder for
Limit value：0.5mm rusting and damages.
② Inspect the surface of the pressure plate for wears, 2. Measure the inner diameter of the release cylinder
cracks and discoloration. with a cylinder gauge at three places (bottom,
③ Inspect rivets of the pressure plate for looseness. In intermediate part and upper part). In the case of the
the case of loose rivets, replace the clutch pressure clearance with the piston outer circumference out of the
plate. limit value, replace the release cylinder assembly.
2. Clutch driven disc Limit value: 0.15mm
Attention: Clutch hydraulic fluid
It is not allowed to clean the clutch driven disc with Attention:
petrol! Do not carry out operations to this system with a
① Inspect its surface for loose rivets, signal side vacuum pump or any other evacuation power devices.
contact, degradation due to burns and adherent Inspect the fluid level of the clutch hydraulic fluid,
grease. In the case of such problems, replace the please ensure the normal fluid level.
clutch driven disc. Air bleeding of the line:
② Measure the rivet settlement. In the case of Attention:
settlement out of the limit value, replace the clutch After the removal of clutch line, clutch master cylinder,
- 3-

CL Clutch
clutch slave cylinder and hydraulic release bearing or in clutch control system should be carried out by
the case of spongy clutch pedal, carry out air bleeding experienced vehicle maintenance technicians.
for the system. After proper diagnosis, carry out adjustment or part
1. Loosen bleed bolts of the clutch release cylinder. replacement according to corresponding troubleshooting
2. Step on the clutch pedal slowly until complete air and proper steps of specific procedures in the service
bleeding has been done. manual. For all parts to be replaced, only authorized
3. Step on the pedal completely, maintain the status parts of JAC shall be applied. For damaged clutch
and tighten the bleed bolts. pressure plates or driven discs, they are not repairable
4. Refill with hydraulic fluid for the clutch hydraulic and it is necessary to replace corresponding assemblies.
system. Numbers in the diagnosis table have no relations with
Attention: the inspection sequence. There is no precedence
Keep the fluid level in the fluid reservoir between relationship for various possible causes.
MIN and MAX marks all the time.
5. Repeat the abovementioned steps until there is
clear clutch hydraulic fluid draining out without
any bubbles.
6. Confirm normal operation of the clutch.
① Start the engine, step on the clutch pedal and shift
into the reverse gear after 2 seconds. In the case of
large noise during gear selection, step the clutch
pedal to the floor for 5 times in order to carry out
system air bleeding.
② Wait for 30 seconds and reinspect the clutch
operation. In the case of remained large noise,
repeat air bleeding.
Fault diagnosis
Performance diagnosis for the clutch assembly and
- 4-

CL Clutch
Common fault diagnosis table
Fault Symptom Possible Cause of Fault Troubleshooting
Incapable release of the clutch means unable functioning of the clutch
and the power transmitted from the engine can not be cut off.
Inspect for following conditions:
1. Deformation in clutch release lever
Incapable Replace deformed, worn and fractured
2. Deformation in diaphragm spring
release parts. Adjust clutch pedal control system.
3. Punsture in diaphragm spring support ring
4. Improper adjustment of clutch pedal control system
5. Seizure of clutch friction lining with flywheel or clutch pressure
plate
Incomplete clutch release may lead to incapable cutting-off of power
transmitted from the engine and the shift lever will be hard to operate Replace deformed, worn and fractured parts
due to continuous rotation of clutch friction linings and transmission or parts out of specified dimension. In the
input shaft. case of poor matching of clutch friction
Inspect for following conditions: lining with the operation of transmission
input shaft spline, replace the clutch friction
1. Deformation in clutch friction lining. In the rotation of the lining, lining and if necessary, replace transmission
there will be swing. input shaft.
Incomplete 2. Damage in clutch friction lining In the case of damaged clutch friction
release 3. Mismatching of clutch friction lining spline and transmission input lining or clutch friction lining out of
shaft or damage in spline tooth surface specified dimension, replace it.
4. Seizure of clutch friction lining with flywheel or clutch pressure Replace inapplicable clutch thrust bearing.
plate Adjust clutch system, remove unnecessary
5. Thickness of flywheel/clutch pressure plate/ clutch friction lining clearances and eliminate mechanical
out of specified dimension failures.
6. Mechanical failure or improper adjustment in clutch pedal control Reinstall improperly-assembled parts.
system
Incomplete clutch engagement may lead to incapable power
transmission of the engine to the transmission input shaft and clutch Replace deformed, worn and fractured
friction linings will slip. parts.
Inspect for following conditions: Replace clutch friction linings or faulted
1. Smudginess in clutch friction lining due to engine oil or grease clutch assembly.
Incomplete 2. Damage in clutch friction lining Carry out proper adjustment of clutch pedal
engagement free travel.
3. No free travel for clutch pedal
Adjust clutch system, remove unnecessary
4. Deformation or damage in diaphragm spring／clutch pressure plate clearances and eliminate mechanical
／clutch release lever／clutch friction lining spline failures.
5. Mechanical failure or improper adjustment in clutch pedal control Reinstall improperly-assembled parts.
system
Replace deformed, worn and fractured parts
or parts out of specified dimension and
specification.
Clutch friction lining slipping may lead to incapable normal power Carry out the same troubleshooting with
transmission of the engine. “Incomplete release” and “Incomplete
Inspect for following conditions: engagement”
1. Wear in clutch friction lining. Turn off the engine, cool the clutch housing
2. Smudginess in clutch friction lining due to engine oil or grease （in the case of overhigh temperature in the
Slipping housing）and carry out further diagnosis.
3. Incomplete clutch engagement
4. Thickness of flywheel/clutch pressure plate/ clutch friction lining Carry out correct installation for specified
out of specified dimension, friction surface out of specified clutch.
specification Adjust clutch system, remove unnecessary
5. Overhigh temperature of clutch housing due to improper driving clearances and eliminate mechanical
failures.
6. Installation of improper clutch
Reinstall improperly-assembled parts.
It is not allowed for the driver to step on the
clutch pedal all the time.
- 5-

CL Clutch
Fault Symptom Possible Cause of Fault Troubleshooting
Replace deformed, worn and fractured
Inspect for following conditions: parts.
1. Improper clutch friction lining. Install specified clutch friction lining.
Noise 2. Poor balance In the case of poor balance in some parts,
3. Fault in clutch thrust bearing replace clutch assembly.
4. Damage in torsion damping spring of clutch friction lining Adjust clutch pedal control system.
Reinstall improperly-assembled parts.
There may be clutch shudder in the case of incapable smooth
engagement of the clutch friction lining with the flywheel.
Inspect for following conditions:
Shudder Replace clutch assembly.
1. Clutch friction lining damping spring out of specified specification
2. Clutch friction lining out of specified specification
3. Smudginess in clutch friction lining due to engine oil or grease
- 6-

CL Clutch
Clutch
3. Remove the clutch slave cylinder.

� Remove bleed bolts of clutch slave cylinder
and drain system brake fluid completely.
� Remove the clutch slave cylinder
4. Remove the shift cable assembly.

Attention:
Remove the shift cable and fixit on one side.
- 7-

CL Clutch
Clutch
5. Remove the rear support pad of the transmission.
Jack up the transmission with a jack.
6. Remove bolts at the side of connection between the
transmission rear flange plate and the propeller
shaft.
7. Remove the starter and the bolts at the side of
connection between the transmission and generator.
Move the removed transmission backward.
8. Insert special tools in the center of pressure plate.

� Remove mounting bolts of the pressure plate
assembly and pay attention to the installation
position.
Attention:
In the processing of removal, there should be one
holding up the pressure plate assembly to avoid
pricks to people.
9. Remove pressure plates and friction linings and

place them horizontally on the ground. Do not
smudge them and it is not allowed to wipe the
pressure plates and friction linings with oily cloth.
10. Remove mounting bolts of the flywheel. Pay

attention to the removal process of the flywheel
and it is not allowed to fix the gear ring or
crankshaft position sensor target wheel with a
screwdriver.
- 8-

CL Clutch
Clutch
11. Remove the release bearing. Attention: Do not
make the lubricating grease to contact with the
clutch assembly.
12. Remove the release fork.

� Remove the dust boot at the outside of the
release fork.
� Snap the release fork. Attention: the release
fork is clipped on the support pin and pay
attention to the spring force to avoid injury in
hands.
- 9-

CL Clutch

Installation of Clutch
Installation:
1. Install the flywheel onto the crankshaft and pay
attention to the fixed pin there.
Attention:
There should be another man for cooperation in the
installation and pay attention to safety.
2. Insert the special tool into the saddle bore of guide

bearing at the rear end of crankshaft. Set the new
friction lining and pressure plate into the special
tool. Install the pressure plate assembly in place. In
the process of bolt tightening, pay attention to
tighten the bolts one by one diagonally. Pull out the
special tool at last.
3. Install the release lever into the clutch housing and

clamp the release lever. Finally, install a dust boot
in the rear of the installed release lever.
4. Apply a layer of lubricating grease on the inner
side of the release bearing and install the release
bearing into the transmission input shaft.
- 10-

CL Clutch
Installation of Clutch
5. Install the transmission in the clamping jaw to
corresponding position and install a bolt there
without tightening.
6. Turn the transmission and install the transmission
input shaft into the center of the installed clutch
assembly.
7. Shake the transmission to inspect whether the
transmission input shaft is installed in place. Install
and tighten connecting bolts between the
transmission and engine with attention to the
tightening torque. Install the starter into the
transmission assembly.
8. Install the mount pad in the rear of transmission
and tighten it. Install the propeller shaft to the
flange plate of the transmission output shaft with
attention to the installation position.
9. Install the transmission gear shift mechanism cable
in place. Pay attention to the cotter pin involved in
the installation process and replace the used cotter
pin with a new one.
10. Clamp the moving side of the removed clutch slave

cylinder into the release lever and fix the slave
cylinder with bolts.
11. After installation of the slave cylinder, lower the
vehicle and carry out air bleeding for the clutch
hydraulic system.
12. Connect the negative cable of battery.
- 11-

CL Clutch
Clutch master cylinder
2. Remove the lower protective plate of driver’s

instrument panel.
Attention:
Pay attention not to damage the instrument clip
during its removal.
3. Drain brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.

4. Remove three mounting bolts of the clutch master
cylinder and do not take down the cylinder after
bolt removal.
5. Remove output and input oil pipes of the clutch
master cylinder.
6. Remove the cotter pin of the clutch master cylinder
and pull out the cotter pin.
7. Disconnect the clutch switch plug.

8. Remove the clutch switch with an open end wrench
with attention of installation position.
- 12-

CL Clutch
Clutch master cylinder
Installation
1. Clean the clutch master cylinder completely.
2. In the installation of output and input hoses of the
master cylinder, confirm that they are well
tightened.
3. Inspect the master cylinder oil pipe for deformation
or crush.
4. Align the master cylinder to screw holes and carry

out tightening according to standard torque.
5. Insert the fixed pin of the master cylinder and fix it
with a new cotter pin.
6. Screw the clutch switch into pedal position and

inspect for its proper installation position with a
multimeter.
7. Install the lower protective plate on the driver’s

instrument panel.
- 13-

CL Clutch
Specification
Tightening Torque
Part name Tightening torque Nm Quantity
Clutch master cylinder bolt and nut cap 23～29 3
Nut for installing the master cylinder to the vehicle body 23～29 4
Clutch slave cylinder bolt 120～140 3
Clutch hose support bolt 23～29 1
Clutch air bleeder pipe bolt 23～29 1
Clutch hose punching bolt 45～50 1
Air bleeder outlet oil pipe joint 23～29 1
Pressure plate mounting bolt 45～50 6
- 14-

MT Manual Transmission
Manual Transmission
Subject Page
Explosive View of Manual Transmission................................................................................................................. 16
Introduction of Manual Transmission.......................................................................................................................16
Manual transmission...................................................................................................................................................... 17
Specifications
Specifications................................................................................................................................................................. 43
Care and Maintenance.............................................................................................................................................. 44
-15-

SUNRAY vehicles adopt synchronizer manual-shift mechanical transmissions of good shifting flexibility, good hand
feel, low noise, compact structure, large carrying capacity as well as good sealing performance, which consist of five
forward gears and one reverse gear. All gears are of helical teeth. Except for the reverse gear that adopts direct
transmission through sleeve, the other gears adopt three-cone (single cone, three-cone only for 1st/2nd gear)
synchronizer. Shifting mechanism is of cable-type remote control.
Principles of motion:
1st gear
Engine→Clutch→Input shaft 1→Main gear of countershaft 15→Countershaft 11→1st driving gear 6→1st/2nd gear
synchronizer 5→Output shaft 10
2nd gear
Engine→Clutch→Input shaft 1→Main gear of countershaft 15→Countershaft 11→2nd driving gear 4→1st/2nd gear
synchronizer 5→Output shaft 10
3rd gear
Engine→Clutch→Input shaft 1→Main gear of countershaft 15→Countershaft 11→3rd gear of countershaft 14→3rd
driving gear 3→3rd/4th gear synchronizer2→Output shaft 10
4th gear
Engine→Clutch→Input shaft 1→3rd/4th gear synchronizer 2→Output shaft 10
5th gear
Engine→Clutch→Input shaft 1→Main gear of countershaft 15→Countershaft 11→5th gear of countershaft 12→5th
driving gear 9→5th/reverse gear synchronizer 8→Output shaft 10
Reverse gear
Engine→Clutch→Input shaft 1→Main gear of countershaft 15→Countershaft 11→Reverse gear 13→Reverse driving
gear 7→5th/reverse gear synchronizer 8→Output shaft 10
-16-

Control bearing.
Gear selector lever and gear shift lever can be controlled Note:
through controlling the control handle inside cab to Please check the stop ring on bearing during
realize gear shifting. Different directions shown on the replacement of bearing. If it is deformed, please
control handle grip corresponds to different gear select replace it.
and shift positions. The control handle shall return to 2. Check output shaft assembly
neutral position automatically after each time of gear Check input shaft for gear teeth fracture, pitting,
removal. Gear selection can only be performed after the severe wear or scuffing of tooth surface. If any,
control handle is returned to the neutral position. please replace the output shaft.
1. In order to shift gear, depress the clutch pedal fully Note:
to make the transmission out of engine torque and Rotate bearing by hand to check for non-flexible
then control the gear shift lever quickly to shift rotation or sticking. If any, please replace the
gear. Please adopt low speed gear when starting. bearing.
2. Please adopt low speed gear during vehicle 3. Check synchronizer ring
climbing, running downhill or turning. Don’t let 1) Check tooth surface of synchronizer ring for any
the vehicle idling with clutch released. damage.
3. In case it is difficult to control the control handle, 2) Check conical surface for any damage or wear;
please stop and inspect. Don’t apply it violently. check if the screw is crushed.
Kilometers applicable to each forward gear of
transmission:
Gear
1st gear 2nd gear 3rd gear 4th gear 5th gear
Position
Kilometers 0～15 20～30 35～45 50～60 65～75
Attention:
1. Gear shifting of transmission should be
performed within relevant kilometer range.
2. The applicable kilometers may vary when the
transmission is equipped to different vehicles.
Principle of gear shifting
Under the forward running status, the requirements of Synchronizer ring Gear
gear shifting is as follows: gear shifting from 1st gear to
5th gear step by step for speeding up, gear shifting from 3) When the synchronizer ring is pressed close to gear,
5th gear to 1st gear step by step for speeding down; check clearance “A”. If “A” is below the limit,
reverse gear can be shifted to in 3 seconds of pause after please replace the ring.
the clutch pedal is depressed under motionless state of Limit value: 0.5mm
vehicle; don’t apply reverse gear under running state 4. Check synchronizer gear sleeve and gear hub
and don’t apply forward gears under reversing state. 1) Assemble the synchronizer gear sleeve and gear
Don’t use the control handle of transmission as an hub together and check for smooth sliding but no
armrest, in order to avoid early wear of shift fork. sticking.
Attention: In case of any emergency occurs during 2) Check front and read end of inner surface of gear
running state, you may perform gear shifting sleeve for any damage.
principle..
without following this principle
Meaning of transmission name:
Torque 280N.M (actual torque up to 300N.M)
Synchronizer structure
Five forward gears
Six gears
Inspection and Confirmation
1. Check input shaft assembly
1) Check input shaft for gear teeth fracture, pitting,
severe wear or scuffing of tooth surface. If any,
please replace the input shaft.
2) Check input shaft spline for any severe wear or
damage. If any, please replace the input shaft. Attention: In case the synchronizer gear sleeve or gear
3) Rotate bearing by hand to check for non-flexible hub is in need of replacement, they should be replaced
rotation or sticking. If any, please replace the as a whole.
-17-

Fault diagnosis
Fault Symptom Possible Cause Solution
Check if the operating system has pushed the gear
Excessive wear of shift fork shaft arc, shift rocker arm of transmission into place; or with
elastic deformation of lock ball spring the transmission removed, push the shift fork into
gear by hand to check gear meshing status.
In case of incomplete meshing, please check shift
Jumping back to neutral Excessive wear of shift fork working face
fork for deformation or working face excessive wear.
position under running state
In case of complete meshing, please check wear
Excessive wear of joint surface of shift fork
condition of inverted cone of gear sleeve and
gear ring or gear sleeve
engaged gear.
If excessive clearance is felt, please check fork shaft
Axial looseness of gear
groove and guide spring for any wear or failure.
Difficulty in gear shifting, loud
impact sound in gear shifting,
or difficulty in shifting to Severe wear of synchronizer ring Replace synchronizer ring.
certain gear with normal
operation of clutch
Caused by breakage of individual gear
Check relevant part and remove it.
tooth
Noise generated in transmission
Backlash increase or gear damage Remove, check and clean or replace damaged gear.
1. Regular impact sound
Remove, check and clean or replace damaged
2. Uniform noise Bearing wear
bearing.
Insufficient lube oil Change oil or add new oil.
Adding too much oil, too high oil level Remove oil filler plug to check oil level.
Excessive wear or damage of oil seal Replace oil seal.
Uneven application of sealant or damage of Remove parts relevant to each joint surface and
Oil leak sealing paper pad apply sealant evenly, or replace paper pad.
Failure of vent plug Replace vent plug.
Remove parts relevant to each joint surface to have
Joint surface bump not shaved in time
the bump point shaved.
Too dirty lube oil Change oil.
Inadequate lubrication or nonconforming or
Abnormal spoilage of bearing Check oil level, add or change oil.
inferior lube oil
Unqualified bearing adopted Replace bearing.
-18-

Manual transmission
1. Remove manual transmission.
● Oil drainage
Attention: Remove oil drain plug with
wrench and drain oil through this plug instead
of other parts.
2. Remove release bearing from input shaft front cap.
3. Remove input shaft front cap from transmission.
4. Remove clutch housing.

Attention: If the transmission housing is assembled
tightly with clutch housing, a rubber hammer or
copper rod can be applied to knock on the housing
edge to make them become loose.
-19-

Removal/Installation (Continued)
Manual transmission
5. Remove clutch housing.
� Place it upside down on cardboard
horizontally.
6. Remove input shaft oil seal from transmission.
7. Remove top cover from transmission.

tightly with clutch housing, a rubber hammer
or copper rod can be applied to knock on the
housing edge to make them become loose.
8. Remove gear shift rocker arm assembly from

transmission.
-20-

Manual transmission
9. Use pneumatic gun or wrench to remove output
shaft bolt of transmission and knock out flange nut.
10. Remove rear cover of transmission.

tightly with clutch housing, a rubber hammer
or copper rod can be applied to knock on the
housing edge to make them become loose.
11. Remove vehicle speed sensor.
12. Remove vehicle speed sensor gear and bushing.
-21-

Manual transmission
13. Remove side cover from transmission.
� Turn over the transmission.
� Remove bolts from side cover.
14. Remove side cover from transmission.
15. Remove gear shift fork from transmission.
16. Remove gear shift block from transmission.

� Punch out the spring pin by using punch and
remove each shift fork, shift block and shift
fork shaft.
-22-

Manual transmission
17. Remove gear selector fork from transmission.
Attention:
Please notice the position of steel balls. This
transmission has 7 steel balls and 1 steel locking
piece, among which, 3 steel balls are self-locking
devices and the others are interlocking devices.
18. Remove all bearing circlips by using circlip pliers.
19. Pull out bearings except for input shaft bearing cap
with SST.
20. Remove input shaft of transmission.
-23-

Manual transmission
21. Remove output (input) shaft of transmission and
place it on cardboard horizontally.
22. Remove output shaft of transmission.
23. Remove output shaft of transmission.

Assemble the output shaft and input shaft of
transmission together and place them on clean
cardboard horizontally.
24. Remove reverse gear shaft pin of transmission.
-24-

Manual transmission
25. Use a rubber hammer or copper rod to knock on the
reverse gear shaft gently.
26. Pull out the reverse gear shaft pin and punch out
the reverse gear shaft.
27. Remove reverse gear of transmission.

Place it on clean cardboard horizontally.
28. Assemble the reverse gear and reverse gear shaft as

a whole.
-25-

Manual transmission
29. Loosen the 5th gear circlip with circlip pliers and
remove the fixed circlip from the 5th driving gear.
30. Adjust the position of 5th gear of countershaft and

remove countershaft of transmission.
31. Transmission gearing diagram
-26-

Exploded View of Reverse Gear Shaft
Reverse Gear Shaft Parts List
S/N Name Qty.
1 Reverse gear assembly 1
2 Reverse gear shaft 1
3 Reverse gear shaft pin 1
-27-

Exploded View of Output Shaft Assembly
-28-

Output Shaft Parts List
S/N Name Qty. S/N Name Qty.
Output shaft head needle
1 1 27 Thrust washer of 5th gear 1
roller bearing
2 Circlip 1 28 Ball bearing 1
3rd/4th gear synchronizer
3 2 29 Stop ring 1
spring
3rd/4th gear synchronizer Front spacer bush of odometer
4 1 30 1
gear hub driving gear
5 1 31 Odometer driving gear 1
gear sleeve
Rear spacer bush of odometer
6 needle roller bearing 1 32 1
driving gear
7 1 33 Flange 1
ring
3rd gear assembly of output
8 1 34 O-ring 1
shaft
9 Circlip 1 35 Conical spring washer 1
nd
10 Thrust washer of 2 gear 1 36 Output shaft nut 1
nd
2 gear assembly of output
11 1 37 Steel ball 1
shaft
12 Needle roller bearing 2 38 3rd/4th gear synchronizer spring 2
1st/2nd gear synchronizer
13 1 39 1st/2nd gear synchronizer spring 2
ring
14 Circlip 1 40 3rd/4th gear synchronizer slider 3
Reverse/5th gear synchronizer
15 1st/2nd gear hub 1 41 3
slider
Reverse/5th gear synchronizer
16 1st/2nd gear sleeve 1 42 1
gear hub
1st/2nd gear synchronizer
17 1 43
ring
1st gear assembly of output
18 1 44
shaft
19 3 45
slider
20 Output shaft 1 46
21 Needle roller bearing 1 47
Reverse gear assembly of
22 1 48
output shaft
23 Circlip 1 49
Reverse/5th gear
24 1
synchronizer gear sleeve
25 1
ring
5th gear assembly of output
26 1
shaft
-29-

Exploded View of Top Cover Assembly
-30-

Top Cover Assembly Parts List

1 Transmission cover 1 14 Hexagon bolt 2
2 Outer gear selector rocker arm assembly 1 15 Large washer 2
3 Flat washer 1 16 Spring washer 8
4 Oil seal 1 17 Hexagon bolt 1
5 Inner gear selector rocker arm 1 18 Flat washer
6 Spring pin 1 19 Washer 1
7 Reverse/5th gear damping spring 1 20 Knurled pin 1
8 Oil seal 1 21 Oil filler plug assembly 1
9 Flat washer 1 22 1st/2nd gear damping spring 1
10 Reversing lamp switch 1 23 Flat washer 1
11 Hexagon bolt 8 24 Outer gear shift rocker arm assembly 1
12 Inner gear shift rocker arm 1
13 Spring washer 8
-31-

Exploded View of Input Shaft Assembly
S/N Name Qty. S/N Name

1 Circlip 1 5 3rd/4th gear synchronizer ring
2 Stop ring 1
3 Ball bearing (input shaft) 1
4 Input shaft assembly 1
-32-

Exploded View of Transmission Rear Cover

1 Rear cover 1 9 Odometer guide sleeve 1
2 Vent plug 1 10 O-ring 1
3 Hexagon bolt 1 11 Spring pin 1
4 Spring washer 1 12 Hexagon bolt 5
5 Hexagon bolt 2 13 Spring washer 7
6 Oil seal 1
7 Oil seal 1
8 Odometer gear 1

-33-

Exploded View of Countershaft Assembly

1 Circlip 1 6 Circlip 1
2 Cylinder roller bearing 1 7 5th gear of countershaft 1
3 Main gear of countershaft 1 8 Cylinder roller bearing 1
4 3rd gear of countershaft 1 9 Stop ring 1
5 Countershaft 1 10 Circlip 1
-34-

Exploded View of Housing Assembly
S/N Name Qty.

1 Flexible shaft bracket assembly 1
2 Liner 1
3 Housing 1
4 Side cover liner 1
5 Side cover of transmission 1
6 Side cover bolt 6
7 Oil drain plug assembly 1
-35-

Exploded View of Shift Fork Assembly

1 5th/reverse gear shift block 1 9 1st/2nd gear shift fork shaft 1
2 5th/reverse gear shift fork shaft 1 10 1st/2nd gear shift block 1
3 5th/reverse gear shift fork 1 11 Spring pin 6
4 Lock ball spring 2 12 Interlocking lifting pin 1
5 3rd/4th gear shift fork 1 13 Steel ball 7
6 3rd/4th gear shift fork shaft 1 14 Lock ball spring 1
7 3rd/4th gear shift block 1 15 Spring pin 5
8 1st/2nd gear shift fork 1
-36-

Exploded View of Transmission Front Cover Assembly
S/N Name S/N Name Qty.

1 Clutch housing 7 Spring washer
2 Release bearing 8 Flat washer 1
3 Input shaft front cap 9 Release fork assembly 1
4 Oil seal 10 Release fork shield 1
5 Hexagonal socket head cap screw 11 Ball joint bracket 1
6 Bolt (Clutch housing)
-37-

Transmission Assembly Diagram
-38-

Transmission
Installation
1. Place transmission housing onto a clean cardboard.
2. Install reverse gear and reverse gear shaft onto
transmission housing.
3. Install side cover and reverse gear shaft pin of

transmission in place and tighten to the specified
torque.
4. Install transmission countershaft into the

-39-

Transmission
5. Install the fixed circlip of 5th driving gear of
transmission countershaft in place.
6. Install output shaft of transmission into

7. Install guide bearing of input shaft of transmission

in place.
8. Install shifting mechanism assembly.

� Maintain each gear and synchronizer at neutral
position.
� Install interlocking steel ball into transmission
housing.
� Install gear shift shaft into transmission
housing gently.
-40-

Transmission
9. Install gear shift control mechanism assembly.
� Install the self-locking device of gear shift
control mechanism in place.
10. Knock the input shaft gently into transmission.

Attention:
During the installation of input shaft, use rubber
hammer to knock gently on symmetric
position on input shaft support bearing.
� Install inside and outside circlips into input
shaft of transmission.
� Install the countershaft bearing into
transmission. Please notice the mounting
direction of both side bearing inner rings, with
the one without ledge facing inward of
transmission. During installation, use hammer
to knock on transmission bearing gently and
evenly into transmission housing.
11. Install shifting mechanism assembly.
� Maintain each gear and synchronizer at neutral
position.
� Install interlocking steel ball into transmission
housing.
� Install gear shift shaft into transmission
housing gently.
12. Install gear shift control mechanism assembly.

Install the self-locking device of gear shift control
mechanism in place.
-41-

Transmission
13. Install top cover of transmission.
Maintain gear shift control mechanism and gear
shift shaft at reverse gear position.
14. Install gear shift control mechanism onto the top

cover of transmission.
Attention:
In order to avoid deformation during installation of
transmission cover, please tighten bolts on middle
part first and then bolts on both sides in symmetry.
(Check for normal gear shifting after installation)
15. Assemble clutch housing onto transmission

housing.
Tighten outer bolts and front cover mounting bolts of
input shaft. Please tighten bolts on middle part first
and then bolts on both sides or tighten diagonally.
16. Tighten output shaft flange of transmission to the

specified torque.
-42-

Maintenance Parameters
Tightening torque
Position Technical Requirement (N.m)
Connection between clutch housing and transmission housing 68.6～93.2
Reversing lamp switch 29.4～39.2
Rear cover, transmission cover bolts 25～35
Bracket bolt 25～35
Side cover bolt 14～24.5
Vent plug 10.8～18.6
Oil filler plug and oil drain plug 39.2～58.8
Output shaft nut 160～210
Gear shift shaft dowel hole bolt 9.8～14.7
Odometer shaft sleeve 9.8～14.7
Release fork ball joint support 30～42
Input shaft front cap 9.8～14.7
Main technical parameters

Type Five forward gears and one reverse gear
Control type Remote control
Rated input torque 300N.m
Assembly mass About 78Kg
Gear position Speed ratio
1st gear 4.717
2nd gear 2.513
Speed ratio
rd
3 gear 1.679
th
4 gear 1.00
th
5 gear 0.784
Reverse gear 4.497
-43-

Care and maintenance
Transmission maintenance
1. Transmission operation and maintenance should be conducted in accordance with application and maintenance
requirements for commercial vehicles, which are generally divided into three technical maintenance stages.
2. Check, change (or add) transmission oil regularly.
Regular Inspection and Maintenance Schedule for Transmission

Mileage and time (by the month) are both indicated for each item, whichever occurs first.
○ Check point, tighten or adjust; ★ Change lube oil
Service interval (based on odometer reading or number of months, which occurs first)
Item Number of months － 3 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54
Odometer reading×1000km 1 5 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
Transmission inside inspection
Check gear oil level inside transmission ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Normal service
★ ★ ★ ★ ★
Change gear oil inside condition
transmission Severe service
★ ★ ★ ★ ★ ★ ★ ★
condition
Other inspections
Note: “Severe service condition” includes items listed below:

1. Running in dusty areas or frequently exposed in salty atmosphere or saline water.
2. Running on bumpy, water-logging roads or on mountain road.
3. Running in cold areas.
4. Engine idling for a long time or frequent short distance running in cold seasons.
5. Frequent application of brakes and emergency brake.
6. Towing vehicle.
7. Under high temperature over 32℃, the time of vehicle running slowly in congested urban areas exceeding 50%
of total running time.
8. Under high temperature over 30℃, the time of vehicle running at high speed over 120km/h exceeding 50% of
total running time.
9. Overloading.
Lubrication and seal

Item Lube Oil/Sealant Qty.
Gear oil In summer 80W/90 GL-4 2.7L
Transmission gear oil
In winter 75W/90 GL-4
Release bearing bore of transmission Grease Adequate
Transmission oil seal Grease Adequate
Mating face between transmission housing and clutch housing TONSAN®1596F Adequate
Mating face between transmission housing and rear cover TONSAN®1596F Adequate
-44-

BR Brake System
Brake System
Subject Page
Brake System................................................................................................................................................................. 46
Explosive View......................................................................................................................................................... 46
Introduction of Brake................................................................................................................................................47
Brake System................................................................................................................................................................. 49
Removal/installation of brake disc...........................................................................................................................50
Removal/installation of brake caliper assembly.......................................................................................................54
Removal/installation of rear wheel brake shoe........................................................................................................ 56
Parking brake adjustment.........................................................................................................................................59
Removal/installation of parking brake lever............................................................................................................ 60
Removal/installation of parking brake cable............................................................................................................61
Replacement of parking brake cable........................................................................................................................ 62
Removal/installation of brake pedal.........................................................................................................................63
Removal/installation of brake master cylinder.........................................................................................................65
Removal/installation of vacuum pump.................................................................................................................... 66
Removal/installation of vacuum booster..................................................................................................................68
Air bleeding for hydraulic pressure brake system....................................................................................................71
- 45-

BR Brake System
SUNRAY vehicles’ brake system adopts cross type brake line and the front disc/rear drum brake type.
1．Brake master cylinder 2. Hydraulic distribution valve
- 46 -

BR Brake System
Operating principle
Good Poor
Brake fluid
Inspection of brake fluid level:
1. Check if the brake fluid level in oil reservoir is
within the specified range (between MAX and
MIN signs). In case of too low fluid level, please
check oil reservoir periphery and brake system for
any leak. 3rd
2. Start the vehicle with parking brake lever released
to observe whether the brake warning lamp goes 2nd
out. If not, please check the parking brake switch 1st
and brake fluid level switch for any fault.
Brake master cylinder Start the engine and let it idling for 1 minute, and
On-vehicle inspection: shut down the engine once the vacuum established
Check mounting surfaces of master cylinder and oil in the vacuum booster. Depress the brake pedal
reservoir, as well as brake pipe connectors for any leak. normally to remove the vacuum.
Instruction and Operation Please check if the clearance between brake pedal
Inspection of vacuum booster and floor increases gradually.
1. Operation inspection Depress the brake pedal with engine running and
Shut down the engine and repeatedly depress the then hold the brake pedal depressed to realize
brake pedal for several times to make the vacuum flameout. Please check if there is any change in
inside the vacuum booster equivalent to pedal travel after holding it for 30 seconds.
atmospheric pressure. With the brake pedal Front disc brake caliper
depressed to the end and engine started, check if On-vehicle inspection:
the clearance between brake pedal and floor 1. Check brake shoes for any wear.
decreases once the vacuum up to the standard Attention:
degree. Standard thickness: 12mm
Wear limit thickness: 2mm
MAX
MIN
Attention:
Please depress the brake pedal with an interval of 5 Inspection of brake disc:
seconds. 1. Visual inspection
2. Air tightness inspection Check brake disc surface for uneven abrasion,
crack or sever damage. If any, please replace the
brake disc.
2. Inspection of runout
① Fix the brake disc onto the wheel hub.
Attention:
Before measurement, please ensure proper axial
clearance of wheel bearing.
- 47-

BR Brake System
Standard thickness: 24.3mm
Wear limit: 22.3mm
② Check the runout with dial indicator. (It is

preferable to conduct measurement at points
10mm distant from the disc edge)
Runout limit: 0.05mm
③ If the disc runout exceeds the specified value,
please replace or reprocess it accordingly.
3. Thickness inspection
Check the thickness of brake disc with a
micrometer.
If the thickness is less than the wear limit, please
replace the brake disc.
- 48 -

BR Brake System
Fault Diagnosis
Insufficient left/right tire pressure Adjust
Improper front wheel alignment Adjust
Vehicle pulled to one side Poor contact of brake shoe Adjust

when braking Grease or oil existed on brake shoe surface Replace
Improper installation of brake wheel cylinder Adjust
Failure of auto-regulating mechanism Adjust
Low level or contamination of brake fluid Replenish or change
Air existed in brake system Bleed air out of system
Failure of vacuum booster Adjust
Poor contact of brake shoe Adjust
Insufficient brake force
Grease or oil existed on brake shoe surface Replace
Overheating of brake rotary parts due to sluggish of brake shoe Adjust
Restriction of brake line Adjust
Air existed in brake system Bleed air out of system
Pedal travel increase Leak of brake fluid Adjust
(decrease of clearance
between pedal and floor) Failure of auto-regulating mechanism Adjust
Excessive clearance between pushrod and brake master cylinder Adjust
Parking brake not fully released Release
Improper adjustment of parking brake Adjust
Wear of brake pedal return spring Replace
Brake hysteresis Restriction of return opening of brake master cylinder Adjust
Insufficient lubrication of sliding parts Lubricate
Defective check valve or piston return spring of brake master cylinder Replace
Insufficient clearance between pushrod and brake master cylinder Adjust
Damage of rear brake shoe Replace
Grease or oil existed on rear brake shoe surface Replace
Insufficient parking braking Parking brake cable stuck Adjust
Excessive travel of parking brake handle Adjust
- 49-

BR Brake System
Front brake disc
Removal
1. Have the vehicle lifted and remove the front wheel.
2. Remove the brake hose from the shock absorber.
Note:
Loosen the brake caliper to certain degree ready
for removal instead of removing it completely.
3. Remove the brake caliper.
Hang up the brake caliper properly in order to
avoid damage of brake hose.
Caution:
Bearing preload adjusting nut is of right hand
thread.
4. Remove the brake disc assembly:
� Remove the dust cover.
� Remove the split pin and nut retainer.
� Loosen the adjusting nut of wheel bearing.
� Remover the brake disc assembly.
5. Remove the wheel hub from the wheel disc.

Bend the lock lug on the set bolt down.
6. Clean the contact surface between wheel hub and
disc.
- 50 -

BR Brake System
Installation
1. Install the wheel hub onto the brake disc.
Bend the lock lug on the set bolt up.
Caution:
The left hand side bearing adjusting nut is of left
hand thread.
2. Reinstall the hub bearing:
� Reinstall the washer and brake disc assembly,
as well as the outer bearing.
� Reinstall the wheel bearing adjusting nut.
3. Reinstall the brake caliper.

4. Install the brake hose onto the shock absorber.
5. Check the front disc runout as required.
6. Set the axial clearance of wheel bearing:

� Tighten the adjusting nut of wheel bearing and
rotate the wheel at the same time to make it
closely fitted against the bearing.
� Rotate the adjusting nut by 180 degree and
shake the wheel to make the hang properly
fitted.
� Push and pull the wheel horizontally to check
the bearing axial clearance. If no clearance
can be felt, adjust the adjusting nut to make
the axial clearance within 0.002~0.05mm.
7. Use new split pin to reinstall the nut lock piece and
the dust cover.
8. Reinstall the wheel.
9. Lower the vehicle.
- 51-

BR Brake System
Replacement of front brake disc
Removal
1. Have the vehicle lifted to remove the front wheel.
2. Remove the plastic cap of brake caliper sliding pin.
3. Make the brake disc exposed:

� Remove the guide pin bolt of brake caliper.
� Upturn the brake caliper.
Note:
The ablated or damaged piston bush should be
replaced.
4. Remove the inner/outer brake pad.
Note:
Resetting of wheel cylinder piston shall make the
brake fluid returned to the fluid reservoir of master
cylinder.
5. Push the wheel cylinder piston carefully to the
original position.
- 52 -

BR Brake System
6. During the installation of new brake lining, please
remove the snap ring of brake lining from the brake
caliper.
7. Clear any dirt within the mounting areas.
Installation
1. Install new snap ring onto new brake lining.
2. Check if two brake linings are of the same type.
3. During the installation of new brake lining, please
remove the interleaving paper from the acoustic
lining.
4. Reinstall inner/outer brake lining.

5. Reinstall the brake caliper assembly:
� Install the brake caliper assembly.
� Install the guide pin bolt of brake caliper.
� Install the plastic cap of brake caliper guide
pin.
6. Adjust the slider of brake plate.
7. Reinstall the wheel and lower the vehicle.
8. Check the brake fluid level of master cylinder. If

insufficient, please add brake fluid to the standard
position.
- 53-

BR Brake System
Brake caliper assembly
Removal
1. Have the vehicle lifted and remove the front wheel.
Note:
Clamp the brake hose with SST in order to avoid
damage of brake hose.
2. Clamp the brake hose.
3. Remove the brake hose from the caliper.

Put on the seal plug to avoid excessive leak of
brake fluid or contamination of dust.
Note:
Loosen the upper mounting bolt of caliper until the
brake caliper can be removed.
4. Remove the brake caliper assembly.
- 54 -

BR Brake System
Installation
1. Reinstall the brake caliper.
2. Connect the brake hose to the brake caliper.

3. Fix the brake hose onto the shock absorber.
4. Bleed air out of brake line in accordance with
specification.
5. Install the wheel and lower the vehicle. Depress the

brake pedal to adjust brake clearance.
- 55-

BR Brake System
Removal/installation of rear wheel brake shoe
Removal
1. Release the parking brake lever, have the vehicle
lifted and remove the rear wheel.
2. Remove the automatic regulator.
3. Mark properly on the wheel hub and rim for
removal of hub.
Caution:
Don’t make the axle casing oil seal damaged.
4. Remove the axle shaft.
5. Remove flange nuts.
6. Remove the flange.
- 56 -

BR Brake System
7. Remove the leading shoe:
� Remove the lock pin and its spring cap.
� Remove the brake shoe lower end from the
support.
� Loosen the lower return spring.
� Remove the brake shoe upper end from the
wheel cylinder.
� Loosen the upper return spring.
8. Remove the trailing shoe:

� Remove the lock pin and its spring cap.
� Remove the trailing shoe from the wheel
cylinder and support.
� Disconnect the parking brake cable.
9. Disassemble the leading shoe:

� Remove retainer ring from the inside of brake
shoe.
� Remove washer and spring from the fulcrum
pin.
� Remove spring and retainer ring from the
ratchet.
� Remove ratchet and washer from brake shoe.
10. Disassemble the trailing shoe:

� Remove return spring and strut from parking
brake lever and brake shoe.
� Remove retainer ring, fulcrum pin, washer and
tie rod from brake shoe.
- 57-

BR Brake System
Installation
1. Clean the support plate and apply ABS fluid onto
the bonding point between brake bottom plate and
brake shoe.
2. Assemble the trailing shoe.
Apply grease onto parking brake lever and brake
shoe.
3. Reconnect the parking brake cable to the lever.
4. Reinstall the trailing shoe.
5. Assemble the leading shoe.
Apply grease between the adjusting ratchet and the
fulcrum pin.
6. Reinstall the leading shoe.
7. Install the upper/lower return spring of brake shoe.
8. Install the brake shoe lock pin, and the fixed pin
and clip of spring.
Note:
Please don’t make the brake lining contaminated
by any oil or grease. If any, please wipe it clean
with sand paper.
9. Reinstall the flange.
Note:
The annular mark on the left side flange nut of
vehicle indicates the nut is of left hand thread.
10. Retighten the flange nut.
Caution:
Don’t make the half axle oil seal damaged.
11. Reinstall the half axle:
� Install the spacer.
� Install a new O-ring.
� Install a new oil seal.
� Install the half axle.
12. Reinstall the brake drum.
13. Reinstall the tire and lower the vehicle.
- 58 -

BR Brake System
Parking brake adjustment
1. Release the parking brake and have the vehicle
lifted.
2. Release the parking brake regulator.

� Loosen the lock nut.
� Rotate the regulator.
3. Depress the brake pedal to ensure proper automatic
regulation.
4. Pull up the parking brake lever until it gets stuck at
the 3rd tooth.
Note:
Ensure thread length on both sides are the same
and the thread can be observed through the hole of
regulator.
Note:
The parking brake lever can be pulled up by four to
six teeth after the last regulation is finished.
5. Tighten the parking brake adjusting nut:

� Tighten the adjusting nut by hand.
� Tighten the adjusting nut.
- 59-

BR Brake System
Removal/installation of parking brake lever
Removal
1. Loosen the parking brake lever.
2. Remove the wavy dust shield of parking brake.
3. Remove the parking brake lever assembly:
� Remove the spring clip and the clevis pin for
fixing cable.
� Remove the mounting bolts from parking
brake lever.
Installation
4. Reinstall the parking brake assembly:
� Tighten the mounting bolts of parking brake
lever.
� Install the spring clip and the clevis pin for
fixing the main cable.
� Install the wavy dust shield of parking brake.
- 60 -

BR Brake System
Removal/installation of parking brake cable
Removal
2. Remove the spring clip and the clevis pin from the
main cable and remove the cable from the parking
brake lever.
3. Separate the main cable from the equalizer:

� Remove the spring clip and the clevis pin.
� Remove the return spring from the equalizer.
4. Remove the main cable.
Installation
1. Reinstall all parts in the reverse order of removal.
2. Regulate the parking brake in accordance with
specification when necessary.
- 61-

BR Brake System
Replacement of parking brake cable
Removal:
2. Remove the main cable from the equalizer:
� Remove the spring clip and the clevis pin.
� Remove the return spring from the equalizer.
3. Remove the rear brake drum.

4. Remove the rear cable from the brake shoe control
lever.
5. Remove the rear cable from the brake bottom plate.
6. Remove the cable from the bracket hook.

Installation
2. Regulate the parking brake in accordance with
specification when necessary.
- 62 -

BR Brake System
Removal/installation of brake pedal
Removal
2. Remove the clevis pin and spring clip from the

vacuum booster control rod of brake pedal.
3. Remove the brake switch:

� Disconnect the harness connector.
� Remove the brake switch.
4. Remove the brake and clutch pedal spider clip from

the pedal bracket.
- 63-

BR Brake System
5. Remove the brake pedal:
� Push the spider to the direction of clutch
pedal.
� Remove the brake pedal.
6. Remove the pedal bushing and spring:

� Remove the pedal bushing.
� Remove the spring.
Installation
2. Reinstall and regulate the brake switch:
� Screw in the switch.
� Reconnect the harness connector.
- 64 -

BR Brake System
Removal/installation of brake master cylinder
Caution:
Don’t the make the brake fluid splashing onto the
paint surface. In case of any, please wash the
surface with clean water immediately.
Removal
2. Remove the brake fluid reservoir cap:

� Disconnect the fluid level alarm harness
connector.
� Remove the fluid reservoir cap.
3. Remove the clutch master cylinder pipe and drain
the brake fluid out of the master cylinder fluid
reservoir.
4. Remove the brake line from brake master cylinder
and block the pipe with plug to avoid
contamination by dirt.
Caution:
Please ensure the air in vacuum booster is fully
bled before the removal of brake master cylinder.
Remove the vacuum pipe from the booster for air
bleeding.
5. Remove the master cylinder.
6. Install it in the reverse order of removal.
Remember to perform air bleeding after
installation. Please bleed air out from system in
accordance with specification.
- 65-

BR Brake System
Removal/installation of vacuum pump
Caution:
Removal
2. Remove the vacuum pipe from the pump.
Note:
Plug the pipe orifice to avoid contamination by
dirt.
3. Remove the oil inlet pipe and the oil return pipe
from the pump.
4. Remove the vacuum pump.
- 66 -

BR Brake System
5. Remove the seal ring between generator and
vacuum pump.
Installation
1. Reinstall the seal ring between generator and
vacuum pump.
2. Reinstall the vacuum booster.

3. Reinstall the oil inlet pipe and the oil return pipe
onto the pump.
4. Connect the vacuum pipe onto the pump.
- 67-

BR Brake System
Removal/installation of vacuum booster
Caution:
Removal
2. Disconnect the harness connector of the brake fluid

level warning switch.
3. Disconnect the brake fluid circuit.
Note:
Plug the pipe orifice to avoid contamination by
dirt.
4. Remove the brake line from the master cylinder.
5. Remove the vacuum booster hose connector

carefully.
6. Remove the clevis pin and spring clip from the

vacuum booster control rod of brake pedal.
- 68 -

BR Brake System
7. Remove the brake switch.
� Remove the harness connector.
8. Remove the booster and master cylinder assembly.
9. Separate the booster from the master cylinder.
Installation
1. Install the vacuum booster.
2. Install the booster control rod onto the brake pedal.
- 69-

BR Brake System
3. Reinstall and debug the brake switch.
4. Reinstall the master cylinder onto the booster.

Ensure proper position and clean joint surface for
sealing washer of vacuum pump.
5. Reconnect the brake line.
6. Reconnect the brake line with the master cylinder.
7. Install the vacuum booster pipe connector.
8. Connect the brake fluid level warning sensor
connector.
10. Bleed air out of brake system in accordance with
specification.
- 70 -

BR Brake System
Air bleeding for brake system
Caution:
1. Disconnect the ground wire of battery.
2. Have the vehicle lifted.
3. Connect the oil drain pipe to the air vent of four

wheels.
4. Loosen the bleeder screw.
Note:
Keep the brake fluid reservoir cap clean.
5. Open the brake fluid reservoir cap.
6. Bleed air out of the front circuit.
Fill the fluid reservoir with brake fluid with the
brake pedal fully depressed, release the brake pedal
immediately and then hold the brake pedal
depressed. Loosen the bleeder screw of wheel
cylinder to bleed air out of system. Perform air
bleeding for wheels in the order of left rear, right
front, right rear and left front. Tighten the bleeder
screw once no air bubble is observed.
- 71-

ABS Anti-lock Brake System
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)

Subject Page
ABS system....................................................................................................................................................................74
ABS system....................................................................................................................................................................79
Operating principle.................................................................................................................................................. 79
Inspection and confirmation.....................................................................................................................................81
Fault Symptom Table............................................................................................................................................... 85
ABS system..................................................................................................................................................................101
Wheel speed sensor................................................................................................................................................ 103
- 73 -

Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
BOCSH 8 ABS is adopted for JAC multifunctional commercial vehicles.
ABS Hydraulic Assembly
- 74 -

Operating principle
Connection Diagram of ABS Brake Line (Diagonal Layout)
- 75 -

Precautions for ABS system diagnosis
As ABS is a safety related component, the following removed for overhaul or partly/separately
precautions should be observed in addition to general replaced. BOSCH Company won’t provide
safety and preventive measures that should be taken in separate spare parts, won’t provide maintenance
the course of maintenance and diagnosis. warranty for the disassembled ABS with
1. Maintenance for ABS system should be conducted hydraulic controller, as well as won’t bear any
by specially trained technicians that mastering the responsibility for consequences caused by
maintenance skills and only genuine parts removal overhaul or part/separate replacement.
manufactured by the original manufacturers should 7. Connectors for ABS ECU:
be applied for replacement. ① The ignition switch must be turned off before
2. Before conducting diagnosis over ABS system, the the removal of connectors for ABS ECU;
conventional brake system should operate ② Keep the connectors for ABS ECU dry and
normally.
clean without any foreign matter;
3. Before and during travelling, ABS ECU shall
③ The connectors for ABS ECU must be
perform continuously monitoring over ABS related
electrical components to see if they can operate installed in position with bottom parallel to
normally. the base;
4. ABS and EBD lamps shall be lit when the ignition ④ The connectors for ABS ECU must be
switch is turned on and go out in several seconds installed in position with lateral part vertical
based on no fault existed in system. to the base.
5. The following two conditions indicate that there is 8. ABS hydraulic governor with ECU should be
fault detected in the system: grounded properly. If not, water and moisture shall
permeate into connectors of ABS ECU via pore
① The warning lamp keeps on after the ignition
path of harness under the capillary (syphon) effect,
switch is turned on; leading to failure.
② The warning lamp doesn’t go out after it is 9. Please ensure ABS brake line properly connected,
turned on during travelling. because ABS ECU is unable to diagnose whether
Under those conditions, the driver can still the brake line is properly connected or not and to
apply conventional brake but should minimize realize failure protection. Wrong connection may
the applied braking force to avoid wheel possibly lead to severe accidents.
locking. Therefore, please be attentive to drive � MC1: Connected with brake line 1 of brake
carefully after the warning lamp is lit. Please go master cylinder;
to the service shop for maintenance of ABS
� MC2: Connected with brake line 2 of brake
system as soon as possible in order to avoid
master cylinder
occurrence of more faults and traffic accidents.
� FL: Connected with brake line of left front
6. ABS hydraulic governor with ECU consists of the
brake wheel cylinder;
following parts:
� FR: Connected with brake line of right front
① ABS ECU: Including reflux pump motor relay brake wheel cylinder;
and solenoid valve relay;
� RL: Connected with brake line of left rear
② Solenoid valves (8): Including 4 oil inlet valves brake wheel cylinder;
and 4 oil outlet valves; � RR: Connected with brake line of right rear
③ Reflux pump and pressure accumulator; brake wheel cylinder.
④ Others: Motor, bolts and so on. They can only 10. Ensure each wheel speed sensor wiring properly
be replaced as a whole instead of being connected.
- 76 -

Fault diagnosis procedures for ABS with EBD
S/N Operation
1 Drive the vehicle into repair shop. Go to the next step.
2 Customer problem analysis Go to the next step.
With DTC Go to Step 4
3 Read diagnostic trouble code (DTC).
No DTC Go to Step 9
4 Record DTC and clear fault memory. Go to the next step.
Verify and reproduce fault: Simulation of fault occurrence status. With DTC Current DTC. Go to Step 8
5
Read DTC again. No DTC History DTC. Go to Step 6
Yes Intermittent fault. Go to Step 7
6 Is it relevant to fault symptom?
No Eliminated fault. Go to Step 9
7 Perform fault simulation again. Go to the next step.
8 Perform troubleshooting based on DTC list. Go to Step 10. Go to the next step.
9 Perform troubleshooting based on fault symptom list. Go to the next step.
10 Ensure the fault is eliminated. Go to the next step.
11 Prevention of recurrence. Go to the next step.
12 End
- 77 -

Diagnosis
1. Preliminary inspection installed.
Inspect those easily accessible components that may (g) ABS is a kind of active safety system, which
lead to ABS system fault. Faults can be determined mainly functions to maintain vehicle’s steerability
quickly through visual and appearance inspection, in no and driving stability in the course of braking and to
need of further diagnosis. minimize the braking distance through obtaining
(a) Ensure the vehicle is equipped with wheels and the maximum deceleration. With the adoption of
tires of recommended size. Coaxial tires should be ABS for braking, there is little but uniform tire
of the same pattern and tread depth. wear, for adhesion applied between tire and road
(b) Check the hydraulic governor, brake line and surface is realized based on adhesion coefficient
connector for leak. limit. However, ABS is unable to avoid skidding of
vehicle completely if the vehicle speed at turning
(c) Check ABS fuses - 10A, 25A and 40A. Only the exceeds the limit or the vehicle is running at high
fuses of correct rating should be applied. speed on slippery road.
(d) Ensure the battery is fully charged. (h) ABS sound
(e) Check battery connection for corrosion or terminal When the vehicle is running for about 15Km/h
looseness. after the start of engine, there is a short buzz
(f) Perform visual and appearance inspection for generated in the engine compartment, which is the
electrical components listed below: sound of ABS self-checking but not abnormal noise.
① Check ABS component harnesses and pins for Kinds of sound in the course of ABS functioning
wrong connection, damage due to clamping or include:
cutting. � Operation sound of motor, solenoid valve and
② Check whether the harnesses are arranged reflux pump inside ABS hydraulic unit;
close to high voltage or heavy current devices, � Sound generated from vibration of brake
such as: pedal;
� High voltage ignition component; � Suspension knock sound arisen by braking
� Motor and generator; during ABS operation.
� Stereo amplifier optional equipped. � Excessive noise during system self-checking
or ABS functioning may be caused by:
IMPORTANT: High voltage or heavy current
devices are likely to make induced noise generated � Looseness of ABS fixation;
in circuit interfering normal operation of circuit. � Looseness of ABS bracket;
③ Check connectors of ABS system relevant � Damage or missing of plastic washers on ABS
components for poor connection or check pins bracket;
for incomplete insertion into connector shells. � Looseness of brake relevant connection or
④ ABS components are sensitive to fixation;
electromagnetic interference (EMI). If any � Brake line connection direction
intermittent fault is suspicious, please check nonconforming to delivery status;
whether the optional equipped anti-theft � Air bubbles in brake line.
devices, lamps or mobile phones are properly �
78

principle::
ABS Operating principle and avoid boosting or reducing of hydraulic pressure.
ABS shall enter antilock brake mode once wheel 2. Pressure reducing
skidding is detected during braking. In the course of Under the pressure maintenance mode, wheel skidding
antilock braking, the hydraulic circuit pressure of each can still be detected by ABS control module to reduce
wheel is under control to avoid wheel skidding. Each the affected wheel pressure. Keep the oil inlet valve
wheel is equipped with individual hydraulic line and closed and oil outlet valve open. The redundant
valve. ABS is able to reduce, maintain or increase the fluid/pressure shall be temporarily stored into the
hydraulic pressure of each wheel braking. However, it is accumulator in hydraulic assembly until the pump motor
unable to increase the hydraulic pressure to a certain is able to return the brake fluid into oil reservoir of
level that exceeds the pressure delivered by the master master cylinder.
cylinder during braking. In the course of antilock 3. Pressure boosting
braking, a series of quick vibration of brake pedal can
be felt. The pedal vibration shall appear during antilock If decrease of wheel skidding is detected by ABS
braking and disappear during conventional braking or control module under pressure maintenance or pressure
after complete stop of vehicle. Operation noise can be reducing mode, the ABS control module shall boost the
heard due to quick cycle use of solenoid valve. When affected wheel pressure through applying the pressure of
antilock braking is applied on dry road, intermittent master cylinder. Keep the oil inlet valve open and oil
sharp noise shall generate right before wheel skidding. outlet valve closed. Pressure from master cylinder shall
Those noises and pedal vibration under antilock braking be partly or fully applied onto wheels.
are normal symptoms. Operation of brake pedal during 4. Operating procedures of ABS
conventional braking should be the same as that of During vehicle running, each wheel speed sensor shall
vehicle without ABS system. Maintain balance pedal produce a voltage signal in proportion to wheel speed.
force can both ensure the vehicle stability and the ABS control module shall make judgment based on the
shortest stopping distance. received wheel speed data; if more than one wheels
1. Pressure maintenance decelerate rapidly (compared with reference vehicle
Once wheel skidding is detected, ABS control module speed), it is determined as skidding. ABS control
shall close the oil inlet valve and then make the oil module shall activate the module as required to control
outlet valve in the hydraulic assembly closed to isolate over the brake pressure of each wheel to achieve
the system, which can keep the brake pressure stable optimization.
System::
Schematic Diagram of ABS Hydraulic System
2 9
6
LF RF
3 10
M
RR 7 11 LR
4
5 8 12
Schematic Diagram of ABS Hydraulic System

1. Master cylinder 2. Oil inlet valve (LF) 3. Oil outlet valve (LF) 4. Oil inlet valve (RR) 5. Oil outlet valve
(RR) 6. Damper 7. Oil return pump 8. Accumulator 9. Oil inlet valve (RF) 10. Oil outlet valve (RF) 11. Oil
inlet valve (LR) 12. Oil outlet valve (LR)
- 79 -

Diagnosis
Checking instrument warning lamp warning lamp shall be lit (details based on
(a) Release the parking brake lever. actual conditions).
(b) Check the warning lamp. � As for some vehicle models, EBD warning
With the ignition switch turned on, check if ABS lamp shall be lit if brake fluid level is too low
and EBD warning lamps is lit and then go out in a (details based on actual conditions).
few seconds. � In case of abnormal operation of warning
Remarks: lamps, please perform troubleshooting for
ABS or EBD warning lamp circuit.
� With the parking brake applied, the EBD
EBD Warning ABS Warning

S/N Operation Sequence
Lamp Lamp
1 With the ignition switch turned on, ABS and EBD warning lamps should be lit.
ON ON
If the system is normal, the warning lamps shall go out in about 3 seconds.
2 The system is normal after self-checking. OFF OFF
3 ① There is current DTC not removed in ABS.
ABS stops operation but EBD is still operating.
For example: Only one wheel speed sensor failed.
② There are current DTCs of wheel speed sensor and reflux pump in ABS. ON OFF
With the vehicle speed below 12Km/h, ABS warning lamp is lit but ABS stops operation.
With the vehicle speed no below 12Km/h, ABS warning lamp goes out after no fault is
detected and the current DTC becomes the history DTC.
4 ① Diagnosis on ABS by diagnostic instrument.
With the vehicle speed below 10Km/h, all diagnoses of ABS function normally.
With the vehicle speed over 10Km/h, two lamps go out once the system is detected to be
normal and diagnosis is cut off automatically if the ABS controls normally. ON ON
②EBD failure.
Both ABS and EBD stop operation.
For example: Over three wheel speed sensors failed.
5 Too low brake fluid level or unreleased parking brake lever (details based on actual
conditions). OFF ON
Both ABS and EBD electrical components operate normally.
- 80 -

Detection by diagnostic instrument
Remarks: ABS and conventional brake system.
Data of switches, sensors, actuators and so on can be Please finish the following procedures before the
read through data stream of diagnostic instrument replacement of ABS:
without removal/installation of any element. 1. Dynamic self-checking: ABS lamp won’t go out
Therefore, the reading of data stream before when the ignition switch is turned on again after
troubleshooting is one of the methods for shortening some faults (such as wheel speed sensor signal
maintenance time. reliability failure or motor failure) are eliminated
Functions of diagnostic instrument shall be determined and the lamp shall go out after ABS dynamic
based on actual development of customer’s instrument. self-checking is qualified with the vehicle speed no
Please refer to corresponding instruction manual of less than 15Km/h.
diagnostic instrument for certain vehicle for details. 2. Cross validation: Install the removed ABS onto a
The diagnostic contents (BOSCH diagnostic instrument) normal vehicle equipped with the same ABS model,
listed below is only for reference. with ABS harness connectors connected but no oil
(a) Connect the diagnostic instrument to data link pipe in need of connection, and ensure ABS
connector (DLC). connectors and wheel speed sensors are firmly and
reliably connected. Start the vehicle to run for a
(b) Turn on the ignition switch. few circles to enable ABS dynamic self-checking.
(c) Read data stream based on display of diagnostic � If the ABS lamp goes out, there is no failure in
instrument. ABS.
Remarks: Apply the diagnostic instrument to test ABS, � If the lamp keeps on, there is failure in ABS.
which should be performed in road test. DTC can be The ABS may be replaced.
cleared when necessary to ensure normal operation of
Item Display Valve/Range Normal State Remarks

Left front wheel speed 1.75Km/h～350Km/h Actual wheel speed
Right front wheel speed 1.75Km/h～350Km/h Actual wheel speed
Left rear wheel speed 1.75Km/h～350Km/h Actual wheel speed
Right rear wheel speed 1.75Km/h～350Km/h Actual wheel speed
Battery voltage 0～+20.40V 9.3～16.9V
Left front oil inlet valve ON/OFF With ignition switch turned on: Relevant to ABS conditions:
Power failure Pressure boosting:
Left front oil outlet valve ON/OFF
Other conditions: Based on Oil inlet valve - power failure
Right front oil inlet valve ON/OFF control
Oil outlet valve - power failure
Right front oil outlet valve ON/OFF Pressure maintenance:
Left rear oil inlet valve ON/OFF Oil inlet valve - continuity
Left rear oil outlet valve ON/OFF Oil outlet valve - power failure
Pressure reducing:
Right rear oil inlet valve ON/OFF
Oil inlet valve - continuity
Right rear oil outlet valve ON/OFF
Oil outlet valve - continuity
Brake lamp switch ON/OFF ON: With brake pedal
depressed
OFF: With brake pedal released
Reflux pump motor ON/OFF
Solenoid valve relay ON/OFF With ignition switch turned on:
Continuity
Occupied state of hydraulic Already occupied and normal or Already occupied and normal
governor BOSCH supply status
- 81 -

Brake bleeding
Note: 1. Manual brake bleeding procedures
Brake bleeding can be performed in the first and second Step Operation
circuits.
1 Fill the brake fluid reservoir.
Brake bleeding should be performed after the
replacement of brake system components (such as Repeat the procedures below for bleeding of
change of brake fluid, replacement of brake system 2 each wheel cylinder in order of left rear, left
components and hydraulic unit) or when the brake pedal front, right front and right rear.
is soft. 3 Open the bleed screw.
The hydraulic unit for replacement must be wet-type 4 Depress and release brake pedal repeatedly.
ABS hydraulic governor with ECU.
During exhaust, please ensure the brake system is of 5 Close the bleed screw.
complete structure and all hydraulic units are properly 6 Release the brake pedal.
connected. 7 Check the pedal travel.
Before brake bleeding, shift to P gear (for AMT) or N
gear (for MT) and apply the parking brake lever. 8 If failed, repeat bleeding.
Brake fluid is toxic, so please clean your skin if any Check if brake fluid level is within upper and
9
fluid touches your skin. lower limit marks.
Remarks: Brake fluid level in reservoir shall be over the
lower limit mark during the whole bleeding process.
2. Manual brake bleeding schematic diagram
Manual brake bleeding schematic diagram for 4-channel ABS X type circuit: Left front wheel
Function mode:
The brake fluid flows into wheel cylinder through master cylinder and hydraulic unit. Open the bleed screw on the left
front wheel with the screws on other wheels closed. Depress and release brake pedal until air bubbles and impurities
are fully drained and the brake fluid is pure. Perform the same process on the other three wheels.
- 82 -

Component activation test
1. Component activation test for reflux pump: cannot rotate the left front wheel by
(1) Turn off the ignition switch. hand.
(2) Connect the diagnostic instrument to DLC. � Boosting phase: Use diagnostic
(3) Turn on the ignition switch with engine off. instrument to access the “boosting
phase”.
(4) Apply the “Component Test” function of
diagnostic instrument to activate the reflux Normal state: The repair man outside
pump. cannot rotate the left front wheel by
hand.
Normal state: Operation sound of reflux pump can
be heard. � Pressure maintenance phase: Use
diagnostic instrument to access the
2. Component activation test for solenoid valve: “pressure maintenance phase”.
Remarks: Normal state: The repair man outside
� Before testing solenoid valve, please test he cannot rotate the left front wheel by
reflux pump to see if it operates normally. hand.
� Two repair men are required to finish this test. � Pressure reducing phase: Use diagnostic
(1) Turn off the ignition switch. instrument to access the “pressure
(2) Connect the diagnostic instrument to DLC. reducing phase”.
(3) One repair man should sit in the vehicle and the Normal state: The repair man outside can
vehicle should be lifted by lifter with wheels rotate the left front wheel by hand.
suspended. (7) Perform testing for right front, left rear and
(4) Turn on the ignition switch with engine off. right rear wheels in sequence. The test results
(5) Apply the “Component Test” function of should be the same as those of left front
diagnostic instrument to activate the solenoid wheel.
valve as per prompt of diagnostic instrument. 3. Component activation test for ABS and EBD
(6) Firstly, test the oil inlet valve and oil outlet warning lamps
valve of left front wheel, during which, the (1) Turn off the ignition switch.
repair man in the vehicle should depress the (2) Connect the diagnostic instrument to DLC.
brake pedal with force and hold it. (3) When performing the component activation
� Conventional braking phase: test for ABS and EBD warning lamps, they
Normal state: The repair man outside should lighten or go out corresponding to the
control of diagnostic instrument.
- 83 -

DTC List
Attention:
Please turn off the ignition switch before removal of parts.
Note:
Please use the diagnostic instrument to read DTC.
If no fault is detected during the detection of components, ABS hydraulic governor with ECU and its ground
point/power line should be inspected.
When more than two DTC is in memory, the fault relevant DTC and circuits should be inspected at first.
DTC list
DTC Detection Item Possible Failure Areas
C0035 Left front wheel speed sensor circuit fault Left front wheel speed sensor circuit, gear ring or sensor itself
C0040 Right front wheel speed sensor circuit fault Right front wheel speed sensor circuit, gear ring or sensor itself
C0045 Left rear wheel speed sensor circuit fault Left rear wheel speed sensor circuit, gear ring or sensor itself
C0050 Right rear wheel speed sensor circuit fault Right rear wheel speed sensor circuit, gear ring or sensor itself
Left front oil outlet valve circuit fault of hydraulic
C0060 ABS hydraulic governor with ECU
governor
Left front oil inlet valve circuit fault of hydraulic
governor
Right front oil outlet valve circuit fault of
hydraulic governor
Right front oil inlet valve circuit fault of hydraulic
governor
Left rear oil outlet valve circuit fault of hydraulic
governor
Left rear oil inlet valve circuit fault of hydraulic
governor
Right rear oil outlet valve circuit fault of hydraulic
governor
Right rear oil inlet valve circuit fault of hydraulic
governor
Reflux pump motor fault: Operation or stopping ABS hydraulic governor with ECU
C0110
failed Ground/power supply for ABS hydraulic governor with ECU
ABS hydraulic governor with ECU
C0121 Solenoid valve relay circuit fault
Ground/power supply for ABS hydraulic governor with ECU
Brake lamp switch and its circuit
C0161 ABS brake lamp switch circuit fault
ABS hydraulic governor with ECU and its circuit
C0245 General fault of wheel speed sensor Wheel speed sensor circuit, gear ring or sensor itself
Battery
C0550 ABS ECU fault Ground/power supply for ABS hydraulic governor with ECU
ABS hydraulic governor with ECU
Battery
C0800 Voltage out of range Charging system
Power/ground circuit
84

Fault symptom table
If fault occurs without fault memory during DTC reading, please check relevant circuits of each fault symptom in
order listed below and by referring to relevant fault diagnosis content.
Attention:
Before maintenance of ABS, please ensure the conventional brake system operates normally.
When the replacement of ABS hydraulic governor with ECU, sensors or other components is necessary, please turn
off the ignition switch firstly.
Fault Symptom Check Areas
ABS failed to operate 1. Check if ABS and EBD warning lamps are lit;
2. Read DTC and check for any fault;
3. Check power UZ circuit of ignition switch;
4. Check brake line for any leak.
ABS poor effect 1. Read DTC and check for any fault;
2. Check brake line for any leak;
3. Apply diagnostic instrument to read “occupied state of hydraulic governor”;
4. Check the power supply state of battery;
5. Ensure the mounting bracket is fixed at normal state (at this time the driving comfort
may decrease).
Abnormal ABS and EBD 1. Read DTC and check for any fault;
warning lamps 2. Check the circuits of ABS and EBD warning lamps;
Diagnostic instrument 1. Check if ABS and EBD warning lamps are lit;
failed to read DTC 2. Check the power line and ground cable of ABS hydraulic governor with ECU;
5. Check the DIAGK cable of ABS hydraulic governor with ECU;
6. Check the diagnostic instrument for reliable connection.
85

Intermittent fault diagnosis table
Note: In case one of the following conditions occurs, there is intermittent fault.
Fault does not always occur;
It may probably occur again;
There is history DTC but no current DTC.
Inspection Operation
Preliminary inspection 1. Perform “preliminary inspection” at first;
2. Collect information relevant to the arising of intermittent fault from the customer, such
as:
1) Driving conditions (vehicle speed, brake, warning lamps and road condition) when the
fault occurs.
2) Does the fault occur during the application of electrical equipments added by service
shop?
3) Has the battery status been checked?
4) Have the wheel speed sensor harnesses and gear rings been checked?
Detection by diagnostic Detection procedures:
instrument 1. Operate the suspicious ABS component harnesses and connectors and observe the data
stream of measured circuit on the diagnostic instrument. If the reading of diagnostic
instrument fluctuates during this operation, please check circuits for loose connection.
2. Perform vehicle road test under occurrence of intermittent fault and ask an assistant to
observe the suspicious operating parameters on the diagnostic instrument.
3. Capture and store data by snapshot once fault occurs. The stored data can be displayed
at lower speed to facilitate diagnosis. Oscilloscope can also be applied for signal
detection.
4. Apply the “Component Test” function of diagnostic instrument to control the
suspicious ABS components to test their operation.
Warning lamps The following conditions may lead to intermittent illumination of warning lamps without
DTC set.
1. Warning indicator circuit is shorted to ground intermittently.
2. Ground points of ABS hydraulic governor with ECU or instruments become loose.
3. Battery voltage is a little lower or unstable under stationary state of vehicle.
Wheel speed sensor 1. Visually inspect wheel speed sensors and gear rings for looseness, damage, foreign
matters or improper installation. Please replace any damaged component, remove any
foreign matter or fix any loosened component accordingly.
2. Check the wheel speed sensor for proper wiring and ensure the harnesses of wheel
speed sensor are not interfered by mechanical components.
3. Monitor the data display of wheel speed sensor on diagnostic instrument with
assistance and at the same time perform road test to check if any wheel speed sensor in
abnormal speed range is displayed.
Additional testing 1. Check electrical equipments added by service shop such as mobile phones, anti-theft
warning devices, lamps, radio equipments, stereo amplifiers and so on for correct
installation.
2. Check if any electromagnetic interference (EMI) is caused by failed components (such
as relays or solenoid valves) with power on.
3. Power-on test for motors and solenoid valves.
86

1. Wheel speed sensor fault (C0035, C0040, C0045, C0050, and C0245): Wheel speed sensors are applied to detect
the wheel speed and transmit relevant signals to ABS ECU. These signals are used for controlling ABS operation.
Each wheel is equipped with a sensor and with a 48-tooth gear ring mounted on its axle shaft. This vehicle model
mainly adopts the active wheel speed sensors that are activated by 12V DC power voltage supplied by ABS ECU.
Wheel speed sensor adopts Hall Effect with nearly constant output amplitude and square wave of 50% duty cycle,
with low voltage of 0.5V and high voltage of 1V; its frequency increases with the increase of vehicle speed. ABS
ECU shall calculate the wheel speed based on this frequency.
Output signals:
Under stationary
Output signals:
or
Output signals: 0.44~0.63 (low voltage), 0.89~1.26 (high voltage)

Low speed
running
Under
state
Output signals: 0.44~0.63 (low voltage), 0.89~1.26 (high voltage)

High speed
87

DTC Detection Condition Set Condition Possible Faulty Areas

C0035 With the ignition 1) Monitor if the power voltage of sensor is too low; 1. Wheel speed sensor bodies
C0040 switch turned on 2) Monitor if the power wire and signal wire of sensor is 2. Wrong connection of wheel
C0045 All conditions normal. speed sensors
C0050 Wheel speed 1) At least one wheel speed above the reference vehicle 3. Wheel speed sensor signals
monitoring speed of 12km/h over 8s (72s is required in case of being interfered
a．Reference vehicle wheel skidding; 4. Too large clearance between
speed within 0 ～ 2) Speed difference between wheels on the same side wheel speed sensor and gear
(such as left front and left rear wheels) over 6Km/h, ring (displacement caused by
100Km/h
or speed difference between wheels on the same axle vibration)
(such as left front and right front wheels) when 5. Corrosion of wheel speed
turning over 10Km/h, or speed difference between sensors and supports
diagonal wheels (such as left front and right rear 6. Gear ring fault (dirty, tooth
wheels) when turning over 14Km/h. damage)
Wheel speed Speed difference between wheels on the same side over 7. Tires: size, pressure, pattern
monitoring 6% of the reference speed, or speed difference between and tread depth
b. Reference vehicle wheels on the same axle when turning over 6%+4Km/h of 8. Connectors flawed,
speed ＞100Km/h the reference speed, or speed difference between diagonal contaminated or affected with
wheels when turning over 6%+8Km/h of the reference damp
speed.
9. Loosened or fractured wheel
Long time monitoring 1) In case signals of one or two wheel speed sensors fail, speed sensors/connecting
of signal interference fault shall be detected in 20s (with brake pedal wires/connectors
depressed) or 5s (without brake pedal depressed). 10. Sensor circuit shorted to
2) In case signals of three or four wheel speed sensors ground
fail, fault shall be detected in 1s. 11.Damaged insulation of sensor
Monitoring of wheel Perform monitoring when vehicle speed over 20Km/h cables
speed difference and 20s (or 80s in case of wheel skidding) is needed
for fault confirmation:
1) If the vehicle speed is within 20Km/h～100Km/h, the
speed difference between the fastest and slowest
wheels shall exceed 6%;
2) If the vehicle speed is over 100Km/h, the speed
difference between the fastest and slowest wheels
shall exceed 6Km/h;
3) During vehicle turning, vehicle speed difference
range shall increase by 4Km/h.
Gear ring monitoring With vehicle speed of 10～ 60Km/h and no operation of
For example: Missing ABS, missing pulse number per rotation of wheel is
teeth displayed for over 10 times.
Dynamic monitoring If the vehicle speed is over 43Km/h, no wheel speed
signal is received within 10～20ms in interval of 60ms.
Monitoring of fast 1) With vehicle speed over 12Km/h, the speed of one or
starting speed two wheels is below 2.75Km/h;
(only for wheel speed 2) If the speed of one wheel decreases below 2.75Km/h
sensors of driving with running speed of v1 (over 12Km/h), the fault can
wheels) be detected when the vehicle speed increases by
18Km/h, viz. speed increase up to v1+18.
Monitoring of slow If the speed of two wheels is over 12Km/h and the speed
starting speed of the other one or two wheels is below 5Km/h, 20s is
needed for fault confirmation.
With the ignition If one of the following faults appears for over 200ms:
switch turned on 1. Sensor wiring circuit open, open to ground or power
All conditions supply
2. Loosened sensor connectors
The current of wheel speed sensor is out of range:
Current ＜1.1mA or ＞39mA
88

Occurrence of fault shall give rise to the following operation:

Braking Strategy Failure Protection
Relevant wheels cannot be controlled any more because correct � The system shall be converted to EBD
wheel speed sensor signals cannot be obtained. When fault occurs, emergency control mode.
ABS shall make the pressure of front wheels increase and that of � ABS warning lamp shall be lit.
rear wheels decrease until the ignition switch is turned off.
If failure of one or two wheel speed sensors is detected in ABS � The system shall be converted to EBD
control process, the system shall be converted to EBD emergency emergency control mode.
control mode until this control process is finished.
If failure of three or four wheel speed sensors is detected, � Brake system shall enter the conventional
braking mode.
� ABS and EBD warning lamps shall be lit.
Remarks: If the ignition switch is turned on after fault removal, the warning lamp shall go out only when the vehicle
speed exceeds 12Km/h.
Troubleshooting procedures
S/N Operating Step Operation Detection Next Step
Result
1 Fault confirmation (a) Connect the diagnostic instrument, read and record Yes If it is current fault, please go
DTC. to Step 3
(b) Clear of DTC: Apply diagnostic instrument to clear No If it is history fault, please go
DTC as per prompt of the instrument. to the next step.
Remarks: DTC cannot be cleared if the battery is
removed.
Please ensure normal voltage of battery before
removing fault.
(c) Conduct fault simulation to see if the fault reoccurs.
2 Intermittent fault (a) Check wiring between ABS hydraulic governor with Yes Go to Step 11
diagnosis ECU and wheel speed sensors and relevant connectors.
No Go to Step 4
Please refer to “04-Inspection before diagnosis” for
inspection methods and procedures.
(b) Check the free travel of hub bearing.
Normal value of free travel of hub bearing: 0mm
Is the problem solved?
3 Appearance (a) Check wiring between ABS hydraulic governor with Yes Go to Step 12
inspection ECU and wheel speed sensors and relevant connectors.
No Go to the next step.
Please replace it when necessary.
(b) Check tires:
1. Check every tire size and perform replacement when
necessary.
2. Check tires and wheel hubs for any damage; perform
repair or replacement when necessary.
3. Check tire pressure and make adjustment when
necessary.
4. Check tire pattern for any abnormal wear (eccentric
wear, excess wear, uneven wear and depth); perform
replacement or make tire balance, four-wheel alignment
and girder correction when necessary.
Is the problem solved?
89


Result
4 Using diagnostic (a) Connect the diagnostic instrument to read data stream. Normal Go to Step 8
instrument to read (b) One repair main conduct test run uniformly in a straight Abnormal Check wheel speed sensors.
wheel speed data line on good road surface and the other one observe the
stream data stream.
Normal state: The displayed speed of each wheel is
basically the same.
Tip: Allowable error for speedometer is ±10%.
5 Checking wheel (a) Remove the connector of wheel speed sensor to Normal Go to the next step.
speed sensors measure the internal resistance of wheel speed sensor.
Abnormal Replace relevant wheel speed
Normal value: 3MΩ～5MΩ sensor.
(b) Measure the wheel speed sensor’s resistance to ground.
Normal value: ∞
6 Ensuring the Use multimeter to measure the cable resistance. Normal Go to the next step.
wheel speed Normal value: 0Ω Abnormal Repair or replace it.
sensor correctly
connected
7 Using oscilloscope (a) Remove the connector from wheel speed sensor. Normal Repair or replace the ABS
to check wheel (b) One terminal of sensor is connected with 12V battery assembly.
speed sensor and and the other terminal connected with red pen of Abnormal Go to the next step.
its waveform oscilloscope.
Attention: Ground cable of oscilloscope must be connected
with ground cable of battery.
Please drive carefully and ensure connecting wire not
interfered with motion parts of vehicle.
8 Checking wheel Wheel speed sensor adopts twisted pair to provide effective Normal Go to the next step.
speed sensor shield so as to protect sensitive electronic elements from
Abnormal Repair
harness being affected by electrical interference.
To avoid performance degradation due to electrical
interference, the following requirements should be satisfied
during maintaining the twisted pair:
(a) Wind the wire by 9 loops every 310mm along the
length direction of the wire.
(b) The external diameter of twisted pair shall be no more
than 6.0mm.
9 Checking the Normal Go to the next step.
installation of
Abnormal Repair
wheel speed
sensor
10 Checking wheel Normal Go to the next step.
speed sensor probe
Abnormal Clean or replace it.
11 Checking wheel Normal Check or replace the ABS
speed sensor rotor assembly.
Abnormal Clean or replace the gear
ring.
12 Conduct final inspection to confirm the fault is removed. Clear DTC.
90

2. Hydraulic governor solenoid valve fault: C0060, C0065, C0070, C0075, C0080, C0085, C0090, C0095
description::
Circuit description
With the ignition switch turned on and ABS solenoid valve relay powered on, battery voltage can be provided to one
terminal of solenoid valve of hydraulic governor.
With ignition switch turned off or ABS system disabled, the solenoid valve relay should be kept power-on.
Function:
ABS ECU is applied to control the operation of solenoid valves through controlling their grounding so as to regulate
brake pressure of each brake circuit.
Inlet valves: PWM type.
Outlet valves: Switch type.
C0060 To be conducted at the 1. With the ignition switch turned on, ABS ECU 1. Fault of solenoid valve
C0065 same time of ABS detects relevant solenoid valve circuit short to inside ABS hydraulic
C0070 ECU initialization and power or ground permanently or governor with ECU:
self-checking: intermittently. brake oil circuit fault,
C0075 electrical fault.
Vehicle under 2. Activate relevant solenoid valve but without
C0080 stationary state or feedback. 2. Hydraulic/mechanical
C0085 speed ≥15Km/h 3. Coil or connector fault of solenoid valve is fault.
C0090 detected during travelling:
C0095 – Without brake pedal depressed: Vehicle under
stationary state
– With brake pedal depressed: Vehicle speed
≈15Km/h
4. Under all conditions, fault occurs in oil
circuit of ABS hydraulic governor with ECU.
Solenoid valve failed to operate or operating wrongly Brake system shall enter the conventional braking mode.
If the solenoid valve failed to operate, relevant wheel ABS and EBD warning lamps shall be lit.
may be locked. If it operates wrongly, no oil pressure
shall be established for relevant wheel.
91

Result
1 Checking ABS (a) Turn off the ignition switch; Normal Go to the next step.
hydraulic governor (b) Turn on the ignition switch without brake pedal depressed; Abnormal Go to Step 3
with ECU under (c) Check if ABS and EBD warning lamps are lit and when
stationary state of necessary use diagnostic instrument to read DTC. If it is
vehicle normal, ABS/EBD warning lamp shall go out without
current DTC.
2 Using diagnostic Remarks: Normal Go to the next step.
instrument to perform ① Before testing solenoid valve, please test he reflux pump to Abnormal Replace ABS control
component testing for see if it operates normally. unit assembly.
solenoid valve of ② Two repair men are required to finish this test.
ABS hydraulic
governor with ECU (a) Turn off the ignition switch;
(b) Connect the diagnostic instrument to DLC;
(c) One repair man should sit in the vehicle and the vehicle
should be lifted by lifter with wheels suspended;
(d) Turn on the ignition switch with engine off;
(e) Apply the “Component Test” function of diagnostic
instrument to activate the solenoid valve as per prompt of
diagnostic instrument;
(f) Firstly, test the oil inlet valve and oil outlet valve of left
front wheel, during which, the repair man in the vehicle
should depress the brake pedal with force and hold it.
① Conventional braking phase
Normal state: The repair man outside cannot rotate the left
front wheel by hand.
② Boosting phase: Use diagnostic instrument to access the
“boosting phase”.
③ Pressure maintenance phase: Use diagnostic instrument to
access the “pressure maintenance phase”.
④ Pressure reducing phase: Use diagnostic instrument to
access the “pressure reducing phase”.
Normal state: The repair man outside can rotate the left
(g) Perform testing for right front, left rear and right rear
wheels in sequence. The test results should be the same as
those of left front wheel.
3 Checking pin voltage (a) Turn off the ignition switch; Normal Replace ABS control
of ABS hydraulic (b) Remove connectors from ABS hydraulic governor with unit assembly.
governor with ECU ECU; Abnormal Go to the next step.
(c) Use multimeter to measure the voltage at the power
terminal and grounding terminal of solenoid valve.
Remarks:
If no jumper box is applied, the normal detection cannot be
ensured.
Normal value: U = 9.3 ～ 16.9V
4 Checking connecting (a) Check if 25A fuse is normal; Normal Go to the next step.
wires, connectors and (b) Check the charging system, such as generator/battery and Abnormal Replace or repair
40A fuse its connecting wire; connecting
(c) Ensure the grounding terminal is well grounded. wire/connector or fuse.
5 Final inspection (a) Clear DTC;
(b) ABS and EBD warning lamps shall go out shortly after the ignition switch is turned on;
(c) With the ignition switch turned on, C0060, C0065, C0070, C0075, C0080, C0085, C0090 or C0095
DTC shall not appear any more after self-checking is finished by system.
92

3. Reflux pump motor fault: C0110
Circuit description:
ABS hydraulic unit with ECU integrates reflux pump with motor. Reflux pump relay shall stop operation and the
reflux pump shall be under stationary state if no regulation is performed by ABS. When decompression is regulated by
ABS, ABS ECU shall control the operation of reflux pump motor through controlling the grounding of reflux pump
relay.
Function:
� ABS Pressure reducing phase: Reflux pump shall operate to pump the brake fluid in the wheel cylinder of locked
wheel back into the master cylinder line so as to reduce the pressure of wheel cylinder.
� EBD Pressure reducing phase: Pressure accumulator shall store the brake fluid flowed back from rear wheels.
C0110 To be conducted at the 1. After the reflux pump motor relay 1. “Reflux pump motor circuit”
same time of ABS ECU operates for 60ms, still no voltage inside ABS.
initialization and signal can be detected by reflux 2. Open circuit of reflux pump
self-checking: pump monitoring. motor relay.
Vehicle under 2. Under no operation of reflux pump 3. Fault of reflux pump motor relay.
stationary state or speed motor relay, voltage detected by 4. Fault of reflux pump motor
≥15Km/h reflux pump monitoring exceeds wiring.
2.5s.
5. Imperfect ground.
3. If the reflux pump motor relay stop
operation, no voltage drop is 6. Inadequate power supply.
detected by reflux pump 7. Fault of reflux pump motor.
monitoring.
� Fault of reflux pump relay: Reflux pump failed to � Brake system shall enter the conventional braking
operate mode.
� Wheel brake force control is disabled due to no � ABS and EBD warning lamps shall be lit.
back-flow pressure can be generated. System shall
perform conventional braking.
Remarks:
If the ignition switch is turned on after fault removal, the ABS and EBD warning lamps shall go out automatically
when the vehicle speed exceeds 12Km/h.
Result
1 Parking the vehicle to (a) Turn off the ignition switch; Normal Go to the next step.
check ABS hydraulic (b) Is any noise heard from ABS hydraulic governor? Abnormal Go to Step 4
governor with ECU
Normal state: ABS reflux pump shall stop operation.
2 Inspection of (a) Start the engine; Normal Go to the next step.
self-checking (b) Run at speed of 10～15Km/h without brake pedal Abnormal Repair based on
initializer of ABS depressed; DTC.
hydraulic governor
with ECU (c) Check if ABS warning lamp is lit and when necessary
use diagnostic instrument to read DTC.
Normal state: ABS warning lamp shall go out without
DTC memory in ABS ECU.
93


Result
3 Using diagnostic (a) Turn off the ignition switch; Normal Go to the next step.
instrument to perform (b) Connect the diagnostic instrument to OBD port; Abnormal Replace ABS control
component testing for
(c) Turn on the ignition switch with engine off; unit assembly.
ABS hydraulic
governor with ECU (d) Apply the “Component Test” function of diagnostic
instrument to activate the reflux pump.
Normal state: Operation sound of reflux pump can be
heard.
4 Checking pin voltage When using multimeter: Normal Replace ABS control
of ABS hydraulic (a) Turn off the ignition switch; unit assembly.
governor with ECU
(b) Remove connectors from ABS hydraulic governor with Abnormal Go to the next step.
ECU;
terminal and grounding terminal of reflux pump.
Remarks:
If no jumper box is applied, the normal detection cannot be
ensured.
Normal value: U=9.3～16.9V
5 Checking connecting (a) Check if 40A fuse is normal; Normal Go to the next step.
wires, connectors and (b) Check the charging system, such as generator/battery Abnormal Replace or repair
40A fuse and its connecting wire; connecting
(c) Ensure the grounding terminal is well grounded. wire/connector or
fuse.
6 Final inspection. (a) Clear DTC;
(b) ABS and EBD warning lamps shall go out shortly after the ignition switch is turned on;
(c) C0110 DTC shall no longer appear with the ignition switch turned on;
(d) When travelling at speed of 10～15Km/h, C0110 DTC shall no longer appear without brake pedal
depressed.
94

4. Solenoid valve relay circuit fault: C0121
With the ignition switch turned on and ABS solenoid valve relay powered on, battery voltage can be provided to one
terminal of solenoid valve of hydraulic governor.
With ignition switch turned off or ABS system disabled, the solenoid valve relay should be kept power-on.
Function:
ABS ECU is applied to control the operation of solenoid valves through controlling their grounding so as to regulate
brake pressure of each brake circuit.
C0121 1. With the ignition Short circuit of solenoid valve, or 1. “Solenoid valve relay circuit”
switch turned on and voltage circuit short to Uz or ground, or inside ABS.
in the course of fault fuse blowout is detected. 2. Inadequate power supply.
testing The time of voltage supplied for 3. Short circuit.
2. In the course of ABS solenoid valve detected to be ＜0.8*Uz 4. Open circuit.
operation (≈8.0V) exceeds 0.8s.
� Fault of solenoid valve relay: Solenoid valve failed to � Brake system shall enter the conventional braking
operate mode.
� If the solenoid valve relay stop operation due to fault � The system shall be converted to EBD emergency
of audion in ECU, control mode.
� ABS warning lamp shall be lit.
Troubleshooting procedures:
Result
1 Checking ABS (a) Turn off the ignition switch; Normal Go to the next step.
hydraulic governor (b) Turn on the ignition switch without brake pedal Abnormal Go to Step 3
with ECU under depressed;
stationary state of (c) Check if ABS and EBD warning lamps are lit and when
vehicle necessary use diagnostic instrument to read DTC.
Normal state: ABS/EBD warning lamp shall go out
without current DTC.
95


Result
2 Using diagnostic Remarks: Normal Go to the next step.
instrument to perform ① Before testing solenoid valve, please test he reflux pump Abnormal Replace ABS control
component testing for to see if it operates normally. unit assembly.
solenoid valve of ABS ② Two repair men are required to finish this test.
hydraulic governor
with ECU (a) Turn off the ignition switch;
(b) Connect the diagnostic instrument to DLC.
(c) One repair man should sit in the vehicle and the vehicle
should be lifted by lifter with wheels suspended.
(d) Turn on the ignition switch with engine off.
(e) Apply the “Component Test” function of diagnostic
instrument to activate the solenoid valve as per prompt of
diagnostic instrument.
(f) Firstly, test the oil inlet valve and oil outlet valve of left
front wheel, during which, the repair man in the vehicle
should depress the brake pedal with force and hold it.
① Conventional braking phase:
Normal state: The repair man outside cannot rotate the
left front wheel by hand.
② Boosting phase: Use diagnostic instrument to access the
“boosting phase”.
③ Pressure maintenance phase: Use diagnostic instrument to
access the “pressure maintenance phase”.
④ Pressure reducing phase: Use diagnostic instrument to
access the “pressure reducing phase”.
Normal state: The repair man outside can rotate the left
(g) Perform testing for right front, left rear and right rear
wheels in sequence.
The test results should be the same as those of left front
wheel.
3 Checking pin voltage When using multimeter: Normal Replace ABS hydraulic
of ABS hydraulic (a) Turn off the ignition switch governor with ECU.
governor with ECU (b) Remove connectors from ABS hydraulic governor with Abnormal Go to the next step.
ECU.
terminal and grounding terminal of solenoid valve.
Remarks:
If no jumper box is applied, the normal detection cannot
be ensured.
Normal value: U=9.3～16.9V
4 Checking connecting (a) Check if 25A fuse is normal. Normal Go to the next step.
wires, connectors and (b) Check the charging system, such as generator/battery and Abnormal Replace or repair
40A fuse its connecting wire. connecting
(c) Ensure the grounding terminal is well grounded. wire/connector or fuse.
5 Final inspection. (a) Clear DTC.
(b) ABS and EBD warning lamps shall go out shortly after the ignition switch is turned on
(c) With the ignition switch turned on, C0121 DTC shall no longer appear after self-checking is
finished by system.
(d) Perform Step 2 in this procedure and the testing result is normal.
96

5. ABS brake lamp switch circuit fault: C0161
Brake lamp switch is a kind of normally open switch.
This switch shall be on with the brake pedal depressed, providing +12V signal voltage to brake lamp signal circuit
(+BLS).
ABS ECU shall monitor the brake lamp switch signal voltage to facilitate the determination of brake engagement time
and the detection of brake lamp switch circuit.
C0161 1. With ignition switch turned on 1. The brake pedal is detected to 1. Brake lamp switch
2. Battery voltage＞8V be depressed under the 2. Brake lamp switch
conditions below: circuit
3. Vehicle speed＞16Km/h
Vehicle speed＞40Km/h 3. Brake lamp switch
Acceleration＞8Km/h2 connector
2. The brake pedal is detected to 4. ABS ground
be released under the 5. ABS hydraulic
conditions below: governor with ECU
Vehicle speed＞24Km/h
Acceleration＞11.5Km/h2
Detection
S/N Operating Step Operation Next Step
Result
1 Checking brake lamp switch (a) Depress and release brake pedal to check brake lamp. Normal Go to the next step.
block With brake pedal depressed: Brake lamp shall be lit. Abnormal Go to Step 4
With brake pedal released: Brake lamp shall go out.
Remarks: Please ensure the brake lamp and its circuit
is normal when using this method to diagnose the
brake lamp switch.
(b) Check brake lamp switch based on data stream of
diagnostic instrument.
With brake pedal depressed: “Engagement” shall be
displayed on diagnostic instrument.
With brake pedal released: “Disengagement” shall be
displayed on diagnostic instrument.
2 Checking pin voltage of (a) Turn off the ignition switch. Normal Go to the next step.
ABS hydraulic governor (b) Remove connector from ABS hydraulic governor. Abnormal Replace ABS with
with ECU (Voltage of Pin
(c) Turn on the ignition switch. hydraulic governor.
30 corresponding to Pin
38) (d) Use multimeter to measure the voltage between brake
lamp switch terminal and grounding terminal.
With brake pedal depressed: Voltage＜2V→Brake
lamp shall be lit.
With brake pedal released: Voltage ＞ 4.5V→Brake
lamp shall go out.
3 Checking connecting wire Checking connecting wire and connector between brake lamp switch and ABS hydraulic
and connector (between governor for short circuit or open circuit.
brake lamp switch and ABS
hydraulic governor with
ECU)
4 Checking connecting wire Check the brake lamp switch circuit for short circuit or open circuit.
and connector (brake lamp
switch circuit)
5 Final inspection. Confirm that the fault shall no longer appear.
97

6. ABS ECU fault: C0550
ABS ECU, installed in ABS hydraulic governor with ECU, is the control center of ABS system. Programmable and
calibration data required by ABS operation are stored in ROM of ABS ECU. ABS ECU shall perform self-checking
continuously to monitor any fault in ABS system.
C0550 With ignition switch turned on Fault is detected immediately. 1. ABS hydraulic
With engine running and under Fault is detected immediately. governor with ECU.
all conditions It is detected that wheel speed sensor 2. Circuit.
Under all conditions power circuit is short to Uz.
Stop operation � Brake system shall enter the conventional braking mode.
S/N Operating Step Operation Detection Result Next Step
1 ABS hydraulic (a) Turn off the ignition switch; Normal Check based on
governor with ECU (b) Turn on the ignition switch without brake pedal other DTC.
under stationary state depressed; Abnormal Go to the next step.
of vehicle
(c) Check if ABS and EBD warning lamps are lit and when
necessary use diagnostic instrument to read DTC.
Normal state: ABS/EBD warning lamp shall go out
without current DTC.
2 Detection of system (a) Check all ground circuit of ABS hydraulic governor Yes Go to Step 4
circuit with ECU for excessive resistance or open circuit.
No Go to the next step.
(b) Check ABS fuse and when necessary replace it.
(c) Check ABS battery power supply voltage circuit for
excessive resistance, open circuit or short to ground.
(d) Check if the wheel speed sensor power line is short to
main power line.
(e) Check for any electromagnetic interference.
3 Replacement of ABS Replace the ABS hydraulic governor with ECU as a whole.
hydraulic governor
with ECU.
4 Conduct final (a) Clear DTC.
inspection to confirm (b) With ignition switch turned on, ABS has no DTC memory.
the fault is removed.
98

7. Voltage out of range: C0800
ABS ECU monitors the battery power supply voltage supplied to ABS ECU through Uz. If the voltage is out of the
specified range, the following faults shall occur:
Too low voltage supplied to ABS ECU may lead to abnormal operation of ABS system.
Too high voltage supplied to ABS ECU may lead to damage of ABS components.
Normal operating voltage of system: 9.3V～16.9V under operation of reflux pump motor
DTC Detection Set Condition Possible Faulty Areas
Condition
C0800 With ignition 1. If the voltage is below 9.6V with no operation 1. Overdischarge or damage of
switch turned of ABS, or below 9.3V with operation of ABS, battery.
on this DTC shall be recorded and ABS shall be 2. Fault of voltage regulator
turned off by software. (charging system).
2. If voltage below 7.6V or above 16.9V is 3. Fault of fuse or connector,
continuously monitored, this DTC shall be imperfect body grounding, or
recorded and ABS and EBD shall be turned off contact resistance.
by hardware.
Normal operation of reflux pump motor and solenoid Brake system shall enter the conventional braking
valve cannot be ensured. mode.
ABS and EBD warning lamps shall be lit.
If the voltage is far below 9.6V The system shall be converted to EBD emergency
control mode.
ABS warning lamp shall be lit.
If the voltage is far above 7.6V Brake system shall enter the conventional braking
mode.
ABS and EBD warning lamps shall be lit.
Voltage Uz is above 9.8V after a period of too low System shall retreat from the EBD emergency
voltage. operation mode.
Normal operation of ABS shall recover.
99

Result
1 Checking fuse (a) Check if the 10A, 25A and 40A fuses for power supply Yes Go to the next step.
ECU of ABS operate normally.
No Check fuse circuit.
Normal: Continuity
2 Using multimeter to (a) Check battery voltage under various conditions. Yes Go to the next step.
check battery voltage ① Idling: with headlamp turned on, A/C turned to the No Check charging
coldest mode/blower turned to the maximum speed system.
mode
② Parking: With all electrical equipments turned off,
rotation speed increased to 3500rpm and hold on for 30s
③ During application of service brake
Normal value: 10～16.9V
3 Using diagnostic (a) Connect the diagnostic instrument to read battery Yes Intermittent fault, go
instrument to read voltage under various conditions. to Step 5
battery voltage ① Idling: with headlamp turned on, A/C turned to the No Go to the next step.
coldest mode/blower turned to the maximum speed
mode
② Parking: With all electrical equipments turned off,
rotation speed increased to 3500rpm and hold on for 30s
③ During application of service brake
Normal value: 10～16.9V
4 Checking voltage of (a) Turn off the ignition switch. Normal Go to the next step.
ABS power line and (b) Remove connectors from ABS hydraulic governor with Abnormal Check and repair
ground cable ECU. circuit.
(c) With ignition switch turned on, use multimeter to
measure if driving voltage of each solenoid valve, motor
or ECU is between 9.3V～16.9V.
5 Fault reconfirmation (a) Simulate fault for reconfirmation. Normal Go to the next step.
(b) Read DTC. Abnormal Replace the ABS
Normal state: No DTC memory hydraulic governor
with ECU.
6 Intermittent fault (a) If it is intermittent fault, please return the vehicle to customer, for the fault cannot be located at that
moment.
(b) Ask the customer to record relevant data once the same fault occurs:
· Vehicle speed
· With/without brake pedal depressed
· Weather
· Road condition and etc.
7 Conduct final (a) Clear DTC
inspection to confirm (b) With ignition switch turned on, ABS has no DTC memory.
the fault is removed.
100

ABS system
1. Remove the negative cable of battery.
2. Drain the brake fluid in the hydraulic brake system

completely.
3. Loosen the oil pipe of brake master cylinder.
4. Remove the ABS connector.
5. Remove the brake fluid pipe from ABS hydraulic

assembly. Wrap the pipe with plastic bag to avoid
dirt. Use clean water to wash the surface that
having brake fluid on it.
6. Remove the mounting bolts from ABS hydraulic
assembly and then remove the assembly.
101

Installation
1. Clean the surface of ABS hydraulic assembly and
fix the assembly onto bracket with bolts.
2. Install the brake pipe onto the ABS hydraulic
assembly.
Attention:
As for the installation of aluminum alloy parts, the
brake pipe should be fit in place smoothly by
correct alignment; otherwise, the original part
bodies may be damaged easily.
3. Insert the ABS plug into relevant socket.

Attention:
The ABS plug should be installed in carefully and
smoothly instead of violently.
4. Install and fasten the oil pipe of brake master

cylinder.
5. Fill the reservoir of master cylinder with brake
fluid.
6. Two persons shall work together to bleed the air in
brake line until pure brake fluid is drained out. Air
bleeding order: left rear, right front, right rear and
left front wheels.
102

Wheel speed sensor
3. Disconnect the plug of wheel speed sensor and

remove the harness fixture of sensor.
4. Remove the mounting bolts from wheel speed
sensor and then remove the sensor.
Installation
1. Insert the sensor into relevant hole and fix it with
bolt.
2. Fix the sensor harness and install the harness onto
the plug.
103

TR Transmission Shaft
Transmission Shaft
Subject Page
Explosive View of Transmission Shaft.................................................................................................................. 106
Introduction of Transmission Shaft........................................................................................................................106
Inspection and Confirmation..................................................................................................................................107
Fault Symptom Table............................................................................................................................................. 108
Removal of Transmission shaft................................................................................................................................. 109
Installation of Transmission shaft................................................................................................................................ 110
- 105 -

Introduction
Transmission shaft is a kind of device that is applied to joint transmission and rear axle together and to transmit power
from transmission to rear axle. Transmission shaft, made of hollow steel tube, is equipped with intermediate support to
reduce resonance during power transmission. Transmission shaft adopts constant velocity universal joints that are
maintainable. Balance weights are equipped for transmission shaft in order to ensure stable power transmission.
- 106 -

Inspection and Confirmation:
1. Inspection of flange
Check flange between transmission and transmission shaft. Check flange screw hole for any deformation or
crack. Check flange internal spline for tooth looseness, missing or damage. If there are more than two teeth is
damaged, please replace the flange assembly.
2. Maintenance and repair of universal joint
Maintenance of universal joint: Use grease nipple that is aligned to the oil filler of universal joint to add grease
until clean grease is extruded out.
Repair of universal joint: Remove universal joint and rotate it to check for any sticking, obvious clearance,
deformation or fracture. Replace the universal joint accordingly.
3. Inspection of intermediate support
Inspection of intermediate support: Use crow bar to pry up the rubber part of intermediate support and check
rubber part for any wear, deformation or crack. Hold and shake the transmission shaft by hand to check for
excessive clearance of intermediate support. If any, please replace the support.
- 107 -

Fault Diagnosis Procedures for Transmission Shaft
Vibration
Check radial runout

of shaft
Normal Abnormal
Check shaft balance Replace
Normal Unbalance
Adjust
Check rear housing bush of

transmission
Normal Worn
Replace
Check universal joint sliding york

spline shaft
Normal Stuck
Replace
- 108 -

Transmission shaft
Note:
Mark properly in pair on transmission shaft front
flange and transmission flange.
2. Remove transmission shaft front flange from
transmission flange.
3. Loosen transmission shaft intermediate bearing.
4. Remove transmission shaft rear flange from rear

axle flange.
� Mark properly in pair on transmission shaft
rear flange and rear axle flange.
� Remove four mounting bolts from
transmission shaft.
- 109 -

Transmission shaft
Installation
Note:
Have marks properly aligned.
1. Install the transmission shaft front flange onto
transmission.
2. Install transmission shaft intermediate support onto the

intermediate support seat located on body bottom plate.
Note:
Don’t tighten bolt for the moment to facilitate
adjustment.
3. Install transmission shaft rear flange with rear axle

flange.
� Have two marks on flanges properly aligned.
� Use new mounting bolts for transmission shaft.
4. Tighten mounting bolts for transmission shaft

intermediate bearing after alignment of transmission
shaft.
- 110 -

FAX Front Suspension
Front Suspension
Subject Page
Front Suspension.....................................................................................................................................................112
Inspection and Confirmation...................................................................................................................................114
Fault symptom Table...............................................................................................................................................115
Removal and Installation of Subframe.........................................................................................................................116
Specification
Specification.................................................................................................................................................................131
Tightening Torques................................................................................................................................................. 131
- 111 -

Front Suspension
This front axle is a steering axle at front of the vehicle, helical spring assembly and mounting cushion for
mainly consisting of the front overhang subframe helical spring, etc., realizing vehicle steering via vehicle
assembly, lower swing arm assembly, front anti-roll bar steering gear by pushing steering knuckle that may
link assembly, steering knuckle with brake assembly, make wheels to deflect with certain angle.
- 112 -

SN Name Quantity Remarks

1 Front helical spring assembly 2
2 Mounting cushion for front helical spring 2
3 Left lower swing arm weld assembly 1
4 Right lower swing arm weld assembly 1
5 Lower swing arm bushing assembly 2
6 Lower swing arm ball pin assembly 2
7 Taper washer(16X61X3) 2
8 Front shock absorber assembly 2
9 Brake hose mounting flat spring nut 2
10 Front anti-roll bar assembly 1
11 Front anti-roll bar mounting bushing 2
12 Front anti-roll bar mounting bracket 2
13 Front anti-roll bar link assembly 2
14 Type 1 all-metal hexagon lock nut (thickness 2
15.5)
15 Hexagon headed bolt 6
16 All-metal hexagon flange face lock nut 12
17 Hexagon flange face lock nut (length of screw 2
thread is 57)
18 Type 1 all-metal hexagon lock nut 2
19 Hexagon headed bolt (length of screw thread is 2 Grade 10.9
78)
20 All-metal hexagon flange face lock nut 2
21 Hexagon headed bolt and flat washer assembly 8
22 Hexagon lobular socket pan head screw 2
113 -
-113

Use and Maintenance
1. Inspect the wear condition of brake pad. After the 2. In Level III maintenance, the front suspension may
first 40000km or 24-month driving of the vehicle, be removed for cleaning of interiors of the steering
inspect the wear condition of friction linings and knuckle with bushing and wheel hub as well as
measure the thickness of the most worn part of bearings. Please tighten bolts and nuts of each
brake caliper friction linings with the standard component with specified torques.
value of 18mm and limit value of 17mm.When the 3. Precautions:
thickness of brake lining is lower than the limit The vehicle loading should not exceed the max.
value, the brake lining should be replaced. loading weight.

Inspection and Maintenance of Front Suspension
1. Special measuring apparatuses and tools should be knuckle)
applied in part inspection. For damaged parts, carry � Abnormal noise（for bearings）
out maintenance or replacement according to � Looseness （in bolts of anti-roll bar and lower
relevant requirements. In the case of one of the swing arm）
matching parts is worn and its clearance exceeds the
� Discoloration or seizure（for steering knuckle
specified one, please replace this worn part together
with its matching part according to relevant ball joint etc.）
requirements. Measure the starting torque of the � Rusting
front wheel hub at wheel bolts, it should be 17 ～ � Deterioration（for brake lining）
25N.m. 4. For all rubber parts like oil seals, gaskets,
2. From the point of view of preventive maintenance, bushings,etc., they should be replaced with new
some parts which are still in maintenance or within ones after removal. For standard parts like
wear limit should be replaced before exceeding the pre-riveted nuts and bolts with rubber, they are not
limit. reusable.
3. Carry out appearance inspections of all parts with 5. Abnormal sound is a kind of noise, mainly
specified visual method or red pigment penetration appearing as abnormal sounds like clash or harsh
method. In the case of following abnormalities in screaming,etc. under different service conditions
part outside surfaces, carry out maintenance or (like vehicle speed or road conditions). Some of
replacement for relevant parts according to these sounds may fade out with running-in while
corresponding requirements: some may increase gradually due to improper
Abnormalities adjustment in assembling. On condition that the part
� Failure or fatigue (in helical spring) is qualified, adjustment of part assembly clearance
� Bending deformation (generally in steering may be taken as solution.
- 114 -

Fault Diagnosis
Common Fault Diagnosis Table
Fault Symptom Possible Cause of fault Troubleshooting
No power steering Repair or replace
Arduous steering
Excessively low tire pressure Carry out tire inflation
Steering exceeding the lower swing arm ball joint Replace
Fault in the shock absorber Repair or replace
Poor return Wear or damage in the front anti-roll bar Replace
Wear or damage in the helical spring Replace
Wear in the lower swing arm bushing Replace
Abnormal tire wear Excessively low or high tire pressure Adjust the tire pressure
Insufficient steering resistance of the lower swing arm Replace
Vehicle deviation
ball joint connection
Looseness or wear in the lower swing arm bushing Replace
Unilateral vehicle deviation ball joint connection
Bending of the lower swing arm Replace
ball joint connection
Looseness or wear in the lower swing arm bushing Replace
Steering wheel fight
Wear or damage in the front anti-roll bar Replace
Looseness in mounting screws of the steering gear Repair
Vehicle body welding failure Repair
Vehicle sinkage Wear or damage in the helical spring Replace
115 -
-115

Removal and Installation of Subframe
Removal
2. Place the steering wheel in the center and lock it up

in the position of straight-ahead.
3. Remove track bolts for fixing the steering column

onto the cross shaft. Rotate clamped plates to make
them separated.
4. Loosen front wheel nuts and lift the vehicle.
5. Remove the front wheel.
- 116 -

Removal and Installation of Subframe (Continued)
Note:
Mounting bolts on the top of the brake caliper
can not be loosened completely until the
complete removal of the brake caliper has been
done.
Hang the brake caliper up to avoid brake hose
damage.
8. Remove cotter pin and castle nuts for fixing the

steering tie rod onto the steering knuckle. (Discard
the removed cotter pin)
Note:
In the separation of the steering tie rod end from
the steering knuckle, sealing protection should be
carried out for the ball joint at any time.
9. Remove the ball joint of the steering tie rod from
the steering knuckle.
10. Remove the front anti-roll bar link from the lower
swing arm.
11. Support the lower swing arm assembly.
117 -
-117

12. Remove mounting nuts of the shock absorber from
the cab.
� Remove the plastic cap.
� Remove nuts and washers for fixing the piston
rod with an L-shaped wrench.
� Remove the disc washer.
Caution:
Pay attention not to damage the lower swing
arm ball joint for connecting the shock absorber
and the front suspension.
13. Lay down the lower swing arm assembly and
remove the helical spring.
14. Support the cross rail.
15. Remove the cross rail assembly.

� ① Remove the two bracket nuts and bolts
from the front suspension.
� ② Remove the four cross rail bolts.
Installation
1. Reinstall the cross rail assembly.
� Lift the cross rail, install the two bracket nuts
and bolts of the subframe relaxedly.
� Reinstall the four cross rail bolts.
� Tighten bracket nuts and bolts of the front
1 suspension.
2
- 118 -

2. Reinstall the helical spring.
Ensure following operations:
� Correctly prevent the shock insulator from
opening.
� Correctly combine the shock insulator
connector.
� Place the lower end of the helical spring into
the deepest place of the lower swing arm
groove.
3. Remove the shock absorber.
4. Lift the lower swing arm assembly and install the
shock absorber.
5. Fix the shock absorber from the cab.

� Reinstall the disc washer.
� Support nuts and washers of the piston rod
with the L-shaped wrench.
� Install nut caps.
6. Reinstall the wheel hub assembly.

7. Reconnect the brake hose onto the shock absorber.
8. Install each end of the steering tie rod onto the

steering knuckle.
Fix castle nuts with a new cotter pin.
Caution:
The convex side of the washer at the joint of the
front anti-roll bar should face the rubber shaft
sleeve.
9. At the mounting position of the front anti-roll bar
link, connect it with the lower swing arm.
Caution:
Make sure that the steering wheel is in
straight-ahead position.
10. Then install tires and lower the vehicle.
11. Align clamped plates of the cross shaft with the
steering column and fix them with a new bolt.
12. Reconnect the negative cable of battery.
119 -
-119

Disassembly and Assembly of Subframe
Disassembly
1. Remove the two mounting bolts at the mounting
position of the front anti-roll bar.
2. Remove the steering gear box.
3. Remove the lower swing arm assembly.

� Remove connecting bolts between the lower
swing arm and the subframe.
� Remove feedthrough bolts and nuts between
the lower swing arm and the subframe.
4. Remove the compression travel stop block.
- 120 -

Assembly
1. Install the compression travel stop block.
2. Reinstall the lower swing arm assembly.

Install feedthrough bolts and nuts between the
lower swing arm and the cross rail from the rear
side.
3. Align and reinstall the lower swing arm assembly.

� Tighten bolts between the front suspension
and the subframe.
� Insert feedthrough bolts into the cross rail,
install and then tighten them.
121 -
-121

Removal and Installation (Continued)
4. Reinstall the steering gear box.
Make sure to install mounting bolts in the direction
of underside of the cross rail.
Caution:
Make sure that the positioning shaft sleeves of the
front anti-roll bar are in the inner side of the rubber
space ring, with their opening marks backward.
5. Install the two mounting bolts of the front anti-roll
bar.
- 122 -

Removal and Installation of Lower Swing Arm
Removal
1. Loosen wheel nuts, lift the vehicle and remove
wheels.
2. Loosen mounting nuts of the front lower swing

arm.
Note:
In the process of steering tie rod removal from the
steering knuckle, wrap up ball seals with cloth as
protection for them.
3. Remove the steering tie rod end ball joint from the
steering knuckle.
4. Support the lower swing arm.
5. At the mounting position, disconnect the front

anti-roll bar link from the lower swing arm.
123 -
-123

Removal and Installation of Lower Swing Arm (Continued)
6. Remove the ball joint from the lower swing arm.
7. Lower the lower swing arm and remove the helical
spring.
8. Remove the lower swing arm.

� Remove nuts and bolts between the lower
swing arm and the cross rail.
� Remove nuts and bolts between the lower
swing arm and the front suspension.
Installation
1. Reinstall the lower swing arm.
� Install the disc washer.
� Install nuts and bolts between the lower swing
arm and the front suspension.
� Install nuts and bolts between the lower swing
arm and the cross rail.

Ensure following operations:
� Correctly place the positioning opening of the
gasket.
� Correctly combine the gasket positioning lug.
� The lower end of the spring is located at the
groove of the lower swing arm
3. Lift the lower swing arm.
- 124 -

Removal and Installation of Lower Swing Arm (Continued)
Caution:
When install the ball joint into the lower swing
arm, the mounting of the front axle is not allowed
to exceed the specified value to avoid damage of
the lower swing arm ball joint dust cover.
4. Reinstall the ball joint into the lower swing arm.
5. Reinstall the steering tie rod end onto the steering

knuckle.
6. Reconnect the front anti-roll bar link with the lower

swing arm.
7. Install wheels and lower the vehicle.

8. Tighten mounting nuts of the lower swing arm.
� Tighten nuts and bolts between the lower
swing arm and the cross rail.
� Tighten nuts and bolts between the lower
swing arm and the front suspension
125 -
-125

Removal and Installation of Helical Spring
Removal
wheels.
2. Remove the fixed cotter pin and castle nuts

between the steering tie rod end and the steering
knuckle.
Note:
In the process of steering tie rod removal from the
steering knuckle, wrap up ball seals with cloth as
protection for them.
3. Remove the steering tie rod ball joint from the
steering knuckle.
5. At the mounting position, remove the front anti-roll

bar link from the lower swing arm.
- 126 -

Caution:
To avoid lower swing arm ball joint damage, tie the
top of the lower swing arm together with the cross
swing arm.
6. Remove the shock absorber form the steering
knuckle.
7. Lower the lower swing arm assembly and remove
the helical spring
8. Remove the gasket from the top of the spring.
Installation
Ensure flowing operations:
� Correctly place the positioning opening of the
gasket.
� Correctly combine the gasket positioning lug.
� The lower end of the spring is located at the
groove of the lower swing arm.
2. Reinstall the shock absorber onto the steering

knuckle.
Loosen the steering knuckle, lift the lower swing
arm and align it with the shock absorber.
3. Retighten the steering tie rod with the steering

knuckle.
Fix castle nuts with new cotter pins.
127 -
-127

4. Connect the steering tie rod link with the lower
swing arm.
- 128 -

Removal and Installation of Front Shock Absorber
Removal
wheels.
4. Support the wheel hub assembly.
5. Remove the shock absorber from the cab.

� Remove the cap.
� Remove nuts and washers for fastening the
central shaft with an L-shaped allen wrench.
6. Remove the shock absorber form the steering

knuckle.
Installation
7. Install the shock absorber onto the steering
knuckle.
8. Apply some soap solution onto the inner side of the
shock insulator and top of the shock absorber.
9. Install the shock absorber in place.
129 -
-129

Removal and Installation of Front Shock Absorber
10. Fix the shock absorber firmly from the cab.
� Reinstall the disc washer.
� Install nuts and washers for fastening the
central shaft with an L-shaped allen wrench.
� Install the cap.
11. Reinstall the brake hose onto the shock absorber.
- 130 -

Specification
1. List of Main Tightening Torques
Name of Bolt（Nut） Tightening Torque (N.m)
Tightening torque for ball pin nut 220～250
Connecting rod nut 20～30
Ball pin mounting bolt 35～75
Front anti-roll bar clamping bolt 16～26
Front nut of the lower swing arm 180～245
Rear nut of the lower swing arm 180～245
2. List of Front Suspension Wearing Parts
Name Quantity
Lower swing arm bushing assembly 2
Front cross rail bushing assembly 2
Front wheel hub inner and outer bearings 2 sets for each
Left and right friction linings 2 pieces for each
3. Maintenance Parameter Table of Front Suspension
Item Major Parameter Remarks
Axle load 1.54t
Wheel base 1760mm
Center distance of helical spring 1170mm
Brake type Disc brake
Brake specification R135mm,cylinder boreΦ45
Max.tolerance between the left
Camber angle of front wheel 0.75±1°
and right 1.25°
Caster angle of kingpin 1.5±1.5°
and right 1°
Inclination angle of kingpin 12.75°±1°
and right 1.25°
Toe-in 2～4mm
Wheel bolt 6-M16X1.5
Standard pitch diameter of hub and wheel bolt Φ180mm
131 -
-131

RAX Rear Axle
Rear Axle
Subject Page
Rear axle...................................................................................................................................................................... 134
Explosive View of Rear Axle..................................................................................................................................134
Introduction of Rear Axle....................................................................................................................................... 135
Rear axle...................................................................................................................................................................... 136
Inspection and Confirmation.................................................................................................................................. 137
Fault symptom Table.............................................................................................................................................. 140
Rear axle...................................................................................................................................................................... 141
Differential..............................................................................................................................................................141
Specification
Specification.................................................................................................................................................................148
Tightening torque....................................................................................................................................................148
-133-

RAX Rear Axle
Rear axle
Rear axles for two-wheel drive vehicles with dependant cylinder roller bearing for bearing radial force only. The
rear suspensions are adopted, mainly composed of final driven gear is fixed on the differential left housing by
drive, differential and axle housing, which are the final using a set of bolts.
stage transmission mechanism in vehicle power train. Differential, for realizing different rotation speed of left
The final drive, consisting of driving gear and driven and right wheels, is mainly composed of left and right
gear, functions for changing driving direction, reducing housings of differential, spider, four planetary gears and
speed and increasing torque. Driving gear is connected two differential gears.
with universal joint assembly of propeller shaft through One end of rear axle shaft is connected with differential
driving gear flange at one end of spline, with its middle gear with spline and the flange at the other end is
part supported by two conical bearings installed connected with wheel hub assembly with brake drum by
reversely for bearing axial force and tangential force and using bolt.
the small end face journal of driving gear installed on
Rear Axle Exploded View

2400010R002
-134-

RAX Rear Axle
1. Driving gear flange nut 2. Driving gear flange flat 3. Driving gear flange 4 Flange dust cover
gasket
5 Driving gear oil seal 6 Tapered roller bearing 7 Resilient spacer 8 Driving gear
9 Driving gear adjusting 10 Tapered roller bearing 11 Final drive housing 12 I-type hexagon nut
washer
13 Spring washer 14 Final drive housing bolt 15 Final drive housing 16 Driven gear bolt
(Single end) bolt (Stud)
17 Differential bearing 18 Differential bearing 19 Differential housing 20 Differential gear thrust
adjusting washer (Right) washer
21 Differential gear 22 Planetary gear shaft 23 Planetary gear 24 Driven gear
25 Differential housing (Left) 26 Differential housing bolt 27 Heavy spring washer 28 Bearing cap
29 Heavy spring washer 30 Bearing cap bolt 31 Rear axle housing 32 Normally-closed vent
assembly plug
33 Oil filler plug 34 Oil filler plug sealing 35 Hexagon plug with 36 Drain plug sealing washer
washer magnetic core
37 Oil catcher 38 Axle shaft 39 Axle shaft oil seal 40 Lock washer
41 Nut and bolt components 42 Bearing lock nut 43 Rear brake drum 44 Rear hub outer bearing
45 Rear hub 46 Rear hub inner bearing 47 Rear hub inner oil 48 Brake assembly
seal (Left/Right)
49 Axle shaft bolt 50 Tapered sleeve 51 Spring washer 52 I-type hexagon nut with
fine thread
53 Tire bolt (Left/Right) 54 Outer bolt of tire 55 Cross recessed 56 Brake bottom plate bolt
(Left/Right) countersunk head
screw
57 Spring washer 58 I-type hexagon nut with
fine thread
-135-

RAX Rear Axle
Application and maintenance
1. Hyperbolic gear is of strict lubrication requirement drained completely. No ordinary gear oil can be
and only the specified hyperbolic gear oil can be adopted. Change lube oil after running for
added instead of using ordinary gear oil or being 80000Km or 48 months and since then change oil
mixed with ordinary gear oil; otherwise, early wear every 50000Km of running. Check oil quality
of tooth surface shall be caused, resulting in every four times of Stage-II maintenance; in case
excessive wear of gear. of any color change, lean, or other kinds of
2. As for bevel gear of rear axle final drive that is deterioration, please change with new oil.
selected and adjusted before delivery, removal and � Check the wear condition of brake lining and brake
adjustment are unnecessary under ordinary drum. After new vehicle running for 40000Km or
condition but are necessary in case of gear wear, using 24 months, check the wear condition of brake
backlash over the specified data or excessive end lining and brake drum, measure the thickness of
play of bearing, or parts damaged in need of brake lining worn badly (standard value: 4.6mm,
replacement. limit value: 1.0mm) . When the thickness of brake
3. Clear earth and dust on the rear axle housing vent lining is below the limit value, please replace the
plug frequently. Remove and clean it during brake lining.
Stage-I maintenance in order to ensure air passage 4. During Stage-III maintenance, you should remove
unobstructed, because the air passage obstruction rear axle, clean internal cavity and final drive
shall lead to pressure increase inside the rear axle assembly, and tighten every bolt and nut to the
housing, giving rise to oil leak at driving gear oil specified torque.
seal and joint position. Please check the lube oil Precautions:
level inside housing also. � Weight loaded on vehicle should be no more than
� Please change lube oil during the first Stage-II the maximum allowable load.
maintenance of new vehicle. Change the lube oil � During running, please don’t release the clutch
for rear axle housing after running for 40000Km or abruptly to improve barrier overtaking ability of
24 months. Drain the gear oil out of rear axle vehicle; otherwise, the gears may be damaged due
housing, add kerosene for cleaning, add new lube to impact.
oil of Grade (GL-5) 85W/90 after the kerosene is
-136-

RAX Rear Axle
Inspection and maintenance
Inspection and maintenance for rear axle the flange clockwise to the end and mark in pair
1. Check parts by using special measuring apparatus properly on the flange dust cover and final drive
or tools. housing; turn the flange counterclockwise to the end to
Determine if the part can be used or not on the measure the distance between two marks (limit
basis of maintenance standard. Repair or replace clearance: 6mm) ; if the clearance is beyond limit, it is
damaged parts as required. If one part damaged in a indicated excessive gear clearance of rear axle, so please
pair of parts makes the clearance over the specified make proper adjustment after removal.
limit, please replace this part or replace it together Abnormal noise is a kind of noise, mainly referring to
with its matched part accordingly. impact sound or shrieking occurs under different
2. In order to prevent failure, please replace those conditions (such as speed, road condition), some of
parts still within but nearly approaching to the which shall disappear gradually after running-in while
repair or wear limit before the limit is exceeded. some shall increase constantly. The latter situation is
3. Check carefully the appearance of each part by mainly caused by improper assembly or adjustment. If
visual inspection or red pigment osmosis method. the parts are normal, the abnormal noise can generally
In case of any abnormality listed below existed on be eliminated by adjusting the assembly clearance of
the outer surface, please repair or replace relevant parts.
parts accordingly. 6. Brake failed to return means the brake is locked
� Uneven wear and cannot be applied again after braking, which
� Eccentric wear can be solved by adjusting the brake assembly
� Scratch adjusting clearance.
� Crack
� Malformation Installation and adjustment of rear axle assembly
� Failure or weakening (of spring) 1. Install the wheel hub assembly with brake drum in
� Bending deformation the reverse order of removal, during which the
� Abnormal noise (of bearing) adjustment listed below should be performed:
� Looseness Adjustment of rear hub bearing clearance:
� Color change or sticking Tighten the bearing nut until the brake drum cannot
� Deterioration (of brake lining) or hardly move, loosen the bearing nut a little by
4. All rubber parts, such as O-rings, oil seals, washers 1/6 ～ 1/8 circle and rotate the brake drum; the
and etc. should be discarded after removal instead tangential force measured at tire bolt without
of being applied again. contact between brake lining and brake drum
5. In case of abnormal noise or vibration in drive should be 2.98 ～ 4.97 N.m or the brake drum can
system, please measure the total clearance of rear be rotated by hand freely.
axle and then determine whether to remove final 2. Adjustment of rear brake clearance:
drive assembly or not. This brake is servo brake whose brake clearance is
Park the vehicle on flat ground with transmission and adjusted automatically instead of manually.
transfer case placed at neutral position; have the vehicle Please observe the above mentioned procedures
jacked up after the parking brake lever is applied. Turn and requirements to perform actual maintenance.
-137-

RAX Rear Axle
Installation and adjustment of rear axle assembly
Please make adjustment based on the flowing bearing. The friction torque at starting should
requirements after the final drive assembly is installed: be 1.764 ～ 2.058N.m. No axial runout of
1. Preloading of driving gear inner/outer bearing: driven gear occurs after the adjustment.
� During the assembly of final drive, the tapered � Adjustment of differential gear clearance:
roller bearing should be of certain preload, Measure the differential gear backlash at the
which means to eliminate the bearing planetary gear with dial indicator.
clearance and also apply certain preload, Attention: Measure at more than three points.
aiming to reduce the axial displacement Standard value: 0 ～ 0.15mm; limit value:
caused by axial force generated in the course 0.3mm.
of bevel gearing and improve the bearing 3. Adjustment of driving/driven gear backlash and
rigidity of axle and thus to ensure normal meshing trail
meshing of bevel gear pair. However, please � Adjustment of driving/driven gear backlash:
avoid excessive preloading, for it shall result Please refer to table for normal meshing
in low drive efficiency and acceleration of clearance and backlash of driving and driven
bearing wear. gears. During the adjustment of backlash,
� Adjustment of driving gear bearing preload: perform measurement at four positions evenly
Install the driving gear oil seal with the distributed along the periphery of driven gear.
tightening torque of driving gear flange nut The measuring head of dial indicator should
and ensure proper driving gear bearing be vertical to the surface of measured points.
preload when the driving gear is not meshed � Adjustment of driving/driven gear meshing
with driven gear. Add or reduce adjusting trail:
washers of driving gear bearing between inner Apply red lead powder onto the driving gear
and outer bearings of driving gear to realize teeth and then rotate the driving and driven
the preload adjustment. The preloading torque gears repeatedly, so there is red trail on both
shall increase with the reduction of adjusting working surfaces of driven gear. If the trail on
washers but decease with the adding of positive/reverse rotation working surface is
adjusting washers. . located at the medium tooth height nearer to
2. Adjustment of differential bearing preload: the small end as shown in the table below, the
� Adjustment of differential bearing: Adjust the meshing trail position should be adjusted
differential bearing to gain proper preload, through adjustment of driving gear adjusting
with 0.05～0.08mm interference on both sides. washer and differential bearing adjusting
Without the meshing between driving and washer.
driven gears, apply gear oil onto rotary part of
.
-138-

RAX Rear Axle
Adjustment of meshing marks:
Contact status of driven gear Causes Adjusting method A-Tooth surface contact area
working flank adjustment
B-Backlash adjustment
High driving gear, driven gear too 1. Driven gear away from driving gear
far
2. Driving gear close to driven gear to
obtain correct backlash (adding
washers)
Deflected
to addendum
High driving gear, driven gear too 1. Driven gear close to driving gear
close
2. Driving gear away from driven gear
to obtain correct backlash (reducing
washers)
Deflected to dedendum
High driven gear, driving gear too 1. Driven gear away from driving gear
close
2. Driving gear away from driven gear
to obtain correct backlash (reducing
washers)
Deflected to small end

High driven gear, driving gear too 1. Driven gear close to driving gear
far
2. Driving gear close to driven gear to
obtain correct backlash (adding
washers)
Deflected to big end
-139-

RAX Rear Axle
Troubleshooting
Fault Causes Solutions/Preventive Measures
Excessive preload for hub bearing Adjust the preload.
Bearing lack of lubricant or adoption of improper
Hub bearing sluggish Add or change grease.
grease
Bearing contaminated by dust Clean and add grease.
Poor camshaft lubrication or adjusting arm failed to
Hub bearing sluggish Add grease or correct faulty parts.
return
Return spring fracture or fatigue for brake shoe or
Wheel sticking Replace faulty parts.
air chamber
Improper differential gear clearance Replace washer or gear.
Excessive clearance between driving and driven
Replace washer or gear.
gears
Abnormal driving
Too small driving gear bearing preload Adjust preload.
sound
Abrasion or damage of differential gear, planetary
Correct or replace faulty parts.
gear, spider thrust washers and etc.
Too low oil level Add lube oil.
Wear, looseness or damage of oil seal Replace oil seal.
Looseness of final drive fastening bolt or damage of
Tighten bolt or reapply sealant.
sealant
Lube oil leak Looseness of bearing support fastening bolt Tighten bolt to the specified torque.
Looseness of drain plug or damage of lining Tighten plug or replace lining.
Axle housing deformation due to overloading Correct or replace axle housing.
Vent plug blockage or damage Clean or replace vent plug.
Overheating or deterioration of brake lining Replace brake lining.
Improper fitting of friction lining Correct the fitting position of brake lining.
Insufficient brake force Depress the pedal slightly during running to drain
Brake drum flooded by water
water.
Grease on contact surface between brake lining or
Clear grease or replace brake lining.
brake drum
Rivet extruded due to wear of brake lining Replace brake lining.
Hardening or deterioration of brake lining surface Replace brake lining.
Uneven wear or insecure installation of brake drum Correct brake drum or tighten bolt.
Untight contact between brake shoe and brake lining Replace rivet.
Looseness of brake shoe fixed pin Tighten the lock screw of fixed pin.
Abnormal braking
noise Hub bearing wear Replace hub bearing.
Deformation of brake drum Replace brake drum.
Improper installation of brake shoe or damage of Tighten fixed pin lock screw or replace return
return spring spring.
Greasy or deteriorated brake lining Clean or replace brake lining.
Damage of brake bottom plate Replace brake bottom plate.
-140-

RAX Rear Axle
Rear axle
Removal of rear axle
1. Block the wheel front and back with anchor blocks.
2. Loosen outside wheel nut.
3. Jack up the rear axle.
Removal of axle shaft
1. Loosen axle shaft nut.
2. Remove axle shaft. If it is difficult to remove,
please use copper hammer to knock on the axle
shaft flange gently until it becomes loose.
Disassembly of wheel hub

1. Remove lock washer.
2. Remove hub bearing lock nut.

Attention:
Remove adjusting nut by using 7757 adjusting nut
wrench for hub bearing.
3. Remove hub assembly.

Attention:
Please apply the rear hub puller.
-141-

RAX Rear Axle
Rear axle
4. Remove axle shaft oil seal from the end of axle
shaft sleeve.
Note:
During assembly, apply lithium base grease onto
the outer ring of axle shaft oil seal and then press it
into rear hub.
5. Disassemble together with the inner ring of inner

bearing.
Note:
During assembly, oil seal bushing shall be pressed
into axle shaft sleeve by using special pressing die
after being heated.
6. Remove oil seal from hub assembly.

7. Remove outer ring of inner/outer bearing.
8. Remove brake drum.
-142-

RAX Rear Axle
Rear axle
Disassembly of axle housing and final drive
1) Drain gear oil from final drive.
2) Disconnect the connection between propeller
shaft and final drive.
3) Remove final drive assembly by using jack.
4) Remove hose, steel tube and electric wiring
harness.
5) Remove brake assembly.
6) Remove rear axle.
� Jack up the axle housing.
� Remove U-bolt and upper/lower back plates,
lower the jack and pull out the axle housing.
Disassembly of final drive assembly

1. Before assembly, measure and record backlash of
driving/driven gear.
Attention:
After adjustment, check gear meshing status.
2. Make assembly marks on bearing cap and housing.

The removed bearing cap and final drive housing
should be placed separately at left and right side in
pair, in order to avoid confusion.
3. Remove bearing cap and bolt.
-143-

RAX Rear Axle
Rear axle
4. Remove differential assembly.
5. Remove driving gear assembly by using puller and

remove adjusting washer at the same time.
Disassembly of differential assembly

1. Remove differential right housing.
2. Remove differential gear and bearing washer.
-144-

RAX Rear Axle
Rear axle
3. Measure and record planetary gear backlash.
Attention:
Please hold the planetary gear spider during
backlash measurement.
4. Remove planetary gear spider assembly and

remove planetary gear and bearing washer from
spider.
5. Take out the differential gear and its thrust washer.

6. Remove driven gear
7. Remove differential bearing from differential

housing.
-145-

RAX Rear Axle
Rear axle
Removal of driving gear
1. Remove driving gear flange nut.
2. Remove retaining ring for shaft and remove driving

gear guide bearing.
3. Extrude the driving gear out of bearing support.
4. Remove adjusting washer and bearing spacer.
-146-

RAX Rear Axle
Rear axle
5. Remove bearing from driving gear.
6. Remove oil seal from bearing support.

7. Remove inner and outer rings of bearing.
Inspection during removal

� Check driving gear flange for wear or damage.
� Check bearing for wear or color change.
� Check gear for crack.
� Check driving and driven gears for wear or
crack.
� Check differential gear, planetary gear and
planetary gear shaft for wear or crack.
� Check differential gear spline for wear or
damage.
-147-

RAX Rear Axle
Specification
1. Structure type of rear axle
Item Specification
Axle housing type Integral press-welding axle housing
Axle shaft support type Full-floating type
Reduction gear type Single-stage hyperboloid spiral bevel gear
Planetary gear type 2/4 planetary gear
2. Sealant and adhesive for rear axle
Item Specified Sealant and Adhesive
Fitting surface between rear axle housing assembly and final drive 1587 Silicon rubber
assembly
Driven gear bolt GY-340 Anaerobic adhesive
Differential housing bolt GY-340 Anaerobic adhesive
Final drive housing bolt Machinery sealant 605
Internal cavity of hub Multi-purpose lithium base grease
Parts installation of final drive assembly 10# Engine oil
3. Rear axle wear parts list
Name Qty.
Driving gear oil seal 1
Rear hub inner oil seal 2
Rear hub inner bearing 2
Rear hub outer bearing 2
Driving gear inner bearing 1
Driving gear outer bearing 1
Axle shaft oil seal 2
Driving gear nut 1
Differential bearing 2
Left/right friction Respectively 2 pieces for left and right
4. Rear axle maintenance parameter list
Item Value
Clearance between driving and driven gears 0.15～0.20
Clearance between planetary gear and differential gear 0～0.15 mm
Rotating torque of driving gear Without oil seal; apply gear oil 18～21Kgf.cm
Rear axle gear oil Hyperbolic gear oil: (GL-5) 85W/90; capacity: 2.5L
Oil applied onto outer lips and lips of axle shaft oil seal and driving ZL-2 GB5671-85, multi-purpose lithium base grease
gear oil seal
Clearance between brake lining and brake drum 0.4～0.7 mm
5. Main tightening torque list
Bolt (nut) name R101(N.m)
Driving gear nut 245～294
Bolt - driven gear 114.6～140.1
Differential housing bolt 68.6～88.2
Final drive housing bolt 65～93
Bearing cap bolt 132.3～171.5
Rear brake bottom plate nut 50～60
Axle shaft bolt 46-80
Small hexagon bolt for lock washer 6～12
Oil filler plug 44.1～53.9
Drain plug 44.1～53.9
-148-

RAX Rear Axle
Specification
Item Wear limit
Wear of rear axle leaf spring retainer location hole 1mm
Outer bearing journal radial runout of left/right axle shaft sleeve 0.1mm
Middle unprocessed surface of axle shaft Radial runout
1.5mm
End face runout of joint surface between hub and axle shaft flange 0.15mm
-149-

PS PowerSteering System
Steering System
Subject Page
Steering System............................................................................................................................................................152
Explosive View of Steering System........................................................................................................................152
Introduction of Steering System............................................................................................................................. 153
Steering System............................................................................................................................................................154
Operating Principle.................................................................................................................................................155
Inspection and confirmation................................................................................................................................... 156
Removal and Installation of Steering System........................................................................................................ 164
Removal and Installation of steering wheel........................................................................................................... 167
- 151 -

Steering System
Summary of Power Steering System
With the purpose of reducing the working intensity of drivers, the power steering system is firstly installed on
heavy-duty vehicles. However, with the increase of high speed demand and load on the steering wheel, the power
steering has become necessary and its application range has been widened. The advantages of the power steering
system are as follows:
It reduces the steering force applied on the steering wheel, especially in the case of static steering and low-speed
steering with large steering angle, the assistance is obvious.
It enhances the steering sensitivity.
It reduces the impact on the steering wheel in the case of ground kick back.
In the case of certain tire burst, it may prevent the wheel from swerve thus it improves driving safety.
It enables the steering wheels to bear larger loads and increase the freedom of general arrangement.
The power steering system consists of:
Vehicle power steering system consists of the power steering gear, power steering pump, power steering oil reservoir
and hydraulic line. The power steering gear is the actuator of the steering system hydraulic booster; the steering oil
pump associates with the engine, playing a role in hydraulic power supply for the system; the steering oil reservoir
possesses the function of storing, cooling and filtering of steering oil.
The structure of the power steering system is shown as follows:
Structural Drawing of Power Steering System
- 152 -

Instruction and Operation Intermediate Position:
In the case of vehicle straight running (without any
Structural Brief Introduction of Rack-and-pinion movement of the steering wheel), the hydraulic oil
Power Steering Gear: supplied by the oil pump goes into the oil inlet and then
The rack-and-pinion power steering gear consists of the goes through the pre-open clearance of the rotary valve.
control valve, mechanical steering gear and power At this moment, because there is no movement of the
steering pump. The control valve is a structurally rotary valve, the hydraulic oil returns to the oil reservoir
advanced and high sensitivity rotary valve and the and the oil pressures in the two working chambers of the
mechanical steering gear is a rack-and-pinion one. steering gear are the same that no assistance is
Control Valve: generated.
As is shown in the under figure: As a normally open In the Process of Steering:
rotary valve, the control valve consists of 1 torsion bar, In the case of steering wheel turning, there will be
2 input shaft, 3 valve pocket and other parts and inputs changes of the valve slot clearance between the valve
the hydraulic oil into two oil chambers on the left and pocket and the input shaft and there will be oil pressure
right through the pre-open clearance between differential formed by the hydraulic oil flowing into
abovementioned 2 input shaft and 3 valve pocket. these two working chambers. The oil pressure
Structural Drawing of Control Valve differential acts on the piston, pushes it to overcome the
steering resistance and generate displacement in order to
drive the steering link assembly to move and realize the
power-assisted steering.
In the Process of Return:
After the completion of steering, the force on the
steering wheel disappears. With the elastic force effect
of the torsion bar, the input shaft returns to a relatively
equilibrium position with the valve pocket and the oil
pressure differential between the two working chambers
of the steering gear disappears correspondingly. Then,
with the self-aligning torque effect of the front wheel,
the vehicle will return to the position of straight running
Connecting to the
Oil inlet right chamber Oil return until the position has been reached.
Road Feel Effect:
1. Torsion bar 2.Input shaft 3.Valve pocket The road feel effect is the ability to produce the steering
Mechanical Steering Part: feel. When there is a force applied on the steering wheel
The mechanical steering part is a rack-and-pinion one, by the driver, the force acts on the torsion bar of the
consisting of three parts as the gear shaft, rack piston steering gear simultaneously to make the torsion bar
assembly and steering link. twisted and deformed. However, the deformation
Power Steering Pump: depends on the steering resistance of wheels. With the
The power steering pump has a metal casing and the increase of the steering resistance, the deformation
internal rack piston of the pump divides it into two oil increases. Therefore, the driver may determine the
chambers on the left and right which are connected to changes of the steering resistance according to the force
two oil ports of the control valve. he applies on the steering wheel in order to realize the
Operating Principle “road feel “effect.
- 153 -

Power Steering Oil performance or durability.
1. Turn off the engine and make full lock turns of the
steering wheel to the left and right for several
times.
Notice:
Fill the power steering oil reservoir with oil and
turn the steering wheel to make the fluid level to or
above the MIN mark.
2. Start the engine, hold the steering wheel in the
locking point position for 3 seconds with the
engine idling and inspect for oil leakage.
3. Repeat Step 2) for several times with an interval of
3 seconds.
Notice:
When the steering wheel is in the locking point
Inspection of Fluid Level: position, do not hold it for more than 10 seconds to
1. The fluid level inspection should be carried out in avoid power steering pump damage.
the case of engine flameout. 4. Inspect the oil for bubbles and white foreign
2. Confirm that the fluid level is between MIN and matters.
MAX. 5. In the case of incomplete bubble or white foreign
Notice: matter elimination, please turn off the engine and
The fluid level should not exceed the maximum value repeat Step 2) ~3) after complete elimination.
(MAX mark) to avoid power steering oil leakage. 6. Turn off the engine and inspect the fluid level.
Recommended Oil: ATF-Ⅲ Notice:
3. Do not reuse the drained power steering oil. Inspect whether the fluid level of the power
Inspection for Steering Oil Leakage steering oil reservoir changes in the range of 5mm
Inspect the hydraulic joint for the existence of oil in the cases of engine operation and engine
leakage, cracks, damages, looseness and wears. flameout.
① Start the engine and make the oil temperature in the If the fluid level is not in the abovementioned
power steering oil reservoir to reach 50 ～ 80℃ range, repeat air bleeding for the system.
（122～176°F）with the engine idling. Change of Power Steering Oil:
1. Lift front wheels of the vehicle.
② Make full lock turns of the steering wheel to the
Notice:
left and right for several times. The front wheels should be fixed with a rigid
③ Hold the steering wheel in the locking point support.
position for 5 seconds and inspect carefully for the 2. Remove the oil return pipe from the power steering
oil leakage at the same time. oil reservoir and block the oil return port of the oil
④ In the case of oil leakage at the joint, loosen oil reservoir.
pipe nuts and retighten them with the specified
torque.
Tightening Torque: 57～63N.m
Notice:
Do not excessively tighten the joint nuts to avoid
Oil pipe nut
O-ring, gasket and joint damages. Fracture of the hose
⑤ In the case of oil leakage from the power steering
pump, please inspect the power steering pump.
Hose clamp
⑥ Inspect the steering gear dust boot for oil
agglutination.
Fracture of the oil pipe
Eyebolt
Air Bleeding of Hydraulic System
In the case of incomplete air bleeding, there may be the
following symptoms: 3. Connect the oil return pipe with a general oil pipe
� Bubbles in the power steering oil reservoir and drain the power steering oil to a vessel.
� Abnormal noise in the power steering pump 4. Start the engine, turn the steering wheel to the left
Notice: and right and drain the power steering oil.
In the operation of power steering pump, there may Notice:
be liquid noise which does not affect system It is necessary to refill the power steering oil and
- 154 -

keep the fluid level between MIN and MAX to Standard Value: <15mm
avoid dry friction of the power steering pump. ⑤ If the free play exceeds the standard value, remove
Excessively lone engine operation is not the steering gear and inspect the total torque of the
appropriate. In the case of decreasing fluid level of pinion.
the steering oil to MIN, it is necessary to turn off 3. Inspection of Intermediate Position
the engine. ① Confirm the proper installation of the steering gear
5. Connect the oil return pipe and refill with new assembly, steering column and steering wheel.
power steering oil to the standard fluid level. ② After wheel alignment, carry out intermediate
6. In the case of unsatisfactory power steering oil position inspection. Please refer to “Inspection of
quality, repeat Step 2) ~5). Front Wheel Alignment”.
Notice:
③ Park the vehicle straight-ahead and confirm that the
After oil change, carry out system air bleeding.
steering wheel is in the intermediate position.
Inspect Pulley Tension of the Power Steering
Pump: ④ Loosen lock nuts of the tie rod and carry out fine
Apply a force of 100N in the upward center of the tuning of the adjusting lever by turning it to the left
V-belt between the power steering pump and the and right to confirm whether the steering wheel is
engine crankshaft, the deflection of the belt shall in in the intermediate position.
the range of 11.7 ～ 15.3mm.In the case of 4. Inspection of Steering Wheel Static Steering Force
out-of-range deflection, loosen adjusting bolts of ① Park the vehicle on a horizontal and dry ground
the tension pulley and adjust the belt tension to and pull up the parking brake lever.
make it qualified. ② Start the engine.
Steering Wheel
On-car Inspection:
1. Inspection of Installation
① Inspect the installation of the steering gear
assembly, front suspension, axle and steering
column.
② Inspect the steering wheel for its movement
clearance in the cases of steering wheel upward and
downward, leftward and right ward and axial
movements.
③ Inspect mounting nuts and bolts of the steering
gear assembly for their looseness.
2. Inspection of Steering Wheel Free Play ③ Keep the engine operating and rise the temperature
① Turn the steering wheel to make the front wheels in of the power steering oil to its working
the straight-ahead position, start the engine and temperature.
then turn the steering wheel slightly to the left or Notice:
right until front wheel movement. At this moment, The tire pressure should in the range of its standard
measure the displacement of the steering wheel on value.
its outside edge. ④ Turn the steering wheel for 360° from its
Free Play of the Steering Wheel: 30mm
intermediate position, inspect the steering force of
② When the measured value exceeds the standard the steering wheel for its obvious fluctuation.
value, inspect the installation of every steering Steering Force of the Steering Wheel: < 34N
column connector and the steering mechanism. Permitted Fluctuation: < 5.9N
Carry out correction or part replacement according ⑤ If the steering force of the steering wheel exceeds
to actual situations.
the specified value, please inspect or adjust the
③ If the free play exceeds 30mm, turn off the engine, following items:
keep front wheels in straight running and apply a a. Damages of lower swing arm and ball joint of
force of 5N on the steering wheel circle for the the steering tie rod
inspection of the free play. The free play should not b. Gear preload of the steering gear and angular
exceed 10mm.If the free play exceeds 10mm, moment of the steering tie rod ball joint.
inspect whether the steering gear is qualified. c. Torque of the lower swing arm ball joint
④ If the free play is still a limit value, make the 5. Inspection of Steering Wheel Self-return
steering wheel to the intermediate position, apply a Notice:
force of 4±0.6N on the steering wheel circle and In the case of slow or quick turn, confirm whether
then inspect the free play. there are differences of the acting force and
- 155 -

returnability between the left and right side.
It is necessary to carry out this step on safe ground
and under safe traffic condition and pay attention to
your safety.
① Turn the steering wheel for 90°, drive with the
speed of 35Km/h, maintain the state for several
seconds and then release the steering wheel, the
returnability should be 70% at least.
Notice:
In the case of rapid turning of the steering wheel,
there may be a transient feel of “arduous”due to
insufficient oil supply during idling and it is not a
fault.
Notice:
When the steering angle of the inner wheel exceeds
the standard value, adjust the tie rod at this side to
rotate outward and the steering angle of the inner
wheel will increase; When the steering angle of the
outer wheel exceeds the standard value, adjust the
tie rod at this side to rotate outward and the
steering angle of the outer wheel will decrease.
Notice:
The adjustment of the toe-in is interrelated with
those of the wheel alignment parameters and the
steering angle.
7. Inspection of Ball Joint Dust Boot
6. Inspection of Front Wheel Steering Angle ① Press the dust boot with hand to inspect it for crack
① After the inspection of front wheel toe-in, inspect or damage.
the steering angle of the front wheel. Place the ② In the case of cracked or damaged dust boot, it is
front wheel on the steering angle measuring device necessary to replace the tie rod ball joint.
(front wheel alignment steering wheel) and inspect Notice:
the maximum steering angles of inner and outer In the case of cracked or damaged dust boot, the
wheels on the left and right. ball joint may be damaged jointly.
Inner Wheel: 8. Inspection for Angular Moment of Steering Tie
Outer Wheel: Rod Ball Joint
② In the case of engine idling, make full lock turns of ① Swing the tie rod rapidly for 10 times.
the steering wheel to the left and right to measure ② Measure the swing resistance of the tie rod with a
the steering angle. spring scale.
If the measured value is not in the standard range, Standard value: 2～5 N.m
adjust the tie rod. If the measured value is not in the range of
The adjustment of the steering angle is as follows: standard value, please replace it.
When the steering angle exceeds the standard value,
loosen lock nuts of the left and right steering tie
rods, rotate the left and right steering tie rods
respectively with a wrench to adjust the steering
angles to the standard values and then tighten the
lock nuts with a tightening torque of 45 ～ 55N.m.
In the length adjustments of the left and right
steering tie rods (length shown in the following
figure), pay attention to adjust them to the same
value for the left and right steering tie rods
（208.7mm,in reversed directions）
- 156 -

Inspection and Replacement of Steering Mechanism Schematic Diagram of Steering Column Assembly
Parts: 1. Horn hood with airbag
Inspection of Rack Piston Assembly: 2. Steering wheel
Inspect the straightness accuracy for the intermediate 3. Steering column assembly
rack of the rack piston assembly and the maximum 4. Connecting shaft with universal joint
deviation is 0.15mm. Inspect the tooth face for 5. Protective cover
exfoliation and impression, verify whether there are 6. Free upward and downward adjustment and
cracks or damages on the operating surface of the tooth locking device of the steering wheel
and inspect the back of the tooth for wear and damage. Inspection of Steering Column:
If necessary, replace the rack piston assembly. Inspect ① Inspect the steering column for cracks,
the piston ring and o-ring in the piston for damages. In deformations or other damages, in the case of such
the case of defects in them, it is necessary to carry out defects, carry out relevant replacement.
replacement. In the replacement, remove the piston ring ② Inspect the spline of steering column shaft for wear
and o-ring with a flat-blade screwdriver. or broken tooth, in the case of such defects, carry
out relevant replacement.
Original Figure of Power-assisted Steering Gear Box
Notice:
In the case of separation of the steering column and
steering gear assembly, rotation of steering wheel may
lead to clock spring damage. Therefore, it is necessary
to fix the steering wheel to prevent it from rotation.
① Power-assisted Steering Gear Box
Inspect the oil pipe joint for looseness and
damages.
Notice: Inspect the fixed bush of the power steering gear
Pay attention not to damage the rack. Apply some power for wears or other damages.
steering hydraulic oil on the new o-ring and install the Inspect the rack and pinion for their smooth
o-ring. operations and wears.
Notice: Inspect the gear preload.
Pay attention not to expand the piston ring excessively. a. Rotate the gear with the speed of 4~6 seconds
Install the new piston ring onto the piston of the rack per turn and measure the gear preload in the
piston assembly, apply some power steering hydraulic whole travel range of the rack.
oil on the new piston ring and press it out downward Standard value: 0.6～1.3N.m
with fingers. b. If the measured value exceeds the specified
Inspection of Valve Assembly value, adjust the plug firstly and then
Inspect the gear shaft tooth surface of the spool reinspect the gear preload.
assembly for cracks, damages, exfoliations or c. If the specified gear preload can not achieved
deformations. Inspect it for its flexible rotation, in the after plug adjustment, inspect or replace the
case of any defects, replace the spool assembly. plug assembly.
Steering Column ② Steering Tie Rod
Figure for Steering Column Assembly:
Inspect the angular moment of steering tie rod.
a. Swing the tie rod rapidly for 10 times.
b. Measure the swing resistance of the tie rod
with a spring scale.
Standard value: 2～5 N.m
If the measured value is not in the range of
standard value, please replace it.
Notice:
In the case of no excessive clearance of the tie
rod under the slow swing condition, even
though the measured value is lower than the
standard value, the tie rod can be applicable.
If the measured value is lower than 4.3N.m, it
- 157 -

is necessary to replace the tie rod.
③ Tie Rod Dust Boot On-car Inspection of Power-assisted Steering Pump:
Inspect the dust boot for damage, in the case of Inspection of Release Oil Pressure
such defect, please carry out replacement. Notice:
Inspect the dust boot for its correct mounting Prior to implementation, please confirm the belt tension.
position. ① Remove the oil pipe from the power steering pump
Post-installation Inspection and connect the pump with a pressure gauge.
Make full lock turns of the steering wheel to the ② Open the valve and carry out air bleeding for the
left and right for several times to verify its flexible hydraulic line.
operation. ③ Start the engine and turn the steering wheel for
Inspection and Replacement of Steering Mechanism several times to raise the oil temperature to about
Parts::
Parts 50℃.
Inspection of Rack Piston Assembly: Notice:
Inspect the straightness accuracy for the intermediate In engine start, it is necessary to keep belts and
rack of the rack piston assembly and the maximum hoses for other parts clean.
deviation is 0.15mm. Inspect the tooth face for
④ In engine idling, close the pressure gauge
exfoliation and impression, verify whether there are
completely to measure the release oil pressure.
cracks or damages on the operating surface of the tooth
Notice:
and inspect the back of the tooth for wear and damage.
The time for closed valve should not exceed 10
If necessary, replace the rack piston assembly. Inspect
seconds.
the piston ring and o-ring in the piston for damages. In
the case of defects in them, it is necessary to carry out ⑤ After the measurement, open the valve slowly. If
replacement. In the replacement, remove the piston ring the release oil pressure is not in the range of
and o-ring with a flat-blade screwdriver. standard value, please replace the power steering
Notice: pump.
Pay attention not to damage the rack. Apply some power ⑥ After the inspection, disconnect the pressure gauge
steering hydraulic oil on the new o-ring and install the from the hydraulic line and refill with new oil and
o-ring. carry out air bleeding for the line.
Notice:
Pay attention not to expand the piston ring excessively.
Install the new piston ring onto the piston of the rack
piston assembly, apply some power steering hydraulic
oil on the new piston ring and press it out downward
with fingers.
Inspection of Valve Assembly
Inspect the gear shaft tooth surface of the spool
assembly for cracks, damages, exfoliations or
deformations. Inspect it for its flexible rotation, in the
case of any defects, replace the spool assembly.
Figure for Power Steering Pump Assembly

1. Temperature gauge
2. Power steering oil reservoir
3. Power steering pump
4. Pressure gauge
5. Stop valve
6. Joint
- 158 -

Common Fault Diagnosis Table
Fault Fault Symptom Fault Cause Troubleshooting
Oil leakage from the Damage in oil seal of the power steering Replace the power steering pump oil
power steering pump pump seal
Oil leakage
Oil leakage from the oil High-temperature aging and poor
Replace the oil reservoir and oil pipe
pipe and oil reservoir connection etc. of the oil pipe
Damage in oil seal of the power steering Replace the power steering pump oil
Damage in the power pump seal
Damage
steering pump
Damage in power steering pump casing Replace the power steering pump
Low system pressure Blockage in slide valve
Remove the slide valve, grind and clean
Seizure Insufficient power
Blockage in slide valve and spring failure it in order to make it slide smoothly
steering pump flow
Inspect the safety valve/relief valve,
No pressure in steering Seizure in slide valve assembly of the
change the oil and replace the steering
system steering pump, serious wear in parts
pump
Inspect the safety valve/relief valve,
Internal pressure relief in the power
Internal pressure change the oil and replace power
steering gear
relief steering gear
power steering gear Replace the oil seal or power steering
Oil seal failure in the power steering gear
gear
Excessive early activation of the steering
Adjust the limiter
limiter
Carry out air bleeding for the steering
Air entrainment
Abnormal noise in the system
power steering pump Damage in drive components of the power
Replace the power steering pump
steering pump
Noise
The oil pipe amplifies the noise in the It can be solved by optimizing the
Noise in the oil steering pump and the flow noise of liquid matching of the steering system only
pipe/power steering oil which is flowing in the oil pipe is not and part replacement alone can not
reservoir absorbed and superimposed so that there is solve it at all. And a resonance tube can
excessive large noise in the system. be installed in the oil pipe.
- 159 -

Fault Fault Symptom Fault Cause Troubleshooting

Too low oil level in the power steering oil
Refill with oil
reservoir
Air entrainment Carry out air bleeding
Seize in the steering column or steering
Adjust the link.
link
Filter element blockage in the power Clean and replace the power steering oil
steering oil reservoir reservoir and change the steering oil
Inspect the output operating pressure of
the hydraulic pump with a pressure
Arduous turns to the left gauge and inspect the pump for
and right of the steering Damage in the power steering pump damages; in the case of insufficient
wheel pressure or flow in the power steering
pump, further inspect the hydraulic oil
filter and pipeline for blockage.
Arduous Poor performance of the power steering Inspect the power steering gear for
steering wheel gear damage
operation Inspect the v-belt for slipping and
looseness; in the case of gear drive, inspect Inspect and adjust each part
the engagement of the drive gear pair
Inspect for leakage/carry out air
Air in the system
bleeding
Low internal pressure in the power-assisted
system, such as insufficient oil supply of
the power steering pump; slipping and
looseness of the drive belt. Improper
Inspect and adjust the whole steering
Arduous quick turn of the adjustment of the relief valve; Deformation
system
steering wheel during of the high pressure oil pipe due to high
idling pressure oil, which may lead to pressure
hysteresis and air entrainment in the
hydraulic system.
Replace the power steering pump and
Internal wear in the power steering pump
clean the whole steering system
- 160 -

Troubleshooting for Common Faults: steering pump.
Oil leakage: 2. Dirty interior of the steering system may lead to
1. Verify whether there is oil leakage in oil pipe of the excessive wears in the stator, rotor, oil distributor,
steering system, joints of the power steering oil end cover and input shaft.
reservoir, power steering gear and power steering 3. Design and installation of the oil pipe, blockage,
pump. and bucking, excessive deformation of the oil pipe
2. At the oil inlet of the power steering pump, in the in its installation and poor matching of the system
case of oil pipe looseness, there will be oil leakage may lead to resonance and unsmooth system oil
here. Therefore, it is not allowed to impact the oil inlet and outlet,etc.
inlet of the power steering pump (for the oil pipe is 4. Overload operation of the steering system may lead
interference fitted into the pump body, please to excessive wear in the stator, rotor in the power
handle with care) steering pump and further lead to irregular
3. In the case of oil leakage in the joint between the movement of the oil in the pump which may
oil pipe and the high pressure oil outlet of the generate abnormal noise (In the case of noise
power steering pump, replace the o-ring and tighten existence “shorter than 6 seconds”, turn the
the mounting bolts on the oil pipe. The oil leakage steering wheel to its limiting position, the
fault is not related with the pump quality and there generated“tehee”sound is normal).
is no need to replace the oil pump. 5. In the case of frequent and excessive long-term
4. In the case of oil leakage in the power steering oil limit steering of the power steering pump, there
reservoir, if there is excessive oil filling in the oil should be lots of bubbles in the steering system.
reservoir or poor seal of the oil reservoir joint, The noise in the system decreases after oil change
when excessive engine bucking occurs, there will and abnormal noise and lots of bubbles occur after
be oil leakage in the power steering oil reservoir road test. In this case, such fault is not relative with
cap under the condition of driving on rough road. the performance and function of the power steering
Such oil leakage occurs constantly and it should be pump and power steering gear. It is recommended
not considered as oil leakage in the power steering to change the steering oil reservoir and oil in it and
pump or power steering oil reservoir. In this case, it is preferable to use an oil reservoir with internal
clean the power steering pump and power steering steps or curved tracks.
oil reservoir carry out reinstallation for them and 6. Noise in other rotating parts of the engine, such as:
observe carefully and confirm the oil leakage in bearings in the water pump, air conditioner
order to confirm the proper oil filling and require compressor, tensioner, pulley, etc. eg. In the case of
customers for regular maintenance and daily loose belt, there may be “squeaks”coming from the
cleaning. front end bearing of the power steering pump. eg.
Troubleshooting for oil leakage: After a certain time of vehicle running, when the
1. Verify and inspect the oil leaky parts carefully, steering wheel is turned to left or right limit
replace oil seals and oil pipes and tighten joint position, abnormal noise may occur in some
bolts. The tightening torque for the large nuts of the vehicles. In this case, inspect the belt for there may
power steering pump high pressure oil outlet is 55 be changes in the required torques for the steering
～ 65N.m and it is not recommended to carry out system in limiting positions. And belt looseness
installation of the high pressure oil pipe and the and slipping may generate noise on the pulley of
nuts with a torque larger than 60 N.m or the screw the power steering pump.
thread in the power steering pump aluminum 7. Low mounting position of the power steering pump,
casing may be damaged. driving on extreme rough road etc. may lead to lots
2. In the case of low oil level, carry out timely of silts and oil stains on the oil pump casing which
refilling of the power-assisted steering oil to the may cause damage in the input shaft housing of the
specified value. And in oil refilling, the oil level is power steering pump by foreign matters and then
not allowed to exceed the mark on the power corrosions by water, acid and alkali. In the case of
steering oil reservoir. irregular maintenance of the whole steering system,
3. Clean the leaky oil on the power steering pump, the ball bearing of the power steering pump may
power steering oil reservoir, oil pipe and relevant easily burnt or seizured and abnormal noise and
joints for accurate distinguishing of oil leakage or arduous steering wheel operation may occur under
excessive oil filling. this condition at the same time.
Abnormal noise: 8. Looseness in the mounting brackets of the power
1. Low oil level in the power steering oil reservoir, oil steering gear and power steering pump, internal
leakage or air entrainment in the system, blocked wear in the power steering gear and improper
filter element in the power steering oil reservoir adjustment of the pinion and rack.
may lead to insufficient oil suction of the power
- 161 -

9. Improper matching of system components before and steering oil, clean the whole power steering
leaving factory may lead to unable vibration system (it is preferable to clean with kerosene and
absorbing of pipeline as well as faults like it is not allowed to disassemble the pump body.
abnormal noise, failure of the system. Eg. In the Instead, remove bolts on the control valve chamber
case of no noise reduction device or corresponding of the pump and take out the pump body for simple
vibration damper in the pipeline, there will be noise cleaning)
and failure in the whole system. In this case, oil 2. In the case of dirty power steering pump, it is
pipe with different noise reduction effect may be necessary to clean the interior and exterior of the
applicable instead. However, in such replacement, power steering pump and oil pipes (it is not
there is a high demand of technical requirements allowed to clean with cotton gauze or other
and it should be carried out by professional staff multi-fiber cloth but carry out cleaning with clean
from the manufacture for better troubleshooting. brush). Pay attention to system cleanness and there
Troubleshooting for abnormal noise: should not be any visible impurities entering the
1. Clean the whole steering system and carry out air pump and system.
bleeding for the system. Adjust belt tension or 3. Refill the oil reservoir to the specified oil level,
replace the belt. Inspect and repair oil pipes, power inspect or replace the oil reservoir.
steering oil reservoir, power steering pump and 4. Adjust the belt tension according to specifications
power steering gear, change with new power and tighten coupling bolts for every component.
steering oil and replace the power steering oil 5. Inspect joints of oil pipes and tighten connecting
reservoir. nuts here.
2. Replace the steering high pressure oil pipe and a 6. Replace oil pipes, the power steering pump or the
new one with vibration damping effect or power steering gear.
possessing good matching to the system may be Emulsible foam in the steering power oil:
applied. Fault cause:
3. Inspect other rotating parts, tension the pulley, and 1. There is air in the steering system.
clean the power steering pump and power steering 2. There is liquid leakage in the steering system.
gear. In special cases, it is necessary to replace the Troubleshooting for the fault:
power steering pump or power steering gear 1. Carry out air bleeding, inspect for oil leakage and
assembly. solve such problem.
Arduous steering wheel operation: 2. Inspect the power steering oil reservoir and refill
1. Dirty interior of the power steering oil reservoir, the oil reservoir with oil.
blockage in the filter screen or low oil level in the Vehicle deviation (Carry out test runs in two directions
power steering oil reservoir. on the flat ground):
2. A great quantity of air in the power steering system Fault cause:
3. Foreign matters in the steering system may lead to 1. Looseness of the steering wheel ball joint or
seizure in the flow control valve of the steering improper front wheel alignment.
pump, serious wear of parts in the power steering 2. Twisted deformation or excessive wear in the
pump and internal leakage of the pump. steering rod.
4. Excessive wear in the piston cylinder of the power 3. Maladjustment of preload of racks in the power
steering gear, poor sealing performance of the oil steering gear
seal, bonding or damage in the control valve. 4. Poor returnability of the steering wheel and
5. Insufficient tire pressure, interference in the power steering wheel tremble.
steering pump steering column , loose connection, Troubleshooting for the fault:
looseness or slipping of power steering pump belt 1. Adjust the front wheel alignment and steering
or loose mounting position of the pump wheel ball joint.
6. Loose bolts in joints of oil pipes which may lead to 2. Refill with steering oil and carry out air bleeding.
steering oil leakage and insufficient flow in the 3. Adjust the preload of racks or repair racks in the
system. power steering gear.
Troubleshooting for arduous steering wheel operation: 4. Inspect and adjust every joints in the system
1. Inspect the power steering gear, control valve of according to specifications.
the power steering pump, oil reservoir filter screen
- 162 -

Power-assisted Steering System
1. Disconnect the negative cable of the battery.
2. Remove the cardan universal joint on the steering

gear box.
3. Remove track bolts for fixing the steering column

to the cross coupling.
4. Remove the cross shaft coupling.
- 163 -

6. Take down the cotter pin and remove castle nuts on
the joint of the tie rod ball joint and steering
knuckle.
� Do not reuse the cotter pin.
7. Remove the tie rod ball joint from the steering

knuckle.
Note:
After the separation of the steering tie rod and
steering knuckle, wrap the ball joint with cloth to
protect the ball joint seal.
8. Remove the tie rod ball joint.

� Loosen lock nuts of the tie rod ball joint.
� Remove the tie rod ball joint.
Note:
Remember the number of turns in ball joint removal.
8. Remove the fixed plate of the steering gear box oil

pipe and remove the oil pipe.
Note:
In the steering gear box oil pipe removal, block
the joint with a plug to avoid dirt entering.
- 164 -

9. Disconnect the booster oil pipe from the steering
gear box.
10. Remove the steering gear box.
Installation
1. Reinstall the steering gear box.
2. Install the booster pump oil pipe to the steering
gear box.
3. Install the booster pump oil pipe to the inverter

valve and tighten the fixed plate.
- 165 -

Note:
In the ball joint installation, make sure that the
number of turns of the installation is the same with
that of the removal.
4. Reinstall the tie rod ball joint in place.
� Install the ball joint in place.
� Tighten lock nuts of the ball joint.
Caution:
Keep the steering wheel in the straight-ahead
position throughout.
5. Install ball studs on the steering knuckle and lock
castle nuts with new cotter pins.
6. Lower the vehicle from the lifter.
7. Install the ball head shaft on the pinion shaft,

confirm the positional accuracy of the positioning
keyway and confirm that fastening bolts are in the
pinion slot.
8. Align the clamped plated of the universal joint to the

steering column and carry out installation.
9. Reconnect the negative cable of the battery.
10. Carry out air bleeding for the system according to the
specification.
11. Inspect for the front wheel alignment.
- 166 -

Removal and Installation of Steering Wheel
Removal:
1. Remove the negative cable of the battery.
2. Remove the upper and lower protective plates of

the steering column.
3. Disconnect the plug of the ignition switch harness.
4. Carry out steering wheel centering and lock it up.

5. Remove the steering wheel central covering plate.
- 167 -

Removal and Installation of Steering Wheel (Continued)
6. Remove mounting nuts of the steering wheel and
remove the steering wheel.
Installation
Warning:
Prior to the steering wheel installation, Keep the
ignition switch upright all the time.
1. Return the steering wheel to ensure the ignition
switch set in place.
- 168 -

Removal and Installation of Steering Column
Removal
1. Disconnect the negative cable of the battery
2. Remove the upper and lower protective plates of

the steering column.
3. Remove the multi-functional combination switch.
4. Return the steering wheel to the intermediate

position and lock it up.
5. Remove track bolts on the joint of the steering

column and steering knuckle.
Turn clamped plates and take them down.
- 169 -

Removal and Installation of Steering Column (Continued)
6. Remove four mounting nuts for fixing the lower
part of the steering column onto the partition panel.
7. Disconnect the ignition switch plug.
8. Remove the steering column.
Installation
9. Install the steering column in place and ensure the
correct positioning of bolts on the lower part of the
steering column.
- 170 -

Removal and Installation of Steering Column (Continued)
10. Fix the lower part of the steering column onto the
partition panel.
11. Reconnect the harness plug of the ignition switch.
12. Reinstall the combination switch.
13. Fix the wire with cable ties.
Caution:
Ensure that the steering wheel is in the
intermediate position.
14. Align the clamped plates of the cardan universal
joint to the shaft and install the clamped plates.
15. Install the upper and lower protective plates of the
steering column in place.
16. Connect the negative cable of the battery.
- 171 -

WT Wheels and Tires
Wheels and Tires

Subject Page
Wheels and Tires..........................................................................................................................................................174
Explosive View of Wheels and Tires...................................................................................................................... 175
Precaution for Tire Usage....................................................................................................................................... 175
Removal/Installation Instruction of Tire Assembly................................................................................................ 176
Removal/installation of wheel and Tires........................................................................................................ 178
- 173 -

WT Wheels and Tires
SUNRAY vehicles adopts tire models of GITI 195/70 R15LT and 185R15LT
/70R15LT 185R15LT..
Tires of different sizes are applied for bearing the buffering the impact from road surface as well as
vehicle weight, supplying driving force and brake force, changing the running direction of vehicle..
- 174 -

WT Wheels and Tires
Notice for tire usage Replacement:
Please use the genuine tires manufactured by the ① Please replace tire after normal running for
original manufacturer. 50000Km.
During running-in period of new tires, please avoid fast ② Replace tire in case one of the following conditions
starting, sharp turning and emergent braking, and don’t occurs:
use tires under severe working conditions, in order to � At least 3 wear marks exposed on tire tread.
protect the new tires from premature damage. � Tire cord fabric or tire cord exposed on the
Wheel balance should be conducted before the rubber.
application of new tires. � Cracking of tire tread or shoulder with cord
fabric exposed.
Tires � Tire bulge, upheaval or layering.
Inspection: � Tire being punctured or scratched or other
1. Inspection of tire pressure damages that is hardly to recover.
� Check the inflation pressure of tire. Make Wheel & tire assembly
adjustment if the pressure is not within the Removal/installation:
standard range. 1. Removal
Standard value: 450±10KPa � Remove wheel nut.
Attention: Tightening torque: 220～280N.m
Check the tire pressure by using tire pressure gauge � Remove wheel & tire assembly.
of good performance. Check tires for wear, 2. Installation
improper inflation, crack or other damage. Install wheel & tire assembly and tire nut.
Please check the tire pressure if the ambient Attention:
temperature experiences violent change. As for manual installation, tighten it according to
� Improper tire pressure shall lead to the results the diagonal order after nuts are pre-tightened in
below: sequence.
a. Under-pressure shall lead to quick wear of tire As for auto tightening, adjust the tightening torque
shoulder, as well as increase of tire deflection and tighten it at one time.
and rolling resistance. Please tighten all wheel nuts in the order indicated
in the figure.
b. Over-pressure shall lead to quick wear of the Wheel balance:
middle part of tire crown and decrease of 1. Removal
buffer capacity. � Remove the wheel and tire in need of
2. Inspection of improper alignment adjustment.
Too large/small front/rear wheel toe-in shall lead to � Remove the used balance weight on both sides
feathered wear of tire. of wheel and clear any foreign matter on the
3. Inspection of tire tread tire tread.
� Check the tread depth of tire. Attention:
Note: Tire size: 185R15LT Don’t make the tire scratched during removal. In
When the tread depth reaches to the limit case of new tire, rubber belt on tire should be
value or smaller, wear mark shall be shown on removed.
the tread; at this time, please replace the tire. 2. Wheel balance adjustment
� Check tire tread for any foreign matter. If any, � Install the wheel onto the balancer by
please clear it. centering the center hole and start the wheel
4. Check wheel for crack or other damages. If there is balancer.
deformation, please check the wheel runout. � When both inner and outer balance values are
� Remove the tire from wheel and install it onto displayed on the balancer, the actual balance
the wheel balancer. weight can be obtained by multiplying the
� Set the dial indicator as shown in figure. outer balance value by 5/3. Choose the outer
Please refer to “Maintenance Data and balance weight approaching to the calculated
Specification” for wheel runout. If it exceeds the value and install it onto the specified position
limit, please replace it. outside or diagonal position.
Tire rotation:: Attention:
Perform tire rotation after the vehicle running for Install the inner balance weight after the
8000Km. tire rotation shall also be conducted when installation of outer balance weight. Before
changing with a new tire. installation, please make the mating surface clean.
a. Install the balance weight to the position as
- 175 -

WT Wheels and Tires
shown in the figure. � No more than two pieces of balance weight
b. When installing balance weight onto wheel, can be installed.
the balance weight shall be placed onto inner � Please always use genuine balance weight.
wall with grooves as shown in the right figure, � Please don’t place one balance weight onto
with the center of balance weight aligned with another one.
the position (or angle) indicated by the wheel ③ Restart the wheel balancer.
balancer. ④ Knock in the balance weight from the inside of
c. If the calculated balance weight exceeds by wheel as per position (or angle) indicated by wheel
50g, please install two balance weights in the balancer.
same straight line. ⑤ Start the balancer to verify if the residual
Attention: inside/outside unbalance value is below 10g. If the
� For balance weight cannot be reused, please residual unbalance value of any side is over 10g,
apply new one every time. dynamic balance test should be conducted.
- 176 -

WT Wheels and Tires
Fault Diagnosis
Excessive deflection of wheel and rim Replace
Looseness of wheel nut Tighten
Wheel unbalance Adjust
Uneven wear of tire Adjust or replace
Steering wheel circular vibration
Under-pressure of tire Adjust
Damage or wear of front wheel bearing Adjust or replace
Steering system fault Adjust or replace
Suspension system fault Adjust or replace
Premature wear of tire Improper tire pressure Adjust
Improper tire pressure Adjust
Tire noise
Tire deterioration Replace
Road noise or body vibration
Deformation of rim and tire Repair or replace
Uneven wear of tire Adjust or replace
Excessive deflection of wheel and rim Replace
Looseness of wheel nut Tighten
Up and down vibration of steering wheel
Fracture or wear of engine mounting rubber Replace
Fracture or wear of transmission mounting Replace
rubber
Improper tire pressure Adjust
Excessive or uneven wear of tire Adjust or replace
Steering wheel drifted to one side Steering system fault Adjust or replace
Brake system fault Adjust or replace
Both side tire pressure unbalance Adjust
Deformation of rim and tire Repair or replace
Wobbling Looseness of wheel nut Tighten
Steering system fault Adjust or replace
Both side tire pressure unbalance Adjust
Brake pulled to one side
Brake system fault Adjust or replace
Heavy steering wheel felt Steering system fault Adjust or replace
Poor steering wheel return Steering system fault Adjust or replace
- 177 -

WT Wheels and Tires
Removal/installation of front wheel assembly
Removal
1. Loosen tire nut, and have the vehicle jacked to
remove the tire.
2. Remove brake hose from shock absorber.
Note:
Loosen the brake caliper top bolt properly for
removal of brake caliper.
� Hang the brake caliper beside the shock
absorber in order to avoid damage of brake
hose.
Caution:
hand thread.
4. Remove flange assembly.
� Remove dust cover.
� Remove split pin and nut lock piece.
� Remove wheel bearing adjusting nut.
� Remove washer and flange assembly together.
- 180 -

WT Wheels and Tires
Installation
Caution:
hand thread.
1. Install flange assembly.
� Install washer and hub assembly together
with outer bearing.
Install wheel bearing adjusting nut.
2. Install brake caliper.

3. Install brake hose onto shock absorber.
4. Install wheel plane bearing.
5. Determine wheel bearing end play.
� Tighten wheel bearing adjusting nut and rotate
the wheel at the same time to make bearing
installed in place.
� Unscrew nut by 180° and shake wheel mount.
� Push and pull wheel until bearing end play
can be felt.
� If necessary, loosen the adjusting nut again by

90° until clearance can be felt.
� Measure end play (required to be 0.002 ～
0.05mm）.
� If necessary, rotate the adjusting nut
clockwise or counterclockwise to obtain
required end play.
6. Use new split pin and dust cover and reinstall the
nut lock piece.
- 181 -

WT Wheels and Tires
Replacement of front flange assembly (with flange assembly already removed)
Removal
1. Mark properly on flange and brake disc to facilitate
positioning during reinstallation.
2. Remove flange from brake disc.
3. Remove oil seal.

4. Remove inner and outer races of conical bearing.
Caution:
Don’t make burr on flange to ensure bearing race
can be fitted in place.
Note:
Tap the bearing race alternately and diagonally and
don’t make the sleeve tilted.
5. Remove inner and outer races of bearing.
6. Clean mating face between wheel hub and brake
disc.
- 182 -

WT Wheels and Tires
Installation
1. Install the flange onto the brake disc.
Caution:
The adopted bearing races and rollers should be
from the same manufacturer.
2. Reinstall the inner and outer races of bearing.
3. Apply grease onto race and roller bearing.

4. Reinstall it onto the bearing race.
5. Clean the periphery of oil seal seat and apply
sealant onto it.
6. Install oil seal and remove redundant sealant.

7. Fill sealing shaft with grease and apply grease onto
lip surface.
- 183 -

FT Four-Wheel Alignment
Four-Wheel Alignment
Subject Page
Preparation before four-wheel alignment............................................................................................................... 184
Function of each angle............................................................................................................................................185
Common fault symptom......................................................................................................................................... 186
Adjustment
Four/wheel alignment.................................................................................................................................................. 187
- 183 -

Objectives for four-wheel alignment: deformed or damaged parts should be detected for
� Elimination of deflection complete removal of fault.
� Decrease of chassis wear Note: It is a must to check the chassis condition before
� Straightness of linear steering wheel conducting four-wheel alignment.
� Decrease of tire wear Preparation before four-wheel alignment
� Straightness of steering wheel after turning 1. Check tire pressure and adjust it as required.
� Decrease of tire wear 2. Check body height.
� Straightness of linear steering wheel � Front part measurement
� Recovery of new car driving feeling � Rear part measurement
3. Check wheel bearing clearance and replace front
Principle and five factors of four-wheel alignment wheel bearing when necessary.
Principle: 4. Check rim and tire condition.
Rear wheels aligned first and then front wheels 5. Check steering linkage and ball joint for looseness.
Five factors
factors: 6. Park the vehicle on flat ground with no luggage or
1. Camber person inside.
2. Inclination angle 7. Check wheels; check front suspension for
3. Caster looseness.
4. Toe-in 8. Check shock absorber for normal operation.
5. Adjustment of thrust axis and angle Note:
Function of four-wheel alignment Make sure half level in oil tank, as well as the required
Four-wheel alignment functions for measurement of level of cooling water in water tank and proper engine
alignment angle of chassis. In case of a little change in oil. The tire jack and accessories should be placed at the
chassis parameters, it is only needed to adjust the specified position.
alignment angle; in case of large difference, the
- 184 -

Four-wheel alignment parameters
Front wheel camber 0.75±1° 1.25°

Kingpin caster 1.5±1.5° 1°
Kingpin inclination angle 12.75°±1° 1.25°
Toe-in 0～2mm
This vehicle is light-duty bus, with integral rear axle.

Rear wheel parameters cannot be adjusted during
Front
four-wheel alignment.
1. Front wheel camber：
Camber refers to the angle included between
geometry centerline and plumb line of tire viewed
from the front of vehicle. Tire upper edge deviates
to the inside (approaching to engine) or outside
(deviated from engine):
� Zero camber refers to the state that the tire
centerline is coincided with the plumb line. Wheel toe-in:
� Positive camber refers to the state that the tire Wheel toe-out:
centerline is located outside of plumb line.
� Negative camber refers to the state that the tire Front wheel toe-in is observed from the front of
centerline is located inside of plumb line. vehicle and measured when two wheel axles are of
the same height. Front and rear end distance
difference between left and right tire centerline is
known as the total toe-in, as shown in the figure:
Zero toe-in: Left and right tire centerline distance
at front and rear end is equal: A=B.
Positive toe-in: Left and right tire centerline
distance at front end is less than that at rear end:
A<B.
Negative toe-in: Left and right tire centerline
distance at front end is larger than that at rear end:
A>B.
2. Toe-in function
It is used for elimination of tire skidding caused by
� Excessive camber may lead to outside wear of camber. The effect of wheel camber shall make the
tire and too small camber may lead to inside wheel top face tilted outwards and the wheel shall
wear of tire. In case of inconsistency between roll outwards during running, thus skidding is
two wheel cambers, the vehicle shall be pulled formed, which shall lead to tire wear. The toe-in
to one side of the larger camber. functions to eliminate tire skidding due to camber,
Toe-in definition as shown in the figure:
- 185 -

from the front of vehicle.
Kingpin inclination angle mainly functions for the
realization of auto return after steering and the increase
of adhesion force of vehicle. Kingpin inclination angle
is unadjustable and its standard value can be achieved
by the replacement of defect parts.
As for four-wheel alignment of SUNRAY vehicles, only
the data adjustment for front wheels can be realized but
not for rear wheels. Among various parameters of front
wheels, the camber and toe-in are adjustable. Determine
the camber at first and then adjust the toe-in in order to
ensure the stability of vehicle straight running.
Common faults:
3. Toe-in effect
1. Abnormal wear of tire: Middle part wear, tire
� Effect of positive toe-in: Tire outside wear due
shoulder wear, eccentric wear, feature-like wear,
to excessive positive camber takes the form of
serrated wear, wavy wear and spotty wear.
feature. Touch it from the inside to outside and
Middle part wear: Too high tire pressure.
sharp needle like feeling can be felt on the
Tire shoulder wear: Too low tire pressure and
tread outer edge.
overloading.
� Effect of negative toe-in: Tire inside wear due
Eccentric wear: Improper camber.
to excessive negative camber takes the form
Feature-like wear: Improper toe-in.
of feature. Touch it from the outside to inside
Serrated wear: Frequent brake application under
and sharp needle like feeling can be felt on the
overloading condition for a long time and tire
tread outer edge.
rotation not conducted at regular intervals.
4. In case of inconsistency between two wheel toe-in,
Wavy wear: Dynamic unbalance of tire, large
the vehicle shall be pulled to one side of the
circular runout of wheel end face, looseness of hub
smaller toe-in.
bearing and steering knuckle, too big thrust angle
of rear wheels and etc.
Kingpin caster
Spotty wear: Shimmy under high speed rotation of
Kingpin caster definition
wheel, excessive clearance of bearing, ball joint
It refers to the angle included between the steering axis
and steering rod, dynamic unbalance of tire.
and the line vertical to ground, which indicates the
2. Running deviation: Probably caused by
forward and backward inclination of the line between
inconsistent kingpin inclination angle, camber,
the upper ball joint or strut top and the lower ball joint
caster, toe-in, tire pattern, shock absorber vibration
viewed from the side of vehicle (called the imaginary
reduction effect or wheel base between left and
steering axis). There are three kinds of caster, viz.
right wheels.
positive caster, negative caster and zero caster.
3. Memory deviation: Probably caused by
interference of upper strut support motion, wear of
Caster adjustment (generally nonadjustable
nonadjustable)
shock absorber steady bearing, over sticking of ball
As for the adjustment of caster, make analysis and
joint or unbalance power steering.
judgment as per different vehicle models at first and
4. Torque deviation: Probably caused by stuck or
then make adjustment through adjusting washer,
loose ball joint, unequal axle angle under
eccentric camshaft, eccentric ball joint, girder slot, or
acceleration, nonconforming inclination angle and
balance bar.
included angle, or improper alignment of power
Inclination angle definition
train.
Definition of inclination angle: The angle included
between the steering axis and the plumb line viewed
- 186 -

Data adjustment of four-wheel alignment
1. Check basic data of vehicle such as tire pressure,
fuel level, vibration reduction effect, tire wear
degree, accessories and tools. Recover it to the
delivery status.
2. Drive the vehicle onto the lifter, with front wheels
held at the center of front turntable of the
four-column lifter.
3. Maintain vehicle and tire horizontal and press the
nose by hand.
4. Install the sensor and claw onto the tire properly
and maintain the sensor balanced.
5. Turn on the four-wheel aligner and select the

current vehicle position.
6. Operate on the basis of the computer reminder to
measure the actual four-wheel alignment
parameters.
7. Compare the parameters provided by four-wheel
aligner with the standard data and calculate the
actual data for adjustment.
8. Lift the vehicle. As the rear wheels are of
nonadjustable rear axle, only front wheel camber
and toe-in are adjustable.
9. Adjustment of front wheel camber: Loosen the
mounting nut of shock absorber lower support,
knock down the lower swing arm with SST or crow
bar and record the number of washers, make
calculation and find out what kinds of washer
should be adopted on the basis of four-wheel
alignment data and actual vehicle parameters,
install the washer onto the lower swing arm and
then tighten the nut to the standard torque.
Tire camber: 0.3°. Check if it is within the normal
data range of vehicle through computer.
10. Adjustment of toe-in: Loosen the mounting nut of
tie rod, calculate the required data on the basis of
the actual toe-in and standard data, and observe if
the toe-in is within the standard range through
computer when making adjustment.
Attention: The adjusting amount should be
controlled within half circle in order to avoid
inaccuracy.
Standard toe-in: 0~2mm.
- 188 -

Special Tools for Sunray
Attached List-Special Tools for Sunray

Applicable model: SUNRAY products manufactured by JAC (4DA1 Series)
Tool number Tool name Outline drawing Purpose/application
Piston pin remover and

JAC-T8F001 Removing and installing piston pins (engine)
installer
Supporting use of related installer in bearing

JAC-T8F002 Handle
installation (transmission)
JAC-T8F003 Flywheel stopper Fixing flywheel for easy removal (engine)
JAC-T8F004 Cooling system tester Checking cooling system for leakage (engine)
JAC-T8F005 Oil filter wrench Removing and installing oil filter (engine)
JAC-T8F006 Valve oil seal installer Installing valve oil seals (engine)
JAC-T8F007 Fuel pressure gauge Measuring fuel pressure (engine)
JAC-T8F008 Compression gauge Measuring cylinder pressure (engine)
Pressure gauge Playing the role of an adapter during cylinder

JAC-T8F009
connector pressure measurement (engine)
Compressing valve springs and removing

JAC-T8F010 Valve spring compressor
valves and related parts (engine)
JAC-T8F011 Camshaft gear puller Removing camshaft gear (engine)
Cylinder liner installer

JAC-T8F012 Installing cylinder liners (engine)
(including jack)

JAC-T8F013 Cylinder liner puller Removing cylinder liners (engine)
JAC-T8F014 Piston installer Installing pistons (engine)
Crankshaft front oil seal

JAC-T8F015 Installing crankshaft front oil seal (engine)
installer
Camshaft bushing Removing and installing camshaft bushing

JAC-T8F016
remover/installer (engine)
V-block for camshaft

JAC-T8F017 Measuring camshaft damage (engine)
measurement
JAC-T8F018 Hose clamp pliers Removing a clamp from a hose
Removing and installing piston circlips

JAC-T8F019 Piston ring extractor
(engine)
JAC-T8F020 Valve oil seal extractor Removing valve oil seals (engine)
JAC-T8F021 End fork clip Securing flywheel (engine)
Crankshaft back bearing

JAC-T8F022 Removing crankshaft back bearing
remover
Crankshaft back bearing

JAC-T8F023 Installing crankshaft back bearing
installer
The diesel common rail tester can accurately

Diesel common rail tool and effectively diagnose a diesel engine with a
JAC-T8F024
kit diesel common rail system and test its fuel
injection.
Shift fork lock pin

JAC-T8B001 Removing shift fork spring pin (transmission)
remover
JAC-T8B002 Oil seal puller Removing oil seals (transmission)

JAC-T8B003 Clutch guide Centering clutch discs (transmission)
Input shaft bearing

JAC-T8B004 Installing input shaft bearings (transmission)
installer
Output shaft bearing

JAC-T8B005 Installing output shaft bearings (transmission)
installer
Countershaft front Installing countershaft front bearing

JAC-T8B006
bearing installer (transmission)
Input shaft protective Protecting front gear of input shaft

JAC-T8B007
sleeve (transmission)
Output shaft protective Protecting front gear of output shaft

JAC-T8B008
Transmission bearing Removing bearings on transmission

JAC-T8B009
remover kit (transmission)
Input shaft oil seal

JAC-T8B010 Installing input shaft oil seals (transmission)
installer
Transmission rear end Removing rear end cover oil seal

JAC-T8B011
cover oil seal remover (transmission)
Rear end cover oil seal

JAC-T8B012 Installing rear end cover oil seal (transmission)
installer
Steering linkage drawing Disconnecting front end control arm ball joint
JAC-T8D001
die of wheel from steering knuckle (chassis)
JAC-T8D002 Interior trim crow plates Prying door trims

Preface

Body Accessories.
The Body Accessories Volume details the removal methods of body accessories
including interior and exterior trims and glasses of SUNRAY long-wheelbase vehicles
as well as repair parameters of metal plates.
be adopted.
JAC INTERNATIONAL
March 2011

Body Accessor ies Volume Content
Accessories Contentss
Body Accessor ies Volume Content

Accessories Contentss
Body Glass
SST for Glass.............................................................................................................................................................BG 2
Front windshield........................................................................................................................................................BG 3
Windshield.................................................................................................................................................................BG 4
Front triangle glass.................................................................................................................................................... BG 7
Front door glass......................................................................................................................................................... BG 9
Front door glass seal................................................................................................................................................ BG 11
Front door glass regulator........................................................................................................................................BG 12
Left side wall glass.................................................................................................................................................. BG 14
Right side wall glass................................................................................................................................................ BG 17
Double-open back door glass.................................................................................................................................. BG 21
Front/Rear Doors and Front Compartment Cover
Front compartment cover.........................................................................................................................................BD 24
Front compartment cover.........................................................................................................................................BD 25
Radiator core bracket...............................................................................................................................................BD 28
Compartment cover release cable............................................................................................................................BD 29
Right front door....................................................................................................................................................... BD 31
Left front door......................................................................................................................................................... BD 34
Door outer handle.................................................................................................................................................... BD 37
Door lock cylinder................................................................................................................................................... BD 39
Left front door lock body.........................................................................................................................................BD 41
Right front door lock body...................................................................................................................................... BD 44
Door seal..................................................................................................................................................................BD 46
Double-open back door........................................................................................................................................... BD 47
Double-open back door outer handle.......................................................................................................................BD 50
Double-open back door latch...................................................................................................................................BD 52
Double-open back door lock and drive rod............................................................................................................. BD 53
Double-open back door lock....................................................................................................................................BD 55
Double-open back door seal.................................................................................................................................... BD 57
Instrument panel....................................................................................................................................................... BP 60
Instrument panel....................................................................................................................................................... BP 61
Roof lining................................................................................................................................................................BP 69
Trim panel of A-pillar...............................................................................................................................................BP 74
Trim panel of B-pillar...............................................................................................................................................BP 75
Trim panel of C-pillar...............................................................................................................................................BP 78
Side wall window trim panel....................................................................................................................................BP 80
Trim panel of D-pillar.............................................................................................................................................. BP 84
Interior trim panel.....................................................................................................................................................BP 86
Front door trim panel................................................................................................................................................BP 88
Double-open back door trim panel........................................................................................................................... BP 89
-1-

Body Accessor
Accessories ies Volume Content Contentss
Interior rear-view mirror...........................................................................................................................................BP 91
Sun visor...................................................................................................................................................................BP 92
Curtains.................................................................................................................................................................... BP 93
Luggage rack............................................................................................................................................................ BP 94
Step plate assembly.................................................................................................................................................. BP 96
Front bumper............................................................................................................................................................ BP 97
Rear bumper............................................................................................................................................................. BP 99
Front grille..............................................................................................................................................................BP 101
Fender.....................................................................................................................................................................BP 102
Front door skirt trim panel......................................................................................................................................BP 106
Front side wall skirt trim panel...............................................................................................................................BP 107
Middle side wall skirt trim panel............................................................................................................................BP 108
Rear wheel skirt trim panel.................................................................................................................................... BP 109
Rear tire mud guard................................................................................................................................................ BP 110
Seats
Driver’s seat............................................................................................................................................................SE 112
Front row twin bench-type seat.............................................................................................................................. SE 114
Front row individual seat........................................................................................................................................SE 115
Driver’s seat............................................................................................................................................................SE 116
Front row twin bench-type seat.............................................................................................................................. SE 119
Front row individual seat........................................................................................................................................SE 120
back row seats........................................................................................................................................................ SE 121
Sealing Elements
Inner acoustic baffle of front wall...........................................................................................................................SP 124
Outer heat shield of front wall................................................................................................................................ SP 125
Front door seal........................................................................................................................................................ SP 125
Rear door seal......................................................................................................................................................... SP 126
Fender seal.............................................................................................................................................................. SP 126
Front compartment seal.......................................................................................................................................... SP 127
Waterproof membrane............................................................................................................................................ SP 127
Body Repair Parameters
Engine Compartment Repair Parameters...............................................................................................................XE 130
Windshield Repair Parameters...............................................................................................................................XE 131
Front Door Repair Parameters............................................................................................................................... XE 132
Rear Double-Door Repair Parameters................................................................................................................... XE 133
Girder Repair Parameters.......................................................................................................................................XE 134
Attached List—SUNRAY Special Service Tools
List—
-2-

BG Body Glass
Body Glass
Subject Page
SST for Glass................................................................................................................................................................... 2
Front windshield.............................................................................................................................................................. 3
Windshield....................................................................................................................................................................... 4
Front triangle glass...........................................................................................................................................................7
Front door glass................................................................................................................................................................9
Front door glass seal.......................................................................................................................................................11
Front door glass regulator.............................................................................................................................................. 12
Left side wall glass.........................................................................................................................................................14
Right side wall glass...................................................................................................................................................... 17
Double-open back door glass......................................................................................................................................... 21
-1-

BG Body Glass
SST for Glass
Tool Illustration Function
For adjustment, removal or

Door hinge adjusting wrench
installation of door hinge
Ceiling remover For removal of ceiling
For cutting door window

Sealant remover seal (used together with the
next tool)
For removing windshield

Seal cutting blade sealant (used together with
the previous tool)
For applying sealant onto

Sealant gun
windshield
For removal/installation of
Glass suction cup
windshield
For removal of windshield

Windshield remover
molding
-2-

BG 车身玻璃
Front windshield
Front windshield is mainly composed of laminated functioning for blocking wind and rain and providing
glass and relevant accessories (interior rear-view safe and comfortable environment for driver and
mirror base, antenna and antenna terminal, pad), passengers.
-3-

BG Body Glass
Front windshield
Removal
1. Remove glass molding
Prepare repair kit, with the following articles
included:
Sealant (carbamic acid Cleaner
ethyl ester adhesive)
Primer Cloth
Wool brush Felt
Mat Nozzle
Note:
An additional tube of sealant may be applied.
2. Remove grille and wiper from vehicle neck. .
3. Remove interior rear-view mirror.
4. Disconnect antenna connector.
-4-

BG Body Glass
Front windshield
5. Install the precise cutting blade (24mm hook type
blade) onto the cutter.
Warning:
When using tools for cutting glasses, please wear
gloves and goggles to avoid possible injury caused by
glass fragments generated during cutting.
Attention:
In case of the windshield to be reused, it is prohibited to
use cutter or electric cutting tools.
6. Cut one side and top side of glass sealant.

Cut the polyurethane sealant on the outside of
windshield from the left lower corner to the left
upper part and then from the upper part to the right
lower corner.
Note:
The windshield is positioned by two height adjustable
pieces installed on the bottom, which should be leveled
before cutting.
7. Cut the glass sealant at the bottom part.
8. Cut the glass sealant at the bottom part (continued).

Cut the sealant from the outside midpoint to both
sides.
9. Take the windshield down carefully.
-5-

BG Body Glass
Front windshield
Installation
Note:
Don’t contact the already trimmed surface, otherwise,
bonding effect of new sealant may be influenced.
1. Trim the side grooves.
� Install the precise cutting blade.
� Trim the polyurethane sealant remained on
grooves carefully, with polyurethane sealant
in thickness of 1mm left on the body for side
trimming.
2. Wipe the glass clean.

Trim the polyurethane sealant remained on window
carefully, with polyurethane sealant in thickness of
1mm left on the glass for side trimming.
Caution:
Glass primer contains solvent that can make the primer
hardened after volatilization but also can soften the
surface coat of synthetic paint, therefore, “ZK”
polypropylene surface paint mixed with hardener should
be applied around the window.
3. Install the new height adjusting brackets onto the
bottom part of windshield.
� Clamp the mark position of windshield center
groove.
� Rotate two adjusting screws to lift the glass to
the uppermost.
� Place the glass into window groove and
check if the clearance between glass top and
window groove is 2~4mm. Adjust when
necessary.
4. Install the glass.

� Mount the glass in place with center aligned.
� Adjust glass based on window groove height
to ensure proper alignment. Adjust when
necessary.
� Press the glass tightly into the sealant from
center part gradually to both sides.
Note:
Park the vehicle in the place with ambient temperature
of zero degree and don’t drive it 24h before complete
curing of carbamic acid ethyl ester adhesive. The curing
time is determined by temperature and humidity, which
shall be prolonged in case of low temperature and
humidity.
5. Install remaining parts in reverse order of removal.
-6-

BG Body Glass
Front triangle glass
Removal
1. Remove the rear-view mirror from the window.
2. Remove the glass.

Compress the glass continuously and forcibly from
the inside upper corner.
3. Peel off the seal.
Installation
1. Insert a high strength cable into seal and window
groove to determine the end position of cable and
make it lapped at the corner part.
-7-

BG Body Glass
Front triangle glass
2. Reinstall the window.
� Pass the cable through the window groove
and stick the lower edge of seal along the
edge of window groove.
� Compress the outside of glass continuously
and forcibly and meanwhile draw one end of
the cable to press the seal onto the window
groove.
� Repeat those action until the window is
properly installed and then check if the seal is
sealed properly.
-8-

BG Body Glass
Front door glass
2. Remove the interior trim panel of door.
3. Disconnect the harness connector of interior trim

panel of door.
4. Peel off the waterproof membrane.
-9-

BG Body Glass
Front door window
5. Pull out the glass seal from top to bottom.
6. Remove the loudspeaker.
7. Remove the glass regulator motor.
8. Take down the glass from the window carefully.
- 10 -

BG Body Glass
Front door glass seal
Removal
2. Peel off the window glass seal.
Note:
Peel off the window glass seal completely from top to
bottom as shown in the figure.
Installation
1. Install the seal into door panel from the front
bottom corner.
- 11 -

BG Body Glass
Front door glass regulator
Removal
Note:
3. Remove the waterproof membrane.
4. Remove the loudspeaker.
- 12 -

BG Body Glass
Front door glass regulator
5. Remove the mounting screws for regulator motor.
6. Take down the regulator motor.
Installation
Install it in reverse order of removal.
- 13 -

BG Body Glass
Left side wall glass
Removal
1. Prepare necessary tools.
Note:
3. Remove upper and lower guard plates of B-pillar.
4. Remove upper and lower guard plates of B-pillar.
- 14 -

BG Body Glass
Warning:
When using tools for cutting glasses, please wear gloves
and goggles to avoid possible injury caused by
glass fragments generated during cutting.
Attention:
In case of the windshield to be reused, it is prohibited
to use cutter or electric cutting tools.
6. Remove the front door window seal.
Note:
Peel off the window glass seal completely from top
to bottom as shown in the figure.
7. Cut the glass sealant, as shown in the figure.

Note:
Two persons are necessary for removal of glass and
one should stand outside to hold the glass by
using suction cup.
- 15 -

BG Body Glass
Installation
1. Prepare repair kit, with the following articles
included:

Primer Cloth
Wool brush Felt
Mat Nozzle
Note: An additional tube of sealant may be applied.
Note:
Peel off the window glass seal completely from top
to bottom as shown in the figure.
Note:
Don’t contact the already trimmed surface,
otherwise, bonding effect of new sealant may be
influenced.
Trim the polyurethane sealant remained on grooves
carefully, with polyurethane sealant in thickness of 1mm
left on the body for side trimming.

Caution:
surface coat of synthetic paint; therefore, “ZK”

� Adjust glass based on window groove height to
ensure proper alignment. Adjust when necessary.
� Press the glass tightly into the sealant from center
part gradually to both sides.
Note:
Park the vehicle in the place with ambient temperature
of zero degree and don’t drive it 24h before complete
curing of carbamic acid ethyl ester adhesive. The curing
time is determined by temperature and humidity, which
shall be prolonged in case of low temperature and
humidity.
- 16 -

BG Body Glass
Right side wall glass
Removal
1. Side wall glass.
2. Remove the curtain.
3. Remove the side pillar trim panel.
4. Remove two mounting bolts for glass.

Attention:
Two service persons are necessary for the removal.
- 17 -

BG Body Glass
Right side wall glass
5. Remove the mounting bolts for glass and take the
glass down.
Installation
- 18 -

BG Body Glass
Rear side wall glass
Removal
1. Rear side wall glass.
2. Remove the curtain.
3. Remove upper and lower trim panels and guard

plates of pillar-D.

glass down carefully.
- 19 -

BG Body Glass
Rear side wall glass
glass down carefully.
Installation
- 20 -

BG Body Glass
Double-open back door glass
1. Prepare repair kit, with the following articles
included:

Primer Cloth
Wool brush Felt
Mat Nozzle
Note: An additional tube of sealant may be applied.

Warning:
When using tools for cutting glasses, please wear gloves
and goggles to avoid being injured by glass fragments
generated during cutting.
Attention:
In case of the windshield to be reused, it is prohibited to
use cutter or electric cutting tools.
3. Remove the double-open back door glass seal.
4. Cut the glass sealant in the direction shown in

figure.
- 21 -

BG Body Glass
Double-open back door glass
Note:
Don’t contact the already trimmed surface;
otherwise, bonding effect of new sealant may be
influenced.
Trim the polyurethane sealant remained on grooves
1mm left on the body for side trimming.

Caution:
surface coat of synthetic paint; therefore, “ZK”

� Adjust glass based on window groove height to
ensure proper alignment. Adjust when necessary.
� Press the glass tightly into the sealant from center
part gradually to both sides.
Note:
Park the vehicle in the place with ambient
temperature of zero degree and don’t drive it 24h before
complete curing of carbamic acid ethyl ester adhesive.
The curing time is determined by temperature and
humidity, which is prolonged in case of low temperature
and humidity.
- 22 -

BD Front/Rear Doors and Front Compartment Cover
Front/Rear Doors and Front Compartment Cover

Subject Page
Front compartment cover............................................................................................................................................... 24
Front compartment cover............................................................................................................................................... 25
Radiator core bracket..................................................................................................................................................... 28
Compartment cover release cable.................................................................................................................................. 29
Right front door..............................................................................................................................................................31
Left front door................................................................................................................................................................34
Door outer handle...........................................................................................................................................................37
Door lock cylinder......................................................................................................................................................... 39
Left front door lock body............................................................................................................................................... 41
Right front door lock body.............................................................................................................................................44
Door seal........................................................................................................................................................................ 46
Double-open back door.................................................................................................................................................. 47
Double-open back door outer handle............................................................................................................................. 50
Double-open back door latch......................................................................................................................................... 52
Double-open back door lock and drive rod.................................................................................................................... 53
Double-open back door lock.......................................................................................................................................... 55
Double-open back door seal...........................................................................................................................................57
- 23 -

Front compartment cover
- 24 -

1. Open the front compartment cover.
2. Mark below the mounting bolts of front fender.
3. Remove four mounting bolts on both left and right

sides.
4. Two persons work together to lift the front

compartment cover down.
- 25 -

1. Install the cover with mounting marks properly
aligned.
2. Two persons work together to install the front

compartment cover.
- 26 -

Inspection/Adjustment
1. The adjustment direction of front compartment
cover is shown in the figure.
2. As shown in the figure, clearance between left/right

side of the cover and fender shall meet the
requirements.
3. Adjust the height of pad and ensure the height of

both fender and cover meet the requirements after
the closing of front compartment cover.
- 27 -

Radiator core bracket
1. Remove the lock body of front compartment cover.
2. Remove mounting bolts for radiator core bracket.
3. Remove mounting bolts for radiator core bracket.
Installation
- 28 -

Compartment cover release cable
1. Open the front compartment cover.
2. Remove the cable handle of front compartment

cover and disconnect the cable.
3. Remove the front grille.
4. Remove mounting bolts for lock body.
- 29 -

Compartment cover release cable
5. Disconnect the cable.
6. Remove the cable.
Installation
- 30 -

Right front door

(Refer to Removal of Front Bumper, Exterior Trim.)
3. Remove the fender.

(Refer to Removal of Fender, Exterior
Trim.)
4. Disconnect the right door harness connector.
- 31 -

Right front door
5. Remove mounting screws for right front door
check.
6. Remove mounting screws for hinges. Two persons

shall work together to remove the door.
- 32 -

Right front door
1. Adjust door hinges.
2. Adjust door latches in four directions shown in the

figure.
- 33 -

Left front door

(Refer to Removal of Front Bumper, Exterior Trim.)
3. Remove the front fender.

(Refer to Removal of Fender, Exterior
Trim.)
4. Disconnect the door harness connector.
- 34 -

Left front door
5. Remove mounting screws for left front door check.
6. Remove mounting screws for hinges. Because the

door is heavy, so two service persons are necessary
for the removal of door.
- 35 -

Left front door
1. Adjust door hinges in four directions shown in the
figure.
2. Adjust door latches in four directions shown in the

figure.
- 36 -

Left front door outer handle
2. Remove door trim panel.
3. Remove door waterproof membrane.
4. Unscrew mounting screws for door handle.
- 37 -

Left front door outer handle
5. Disconnect the door handle linkage and remove
mounting screws for door handle.
6. Take down the door handle.
- 38 -

Left front door lock cylinder
2. Remove the interior trim panel of door.
3. Remove waterproof membrane.
4. Remove mounting screws for door handle.
- 39 -

Left front door lock cylinder
5. Remove door handle.
6. Remove door lock cylinder.
- 40 -

Left front door lock body
Removal
2. Remove the door trim panel.
4. Remove three mounting screws for lock body.
- 41 -

5. Remove the linkage of lock body.
6. Take out the whole lock body.
- 42 -

Installation
1. Install the lock body into door.
2. Connect each linkage properly. As for other parts,

please install them in reverse order of removal.
- 43 -

Right front door lock body
Removal
2. Remove mounting screws for door.
3. Remove door trim panel.
- 44 -

Right front door lock body
5. Remove three mounting bolts for door lock.
6. Disconnect the door linkage and then remove the

lock assembly.
Installation
- 45 -

Door seal
1. Remove the step plate.
2. Peel off door seal from top to bottom.

Attention:
After removal of door seal, please don’t tension the seal
forcibly.
Installation
- 46 -

Double-open back door
Removal
2. Disconnect the harness of left door.
3. Remove bolts for door hinge.
4. Remove bolts for door hinge.

Attention:
Because the double-open back door is heavy, so jack
may be applied when necessary to hold the door, during
which, use some cloth wrapping the jacked part to avoid
damage to paint surface.
- 47 -

5. Remove bolts for right door hinge.
6. Remove bolts for right door hinge.

Attention:
Because the double-open back door is heavy, so jack
may be applied when necessary to hold the door, during
which, use some cloth wrapping the jacked part to avoid
damage to paint surface.
- 48 -

Installation
1. After the installation of back door, lower/upper
clearance should be adjusted properly.
- 49 -

Back door outer handle
Removal
1. Remove inner handle shield of back door.
2. Remove mounting screws for back door inner

handle assembly.
3. Disconnect the linkage.
4. Disconnect the linkage with outer handle.
- 50 -

Back door outer handle
5. Remove mounting screws for outer handle.
6. Remove outer handle.
Installation
- 51 -

Back door latch
1. Remove mounting screws for back door latch.
2. Remove the back door latch.
Installation
- 52 -

Outer lock of back door
Removal
1. Remove inner handle shield.
2. Remove mounting screws for inner handle.
3. Disconnect the linkage of inner handle.
4. Disconnect the linkage with door lock.
- 53 -

Outer lock of back door
5. Remove three mounting bolts for door lock.
6. Remove the linkage assembly.
Installation
- 54 -

Inner lock of back door
Removal
1. Remove interior trim panel of back door.
2. Remove the upper mounting bracket of door lock.
3. Remove the lower mounting bracket of door lock.
4. Remove mounting screws for door latch.
- 55 -

Inner lock of back door
5. Disconnect circlip between door latch and linkage.
6. The circlip is shown in the figure. Remove the lock

linkage assembly.
Installation
- 56 -

Back door seal
Removal
1. Peel off the seal forcibly from top to bottom.
Installation
- 57 -

- 58 -

BP Interior/Exterior Trims
Interior/Exterior Trims
Subject Page
Instrument panel.............................................................................................................................................................60
Instrument panel.............................................................................................................................................................61
Roof lining..................................................................................................................................................................... 69
Trim panel of A-pillar.................................................................................................................................................... 74
Trim panel of B-pillar.................................................................................................................................................... 75
Trim panel of C-pillar.................................................................................................................................................... 78
Side wall window trim panel..........................................................................................................................................80
Trim panel of D-pillar.................................................................................................................................................... 84
Interior trim panel.......................................................................................................................................................... 86
Front door trim panel..................................................................................................................................................... 88
Double-open back door trim panel.................................................................................................................................89
Interior rear-view mirror................................................................................................................................................ 91
Sun visor........................................................................................................................................................................ 92
Curtains.......................................................................................................................................................................... 93
Luggage rack..................................................................................................................................................................94
Step plate assembly........................................................................................................................................................96
Front bumper..................................................................................................................................................................97
Rear bumper...................................................................................................................................................................99
Front grille................................................................................................................................................................... 101
Fender.......................................................................................................................................................................... 102
Front door skirt trim panel........................................................................................................................................... 106
Front side wall skirt trim panel.................................................................................................................................... 107
Middle side wall skirt trim panel................................................................................................................................. 108
Rear wheel skirt trim panel.......................................................................................................................................... 109
Rear tire mud guard......................................................................................................................................................110
- 59 -

Instrument panel
- 60 -

Instrument panel
2. Remove the upper cover of steering wheel.
3. There are two mounting screws on the left and

right sides of upper cover of steering wheel.
4. Unscrew the mounting nuts of steering wheel and

take down the steering wheel.
- 61 -

Instrument panel
5. Remove the instrument cover.
6. Remove four mounting screws of instrument.
7. Remove the harness connectors of instruments.
8. Remove three mounting screws on the lower cover

of steering wheel and take down the lower cover.
- 62 -

Instrument panel
9. Remove four mounting screws of the clock spring
and take down the clock spring.
10. Remove three mounting screws of combined

switch and take down the switch.
11. Remove two mounting screws of rear A/C control

panel.
12. Disconnect the harness of rear A/C control panel.
- 63 -

Instrument panel
13. Remove two mounting screws of A/C control
panel.
14. Disconnect the harness of A/C control panel.
15. Remove audio cover with tool.
16. Disconnect the harness connector of audio cover.
- 64 -

Instrument panel
17. Remove four mounting screws of audio.
18. Disconnect the harness connector of audio.
19. Remove the lower cover of instrument panel.
20. Remove the glove box.
- 65 -

Instrument panel
21. Loosen two mounting screws of instrument panel.
22. Remove the mounting bolt on the left side of

instrument panel.
23. Remove the mounting bolt on the right side of

instrument panel.
Note:
There are three mounting screws on instrument
panel in total, respectively on the left, middle and
right part.
24. Remove two mounting bolts on the left side of

instrument panel.
- 66 -

Instrument panel
25. Remove two mounting bolt on the right side of
instrument panel.
26. Remove the shift lever.
27. Remove the mounting bolts for shift lever

assembly.
28. Remove the instrument panel carefully.

Note:
Two service persons are necessary for removal of
instrument panel.
- 67 -

Instrument panel
Installation
1. During the installation of instrument panel, the
clock spring should be installed under the premise
that the wheels face forward and it should be
rotated clockwise until rotation disabled (rotating
with proper force instead of using too much force),
and then rotated counterclockwise by three circles
with centering triangle marks aligned.
2. Install other parts in reverse order of removal.
- 68 -

Roof lining
- 69 -

Roof lining
Removal
2. Remove curtains.
3. Remove upper and lower trim panels of B-pillar.
4. Remove luggage racks on bolt left and right sides.
- 70 -

Roof lining
5. Remove interior ceiling lamp 1.
6. Remove interior ceiling lamp 2.
7. Remove right sun visor.
8. Remove left sun visor.
- 71 -

Roof lining
9. Remove front interior ceiling lamp.
10. Remove clips of rear roof lining and take down the
rear roof lining.
11. Remove clips of middle roof lining and take down

the middle roof lining.
12. Remove clips of front roof lining and take down

the front roof lining.
- 72 -

Roof lining
Installation
Two service persons are necessary for installation of
roof lining, to avoid fracture of roof interior trim.
- 73 -

Right/Left upper trim panel of A-pillar
Removal
1. Remove left upper trim panel of A-pillar with tool.
2. Remove right upper trim panel of A-pillar with

tool.
Installation
- 74 -

Right upper/lower trim panel of B-pillar
Removal
1. Remove curtains.
2. Remove two mounting screws for right lower trim

panel of B-pillar and then remove the lower trim
panel.
3. Remove a mounting screw for upper trim panel of

B-pillar and then remove the upper trim panel.
Installation
- 75 -

Removal/Installation for B-pillar Trim Panel
Left upper/lower trim panel of B-pillar
Removal
1. Remove curtains.
2. Remove two mounting screws for left lower trim

panel of B-pillar and then remove the lower trim
panel.
3. Remove mounting bolts for seat belt.
4. Remove mounting screws for right upper trim

panel of B-pillar and then remove the upper trim
panel.
- 76 -

Left upper/lower trim panel of B-pillar
Installation
- 77 -

Removal/Installation for C-pillar Trim Panel
Left/Right trim panel of C-pillar
Removal
1. Remove curtains.
2. Remove right upper and lower trim panels of

C-pillar.
3. Remove right trim panel of C-pillar.
4. Remove left upper and lower trim panels of

C-pillar.
- 78 -

Left/Right trim panel of C-pillar
5. Remove left trim panel of C-pillar.
Installation
- 79 -

Right side wall window trim panel
Removal
1. Remove curtains.
2. Remove upper trim panel 1 and lower trim panel 1

of right side wall window pillar.

of right side wall window pillar.
4. Remove trim panel for right side wall window

pillar.
- 80 -

Right side wall window trim panel
Installation
1. Install it in reverse order of removal.
- 81 -

Left side wall window trim panel
Removal
1. Remove curtains.

of left side wall window pillar.

of left side wall window pillar.
4. Remove left side wall window pillar.
- 82 -

Left side wall window trim panel
Installation
- 83 -

Upper/lower trim panel of right D-pillar
Removal
1. Remove curtains.
2. Remove mounting screws for upper trim panel of

right D-pillar and take down the upper trim panel.
3. Remove mounting screws for lower trim panel of

right D-pillar and take down the lower trim panel.
Installation
- 84 -

Upper/lower trim panel of left D-pillar
Removal
1. Remove curtains.
2. Remove mounting screws for upper trim panel of

left D-pillar and take down the upper trim panel.
3. Remove mounting screws for lower trim panel of

left D-pillar and take down the lower trim panel.
Installation
- 85 -

Left trim panels 1, 2, 3 and 4 and right trim panels 1, 2 and 3
Removal
1. Remove curtains.
2. Remove upper and lower trim panels for right

B-pillar, C-pillar, side pillar and D-pillar.
3. Remove right trim panels 1, 2 and 3.
4. Remove upper and lower trim panels for left

B-pillar, C-pillar, side pillar and D-pillar. Remove
left trim panels 1, 2, 3 and 4.
- 86 -

Left trim panels 1, 2, 3 and 4 and right trim panels 1, 2 and 3
Installation
- 87 -

Left trim panel of front door trim panel
Removal
2. Remove mounting screws of door trim panel and

take down the trim panel.
Installation
- 88 -

Left door
Removal
1. Pry up the left door lower trim panel with tool
carefully.
2. Pry up the left door upper trim panel with tool

carefully.
Installation
- 89 -

Right door
Removal
1. Remove inner handle cover of door.
2. Remove the right door lower trim panel with tool.
3. Remove right door upper trim panel with tool.
Installation
- 90 -

Interior rear-view mirror
Removal
1. Pull the interior rear-view mirror downwards
carefully in the direction shown in the figure.
2. Take out the interior rear-view mirror assembly.
Installation
- 91 -

Sun visor
Removal
1. Remove mounting screws of right sun visor.
2. Take down the sun visor.
3. Remove mounting screws of left sun visor and take

down the sun visor.
Installation
- 92 -

Curtains
Removal
1. Pry out the curtain slide rail with screwdriver and
make it separated from the clips mounted on the
trim panel.
2. Clips are positioned at the middle of each pillar and

at the middle of each side window glass.
3. Remove the mounting screws of curtain plug and

take down the curtain.
Installation
Install it in reverse order of removal. Install the slide rail
in order from front to back.
- 93 -

Luggage rack
Removal
1. Two service persons are necessary for removal of
luggage rack, in order to avoid personal injury and
damage to luggage rack.
2. Remove mounting nuts for luggage rack.
3. Hold the luggage rack during the removal.
4. Remove brackets of luggage rack.
- 94 -

Luggage rack
Installation
- 95 -

Step plate assembly
Removal
1. Remove mounting screws of step plate.
2. Take down the step plate assembly.
Installation
- 96 -

Front bumper
Removal
2. Remove screws of front grille and take down the

front grille.
3. Remove the front trim panel.
4. Disconnect the harness connector of fog lamp.
- 97 -

Front bumper
5. Remove mounting screws of bumper.
6. Remove four mounting screws of bumper.
7. Take down front bumper.
Installation Install it in reverse order of removal.
- 98 -

Rear bumper
2. Remove mounting screws below rear bumper.
3. Remove mounting screws from rear bumper.
4. Remove side mounting screws from rear bumper.
- 99 -

Rear bumper
5. Disconnect the harness connector of rear bumper
and take down the rear bumper.
Installation
- 100 -

Front grille
Removal
1. Remove mounting screws for front grille.
2. Take down the front grille.
Installation
- 101 -

Fender
Removal
2. Remove the front grille.
3. Remove front trim panel and headlamps.
4. Disconnect harness connector of fog lamp.
- 102 -

Fender
5. Remove front bumper.
6. Remove clearance lamps.
7. Remove pads for front bumper.
8. Remove mounting bolts for fender.
- 103 -

Fender
10. Remove rear-view mirror trim panel.
12. Remove front wheel trim panel.
- 104 -

Fender
13. Remove mounting screws for fender.
14. Remove mounting screws for fender and take down

the fender.
Installation
- 105 -

Front door skirt trim panel
Removal
1. Remove front door skirt trim panel with tool.
2. Clip position of front door skirt trim panel.
Installation
- 106 -

Front side wall skirt trim panel
Removal
1. Remove front side wall skirt trim panel with tool.
2. Clip position of front side wall skirt trim panel.
Installation
- 107 -

Middle side wall skirt trim panel
Removal
1. Remove mounting screws for middle side wall skirt
trim panel.
2. Remove middle side wall skirt trim panel with tool.
3. Clip position of middle side wall skirt trim panel.
Installation
- 108 -

Rear wheel skirt trim panel
Removal
1. Remove mounting screws.
2. Remove rear wheel skirt trim panel with tool.
3. Clip position of rear wheel skirt trim panel.
Installation
- 109 -

Rear tire mud guard
Removal
1. Remove mounting screws for rear tire mud guard
and take down the mud guard.
Installation
- 110 -

SE Seats
Seats
Subject Page
Driver’s seat................................................................................................................................................................. 112
Front row twin bench-type seat.................................................................................................................................... 114
Front row individual seat..............................................................................................................................................115
Driver’s seat................................................................................................................................................................. 116
Front row twin bench-type seat.................................................................................................................................... 119
Front row individual seat............................................................................................................................................. 120
back row seats.............................................................................................................................................................. 121
- 111 -

SE Seats
driver’’s seat
Components of driver
1. Vertical adjustable headrest 2. Angle adjustable armrest 3. Front and rear height adjustable seat
Eight adjusting ways for driver’s seat can be achieved, of backrest, upward/downward adjustment of headrest,
viz. forward/rearward and upward/downward which can provide the driver with comfortable driving
adjustment of seat, angle forward/rearward adjustment environment.
- 112 -

SE Seats
Driver’’s seat
Driver
1. Armrest 2. Backrest cushion 3. Headrest assembly 4. Headrest latch

5. Angle adjuster 6. Plastic cover 7. Backrest frame
- 113 -

SE Seats
Front row twin bench-type seat
1
4
7
5
1. Armrest 2. Backrest cushion 3. Headrest assembly 4. Headrest latch

5. Plastic cover 6. Angle adjuster 7. Backrest frame
- 114 -

SE Seats
Front row individual seat
1 7
5
1. Backrest cushion 2. Headrest assembly 3. Headrest latch 4. Armrest

5. Angle adjuster 6. Plastic cover 7. Backrest frame
- 115 -

SE Seats
Driver’’s seat
Driver
2. Remove two mounting nuts on the left side of seat.
3. Remove two nuts on the right side of seat and

disconnect the harness.
4. Take down the driver’s seat from sliding rail.
- 116 -

SE Seats
Sliding rail and seat
1. Push the sliding rail rearwards and remove four
mounting bolts.
2. Pull the sliding rail forwards and remove three

mounting bolts on the rear part.
3. Take down the sliding rail assembly.
- 117 -

SE Seats
Removal/Installation (continued)
Sliding rail and seat
1. Install the sliding rail onto the vehicle and install
seven mounting bolts in reverse order of removal.
2. Install the seat onto sliding rail and tighten two

mounting nuts on the left side.
3. Tighten two mounting nuts on the right side in the

same way and tighten nuts on both sides to the
specified torque.
Tightening torque: 45～55N.m
- 118 -

SE Seats
Front row twin bench-type seat
Removal
1. Remove four mounting bolts below front row seat.
2. Remove the front row twin bench-type seat from

vehicle.
Installation
1. Install the front row seat in reverse order of
removal.
Note:
Bolts should be tightened to the specified torque.
- 119 -

SE Seats
Front row individual seat
Removal
1. Remove four mounting bolts below front row seat.
2. Remove the front row individual seat from vehicle.
Installation
1. Install the front row individual seat in reverse order
of removal.
Note:
Bolts should be tightened to the specified torque.
- 120 -

SE Seats
Back row seats
Removal
1. Remove four mounting bolts below back row seats.
2. Remove the back row twin bench-type seat from

vehicle.
Installation
1. Install the back row twin bench-type seat in reverse
order of removal.
Note:
Bolts should be tightened to the specified
torque.
- 121 -

SP Sealing Elements
Sealing Elements
Subject Page
Inner acoustic baffle of front wall................................................................................................................................ 124
Outer heat shield of front wall..................................................................................................................................... 125
Front door seal............................................................................................................................................................. 125
Rear door seal...............................................................................................................................................................126
Fender seal................................................................................................................................................................... 126
Front compartment seal................................................................................................................................................127
Waterproof membrane..................................................................................................................................................127
- 123 -

SP Sealing Elements
Inner acoustic baffle of front wall
2. Remove upper acoustic baffle of front wall.

Lower acoustic baffle Upper acoustic baffle 3. Clip.
of front wall of front wall 4. Remove lower acoustic baffle of front wall.
- 124 -

SP Sealing Elements
Outer heat shield of front wall
Inner panel heat shield of engine hood

2. Remove clips.
Heat shield of right
3. Remove inner panel heat shield of engine hood.
fender 4. Remove heat shields of left and right fenders.
5. Remove heat shields of left and right wheels.
Heat shield of right
wheel
6. Remove front and right acoustic baffles of front
wall.
Right heat shield of front wall Heat shield of left

Left panel heat shield fender
of front wall
Heat shield of left wheel
Front door seal
1. Remove the front door seal.
- 125 -

SP Sealing Elements
Rear door seal
1. Remove middle seal of rear door frame.
2. Remove seal of rear door frame.
Fender seal
1. Remove fender seal.
Fender seal
- 126 -

SP Sealing Elements
Front compartment seal
1. Remove the rear end seal of front compartment.
2. Remove the front section seal assembly of front

compartment.
Waterproof membrane
1. Remove the rear end seal of front compartment.
- 127 -

XE Body Repair Parameters
Body Repair Parameters

Subject Page
Engine Compartment Repair Parameters..................................................................................................................... 130
Windshield Repair Parameters..................................................................................................................................... 131
Front Door Repair Parameters..................................................................................................................................... 132
Rear Double-Door Repair Parameters..........................................................................................................................133
Girder Repair Parameters.............................................................................................................................................134
- 129 -

Engine Compartment Repair Parameters
- 130 -

Windshield Repair Parameters
- 131 -

Front Door Repair Parameters
- 132 -

Rear Double-Door Repair Parameters
- 133 -

Girder Repair Parameters
Side member repair parameters: Diagonal L1=5068mm

Side member length L2=4998mm
Side member ledge L3=840mm
- 134 -

SUNRAY Special Service Tools
Attached List
List——SUNRAY Special Service Tools
Tool Number Tool Name Illustration Function/Applied Part
For removal/installation of engine piston pin

JAC-T8F001 Piston pin puller
(engine)
For installing bearing together with relevant

JAC-T8F002 Handle
installer (transmission)
JAC-T8F003 Flywheel stopper For fixing flywheel to facilitate removal (engine)
Cooling system For checking engine cooling system for leakage

JAC-T8F004
detector (engine)
JAC-T8F005 Oil filter wrench For removal/installation of oil filter (engine)
Valve oil seal

JAC-T8F006 For installation of valve oil seal (engine)
installer
JAC-T8F007 Fuel pressure gauge For measuring fuel pressure (engine)
Compression
JAC-T8F008 For measuring engine cylinder pressure (engine)
pressure gauge
Pressure gauge For connection when measuring cylinder

JAC-T8F009
connector pressure (engine)
Valve spring For compressing valve spring, removing engine

JAC-T8F010
compressor valves and relevant parts (engine)
JAC-T8F011 Camshaft gear puller For removing camshaft gear (engine)
Cylinder liner
JAC-T8F012 For installing cylinder liner (engine)
installer (incl. jack)

JAC-T8F013 Cylinder liner puller For removing cylinder liner (engine)
JAC-T8F014 Piston installer For installing piston (engine)
Crankshaft front oil

JAC-T8F015 For installing crankshaft front oil seal (engine)
seal installer
Camshaft bushing For removal/installation of camshaft bushing

JAC-T8F016
puller (engine)
V-block for camshaft

JAC-T8F017 For measuring damage of camshaft (engine)
measurement
JAC-T8F018 Hose clamp pliers For removing hose clamp
For removal/installation of piston circlip

JAC-T8F019 Piston ring extractor
(engine)
Valve oil seal

JAC-T8F020 For removing valve oil seal (engine)
extractor
JAC-T8F021 End fork clip For fixing flywheel (engine)
Crankshaft rear
JAC-T8F022 For removing crankshaft rear bearing
bearing puller
Crankshaft rear
JAC-T8F023 For installing crankshaft rear bearing
bearing installer
Diesel common rail detector can diagnose

Diesel common rail accurately and efficiently the diesel engine
JAC-T8F024
tool kit injection by performed diesel common rail
system.
JAC-T8B001 Fork lock pin puller For removing shift fork spring pin (transmission)

星锐专用工具
JAC-T8B002 Oil seal puller For removing oil seal (transmission)
For center alignment of clutch disc

JAC-T8B003 Clutch guider
(transmission)
Input shaft bearing

JAC-T8B004 For installing input shaft bearing (transmission)
installer
Output shaft bearing

JAC-T8B005 For installing output shaft bearing (transmission)
installer
Countershaft front For installing countershaft front bearing

JAC-T8B006
bearing installer (transmission)
Input shaft protective For protecting input shaft front end teeth
JAC-T8B007
Output shaft For protecting output shaft front end teeth

JAC-T8B008
protective sleeve (transmission)
Transmission bearing For removing transmission bearing

JAC-T8B009
removal tool kit (transmission)
Input shaft oil seal

JAC-T8B010 For installing input shaft oil seal (transmission)
installer
Oil seal puller of

For removing oil seal of rear end cover
JAC-T8B011 transmission rear end
(transmission)
cover
Oil seal installer of For installing oil seal of rear end cover
JAC-T8B012
rear end cover (transmission)
Steering linkage For disengaging front wheel end control arm ball
JAC-T8D001
drawing die joint from steering knuckle (chassis)
Interior trim crow

JAC-T8D002 For prying up interior trim of vehicle
plate


Hfc4da12c JAC PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Hfc4da12c JAC PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Hfc4da12c JAC PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Maintenance manual for sunray hfc4da1-2c china-IV diesel engines

Chapter I Technical Characteristics of Engine .......................................................................................................... 11

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Chapter I Technical Characteristics of Engine

Environment temperature Above 5℃ Above -5℃ Above -10℃ Above -25℃

The diesel filter embodies the fuel-water separation function:

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

II. Engine Oil

Notice: Make sure to horizontally park the vehicle while

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Section II Main Technical Specification of Engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Section III Performance Curve of Engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Section IV Main Checking and Adjustment Parameters

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Section V Tightening Torque for Critical Bolts of Engine

☆ Comparison Table of Tightening Torque for Critical Bolts

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

No. Description N．m

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

No. Description N．m

☆ Comparison Table for Standard Bolt Specification and Tightening Torque

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

M22×1.5 256~422 370~555 433~649

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Section VI Main Fitting Clearances and Allowable Wear Limits of Engine

Outside diameter of tappet Φ13 −−00..010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Section VII Specification of Main Attachments and Accessories

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Chapter II Maintenance for Main Structures of Engine

Section I Disassembly of Engine Assembly

II. Disassembly Procedure

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

2. Disassemble the belt, air conditioner

a. Use an open-end wrench to remove the fixing nuts of

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

3. Disassemble the exhaust system.

a. Disassemble the fixing bolts of turbocharger lubricating

b. Remove the exhaust pipe shield.

c. Remove the EGR cooler.

d. Remove the exhaust pipe and turbocharger assembly.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

a. Loosen the conical nut at fuel injector end and the

c. Remove the fixing bolts of fuel injector pressure plate,

4. Disassemble the fuel-gas separator

a. Remove the crankshaft breathe hose and fuel-gas

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

d. Remove the fixing bolts of fuel-gas separator housing

e. Disassemble the fixing bolts of fuel-gas separator

4. Disassemble the intake manifold and

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

a. Disassemble the fixing bolts of power steering pump

c. Remove the EGR valve.

d. Remove the fixing bolts of air intake pipe bracket.